summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2021-06-01 21:12:14 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2021-06-01 21:12:14 +0000
commitf496422c8703b52babe725eb473534648fad4367 (patch)
treefebd2c0e8d52525785bc6d403caf5a2094f15e50 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex
parent8e612434e447670e242d9f964512bd2c04037d03 (diff)
latex2e (1jun21)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@59424 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx137
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx10
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.dtx350
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx63
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx118
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx271
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmd.dtx4034
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmdhooks.dtx1094
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx107
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx133
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx179
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx136
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx122
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx402
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx56
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx146
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx176
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx1210
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx36
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx45
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx112
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx38
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx1223
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx222
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx730
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx545
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx153
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx10
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.fdd6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/color.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/drivers.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/epsfig.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphics.dtx19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphicx.dtx11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/keyval.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/lscape.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/rotating.dtx8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/trig.dtx6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/array.dtx64
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.dtx71
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/calc.dtx6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/dcolumn.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/delarray.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/enumerate.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fileerr.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fontsmpl.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/ftnright.dtx6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/hhline.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/indentfirst.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/layout.dtx43
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.dtx142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/rawfonts.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/shellesc.dtx6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/showkeys.dtx6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/somedefs.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/theorem.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tools.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/trace.dtx34
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/verbatim.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xr.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xspace.dtx4
143 files changed, 11379 insertions, 1829 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
index 2c9e22a1243..350229ab40f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
%%
%% File `alltt.dtx'.
%% Copyright (C) 1987 by Leslie Lamport
-%% Copyright (C) 1994--1997 LaTeX3 project, Johannes Braams
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2021 LaTeX Project, Johannes Braams
%% all rights reserved.
%%
%<*dtx>
@@ -40,10 +40,11 @@
%<package>\ProvidesPackage{alltt}
%<driver>\ProvidesFile{alltt.drv}
%\ProvidesFile{alltt.dtx}
- [1997/06/16 v2.0g defines alltt environment]
+ [2021/01/29 v2.0g defines alltt environment]
%
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage{alltt}
\begin{document}
\providecommand{\Lenv}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\providecommand{\pkg}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
@@ -55,6 +56,8 @@
%
% \changes{v2.0g}{1997/06/16}{A few documentation fixes (PR 2520)}
% \changes{v2.0d}{1995/04/02}{A few documentation fixes (PR 1517)}
+% \changes{v2.0g}{2021-01-29}{Added a warning about OT1 versus T1 font
+% encoding}
%
% \GetFileInfo{alltt.dtx}
% \title{The \texttt{alltt} environment\thanks{This file
@@ -88,11 +91,19 @@
% extra blank line if you're not careful.
%
% \item Insert a math formula. Note that |$| just produces a dollar
-% sign, so you'll have to type |\(...\)| or |\[...\]|. Also, |^|
-% and |_| just produce their characters; use |\sp| or |\sb| for
-% super- and subscripts, as in |\(x\sp{2}\)|.
+% sign, so you'll have to type |\(...\)| or |\[...\]|. Also, |^|
+% and |_| just produce their characters; use |\sp| or |\sb| for
+% super- and subscripts, as in |\(x\sp{2}\)|.
% \end{itemize}
%
+% \textbf{NB} When you are using \textsf{OT1} encoded fonts you might
+% be surprsied when you switch to italics, becuase those fonts have
+% a different set of glyphs:
+% \begin{alltt}
+% The glyph at the position of the $ in a slanted font: \textsl{$}.
+% The glyph at the position of the $ in an italic font: \textit{$}.
+% \end{alltt}
+%
% \StopEventually{}
%
% \section{The Implementation}
@@ -173,7 +184,7 @@
% control sequence |\do| between the characters. We use that to
% check whether a character has to be removed.
%
-% The macro |\g@remfrom@specials| takes one argument, the chracter
+% The macro |\g@remfrom@specials| takes one argument, the character
% to be removed from the list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\g@remfrom@specials#1{%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
index adb3838a473..7ce21032079 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
index d6f2bb64e6a..ffe04c620fa 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
%<*driver>
\ProvidesFile{classes.drv}
%</driver>
- [2020/04/10 v1.4m
+ [2021/02/12 v1.4n
%<article|report|book> Standard LaTeX document class]
%<10pt|11pt|12pt> Standard LaTeX file (size option)]
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@
\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
% \end{macrocode}
-% We do want an index, using linenumbers
+% We do want an index, using line numbers
% \begin{macrocode}
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@
% \changes{v1.2o}{1994/05/24}{Changed file information}
% \changes{v1.2p}{1994/05/27}{Moved identification and driver to the
% front of the file}
-% \changes{v1.2t}{1994/06/22}{Refrased a few sentences to prevent
+% \changes{v1.2t}{1994/06/22}{Rephrased a few sentences to prevent
% overfull hboxes}
% \changes{v1.2v}{1994/12/01}{Made the oneside option work for the
% book class}
@@ -221,9 +221,9 @@
% file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.}}
%
% \author{%
-% Copyright (C) 1992 by Leslie Lamport \and
-% Copyright (C) 1994-2020 by Frank Mittelbach \and Johannes Braams \and
-% \LaTeX3 Project Team
+% Copyright (C) 1992 by Leslie Lamport and
+% Copyright (C) 1994-2020 by Frank Mittelbach and Johannes Braams and
+% LaTeX Project Team
% }
% \date{\filedate}
% \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{latex}
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@
%<!article>\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \subsection{Twocolumn printing}
+% \subsection{Two-column printing}
%
% Two-column and one-column printing is again realized via a switch.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -788,7 +788,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
% |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation. The value
-% of |\parindent| depends on whether we are in two column mode.
+% of |\parindent| depends on whether we are in two-column mode.
% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/01/12}{\cs{parindent} should be different,
% depending on the pointsize}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -998,7 +998,7 @@
% Now we can set the |\textwidth|, depending on whether we will be
% setting one or two columns.
%
-% In two column mode each \emph{column} shouldn't be wider than
+% In two-column mode each \emph{column} shouldn't be wider than
% |\@tempdimb| (which could happen on \textsc{a3} paper for
% instance).
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% In one column mode the text should not be wider than the minimum
+% In one-column mode the text should not be wider than the minimum
% of the paperwidth (minus 2 inches for the margins) and the
% maximum length of a line as defined by the number of characters.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1168,7 +1168,7 @@
\fi
%</!bk>
% \end{macrocode}
-% And values for two column mode:
+% And values for two-column mode:
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\setlength\oddsidemargin {30\p@}
@@ -1389,7 +1389,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@dbltopnumber}
% The \Lcount{dbltopnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
-% two column floats that can appear on the top of a two column text
+% two-column floats that can appear on the top of a two-column text
% page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
@@ -1397,8 +1397,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dbltopfraction}
-% This indicates the maximum part of a two column text page that
-% can be occupied by two column floats at the top.
+% This indicates the maximum part of a two-column text page that
+% can be occupied by two-column floats at the top.
% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} with
% \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1408,7 +1408,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatpagefraction}
% This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
-% occupied by two column wide floating objects before a `float
+% occupied by two-column wide floating objects before a `float
% page' is produced.
% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} with
% \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
@@ -1459,7 +1459,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\dbltextfloatsep}
% When floating objects that span the whole |\textwidth| are placed
-% on a text page when we are in twocolumn mode the separation
+% on a text page when we are in two-column mode the separation
% between the float and the text is controlled by |\dblfloatsep|
% and |\dbltextfloatsep|.
%
@@ -1498,7 +1498,7 @@
% whitespace. Between adjacent floats the |\@fpsep| is inserted.
%
% These parameters are used for the placement of floating objects
-% in one column mode, or in single column floats in two column
+% in one-column mode, or in single-column floats in two-column
% mode.
%
% Note that at least one of the two parameters |\@fptop| and
@@ -1528,7 +1528,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfptop}
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpsep}
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpbot}
-% Double column floats in two column mode are handled with similar
+% Double-column floats in two-column mode are handled with similar
% parameters.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*10pt>
@@ -1809,7 +1809,7 @@
\let \footnote \thanks
% \end{macrocode}
% We center the entire title vertically; the centering is set off a
-% little by adding a |\vskip|. (In compatibility mode the pagenumber
+% little by adding a |\vskip|. (In compatibility mode the page number
% is set to 0 by the titlepage environment to keep the behaviour
% of \LaTeX\ 2.09 style files.)
% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Removed the setting of the page number,
@@ -1872,7 +1872,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% When the title is not on a page of its own, the layout of the
% title is a little different. We use symbols to mark the footnotes
-% and we have to deal with two column documents.
+% and we have to deal with two-column documents.
%
% Therefore we first start a new group to keep changes local. Then
% we redefine |\thefootnote| to use |\fnsymbol|; and change
@@ -1893,7 +1893,7 @@
\hb@xt@1.8em{%
\hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}##1}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% If this is a twocolumn document we start a new page in twocolumn
+% If this is a two-column document we start a new page in two-column
% mode, with the title set to the full width of the text. The
% actual printing of the title information is left to
% |\@maketitle|.
@@ -1908,7 +1908,7 @@
\fi
\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% When this is not a twocolumn document we just start a new page,
+% When this is not a two-column document we just start a new page,
% prevent floating objects from appearing on the top of this page
% and print the title information.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2133,10 +2133,10 @@
% \Lcount{COUNTER} as an arabic numeral.
%
% |\roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
-% \Lcount{COUNTER} as a lowercase roman numberal.
+% \Lcount{COUNTER} as a lowercase roman numeral.
%
% |\Roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
-% \Lcount{COUNTER} as an uppercase roman numberal.
+% \Lcount{COUNTER} as an uppercase roman numeral.
%
% |\alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
% as a lowercase letter: $1 =$~a, $2 =$~ b, etc.
@@ -2144,7 +2144,7 @@
% |\Alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
% as an uppercase letter: $1 =$~A, $2 =$~B, etc.
%
-% Actually to save space the internal counter repesentations
+% Actually to save space the internal counter representations
% and the commands operating on those are used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand \thepart {\@Roman\c@part}
@@ -2281,7 +2281,7 @@
\fi
\thispagestyle{plain}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% When we are making a two column document, this will be a one
+% When we are making a two-column document, this will be a one
% column page. We use |@tempswa| to remember to switch back to two
% columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2453,8 +2453,8 @@
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% When this was a two column document we have to switch back to two
-% column mode.
+% When this was a two-column document we have to switch back to
+% two-column mode.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@tempswa
\twocolumn
@@ -2522,8 +2522,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we call upon |\@makechapterhead| to format the actual
% chapter title. We have to do this in a special way when we are in
-% twocolumn mode in order to have the chapter title use the entire
-% |\textwidth|. In one column mode we call |\@afterheading| which
+% two-column mode in order to have the chapter title use the entire
+% |\textwidth|. In one-column mode we call |\@afterheading| which
% takes care of suppressing the indentation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
@@ -2705,7 +2705,7 @@
% \changes{v1.3q}{1995/12/20}{Temporary(?) fix: revert to setting
% \cs{leftmargin} at outer level}
%
-% When we are in two column mode some of the margins are set somewhat
+% When we are in two-column mode some of the margins are set somewhat
% smaller.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
@@ -2953,11 +2953,12 @@
% the labels of the various itemization levels: the symbols used are
% bullet, bold en-dash, centered asterisk and centred dot.
%
+% \changes{v1.4n}{2021/06/11}{Drop incorrect space in \cs{labelitemiv} (gh/496)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\labelitemi {\labelitemfont \textbullet}
\newcommand\labelitemii {\labelitemfont \bfseries \textendash}
\newcommand\labelitemiii{\labelitemfont \textasteriskcentered}
-\newcommand\labelitemiv{ \labelitemfont \textperiodcentered}
+\newcommand\labelitemiv {\labelitemfont \textperiodcentered}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemfont}
@@ -2966,13 +2967,16 @@
% produced regardless of surrounding conditions.
%
% \changes{v1.4l}{2019/12/20}{Normalize label fonts}
-% A possible alternative would be
+% Possible alternatives would be, for example,
%\begin{verbatim}
-%\renewcommand\labelitemfont{%
-% \fontseries\seriesdefault
-% \fontshape\shapedefault\selectfont}
+% \renewcommand\labelitemfont
+% {\normalfont\fontfamily{lmss}\selectfont}
+% \renewcommand\labelitemfont
+% {\rmfamily\normalshape}
%\end{verbatim}
-% which resets series and shape doesn't touch the family.
+% the first would use symbols from Latin Modern Sans, the second
+% would only allow changes in the font series so that an
+% \texttt{itemize} in a bold context would produce bolder symbols.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\labelitemfont{\normalfont}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -3036,7 +3040,7 @@
{\par\vfil\null\endtitlepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% When we are not making a separate titlepage --the default for the
-% article document class-- we have to check if we are in twocolumn
+% article document class-- we have to check if we are in two-column
% mode. In that case the abstract is as a |\section*|, otherwise
% the quotation environment is used to typeset the abstract.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3125,13 +3129,16 @@
%
% \begin{environment}{titlepage}
% In the normal environments, the titlepage environment does nothing
-% but start and end a page, and inhibit page numbers. In the report
-% style, it also resets the page number to one, and then sets it
-% back to one at the end. In compatibility mode, it sets the
-% page number to zero. This is incorrect since it results in using
-% the page parameters for a right-hand page but it is the way it was.
-% In two-column style, it still makes a
-% one-column page.
+% but start and end a page, and inhibit page numbers. When \LaTeX\ is
+% in two-column mode, the environmont temporarily switches to
+% one-column mode.
+% In the report class, it also resets the page number to one, and
+% then, in two-column mode, sets it back to one at the end.
+% For the book class the environment makes sure that the title page
+% is on a recto page by issueing a \cs{cleardouplepage}-command.
+% In compatibility mode, it sets the page number to zero. This is
+% incorrect since it results in using the page parameters for a
+% right-hand page but it is the way it was.
%
% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Moved the setting of
% \cs{@restonecolfalse}}
@@ -3291,7 +3298,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
% The macro |\@minipagerestore| is called upon entry to a minipage
% environment to set up things that are to be handled differently
-% inside a minipage environment. In the current styles, it does
+% inside a minipage environment. In the current classes, it does
% nothing.
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -3397,7 +3404,7 @@
% a figure is defined using the macros |\@float| and |\end@float|,
% which are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
%
-% An environment that implements a single column floating object is
+% An environment that implements a single-column floating object is
% started with |\@float{|\texttt{TYPE}|}[|\meta{placement}|]| of type
% \texttt{TYPE} with \meta{placement} as the placement specifier.
% The default value of \meta{PLACEMENT} is defined by |\fps@TYPE|.
@@ -3449,7 +3456,7 @@
% \begin{environment}{figure}
% \begin{environment}{figure*}
% And the definition of the actual environment. The form with the
-% |*| is used for double column figures.
+% |*| is used for double-column figures.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{figure}
{\@float{figure}}
@@ -3506,7 +3513,7 @@
% \begin{environment}{table}
% \begin{environment}{table*}
% And the definition of the actual environment. The form with the
-% |*| is used for double column tables.
+% |*| is used for double-column tables.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{table}
{\@float{table}}
@@ -3743,7 +3750,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
% This macro is used to request that \LaTeX{} produces a table of
% contents. In the report and book document classes the tables of
-% contents, figures etc. are always set in single-column style.
+% contents, figures etc. are always set in single-column mode.
%
% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Moved the setting of
% \cs{@restonecolfalse}}
@@ -3778,7 +3785,7 @@
\MakeUppercase\contentsname}{\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The actual table of contents is made by calling
-% |\@starttoc{toc}|. After that we restore twocolumn mode if
+% |\@starttoc{toc}|. After that we restore two-column mode if
% necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@starttoc{toc}%
@@ -3823,13 +3830,13 @@
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
% We set |\parindent| to 0pt and use |\rightskip| to leave
-% enough room for the pagenumbers.\footnote{^^A
+% enough room for the page numbers.\footnote{^^A
% We should really set \cs{rightskip} to \cs{@tocrmarg} instead
% of \cs{@pnumwidth} (no version of {\LaTeX} ever did this),
% otherwise the \cs{rightskip} is too small.
% Unfortunately this can't be changed in {\LaTeXe} as we don't
% want to create different versions of {\LaTeXe} which produce
-% different typset output unless this is absolutely necessary;
+% different typeset output unless this is absolutely necessary;
% instead we suspend it for \LaTeX3.}
% To prevent overfull box messages the |\parfillskip| is set to a
% negative value.
@@ -3838,7 +3845,7 @@
\parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we can set the entry, in a large bold font. We make sure to
-% leave vertical mode, set the part title and add the pagenumber,
+% leave vertical mode, set the part title and add the page number,
% set flush right.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\leavevmode
@@ -4238,9 +4245,9 @@
\columnsep 35\p@
\let\item\@idxitem}
% \end{macrocode}
-% When the document continues after the index and it was a one
-% column document we have to switch back to one column after the
-% index.
+% When the document continues after the index and it was a
+% one-column document we have to switch back to one column after
+% the index.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -4293,7 +4300,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@footnote}
% Footnotes are numbered within chapters in the report and book
-% document styles.
+% document classes.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<!article>\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -4433,18 +4440,18 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \subsection{Two column mode}
+% \subsection{Two-column mode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
-% This gives the distance between two columns in two column mode.
+% This gives the distance between two columns in two-column mode.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\columnsep{10\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\columnseprule}
-% This gives the width of the rule between two columns in two
-% column mode. We have no visible rule.
+% This gives the width of the rule between two columns in
+% two-column mode. We have no visible rule.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -4454,7 +4461,7 @@
% We have \pstyle{plain} pages in the document classes article and
% report unless the user specified otherwise. In the `book'
% document class we use the page style \pstyle{headings} by
-% default. We use arabic pagenumbers.
+% default. We use arabic page numbers.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<!book>\pagestyle{plain}
%<book>\pagestyle{headings}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins
index 13d49747272..be0dcaf8ff3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins
index 05776a68075..c530e04d0bb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
index 1eb318b0492..f991ee564ee 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% Copyright 1993-2019
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
index b5ed3e3f106..d54a325f42e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx
index 7e7817153c8..fb3412f21f4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
%<+package|shortvrb>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01]
%<+package> \ProvidesPackage{doc}
%<+shortvrb>\ProvidesPackage{shortvrb}
-%<+package|shortvrb> [2020/06/15 v2.1m
+%<+package|shortvrb> [2021/05/28 v2.1n
%<+package|shortvrb> Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)]
%\catcode`\<=12
%
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
%
%
%% Package `doc' to use with LaTeX 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Frank Mittelbach, all rights reserved.
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-2020 Frank Mittelbach, all rights reserved.
%
%
% Version: Date: Changes:
@@ -751,7 +751,7 @@
% in your package file. Precede it by any bibliography commands
% necessary for your citations.
% Alternatively, it may be more convenient to put all such calls
-% amongst the arguments of the |\StopEventually| macro, in
+% amongt the arguments of the |\StopEventually| macro, in
% which case a |\Finale| command should appear at the end of
% your file.
%
@@ -949,7 +949,7 @@
% macro.}
% \DescribeMacro\changes
% To maintain a change history within the file, the |\changes|
-% command may be placed amongst the description part of the changed
+% command may be placed amongt the description part of the changed
% code. It takes three arguments, thus:
% \begin{quote}
% |\changes{|\meta{version}|}{|\meta{date}|}{|^^A
@@ -2117,6 +2117,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\verb@eol@error}
% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Renamed \cs{verb@err} to
% \cs{verb@eol@error}, as in new LaTeX verbatim.}
+% \changes{v2.1n}{2021/05/28}{Use same error message text as in format}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\verb@balance@group\@empty
@@ -2126,7 +2127,7 @@
\obeylines%
\gdef\verb@eol@error{\obeylines%
\def^^M{\verb@egroup\@latex@error{%
- Text for \noexpand\verb command ended by end of line}\@ehc}}%
+ \noexpand\verb ended by end of line}\@ehc}}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -2200,7 +2201,7 @@
%
% \begin{environment}{environment}
% \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{Environment added}
-% The ``environment'' envrionment will be implemented just like the
+% The ``environment'' environment will be implemented just like the
% ``macro'' environment flagging any differences in the code by
% passing |\iffalse| or |\iftrue| to the |\m@cro@| environment
% doing the actual work.
@@ -3029,7 +3030,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\addto@hook}
% The code for adding tokens (the second argument) to a token list
% (the first argument) is taken from~\cite{art:verbatim}, but it needs
-% to be "\long" in case "\par" is amongst the tokens.
+% to be "\long" in case "\par" is amongt the tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -3149,7 +3150,7 @@
% of an `index style file'; the character selected for this function
% is |=|, and therefore this character too must be specially treated
% when it is met in a \TeX\ command. A suitable index style file is
-% provided amongst the supporting files for this style file in
+% provided amongt the supporting files for this style file in
% \texttt{gind.ist} and is generated from this source by processing
% with \texttt{docstrip} to extract the module \textbf{gind}. A
% similar style file \texttt{gglo.ist} is supplied for sorting the
@@ -4219,7 +4220,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\meta@font@select}
% \changes{v2.0k}{2000/05/26}{Macro added (pr/3170)}
-% Maske font used inside |\meta| customizable.
+% Make font used inside |\meta| customizable.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\meta@font@select{\itshape}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -4431,7 +4432,7 @@
\global\catcode`#1\csname cc\string#1\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.9e.2}{1994/02/07}{-js: Reset `cc`\protect\meta{c} in
-% in \cs{DeleteShortVerb}}
+% \cs{DeleteShortVerb}}
% We must not forget to reset "\cc\"\meta{c}, otherwise the check in
% "\MakeShortVerb" for a repeated definition will not work.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4532,7 +4533,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\init@checksum}
% The checksum mechanism works by counting backslashes in the
-% macrocode. This initialises the count (when called from
+% macrocode. This initializes the count (when called from
% "\StopEventually").
% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Macro added to support checksum.}
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
index a0a06311edb..c7480988b44 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
\catcode`\}=2
\def\filename{docstrip.dtx}
\def\fileversion{v2.6a}
-\def\filedate{2020-07-07}
-\def\docdate {2020-07-11}
+\def\filedate{2020-11-23}
+\def\docdate {2020-11-23}
%%
%
%\iffalse
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
%% Frank Mittelbach
%% Copyright (C) 1995 Marcin Woli\'nski
%% Copyright (C) 1996-1997 Mark Wooding, Marcin Woli\'nski
-%% Copyright (C) 1998-2020 LaTeX3 project and the above authors
+%% Copyright (C) 1998-2021 LaTeX Project and the above authors.
%% All rights are reserved.
%%
%
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
% less/more dirty---all uses of \cs{afterfi}}
% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/25}{Directories support}
% \changes{2.3e}{1995/10/24}{added \cs{makepathname} to support
-% systems with bizzare pathnames}
+% systems with bizare pathnames}
% \changes{2.3e}{1995/10/25}{batch files work by \cs{input}}
% \changes{2.3e}{1996/10/02}{Introduced ``open lists''}
% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}{Add stream limits (MDW)}
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@
%
% \changes{2.1b}{1993/02/23}{modified mailaddress of Johannes}
% \changes{2.4i}{1998/01/18}{removed mail addresses as it is hopeless
-% to keep them uptodate}
+% to keep them up-to-date}
% \author{%
% Frank Mittelbach
% \and
@@ -789,7 +789,7 @@
%
% \section{Internal functions and variables}
%
-% An important consideration for \LaTeX3 development is separating
+% An important consideration for \LaTeX\ development is separating
% out public and internal functions. Functions and variables which
% are private to one module should not be used or modified by any
% other module. As \TeX{} does not have any formal namespacing
@@ -809,7 +809,7 @@
% \end{verbatim}
%
% To extract the code using \ds, the original `guard'
-% mecahnism is extended by the introduction of the syntax
+% mechanism is extended by the introduction of the syntax
% \texttt{\%<@@=\meta{module}>}. The \meta{module} name then
% replaces the |@@| when the code is extracted, so that
% \begin{verbatim}
@@ -2305,7 +2305,7 @@ Z
% delimited with |\endLine|) on all active output files i.e.
% those with off-counters equal to zero. It uses the
% search-and-replace macro \cs{replaceModuleInLine} to replace any
-% occurences of \texttt{@@} with the current module name.
+% occurrences of \texttt{@@} with the current module name.
% If statistics are included, the counter
% |\codeLinesPassed| is incremented by $1$.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4310,7 +4310,7 @@ for copying and modification in the file \inFileName.
% \begin{macro}{\WriteToDir}
% Macro |\WriteToDir| is either empty or holds the prefix
% necessary to read a file from the current directory. Under UNIX
-% this is |./| but a lot of other systems addopted this concept.
+% this is |./| but a lot of other systems adopted this concept.
% This macro is a default value for |\destdir|.
%
% The definition of this macro is now delayed until |\@setwritedir|
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins
index 281a376761b..e34281fc365 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins
index 4283ef1ddda..90b7b2e61f3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx
index f13e0116cd1..ea67cb6fb72 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins
index d504b056cb4..cfd2c535a77 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.dtx
index e4c384ee70c..1be2e16cc09 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
%<driver>\ProvidesFile{fix-cm.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{fix-cm.dtx}
- [2015/01/14 v1.1t fixes to LaTeX]
+ [2020/11/24 v1.1t fixes to LaTeX]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -446,7 +446,7 @@
{<->sub * cmtt/m/sl}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \paragraph{CM Typewiter (var.)}
+% \paragraph{CM Typewriter (var.)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmvtt}{}
\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}{
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.ins
index 0407d39630b..95931970f47 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fix-cm.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
index 632f1c9be56..581cfeb7895 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@
%<driver, >\ProvidesFile{fontdef.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{fontdef.dtx}
-%<-latexrelease> [2020/08/01 v3.0i LaTeX Kernel
+%<-latexrelease> [2021/01/15 v3.0i LaTeX Kernel
% \iftrue (\else
%<text, >(Text
%<math, >(Math
-%<+cfgtext>(Uncustomised text
-%<+cfgmath>(Uncustomised math
-%<+cfgprel>(Uncustomised preload
+%<+cfgtext>(Uncustomized text
+%<+cfgmath>(Uncustomized math
+%<+cfgprel>(Uncustomized preload
% \fi
%<-latexrelease> font setup)]
%
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@
% If you don't plan to use Computer Modern much or at all, it might
% (!) be a good idea to make your own \texttt{fonttext.cfg}. Look at
% the comments below (docstrip module `text') to see what should
-% should go into such a file.
+% go into such a file.
%
% To change the math font setup use a copy of \texttt{fontmath.ltx}
% under the name \texttt{fontmath.cfg} and change this copy. However,
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@
% described in \texttt{ltoutenc.dtx}.
%
% By convention, text encoding specific declarations, including the
-% declaration |\DeclareFontEncoding|, are kept in separate file of
+% |\DeclareFontEncoding| declaration, are kept in separate file of
% the form \meta{enc}\texttt{enc.def}, e.g.~\texttt{ot1enc.def}. This
% allows other applications to make use of the declarations as
% well.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins
index 8796d16d3e2..eece2f57ef6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright 2015
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 2015-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
This is a generated file.
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -166,11 +166,14 @@ the system are in the document `cfgguide.tex'.
% we have the extensions as soon as possible.
\from{ltexpl.dtx}{2ekernel} % expl3-based extensions
\from{ltdefns.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltcmd.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module (used to be xparse)
\from{lthooks.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module
+ \from{ltcmdhooks.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module
\from{ltalloc.dtx}{2ekernel}
\from{ltcntrl.dtx}{2ekernel}
\from{lterror.dtx}{2ekernel}
\from{ltpar.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltpara.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module
\from{ltspace.dtx}{2ekernel}
\from{ltlogos.dtx}{2ekernel}
\from{ltfiles.dtx}{2ekernel}
@@ -233,15 +236,12 @@ the system are in the document `cfgguide.tex'.
% hook management support
-\generate{\file{everyshi-ltx.sty}{\from{ltshipout.dtx}{everyshi-ltx}}} % emulating everyshi
\generate{\file{atbegshi-ltx.sty}{\from{ltshipout.dtx}{atbegshi-ltx}}} % emulating atbegshi
\generate{\file{atveryend-ltx.sty}{\from{ltfilehook.dtx}{atveryend-ltx}}} % emulating atveryend
\generate{\file{structuredlog.sty}{\from{ltfilehook.dtx}{structuredlog}}}
-
-
% luatex support (TeX part)
\generate{\file{ltluatex.tex}{\from{ltluatex.dtx}{tex,plain}}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
index ac72f4dca5f..cc9f4da3cb1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins
index b5bb800122a..65156ad9176 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
index f2157e094ab..acb5cf19670 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
%%
%% File `ifthen.dtx'.
%% Copyright (C) 1991 by Leslie Lamport
-%% Copyright (C) 1994-2001 LaTeX3 project, David Carlisle
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2001 LaTeX project, David Carlisle
%% all rights reserved.
%%
%
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
%<driver>\ProvidesFile{ifthen.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{ifthen.dtx}
- [2014/09/29 v1.1c Standard LaTeX ifthen package (DPC)]
+ [2020/11/24 v1.1c Standard LaTeX ifthen package (DPC)]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TE@endeval}
-% Finalise a term. (Expanded on the first pass).
+% Finalize a term. (Expanded on the first pass).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TE@endeval{\relax
\noexpand\TE@setvaltrue\noexpand
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins
index 0e813cd5de3..42e1d3f5d93 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
index c1d08b4830f..1b8691d30fa 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
% THIS MAY CHANGE}
% \changes{v0.95}{1997/12/20}{Updated documentation}
% \changes{v0.97}{1998/03/05}{Spanish ords changed to text chars, pr/2579}
-% \changes{v1.1b}{2006/03/04}{Number of normalisations in the LICR
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2006/03/04}{Number of normalizations in the LICR
% representation (pr/3849)}
% \changes{v1.1c}{2006/11/18}{Added missing \cs{ProvidesFile} line for cp1257 (pr/3892)}
%
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@
% with the |utf8| option.
%
% The |\DeclareUnicodeCharacter| takes UTF-8 code point as its first argument
-% (in form of a a hexadecimal number) and the definition that this maps to as
+% (in form of a hexadecimal number) and the definition that this maps to as
% its second argument. For example, the code point |00E4| which is
% ``LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS'' would be set up via:
%\begin{verbatim}
@@ -410,7 +410,7 @@
%<cp1252&!ansinew> \ProvidesFile{cp1252.def}
%<cp1250> \ProvidesFile{cp1250.def}
%<cp1257> \ProvidesFile{cp1257.def}
- [2020/08/01 v1.3d Input encoding file]
+ [2021/02/14 v1.3d Input encoding file]
%<cp850>%%
%<cp850>%% If you need a Euro symbol, try cp858 instead.
%<cp850>%%
@@ -1053,7 +1053,7 @@
%
% The ISO Latin-3 encoding file defines the characters
% in the ISO 8859-3 encoding. It was contributed by
-% by J\"org Knappen (\texttt{joerg.knappen@uni-mainz.de}) and
+% J\"org Knappen (\texttt{joerg.knappen@uni-mainz.de}) and
% adapted by Chris Rowley.
%
% It can be used for general purpose applications in
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins
index 6494a689eab..920a585bffc 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx
index d08a8001b56..bf92f8ef1e8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Describe the file.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesFile{latex209.def}[2020/08/21 v0.55 Standard LaTeX file]
+\ProvidesFile{latex209.def}[2020/11/26 v0.55 Standard LaTeX file]
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v0.24}{1994/05/14}{Removed date.}
% \changes{v0.40}{1995/03/21}
@@ -712,7 +712,7 @@
%
% \changes{v0.18}{1994/03/11}{Added the catcode changes}
%
-% By default, \LaTeXe{} makes the input charactes 0--8, 11, 14--31 and
+% By default, \LaTeXe{} makes the input characters 0--8, 11, 14--31 and
% 128--255 illegal. In compatibility mode, we restore their old
% meanings.
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins
index bb72f344f1b..33ebc2488c4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.dtx
index 5ee39a3a2df..7d2290f4d8a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -37,13 +37,13 @@
%<fixltx2e>\ProvidesPackage{fixltx2e}
%<fixltx2e> [2016/12/29 v2.1a fixes to LaTeX (obsolete)]
%<latexrelease>\ProvidesPackage{latexrelease}
-%<*!fixltx2e>
+%<*latexrelease>
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{latexrelease.dtx}
- [2018/05/08 v1.0k LaTeX release emulation and tests
+ [2021/04/29 v1.0n LaTeX release emulation and tests
(including releases up to \latexreleaseversion)]
% \iffalse
-%</!fixltx2e>
+%</latexrelease>
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
@@ -51,6 +51,8 @@
\providecommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
\providecommand{\MF}{\textsf{Metafont}}
\providecommand{\danger}{\marginpar[\hfill\protect\Huge!!]{\protect\Huge!!\hfill}}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand\cs[2][]{\texttt{\char`\\\detokenize{#2}}}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand\pkg[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\begin{document}
\DocInput{latexrelease.dtx}
\end{document}
@@ -69,7 +71,7 @@
% \title{The \Lpack{latexrelease} package\thanks{This file
% has version number \fileversion, last
% revised \filedate.}}
-% \author{The \LaTeX3 Project}
+% \author{The \LaTeX{} Project}
% \date{\filedate}
% \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{latex}
% \maketitle
@@ -129,7 +131,6 @@
% package has no information will generate a warning. Dates
% earlier than 2015 will work but will roll back to some point in 2015
% when the method was introduced.
-% |\IncludeInRelease| command is defined.
% The |\requestedLaTeXdate| is set to the normalized date argument
% so that package rollback defaults to the specified date.
%
@@ -137,9 +138,6 @@
% |current| This is the default behaviour, it does not change the
% effective date of the format but does ensure that the
% |\IncludeInRelease| command is defined.
-% the |\requestedLaTeXdate| is reset to 0 so that package rollback
-% does not use the implicit date.
-% |\IncludeInRelease| command is defined.
% The |\requestedLaTeXdate| macro is reset to 0 so that package rollback
% does not use the implicit date.
%
@@ -147,11 +145,16 @@
% |latest| sets the effective date of the format to the release date
% of this file, so in an older format applies all patches currently
% available.
-% |\IncludeInRelease| command is defined.
% The |\requestedLaTeXdate| macro is reset to 0 so that package rollback
% does not use the implicit date.
% \end{itemize}
%
+% In all cases, when the package is loaded, the |\sourceLaTeXdate| is
+% defined to be the numerical representation of |\fmtversion| before the
+% rollback/forward actually happens, so it is possible to test from which
+% was the original \LaTeX{} version before \Lpack{latexrelease} was loaded.
+% This is particularly useful when some code in a package has to be
+% redefined differently if rolling backwards in time or forwards.
%
% \section{Release Specific Code}
%
@@ -345,7 +348,7 @@
%
% Now if you make a further change to |\widget| in the future you
% simply copy the current definition into the empty block and add a new
-% empty declaration with todays date and the current format date. This
+% empty declaration with today's date and the current format date. This
% way your main code stays readable and the old versions accumulate at
% the end of the package.\footnote{Of course there may be some cases
% in which the old code has to be in a specific place within the
@@ -363,6 +366,99 @@
% necessary as the new code only gets defined if that release is
% chosen.
%
+% \section{Declaring entire modules}
+%
+% Sometimes a large chunk of code is added as a module to another larger
+% code base. As example of that in the 2020-10-01 release \LaTeX{} got
+% a new hook management system, \pkg{lthooks}, which was added in one go
+% and, as with all changes to the kernel, it was added to
+% \pkg{latexrelease}. However rolling back from a future date to the
+% 2020-10-01 release didn't work because \pkg{latexrelease} would try to
+% define again all those commands, which would result in many
+% ``already defined'' errors and similar issues.
+%
+% To solve that problem, completely new modules can be defined in
+% \pkg{latexrelease} using the commands:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{NewModuleRelease}%^^A
+% \verb|{|\meta{initial release date}%^^A
+% \verb|}{|\meta{name}\verb|}{|\meta{message}\verb|}|\\
+% \null\quad\meta{module code}\\
+% \cs{IncludeInRelease}%^^A
+% \verb|{0000/00/00}{|\meta{name}\verb|}{|\meta{message}\verb|}|\\
+% \null\quad\meta{undefine module code}\\
+% \cs{EndModuleRelease}
+% \end{quote}
+% With that setup, the module \meta{name} will be declared to exist only
+% in releases equal or later \meta{initial release date}.
+%
+% If \pkg{latexrelease} is rolling backwards or forwards between dates
+% after \meta{initial release date}, then all the \meta{module code} is
+% skipped, except when inside \meta{IncludeInRelease} guards, in which
+% case the code is applied or skipped as discussed above.
+%
+% If rolling forward from a date before the module's \meta{initial
+% release date} to a date after that, then all the \meta{module code} is
+% executed to define the module, and \cs{IncludeInRelease} guards are
+% executed accordingly, depending on the date declared and the target
+% date.
+%
+% If \pkg{latexrelease} is rolling back to a date before \meta{release
+% date}, then the code in the \cs{IncludeInRelease} guard dated
+% \verb|0000/00/00| is executed instead to undefine the module. This
+% guard \emph{is not} ended by the usual \cs{EndIncludeInRelease}, but
+% instead by \cs{EndModuleRelease}.
+%
+% Finally, if rolling backwards or forwards between dates both before
+% \meta{initial release date}, the entire code between
+% \meta{NewModuleRelease} and \meta{EndModuleRelease} is entirely
+% skipped.
+%
+% \subsection{Example}
+%
+% Here is an example usage of the structure described above, as it would
+% be used in the \LaTeX{} kernel, taking \pkg{lthooks} as example:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% %<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+% \ExplSyntaxOn
+% %<latexrelease>\NewModuleRelease{2020/10/01}{lthooks}%
+% %<latexrelease> {The~hook~management~system}
+% \NewDocumentCommand \NewHook { m }
+% { \hook_new:n {#1} }
+% %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}{\AddToHook}{Long~argument}
+% \NewDocumentCommand \AddToHook { m o +m }
+% { \hook_gput_code:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} }
+% %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% %<latexrelease>
+% %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\AddToHook}{Long~argument}
+% %<latexrelease>\NewDocumentCommand \AddToHook { m o m }
+% %<latexrelease> { \hook_gput_code:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} }
+% %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% %<latexrelease>
+% %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{lthooks}{Undefine~lthooks}
+% %<latexrelease>\cs_undefine:N \NewHook
+% %<latexrelease>\cs_undefine:N \AddToHook
+% %<latexrelease>\EndModuleRelease
+% \ExplSyntaxOff
+% %</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% In the example above, \cs{NewHook} is declared only once, and
+% unchanged in the next release (2021/06/01 in the example), so it has
+% no \cs{IncludeInRelease} guards, and will only be defined if needed.
+% \cs{AddToHook}, on the other hand, changed between the two releases
+% (made up for the example; it didn't really happen)
+% and has an \cs{IncludeInRelease} block for the current release (off
+% \pkg{docstrip} guards, so it goes into the kernel too), and another
+% for the previous release (in \pkg{docstrip} guards so it goes only
+% into \pkg{latexrelease}).
+%
+% Note that in the example above, \cs{ExplSyntaxOn} and
+% \cs{ExplSyntaxOff} were added \emph{outside} the module code because,
+% as discussed above, sometimes the code outside \cs{IncludeInRelease}
+% guards may be skipped, but not the code inside them, and in that case
+% the catcodes would be wrong when defining the code.
+%
% \section{fixltx2e}
%
% As noted above, prior to the 2015 \LaTeX\ release updates to the
@@ -386,17 +482,34 @@
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \section{Setup}
+% \subsection{Setup}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sourceLaTeXdate}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{2021/01/23}{\cs{sourceLaTeXdate} added}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{2021/03/18}{Define \cs{sourceLaTeXdate} conditionally}
+% Store the original \LaTeX{} format version
+% as a number in the format |YYYYMMDD|. This macro has to
+% be defined conditionally, so that it isn't changed in case
+% \file{latexrelease.sty} is loaded twice (for tests), but it
+% can't be defined in the kernel only, otherwise
+% \file{latexrelease.sty} wouldn't work in older \LaTeX{} due
+% to the missing macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{sourceLaTeXdate}{%
+ \edef\sourceLaTeXdate{%
+ \expandafter\@parse@version\fmtversion//00\@nil}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\IncludeInRelease}
% \begin{macro}{\EndIncludeInRelease}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \end{macrocode}
+% These are defined in \file{ltvers.dtx}.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.0c}{2015/02/19}{Swap argument order}
-% \changes{v1.0k}{2018/05/08}{reset \cs{\requestedLaTeXdate} for current and latest options, gitub issue 43}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{2018/05/08}{reset \cs{\requestedLaTeXdate} for current
+% and latest options, github issue 43}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption*{%
\def\@IncludeInRelease#1[#2]{\@IncludeInRele@se{#1}}%
@@ -483,16 +596,213 @@ of this package available from CTAN}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
-% \section{Individual Changes}
+% \subsection{Ignoring \texttt{\string_new} errors when rolling back}
%
-% The code for each change will be inserted at this point, extracted
-% from the kernel source files.
+% Enforce \cs{ExplSyntaxOn} and \cs{ExplSyntaxOff} to be \cs{relax} in
+% \pkg{latexrelease} if they are not yet defined. They are later
+% restored to be undefined if needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\csname ExplSyntaxOn\endcsname
+\csname ExplSyntaxOff\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0m}{2021/03/18}
+% {Make \texttt{\string_new} definitions harmless}
+%
+% Define a set of changes here, but we'll only use them later to make
+% sure they are applied after \pkg{expl3} is loaded. If loading from a
+% rather old format, we don't have \cs{ExplSyntaxOn} yet.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \endlinechar=-1
+ \catcode95=11 % _
+ \catcode58=11 % :
+ \catcode126=10 % ~
+ \catcode32=09 % <space>
+ \xdef\latexrelease@postexpl{\unexpanded{%
+%<@@=latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% First we'll define a \cs{declarecommand} that does \cs{renewcommand}
+% if the command being defined already exists, and \cs{newcommand}
+% otherwise.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_declare_command:w
+ { \@star@or@long \@@_declare_command:Nw }
+\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_declare_command:Nw #1
+ { \cs_if_exist:NTF #1 { \renew@command } { \new@command } #1 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then define a version of \cs{e@alloc} that checks if the control
+% sequence being defined already exists, and if so, checks if its
+% meaning is the same as the one that would be defined with the call to
+% \cs{e@alloc}. If both tests pass, nothing is defined to save a
+% register. This version also takes care of setting
+% \cs{allocationnumber} to the value it would have after the register is
+% allocated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_e@alloc:NnnnnN #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
+ {
+ \cs_if_free:NTF #6
+ { \use:n }
+ {
+ \exp_after:wN \@@_e@alloc:N
+ \token_to_meaning:N #6 \scan_stop: {#2} #6
+ }
+ { \@@_e@alloc #1 {#2} {#3} {#4} {#5} #6 }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Walk through the meaning of the control sequence token by token,
+% looking for the register allocation number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_e@alloc:N #1
+ {
+ \if_int_compare:w 0 < 0
+ \if_int_compare:w 10 < 9#1 ~ 1 \fi:
+ \if_charcode:w " #1 1 \fi: \exp_stop_f:
+ \tex_afterassignment:D \@@_e@alloc:w
+ \@tempcnta #1
+ \use_i:nnn
+ \fi:
+ \use:n
+ {
+ \if_meaning:w \scan_stop: #1
+ \exp_after:wN \use_iv:nnnn
+ \fi:
+ \@@_e@alloc:N
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When found, check if it is the exact same register as it would be
+% allocated, and if it is, set \cs{allocationnumber} accordingly and
+% exit, otherwise undefine the register and allocate from scratch.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_e@alloc:w #1 \scan_stop: #2 #3
+ {
+ #2 \@@_tmp:w = \@tempcnta
+ \token_if_eq_meaning:NNTF #3 \@@_tmp:w
+ { \int_set_eq:NN \allocationnumber \@tempcnta \use_none:n }
+ { \cs_set_eq:NN #3 \tex_undefined:D \use:n }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
%
+% Now create a token list to hold the list of changed commands, and
+% define a temporary macro that will loop through the command list,
+% store each in \cs{l_@@_restores_tl}, save a copy, and redefine each.
% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_clear_new:N \l_@@_restores_tl
+\cs_gset:Npn \@@_tmp:w #1 #2
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:Nn #1
+ { \cs_undefine:N \@@_tmp:w }
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_restores_tl {#1}
+ \cs_set_eq:cN { @@_ \cs_to_str:N #1 } #1
+ \cs_set_eq:NN #1 #2
+ \@@_tmp:w
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The redefinitions below are needed because:
+% \begin{description}
+% \def\makelabel#1{\cs{#1}}
+% \item[__kernel_chk_if_free_cs:N] This function is used ubiquitously
+% in the \pkg{l3kernel} to check if a control sequence is definable,
+% and give an error otherwise (similar to \cs{@ifdefinable}).
+% Making it a no-op is enough for most cases (except when defining
+% new registers);
+% \item[e@alloc] In the case of new registers, we waste an allocation
+% number if we do \cs[no-index]{new\meta{thing}} in a register
+% that's already allocated, so the redefinition of \cs{e@alloc}
+% checks if the new register is really necessary. This code does
+% not clear the register, which might cause problems in the future,
+% if a register is allocated but not properly cleared before using;
+% \item[__kernel_msg_error:nnx] This command is used to error on
+% already defined scan marks. Just making the error do nothing is
+% enough, as no action is taken in that case;
+% \item[msg_new:nnnn] Used to define new messages. Making it
+% \texttt{\string_gset} is enough. Other msg commands like
+% \cs{msg_new:nnn} and \cs[no-index]{__kernel_msg_new:nnn(n)} are
+% defined in terms of \cs{msg_new:nnnn}, so there is no need to
+% change the other ones;
+% \item[NewDocumentCommand] Used to define user-level commands in the
+% kernel. Making it equal to \cs{DeclareDocumentCommand} solves the
+% problem;
+% \item[newcommand] Same as above.
+% \end{description}
+% And here we go:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@@_tmp:w
+ \__kernel_chk_if_free_cs:N \use_none:n
+ \e@alloc \@@_e@alloc:NnnnnN
+ \__kernel_msg_error:nnx \use_none:nnn
+ \msg_new:nnnn \msg_gset:nnnn
+ \NewDocumentCommand \DeclareDocumentCommand
+ \newcommand \@@_declare_command:w
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Temp addition \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_msg_error:nnn \use_none:nnn % needed while redirect for kernel msgs doesn't work
+ \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_tail
+ \q_recursion_stop
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Finally, redirect the error thrown by \cs{NewHook} to nowhere so it
+% can be safely reused (the hook isn't redeclared if it already exists).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_redirect_name:nnn { hooks } { exists } { none }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }}%
+\endgroup
%</latexrelease>
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \section{fixltx2e}
+% \subsection{Undoing the temp modifications}
+%
+% If \cs{ExplSyntaxOn} exists (defined and not equal \cs{relax}), then
+% use the \pkg{expl3} restore code, otherwise restore \cs{ExplSyntaxOn}
+% and \cs{ExplSyntaxOff} to be undefined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latexrelease-finish>
+\@ifundefined{ExplSyntaxOn}%
+ {\let\ExplSyntaxOn\@undefined
+ \let\ExplSyntaxOff\@undefined
+ \@gobble}%
+ {\ExplSyntaxOn
+ \@firstofone}%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now just loop through the list of redefined commands and restore their
+% previous meanings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_restores_tl
+ {
+ \cs_set_eq:Nc #1 { @@_ \cs_to_str:N #1 }
+ \cs_undefine:c { @@_ \cs_to_str:N #1 }
+ }
+\tl_clear:N \l_@@_restores_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And restore the hook error message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_redirect_name:nnn { hooks } { exists } { }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=>
+ \ExplSyntaxOff}%
+%</latexrelease-finish>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Individual Changes}
+%
+% The code for each change will be inserted at this point, extracted
+% from the kernel source files.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{fixltx2e}
%
% Generate a stub \Lpack{fixltx2e} package:
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins
index ffc92374c35..0b65114a2f9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -93,13 +93,16 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
\from{ltluatex.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty
\from{ltexpl.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty
\from{ltdefns.dtx} {latexrelease}%
- \from{lthooks.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty % L3 layer module
+ \from{ltcmd.dtx} {latexrelease}%
+ \from{lthooks.dtx} {latexrelease}% L3 layer module
+ \from{ltcmdhooks.dtx} {latexrelease}% L3 layer module
\from{ltalloc.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty
\from{ltcntrl.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty
\from{lterror.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty
\from{ltpar.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty
+ \from{ltpara.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty
\from{ltspace.dtx} {latexrelease}%
- \from{ltlogos.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty
+ \from{ltlogos.dtx} {latexrelease}% L3 layer module
\from{ltfiles.dtx} {latexrelease}%
\from{ltoutenc.dtx} {latexrelease}%
\from{ltcounts.dtx} {latexrelease}%
@@ -132,6 +135,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
\from{ltoutput.dtx} {latexrelease}%
\from{ltfsscmp.dtx} {latexrelease}% only in latexrelease!
\from{ltfinal.dtx} {latexrelease}%
+ \from{latexrelease.dtx}{latexrelease-finish}%
}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
index 908f11e1244..7a97aa4318c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins
index 9e9901b879c..902bbfc9e8e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -87,8 +87,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx
index 7b31dfbbc96..6beee81735a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
%<*driver>
\ProvidesFile{letter.drv}
%</driver>
- [2020/03/11 v1.3b
+ [2021/03/05 v1.3c
%<+letter> Standard LaTeX document class]
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@
% \changes{v1.3a}{2020/03/07}{merged changes to classes.dtx into letter.dtx}
%
% \iffalse
-% Copyright (C) 1994 LaTeX3 project, Frank Mittelbach
+% Copyright (C) 1994 LaTeX Project, Frank Mittelbach
% and Rainer Sch\"opf, all rights reserved.
% \fi
%
@@ -1019,7 +1019,29 @@
\@date \end{tabular}\par}%
\fi
\vspace{2\parskip}%
- {\raggedright \toname \\ \toaddress \par}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the address field used \verb=\\[...]= then we have
+% \cs{toaddress} starting with the bracket argument as the split
+% was done simply at \verb=\\=. So we add \cs{expandafter} here so
+% that is will be used and not typeset. A better fix would be to do
+% a proper parsing but \ldots
+%
+% Other classes based on \texttt{letter.cls} could benefit from the same fix, e.g.,
+% \texttt{akletter.cls},
+% \texttt{bletter.cls},
+% \texttt{letter.cls},
+% \texttt{chletter.cls},
+% \texttt{extletter.cls},\\
+% \texttt{frletter.cls},
+% \texttt{hletter.cls},
+% \texttt{scrlttr2.cls} (change rejected),
+% \texttt{lettre.cls},
+% \texttt{beletter.cls},\\
+% \texttt{brief.cls} and perhaps others.
+%
+% \changes{v1.3c}{2020/12/28}{Add \cs{expandafter} (gh/427)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\raggedright \toname \expandafter\\\toaddress \par}%
\vspace{2\parskip}%
#1\par\nobreak}
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins
index 8e8ed4ef7b9..44777393eb6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
index d18df9ad896..59c492836f9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
index a3a25308fe8..cda0fa160ad 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltbibl.dtx}
- [2018/11/09 v1.1r LaTeX Kernel (Bibliography)]
+ [2020/12/10 v1.1s LaTeX Kernel (Bibliography)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltbibl.dtx}
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@
% but puts nothing in the text.
%
% |\nocite{*}| is special: it tells \BibTeX{} to put the whole of a
-% collection of references into the bibiography.
+% collection of references into the bibliography.
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@
% year citations it becomes more than questionable.
%
% So Chris added yet another hook here, as suggested by, at least,
-% Donald Arsenau. Note that this one is inside the first argument
+% Donald Arseneau. Note that this one is inside the first argument
% of the |\@cite| hook.
% This decouples the top-level typesetting of the citation from
% the details of the other business conducted here. All this really
@@ -327,6 +327,10 @@
% \changes{v1.1g}{1995/05/08}{Use \cs{@firstofone}}
% \changes{v1.1k}{1995/10/20}{Removed refundefined flag}
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\nocite}{Allow nocite in preamble}%
\def\nocite#1{\@bsphack
% \end{macrocode}
% With the implementation designed already in \LaTeX\,2.09 the
@@ -335,10 +339,15 @@
% that point. As a result the ``reference'' will appear on the
% terminal and nothing else will happen.
%
-% This would be easy to fix, but then a document using the fix will
+% [This would be easy to fix, but then a document using the fix will
% silently fail on an older release of \LaTeX{}, missing all
% citations done with |\nocite|. Thus we do only generate an error
-% message and leave the fix for a \LaTeXe{} successor.
+% message and leave the fix for a \LaTeXe{} successor.]
+%
+% Given that we are now a quarter century into using \LaTeXe{}
+% there is no good reason any more do limit ourself to 2.09
+% conciderations. So we now simply delay the \cs{nocide} if it is
+% issued in the preamble.
%
% \changes{v1.1o}{2003/05/18}{Check if we are after \cs{document}}
% \changes{v1.1p}{2004/01/04}{Changed error message}
@@ -354,18 +363,48 @@
\@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}}{}}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% But before |\begin{document}| we raise an error message:
+% But before |\begin{document}| we raised an error message in the
+% past but as of 2021/05 not any longer.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \@latex@error{Cannot be used in preamble}\@eha
+% \@latex@error{Cannot be used in preamble}\@eha
% \end{macrocode}
-% Without the compatibility problems we could fix the problem as follows:
+% Instead we delay the declaration to the start of the document.
+% We have to use a late hook for this, so that it comes after the
+% \texttt{.aux} file is open for writing and after
+% \cs{@preamblecmds} was executed to change the above
+% test. Therefore \cs{AtBeginDocument} would still be too early.
+% \changes{v1.1s}{2020/12/10}{Delay any \cs{nocite} in the preamble
+% instead of raising an error}
% \begin{macrocode}
- % \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}}
+ \AddToHook{begindocument/end}[kernel]{\nocite{#1}}%
\fi
\@esphack}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\nocite}{Allow nocite in preamble}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\def\nocite#1{\@bsphack
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\@onlypreamble\document
+%<latexrelease> \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+%<latexrelease> \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+%<latexrelease> \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\G@refundefinedtrue
+%<latexrelease> \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}}{}}%
+%<latexrelease> \else
+%<latexrelease> \@latex@error{Cannot be used in preamble}\@eha
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \@esphack}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
+%
% Since |\nocite{*}| should not produce a warning about undefined
-% citation keys (seee PR 557), we need to set the control sequence
+% citation keys (see PR 557), we need to set the control sequence
% `|\b@*|' to something other than |\relax|. As a result |\cite{*}|
% will not warn either (but that never worked with \BibTeX{} in the
% first place).
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
index 39c134b3bfd..8499d3ab8b9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltboxes.dtx}
- [2020/09/27 v1.4a LaTeX Kernel (Box Commands)]
+ [2021/02/10 v1.4b LaTeX Kernel (Box Commands)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltboxes.dtx}
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@
% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
% {stuff from ltpatch done}
% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/11/09}
-% {more colour changes\ldots}
+% {more color changes\ldots}
% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/11/17}
% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/07}{Use \cs{hb@xt@}}
@@ -422,7 +422,7 @@
% {macro added}
% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
% {color support}
-% This macro is initially a no-op, but the colour package will redefine
+% This macro is initially a no-op, but the color package will redefine
% it to insert a |\special|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\set@color\relax
@@ -431,38 +431,66 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\color@begingroup}
% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
-% {macro added for colour support}
+% {macro added for color support}
% \begin{macro}{\color@endgroup}
% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
-% {macro added for colour support}
+% {macro added for color support}
% \begin{macro}{\color@setgroup}
% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
-% {macro added for colour support}
+% {macro added for color support}
% \begin{macro}{\normalcolor}
% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/12}
-% {macro added for colour support}
+% {macro added for color support}
% \begin{macro}{\color@hbox}
% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/05}
-% {macro added for colour support}
+% {macro added for color support}
% \begin{macro}{\color@vbox}
% \changes{v1.0r}{1994/11/18}
-% {macro added for colour support}
+% {macro added for color support}
% \begin{macro}{\color@endbox}
% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/05}
-% {macro added for colour support}
-% These macros are initially a no-op, but the colour package will
+% {macro added for color support}
+% \changes{v1.4b}{2021/02/04}
+% {Always add the color groups (gh/488)}
+% In the past these macros were initially no-ops, and the \pkg{color}
+% package redefined
% redefine them to be |\begingroup|, |\endgroup|,
% |\begingroup\set@color|,\\ |\hbox\bgroup\color@begingroup|,
% |\color@endgroup\egroup|.
-% and \meta{set to main document colour} respectively.
+% and \meta{set to main document color} respectively.
+%
+% Nowadays we always set the group already in the kernel as this makes the
+% coding simpler.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\color@begingroup\relax
-\let\color@endgroup\relax
-\let\color@setgroup\relax
-\let\normalcolor\relax
-\let\color@hbox\relax
-\let\color@vbox\relax
-\let\color@endbox\relax
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\color@begingroup}{color group settings}%
+\let\color@begingroup\begingroup
+\def\color@endgroup{\endgraf\endgroup}
+\def\color@setgroup{\color@begingroup} % changed further in color package
+\let\normalcolor\relax % remains untouched; only changed in a color package
+\def\color@hbox{\hbox\bgroup\color@begingroup}
+\def\color@vbox{\vbox\bgroup\color@begingroup}
+\def\color@endbox{\color@endgroup\egroup}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\color@begingroup}{color group settings}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\color@begingroup\relax
+%<latexrelease>\let\color@endgroup\relax
+%<latexrelease>\let\color@setgroup\relax
+%<latexrelease>\let\normalcolor\relax
+%<latexrelease>\let\color@hbox\relax
+%<latexrelease>\let\color@vbox\relax
+%<latexrelease>\let\color@endbox\relax
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -539,7 +567,7 @@
% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
% {Use \cs{color@setgroup}}
% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/15}
-% {Added missing procent character.}
+% {Added missing percent character.}
% \changes{v1.0v}{1995/07/20}
% {Use \cs{sbox}}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -888,7 +916,7 @@
%
% The rational for allowing two normally global flags to be set
% locally here was stated originally by
-% Donald Arsenau and extended by Chris Rowley.
+% Donald Arseneau and extended by Chris Rowley.
% It is because these flags are only set globally to
% true by section commands, and these should never appear within
% boxes or, indeed, in any group; and they are only ever
@@ -1016,7 +1044,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\@iiiminipage}
% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/21}
-% {Extra \cs{bgroup} for colour}
+% {Extra \cs{bgroup} for color}
% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
% {Use new \cs{color@setgroup} concept.}
% Internal form of |minipage|.
@@ -1054,11 +1082,11 @@
% {(RmS) replaced \cs{vskip}-\cs{lastskip} by \cs{unskip}
% (proposed by FMi)}
% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/21}
-% {Extra \cs{egroup} for colour}
+% {Extra \cs{egroup} for color}
% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
% {Use new \cs{color@setgroup} concept.}
% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/05}
-% {Colour resetting for footnotes moved to here: as for main
+% {Color resetting for footnotes moved to here: as for main
% page.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endminipage{%
@@ -1093,9 +1121,9 @@
% Final |\strut| added 27 Mar 89, on suggestion by Don Hosek
% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/09/29}{(RmS) added \cs{reset@font}}
% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/11/26}{(RmS) added protection for \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{Extra group for colour}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{Extra group for color}
% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/21}
-% {Extra \cs{endgraf} for colour}
+% {Extra \cs{endgraf} for color}
% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
% {Use new \cs{color@setgroup} concept.}
% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
@@ -1103,11 +1131,17 @@
% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/11/04}
% {Added \cs{protected@edef}. ASAJ.}
% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/05}
-% {Colour resetting for footnotes moved to endminipage: as for main
+% {Color resetting for footnotes moved to endminipage: as for main
% page.}
% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/11/05}
-% {Colour groups restored here.}
+% {Color groups restored here.}
+% \changes{v1.4b}{2021/02/10}
+% {Explicitly run \cs{par} in support for paragraph tagging}
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@mpfootnotetext}{footnotetext tagging}%
\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootins
@@ -1119,7 +1153,31 @@
\color@begingroup
\@makefntext{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+ \par
\color@endgroup}}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@mpfootnotetext}{footnotetext tagging}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
+%<latexrelease> \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+%<latexrelease> \unvbox\@mpfootins
+%<latexrelease> \reset@font\footnotesize
+%<latexrelease> \hsize\columnwidth
+%<latexrelease> \@parboxrestore
+%<latexrelease> \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+%<latexrelease> {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+%<latexrelease> \color@begingroup
+%<latexrelease> \@makefntext{%
+%<latexrelease> \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+%<latexrelease> \color@endgroup}}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
index c62136c3097..a0ab0fa3547 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltclass.dtx}
- [2020/12/17 v1.3v LaTeX Kernel (Class & Package Interface)]
+ [2021/05/18 v1.4b LaTeX Kernel (Class & Package Interface)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltclass.dtx}
@@ -427,7 +427,7 @@
% \changes{v0.2h}{1993/11/28}
% {Primitive filenames now terminated by space not \cs{relax}.}
% \changes{v0.2h}{1993/11/28}
-% {Directory syntax checing moved to dircheck.dtx}
+% {Directory syntax checking moved to dircheck.dtx}
% \changes{v0.2h}{1993/11/28}
% {Assorted commands now in the kernel removed.}
% \changes{v0.2i}{1993/12/03}
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@declaredoptions}
% This list is automatically built by |\DeclareOption|.
% It is the list of options (separated by commas) declared in
-% the class or package file and it defines the order in which the
+% the class or package file and it defines the order in which
% the corresponding |\ds@|\meta{option} commands are executed.
% All local \meta{option}s which are not declared will be processed
% in the order defined by the optional argument of |\documentclass|
@@ -505,6 +505,14 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\@raw@classoptionslist}
+% List of options of the main class (unprocessed).
+% \changes{v1.4b}{2021/05/18}{Initialise to \cs{relax} to match \cs{@classoptionslist}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@raw@classoptionslist\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% \begin{macro}{\@unusedoptionlist}
% \changes{v1.0u}{1996/07/26}{made only preamble}
% List of options of the main class that haven't been declared or
@@ -640,14 +648,38 @@
%<latexrelease> \@expl@push@filename@aux@@}
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When we roll back from a release that has \pkg{expl3} preloaded, the
+% definitions of \cs{@pushfilename} and \cs{@popfilename} can't be
+% completely rolled back otherwise \pkg{expl3}-based packages won't
+% have the automatic \cs{ExplSyntaxOff} at the end. Here and below for
+% \cs{@popfilename}, we don't roll back all the way through if coming
+% from \LaTeX${}>2020-02-02$.
+% \changes{v1.4a}{2021/03/27}
+% {Do not completely roll back if \pkg{expl3} is loaded.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\@pushfilename}%
%<latexrelease> {Add \@expl@push@filename@@ and \@expl@push@filename@aux@@}%
+%<latexrelease>\ifnum\sourceLaTeXdate<20200202\relax
+%<latexrelease> \GenericInfo{}{Defining 00-00-00\string\@pushfilename.}
%<latexrelease>\def\@pushfilename{%
%<latexrelease> \xdef\@currnamestack{%
%<latexrelease> {\@currname}%
%<latexrelease> {\@currext}%
%<latexrelease> {\the\catcode`\@}%
%<latexrelease> \@currnamestack}}
+%<latexrelease>\else
+%<latexrelease> \GenericInfo{}{Defining 2020-02-02\string\@pushfilename.}
+%<latexrelease>\def\@pushfilename{%
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@push@filename@@
+%<latexrelease> \xdef\@currnamestack{%
+%<latexrelease> {\@currname}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@currext}%
+%<latexrelease> {\the\catcode`\@}%
+%<latexrelease> \@currnamestack}%
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@push@filename@aux@@}
+%<latexrelease>\fi
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
\@onlypreamble\@pushfilename
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -676,9 +708,21 @@
%<latexrelease> \@expl@pop@filename@@}
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.4a}{2021/03/27}
+% {Do not completely roll back if \pkg{expl3} is loaded.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\@popfilename}%
%<latexrelease> {Add \@expl@push@filename@@ and \@expl@push@filename@aux@@}%
+%<latexrelease>\ifnum\sourceLaTeXdate<20200202\relax
+%<latexrelease> \GenericInfo{}{Defining 00-00-00\string\@popfilename.}
%<latexrelease>\def\@popfilename{\expandafter\@p@pfilename\@currnamestack\@nil}
+%<latexrelease>\else
+%<latexrelease> \GenericInfo{}{Defining 2020-02-02\string\@popfilename.}
+%<latexrelease>\def\@popfilename{\expandafter\@p@pfilename\@currnamestack\@nil
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@pop@filename@@}
+%<latexrelease>\fi
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
\@onlypreamble\@popfilename
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -712,6 +756,7 @@
% Path to the current file if explicitly given. The auxiliary is
% needed here to insert a \cs{@empty} to prevent the loss of braces.
% \changes{v1.3u}{2020/11/20}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.3w}{2021/01/21}{Add empty entry for latexrelease}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
@@ -719,6 +764,7 @@
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\@kernel@currpathstack}%
%<latexrelease> {Add \@kernel@currpathstack}%
\gdef\@kernel@currpathstack{}
+%<latexrelease>\g@addto@macro\@kernel@currpathstack{{}}
\def\@p@pfilepath#1{%
\gdef\@currpath{#1}\@p@pfilepath@aux\@empty}
\def\@p@pfilepath@aux#1\@nil{%
@@ -1026,12 +1072,12 @@
% be cautious when handling the identification string in case it
% contains UTF-8 characters.
% \changes{v1.3e}{2019/11/29}{Protect package info text (gh/52)}
-% \changes{v1.3r}{2020/10/01}{Allow for package subsitution}
+% \changes{v1.3r}{2020/10/01}{Allow for package substitution}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {\@pr@videpackage}{Allow for package subsitution}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@pr@videpackage}{Allow for package substitution}%
\def\@pr@videpackage[#1]{%
\expandafter\protected@xdef % <-- protected...
\csname ver@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname{#1}% Loaded package
@@ -1164,13 +1210,14 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\PassOptionsToPackage}
% \begin{macro}{\PassOptionsToClass}
-% If the package has been loaded, we check that it was first loaded with
-% the options. Otherwise we add the option list to that of the package.
+% If the package has been loaded, we check that it was first loaded with
+% the options. Otherwise we add the option list to that of the package.
% \changes{v1.3t}{2020/10/18}{Drop path from \cs{input@path} (gh/414).}
+% \changes{v1.3x}{2021/02/18}{save raw option lists (gh/85)}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\@pass@ptions}
-%<latexrelease> {Add file replacement in \@pass@ptions}%
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@pass@ptions}{Raw option lists}%
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
\def\@pass@ptions#1#2#3{%
\@expl@@@filehook@set@curr@file@@nNN
@@ -1187,12 +1234,41 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let
\csname opt@#3.#1\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname opt@\reserved@a\endcsname}
+ \csname opt@\reserved@a\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Extend raw option list
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{@raw@opt@#3.#1}%
+ {\expandafter\gdef\csname @raw@opt@#3.#1\endcsname{#2}}%
+ {\expandafter\g@addto@macro\csname @raw@opt@#3.#1\endcsname{,#2}}%
+}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\@pass@ptions}
+%<latexrelease> {Add file replacement in \@pass@ptions}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\def\@pass@ptions#1#2#3{%
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@@@filehook@set@curr@file@@nNN
+%<latexrelease> {\@expl@@@filehook@resolve@file@subst@@w #3.#1\@nil}%
+%<latexrelease> \reserved@a\reserved@b
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@@@filehook@clear@replacement@flag@@
+%<latexrelease> \expandafter\xdef\csname opt@\reserved@a\endcsname{%
+%<latexrelease> \@ifundefined{opt@\reserved@a}\@empty
+%<latexrelease> {\csname opt@\reserved@a\endcsname,}%
+%<latexrelease> \zap@space#2 \@empty}%
+%<latexrelease> \expandafter\let
+%<latexrelease> \csname opt@#3.#1\expandafter\endcsname
+%<latexrelease> \csname opt@\reserved@a\endcsname}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\@pass@ptions}
%<latexrelease> {\@pass@ptions}%
+%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\def\@pass@ptions#1#2#3{%
%<latexrelease> \expandafter\xdef\csname opt@#3.#1\endcsname{%
%<latexrelease> \@ifundefined{opt@#3.#1}\@empty
@@ -1200,6 +1276,9 @@
%<latexrelease> \zap@space#2 \@empty}}
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypreamble\@pass@ptions
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -1241,18 +1320,49 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\OptionNotUsed}
+% \changes{v1.3x}{2021/02/18}{filter out =value from unused option list (gh/85)}
+% \begin{macro}{\@remove@eq@value}
+% \changes{v1.3x}{2021/02/18}{macro added (gh/85)}
% If we are in a class file, add |\CurrentOption| to the list of
% unused options. Otherwise, in a package file do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\OptionNotUsed}{filter unused option list}%
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+\def\@remove@eq@value#1=#2\@nil{#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\def\OptionNotUsed{%
\ifx\@currext\@clsextension
\xdef\@unusedoptionlist{%
\ifx\@unusedoptionlist\@empty\else\@unusedoptionlist,\fi
- \CurrentOption}%
+ \expandafter\@remove@eq@value\CurrentOption=\@nil}%
\fi}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\OptionNotUsed}{filter unused option list}%
+%<latexrelease>\let\@remove@eq@value\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\def\OptionNotUsed{%
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\@currext\@clsextension
+%<latexrelease> \xdef\@unusedoptionlist{%
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\@unusedoptionlist\@empty\else\@unusedoptionlist,\fi
+%<latexrelease> \CurrentOption}%
+%<latexrelease> \fi}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypreamble\OptionNotUsed
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\default@ds}
% The default option code.
@@ -1279,7 +1389,7 @@
% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}
% {Stop adding the global option list inside class files.}
% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}
-% {Optimise `empty option' code.}
+% {Optimize `empty option' code.}
% \changes{v0.2b}{1993/11/15}
% {Star form added.}
% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
@@ -1312,19 +1422,50 @@
%
% \changes{v0.2y}{1994/02/07}
% {Add extra ,s so `two' is not matched with `twocolumn'}
+% \changes{v1.3z}{2021/03/05}{modify so braces to not give errors (gh/513)}
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@xprocess@ptions}{safer @xprocess@ptions}%
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
\def\@xprocess@ptions{%
\ifx\@currext\@clsextension\else
+ \ifx\@classoptionslist\relax\else
\@for\CurrentOption:=\@classoptionslist\do{%
\ifx\CurrentOption\@empty\else
- \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\CurrentOption,}{,\@declaredoptions,}%
- \ifin@
+ \@ifundefined{ds@\CurrentOption}{}{%
\@use@ption
\expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
- \fi
+ }%
\fi}%
+ \fi
\fi
\@process@pti@ns}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@xprocess@ptions}{safer @xprocess@ptions}%
+%<latexrelease>\let\@remove@eq@value\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\def\@xprocess@ptions{%
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\@currext\@clsextension\else
+%<latexrelease> \@for\CurrentOption:=\@classoptionslist\do{%
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\CurrentOption\@empty\else
+%<latexrelease> \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\CurrentOption,}{,\@declaredoptions,}%
+%<latexrelease> \ifin@
+%<latexrelease> \@use@ption
+%<latexrelease> \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \fi}%
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \@process@pti@ns}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypreamble\@xprocess@ptions
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -1403,11 +1544,30 @@
% {Name changed from \cs{@executeoption}}
% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/05/17}
% {Execute option after removing from list, not before}
+% \changes{v1.3x}{2021/02/18}{filter out =value from unused option list (gh/85)}
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@use@ption}{filter unused option list}%
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
\def\@use@ption{%
- \@expandtwoargs\@removeelement\CurrentOption
+ \@expandtwoargs\@removeelement
+ {\expandafter\@remove@eq@value\CurrentOption=\@nil}%
\@unusedoptionlist\@unusedoptionlist
\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@use@ption}{filter unused option list}%
+%<latexrelease>\def\@use@ption{%
+%<latexrelease> \@expandtwoargs\@removeelement\CurrentOption
+%<latexrelease> \@unusedoptionlist\@unusedoptionlist
+%<latexrelease> \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypreamble\@use@ption
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1460,7 +1620,7 @@
% the internal command, |\@fileswithoptions|.
% \begin{macro}{\documentclass}
% \changes{v1.0q}{1995/06/19}
-% {Dont redefine \cs{usepackage} in compat mode for /1634}
+% {Don't redefine \cs{usepackage} in compat mode for /1634}
% The main new-style class declaration.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\documentclass{%
@@ -1721,15 +1881,23 @@
% {Prevent loss of brackets PR/3965}
% \changes{v2.1b}{2016/11/09}
% {Improve \cs{ifx} tests PR/4497}
+% \changes{v1.3x}{2021/02/18}{save raw class option list (gh/85)}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2017/01/01}%
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
%<latexrelease> {\@fileswith@pti@ns}{ifx tests in \@fileswith@pti@ns}%
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
\def\@fileswith@pti@ns#1[#2]#3[#4]{%
\ifx#1\@clsextension
\ifx\@classoptionslist\relax
\xdef\@classoptionslist{\zap@space#2 \@empty}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Save raw class list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\@raw@classoptionslist{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\def\reserved@a{%
\@onefilewithoptions#3[{#2}][{#4}]#1%
\@documentclasshook}%
@@ -1750,8 +1918,8 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@nnil##1\relax\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% If |\ifx\@nnil##1\n@nil| is true then |#1| is (presumably) empty
-% (Older code used |\relax| which is slighly easier to get into |#1|
+% If |\ifx\@nnil##1\@nnil| is true then |#1| is (presumably) empty
+% (Older code used |\relax| which is slightly easier to get into |#1|
% by mistake, which would spoil this test.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@nnil##1\@nnil\else
@@ -1768,6 +1936,33 @@
\fi
\reserved@a}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2017/01/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@fileswith@pti@ns}{ifx tests in \@fileswith@pti@ns}%
+%<latexrelease>\def\@fileswith@pti@ns#1[#2]#3[#4]{%
+%<latexrelease> \ifx#1\@clsextension
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\@classoptionslist\relax
+%<latexrelease> \xdef\@classoptionslist{\zap@space#2 \@empty}%
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{%
+%<latexrelease> \@onefilewithoptions#3[{#2}][{#4}]#1%
+%<latexrelease> \@documentclasshook}%
+%<latexrelease> \else
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{%
+%<latexrelease> \@onefilewithoptions#3[{#2}][{#4}]#1}%
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \else
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@b##1,{%
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\@nnil##1\relax\else
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\@nnil##1\@nnil\else
+%<latexrelease> \noexpand\@onefilewithoptions##1[{#2}][{#4}]%
+%<latexrelease> \noexpand\@pkgextension
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \expandafter\reserved@b
+%<latexrelease> \fi}%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\reserved@a{\zap@space#3 \@empty}%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\reserved@a{\expandafter\reserved@b\reserved@a,\@nnil,}%
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \reserved@a}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1834,7 +2029,7 @@
% \usepackage{some/local/path/array}
% \usepackage{array}
% \end{verbatim}
-% won't load \file{array.sty} twice. It is remotely possible that
+% won't load |array.sty| twice. It is remotely possible that
% those are two different files, but as a matter of principles, we
% will consider that the base file name uniquely identifies a
% package, regardless of where it lives. This assumption already
@@ -2087,7 +2282,7 @@
% loaded.}
%
% This has changed in 2020. We now use a separate macro per package
-% to avoid interferences in case of nested packages. The whole
+% to avoid interference in case of nested packages. The whole
% code for handling this issue (GitHub 22) was provided by Hironobu
% Yamashita, thanks for that.
% \changes{v1.3k}{2020/04/07}{Use different method to ignore
@@ -2424,7 +2619,7 @@
% \changes{v0.2r}{1993/12/19}{Different message when ignoring a file}
% \changes{v0.3g}{1994/04/11}
% {Add star form,
-% dont write \cs{endinput} at the end of the file.}
+% don't write \cs{endinput} at the end of the file.}
% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/11}
% {Add checks for form feed and tab}
% \changes{v1.0m}{1995/04/21}
@@ -2549,15 +2744,15 @@
% this only works for input files ending in \texttt{.tex}. If a
% different extension is used there is no way to see that we are
% overwriting ourselves!
+% \changes{v1.3y}{2021/03/03}
+% {Fix overwrite check for files with UTF-8 (gh/415)}
% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\reserved@a{#1}%
- \edef\reserved@a{\detokenize\expandafter{\reserved@a}}%
\edef\reserved@b{\detokenize\expandafter{\jobname}}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b%
+ \ifx\@curr@file\reserved@b%
\@fileswtrue%
\else%
\edef\reserved@b{\reserved@b\detokenize{.tex}}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b
+ \ifx\@curr@file\reserved@b
\@fileswtrue%
\fi%
\fi%
@@ -2640,7 +2835,8 @@
% Text before the |\end|, write it with a warning.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@latex@warning{Writing text `##1' before %
- \string\end{\@currenvir}\MessageBreak as last line of \@curr@file}%
+ \string\end{\@currenvir}\MessageBreak
+ as last line of \@curr@file}%
\immediate\write\reserved@c{##1}%
\fi%
\ifx\relax##2\relax%
@@ -2675,7 +2871,8 @@
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2019/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {\filec@ntents}{Spaces in file names + optional arg}%
+%<latexrelease> {\filec@ntents}{Spaces in file names + optional arg}%
+%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\def\filecontents{\@tempswatrue\@fileswtrue
%<latexrelease> \@ifnextchar[\filec@ntents@opt\filec@ntents
%<latexrelease>}
@@ -2805,7 +3002,7 @@
%<latexrelease>\endgroup%
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\filec@ntents}{Spaces in file names + optional arg}%
+%<latexrelease> {\filec@ntents}{Spaces in file names + optional arg}%
%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\let\filec@ntents@opt \@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\filec@ntents@force \@undefined
@@ -2976,7 +3173,7 @@
% YYYYMMDD (if there was one, otherwise the value of
% |\requestedLaTeXdate|) and |\pkgcls@targetlabel| will be
% empty. If there was a request for a named version then
-% |\pkgcls@targetlabel| holds the verion name and
+% |\pkgcls@targetlabel| holds the version name and
% |\pkgcls@targetdate| is set to \texttt{1}.
%
% |\pkgcls@targetdate=0| is used to indicate that there was no
@@ -3063,7 +3260,7 @@
\pkgcls@parse@date@arg{#3}%
% \end{macrocode}
% When determining the correct release to load we keep track of
-% candiates in |\pkgcls@candidate| and initially we don't have any:
+% candidates in |\pkgcls@candidate| and initially we don't have any:
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\pkgcls@candidate\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -3103,7 +3300,7 @@
%
% But if it starts with an equal sign followed by a date string or
% followed by a version name then this means that we should roll
-% back to the state of the package at tht date or to the version
+% back to the state of the package at that date or to the version
% with the requested name.
%
% If there was no optional argument or the optional argument
@@ -3381,7 +3578,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\pkgcls@show@selection}
% This command records what selection was made. As that is needed
-% in two places (and it is rather lengthly) it was placed in a
+% in two places (and it is rather lengthy) it was placed in a
% separate command. The first argument is the name of the external
% file that is being loaded and is only needed for debugging. The
% second argument is the date that corresponds to this file and it
@@ -3484,7 +3681,7 @@
\pkgcls@releasedate
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Otherwise the curent file is the right release, so we record that
+% Otherwise the current file is the right release, so we record that
% in the transcript and then carry on.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmd.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmd.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..806161d5386
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmd.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4034 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1999 Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley, David Carlisle
+% Copyright (C) 2004-2008 Frank Mittelbach, The LaTeX3 Project
+% Copyright (C) 2009-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%
+%%% From File: ltcmd.dtx
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltcmdversion{v1.0e}
+\def\ltcmddate{2021-05-24}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltcmd.dtx}
+ [\ltcmddate\space \ltcmdversion\space
+ LaTeX Kernel (Document commands)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltcmd.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley, David Carlisle, \LaTeX{} Project Team}
+\begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ \DocInput{ltcmd.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Creating document commands}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2020/11/20}{Initial version derived from \texttt{xparse.dtx}}
+%
+% Document commands should be created using the tools provided by this module:
+% \cs{NewDocumentCommand}, etc.\@, in almost all cases. This allows clean
+% separation of document-level syntax from code-level interfaces. Users have
+% a need to create new document commands, and as such a significant amount of
+% documentation for \pkg{ltcmd} is provided as part of \texttt{usrguide3}. Here,
+% additional material aimed at programmers is provided
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=cmd>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{document commands,}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0b}{2021/03/18}{Use \cs{NewModuleRelease}.}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{2021/05/24}{Use \cs{msg_...} instead of \cs{__kernel_msg...}}
+%
+%
+% \pkg{ltcmd} code contains an |^^@| character, which usually has
+% catcode~15, so \cs{IncludeInRelease} will break when this code is
+% being skipped, so we'll save the catcode of |^^@| to restore later:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\edef\@latexrelease@catcode@null{\the\catcode`\^^@ }
+%<latexrelease>\catcode`\^^@=12
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+%<latexrelease>\NewModuleRelease{2020/10/01}{ltcmd}
+%<latexrelease> {Document~command~parser}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Variables and constants}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_arg_spec_tl}
+% Holds the argument specification after normalization of shorthands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_arg_spec_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_args_tl}
+% Token list variable for grabbed arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_args_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_args_i_tl, \l_@@_args_ii_tl}
+% Hold the modified arguments when dealing with default values or
+% processors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_args_i_tl
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_args_ii_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_current_arg_int}
+% The number of the current argument being set up: this is used to
+% make sure there are at most 9 arguments, then for creating the
+% expandable auxiliary functions and knowing how many arguments the
+% code function should take.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\int_new:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_defaults_bool, \l_@@_defaults_tl}
+% The boolean indicates whether there are any argument with default
+% value other than |-NoValue-|; the token list holds the code to
+% determine these default values in terms of other arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_defaults_bool
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_defaults_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_environment_bool}
+% Generating environments uses the same mechanism as generating functions.
+% However, full processing of arguments is always needed for environments,
+% and so the function-generating code needs to know this.
+% This variable is also used at run time to give correct error messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_environment_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_environment_str}
+% Name of the environment, used at definition time and at run time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\str_new:N \l_@@_environment_str
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_expandable_bool}
+% Used to indicate if an expandable command is begin generated, as this
+% affects both the acceptable argument types and how they are implemented.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_expandable_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_expandable_aux_name_tl}
+% Used to create pretty-printing names for the auxiliaries: although the
+% immediate definition does not vary, the full expansion does and so it
+% does not count as a constant.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_expandable_aux_name_tl
+\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_expandable_aux_name_tl
+ {
+ \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl
+ ( arg~ \int_use:N \l_@@_current_arg_int )
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_grabber_int}
+% Used (in exceptional cases) to get unique names for grabbers used by
+% expandable commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\int_new:N \g_@@_grabber_int
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_fn_tl}
+% For passing the pre-formed name of the auxiliary to be used as the
+% parsing function.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_fn_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_fn_code_tl}
+% For passing the pre-formed name of the auxiliary that contains the
+% actual code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_fn_code_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_function_tl}
+% Holds the control sequence name of the function currently being
+% defined: used to avoid passing this as an argument and to avoid repeated
+% use of \cs{cs_to_str:N}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_function_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_grab_expandably_bool}
+% When defining a non-expandable command, indicates whether the
+% arguments can all safely be grabbed by expandable grabbers. This is
+% to support abuses of \pkg{xparse} that use protected functions
+% inside csname constructions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_obey_spaces_bool}
+% For trailing optionals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_last_delimiters_tl}
+% Holds the delimiters (first tokens) of all optional arguments since
+% the previous mandatory argument, to warn about cases where it would
+% be impossible to omit optional arguments completely because the
+% following mandatory argument has the same delimiter as one of the
+% optional arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_long_bool}
+% Used to indicate that an argument is long, on a per-argument basis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_long_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_m_args_int}
+% The number of \texttt{m} arguments: if this is the same as the total
+% number of arguments, then a short-cut can be taken in the creation of
+% the grabber code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\int_new:N \l_@@_m_args_int
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_prefixed_bool}
+% When preparing the signature of non-expandable commands, indicates
+% that the current argument is affected by a processor or by |+|
+% (namely is long).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_prefixed_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_process_all_tl, \l_@@_process_one_tl, \l_@@_process_some_bool}
+% When preparing the signature, the processors that will be applied to
+% a given argument are collected in \cs{l_@@_process_one_tl}, while
+% \cs{l_@@_process_all_tl} contains processors for all arguments. The
+% boolean indicates whether there are any processors (to bypass the
+% whole endeavour otherwise).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_process_all_tl
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_process_one_tl
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_process_some_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_saved_args_tl}
+% Stores \cs{l_@@_args_tl} to deal with space-trimming of
+% \texttt{b}-type arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_saved_args_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_signature_tl}
+% Used when constructing the signature (code for argument grabbing) to
+% hold what will become the implementation of the main function.
+% When arguments are grabbed (at point of use of the command/environment),
+% it also stores the code for grabbing the remaining arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_signature_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}
+% {\l_@@_some_obey_spaces_bool, \l_@@_some_long_bool, \l_@@_some_short_bool}
+% These flags are set while normalizing the argument specification.
+% The \texttt{obey_spaces} one is used to detect when |!| is used on
+% an argument that is not a trailing optional argument.
+% The other two are used to check whether all short arguments appear
+% before long arguments: this is needed to grab arguments expandably.
+% As soon as the first long argument is seen (other than
+% \texttt{t}-type, whose long status is ignored) the
+% \texttt{some_long} flag is set. The \texttt{some_short} flag is
+% used for expandable commands, to know whether to define a short
+% auxiliary too.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_some_obey_spaces_bool
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_some_long_bool
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_some_short_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_tmp_prop, \l_@@_tmpa_tl, \l_@@_tmpb_tl}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_tmp:w}
+% Scratch space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prop_new:N \l_@@_tmp_prop
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_tmpb_tl
+\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_tmp:w ?
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% With \pkg{xparse}, information about commands being (re)defined was
+% switched off by default, unless the |log-declarations| package
+% option was used, so here we'll switch that off as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_redirect_module:nnn { cmd } { info } { none }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Also add \pkg{cmd} to the \pkg{LaTeX} messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prop_gput:Nnn \g_msg_module_type_prop { cmd } { LaTeX }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Declaring commands and environments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_cmd:Nnn, \@@_declare_expandable_cmd:Nnn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_cmd_aux:Nnn}
+% \begin{macro}
+% {\@@_declare_cmd_internal:Nnnn, \@@_declare_cmd_internal:cnxn}
+% The main functions for creating commands set the appropriate flag then
+% use the same internal code to do the definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd:Nnn
+ {
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ \@@_declare_cmd_aux:Nnn
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_expandable_cmd:Nnn
+ {
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ \@@_declare_cmd_aux:Nnn
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first stage is to log information, both for the user in the log and
+% for programmatic use in a property list of all declared commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_aux:Nnn #1#2#3
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:NTF #1
+ {
+ \msg_info:nnxx { cmd } { redefine-command }
+ { \token_to_str:N #1 } { \tl_to_str:n {#2} }
+ }
+ {
+ \bool_lazy_or:nnT
+ { \cs_if_exist_p:c { \cs_to_str:N #1 ~ code } }
+ { \cs_if_exist_p:c { \cs_to_str:N #1 ~ defaults } }
+ {
+ \msg_warning:nnx { cmd } { unsupported-let }
+ { \token_to_str:N #1 }
+ }
+ \msg_info:nnxx { cmd } { define-command }
+ { \token_to_str:N #1 } { \tl_to_str:n {#2} }
+ }
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_environment_bool
+ \@@_declare_cmd_internal:Nnnn #1 {#2} {#3} { }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At definition time, the variable \cs{l_@@_fn_tl} is only used for error messages.
+% The real business of defining a document command starts with setting up
+% the appropriate name, then normalizing the argument specification to get rid of
+% shorthands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_internal:Nnnn #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_function_tl { \cs_to_str:N #1 }
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_fn_tl
+ { \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl } }
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec:n {#2}
+ \exp_args:No \@@_prepare_signature:n \l_@@_arg_spec_tl
+ \@@_declare_cmd_code:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3}
+ #4
+ \@@_break_point:n {#2}
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_declare_cmd_internal:Nnnn { cnx }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_break_point:n}
+% A marker used to escape from creating a definition if necessary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_break_point:n \use_none:n
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_cmd_code:Nnn}
+% \begin{macro}
+% {\@@_declare_cmd_code_aux:Nnn, \@@_declare_cmd_code_expandable:Nnn}
+% The appropriate auxiliary is called.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_code:Nnn
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ { \@@_declare_cmd_code_expandable:Nnn }
+ { \@@_declare_cmd_code_aux:Nnn }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Standard functions call \cs{@@_start:nNNnnn}, which receives the
+% argument specification, an auxiliary used for
+% grabbing arguments, an auxiliary containing the code, and then the
+% signature, default arguments, and processors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_code_aux:Nnn #1#2#3
+ {
+ \cs_generate_from_arg_count:cNnn
+ { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl code }
+ \cs_set_protected:Npn \l_@@_current_arg_int {#3}
+ \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npx #1
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_environment_bool
+ {
+ \@@_start_env:nnnnn { \exp_not:n {#2} }
+ { \l_@@_environment_str }
+ }
+ {
+ \@@_start:nNNnnn { \exp_not:n {#2} }
+ \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl }
+ \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl code }
+ }
+ { \exp_not:o \l_@@_signature_tl }
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_defaults_bool
+ { \exp_not:o \l_@@_defaults_tl }
+ }
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_process_some_bool
+ { \exp_not:o \l_@@_process_all_tl }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Expandable functions and functions whose arguments can be grabbed
+% expandably call \cs{@@_start_expandable:nNNNNn}, which receives the
+% argument specification, four auxiliaries (two for grabbing arguments, one for
+% the code, and one for default arguments), and finally the signature.
+% Non-expandable functions that take this branch should nevertheless
+% be protected, as well as their \texttt{code} function. They will
+% only be expanded in contexts such as constructing a csname.
+% The two grabbers (named after the function with one or two spaces)
+% are needed when there are both short and long arguments; otherwise
+% the same grabber is included twice in the definition. If all
+% arguments are long or all are short the (only) grabber is defined
+% correspondingly to be long/short. Otherwise two grabbers are
+% defined, one long, one short.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_code_expandable:Nnn #1#2#3
+ {
+ \exp_args:Ncc \cs_generate_from_arg_count:NNnn
+ { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl code }
+ { cs_set \bool_if:NF \l_@@_expandable_bool { _protected } :Npn }
+ \l_@@_current_arg_int {#3}
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_defaults_bool
+ {
+ \use:x
+ {
+ \cs_generate_from_arg_count:cNnn
+ { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl defaults }
+ \cs_set:Npn \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ { \exp_not:o \l_@@_defaults_tl }
+ }
+ }
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ { \cs_set_nopar:Npx } { \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npx } #1
+ {
+ \exp_not:N \@@_start_expandable:nNNNNn
+ { \exp_not:n {#2} }
+ \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl }
+ \exp_not:c
+ {
+ \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_some_short_bool
+ { \bool_if:NT \l_@@_some_long_bool { \c_space_tl } }
+ }
+ \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl code }
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_defaults_bool
+ { \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl defaults } }
+ { ? }
+ { \exp_not:o \l_@@_signature_tl }
+ }
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_some_long_bool
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_some_short_bool
+ {
+ \cs_set_nopar:cpx { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl \c_space_tl }
+ ##1##2 { ##1 {##2} }
+ }
+ \cs_set:cpx
+ }
+ { \cs_set_nopar:cpx }
+ { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl } ##1##2 { ##1 {##2} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_env:nnnn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_env_internal:nnnn}
+% The lead-off to creating an environment is much the same as that for
+% creating a command: issue the appropriate message, store the argument
+% specification then hand off to an internal function.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_env:nnnn #1#2
+ {
+ \str_set:Nx \l_@@_environment_str {#1}
+ \str_set:Nx \l_@@_environment_str
+ { \tl_trim_spaces:o { \l_@@_environment_str } }
+ \cs_if_exist:cTF { \l_@@_environment_str }
+ {
+ \msg_info:nnxx { cmd } { redefine-environment }
+ { \l_@@_environment_str } { \tl_to_str:n {#2} }
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_info:nnxx { cmd } { define-environment }
+ { \l_@@_environment_str } { \tl_to_str:n {#2} }
+ }
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_environment_bool
+ \exp_args:NV \@@_declare_env_internal:nnnn
+ \l_@@_environment_str {#2}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Creating a document environment requires a few more steps than creating
+% a single command. In order to pass the arguments of the command to the
+% end of the function, it is necessary to store the grabbed arguments.
+% To do that, the function used at the end of the environment has to be
+% redefined to contain the appropriate information. To minimize the amount
+% of expansion at point of use, the code here is expanded now as well as
+% when used.
+% The last argument of \cs{@@_declare_cmd_internal:Nnnn} is only run
+% if the definition succeeded. In package mode this ensures that the
+% original definition of the environment is not changed if the
+% definition fails for any reason. This also avoids an error when
+% defining the \verb*|end aux | function when the user asks for more
+% than $9$ arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_env_internal:nnnn #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \@@_declare_cmd_internal:cnxn { environment~ #1 } {#2}
+ {
+ \cs_set_nopar:Npx \exp_not:c { environment~ #1 ~end~aux }
+ {
+ \exp_not:N \exp_not:N \exp_not:c { environment~ #1~end~aux~ }
+ \exp_not:n { \exp_not:o \l_@@_args_tl }
+ }
+ \exp_not:n {#3}
+ }
+ {
+ \cs_set_nopar:cpx { environment~ #1 ~end }
+ { \exp_not:c { environment~ #1 ~end~aux } }
+ \cs_generate_from_arg_count:cNnn
+ { environment~ #1 ~end~aux~ } \cs_set:Npn
+ \l_@@_current_arg_int {#4}
+ \cs_set_eq:cc {#1} { environment~ #1 }
+ \cs_set_eq:cc { end #1 } { environment~ #1 ~end }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Structure of \pkg{xparse} commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_start_env:nnnnn, \@@_start:nNNnnn}
+% For error messages that occur during run-time when getting arguments
+% of environments it is necessary to keep track of the environment
+% name. We begin non-expandable commands with a token equal to
+% \cs{scan_stop:}, whose name gives a reasonable error message if the
+% command is used inside a csname and protects against
+% \texttt{f}-expansion. This is useless for environments since
+% \cs{begin} is already not expandable. Both the command and
+% environment codes start with \cs{group_align_safe_begin:}, then
+% \cs{@@_run_code:} (used by both) does \cs{group_align_safe_end:}, so
+% that delimited arguments may be grabbed in alignments if they
+% contain and alignment tab token (see latex3/latex3/issues/839).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_start_env:nnnnn #1#2
+ {
+ \conditionally@traceoff
+ \group_align_safe_begin:
+ \str_set:Nn \l_@@_environment_str {#2}
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_environment_bool
+ \@@_start_aux:ccnnnn
+ { environment~ \l_@@_environment_str \c_space_tl }
+ { environment~ \l_@@_environment_str \c_space_tl code }
+ {#1}
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npx \@@_start:nNNnnn #1#2#3
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { xparse~function~is~not~expandable }
+ \exp_not:N \conditionally@traceoff
+ \exp_not:N \group_align_safe_begin:
+ \exp_not:n { \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_environment_bool }
+ \exp_not:N \@@_start_aux:NNnnnn
+ #2 #3 {#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_start_aux:NNnnnn, \@@_start_aux:ccnnnn}
+% This sets up a few variables to minimize the boilerplate code
+% included in all \pkg{xparse}-defined commands. It then runs the
+% grabbers~|#4|. Again, the argument specification |#1| is only for
+% diagnostics.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_start_aux:NNnnnn #1#2#3#4#5#6
+ {
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_args_tl
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_fn_tl {#1}
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_fn_code_tl {#2}
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_defaults_tl {#5}
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_process_all_tl {#6}
+ #4 \@@_run_code:
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_start_aux:NNnnnn { cc }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_run_code:}
+% After arguments are grabbed, this function is responsible for
+% inserting default values, running processors, and finally doing
+% \cs{group_align_safe_end:} as promised, and running the code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_defaults_tl { \@@_defaults: }
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_process_all_tl { \@@_args_process: }
+ \group_align_safe_end:
+ \conditionally@traceon
+ \exp_after:wN \l_@@_fn_code_tl \l_@@_args_tl
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_defaults:}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_defaults_def:, \@@_defaults_def:nn, \@@_defaults_def:nnn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_defaults_aux:, \@@_defaults_error:w}
+% First construct \cs{@@_tmp:w} (see below) that will receive
+% the arguments found so far and determine default values for any
+% missing argument. Then call it repeatedly until the set of
+% arguments stabilizes. Since that could lead to an infinite loop we
+% only call it up to nine times, the maximal number needed for
+% stabilization if there is a chain of arguments that depend on each
+% other. If that fails to stabilize raise an error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_defaults:
+ {
+ \@@_defaults_def:
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_args_i_tl \l_@@_args_tl
+ \@@_defaults_aux: \@@_defaults_aux: \@@_defaults_aux:
+ \@@_defaults_aux: \@@_defaults_aux: \@@_defaults_aux:
+ \@@_defaults_aux: \@@_defaults_aux: \@@_defaults_aux:
+ \@@_defaults_error:w
+ \q_recursion_stop
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_args_tl \l_@@_args_i_tl
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_defaults_aux:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_args_ii_tl
+ { \exp_after:wN \@@_tmp:w \l_@@_args_i_tl }
+ \tl_if_eq:NNT \l_@@_args_ii_tl \l_@@_args_i_tl
+ { \use_none_delimit_by_q_recursion_stop:w }
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_args_i_tl \l_@@_args_ii_tl
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_defaults_error:w \q_recursion_stop
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnx { cmd } { loop-in-defaults }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To construct \cs{@@_tmp:w}, first go through the arguments
+% found and the corresponding defaults, building a token list with
+% |{#|\meta{arg number}|}| for arguments found in the input (whose
+% default will not be used) and otherwise
+% |{|\cs{exp_not:n}\Arg{default}|}| for arguments whose default will
+% be used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_defaults_def:
+ {
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ \int_zero:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \@@_tl_mapthread_function:NNN \l_@@_args_tl \l_@@_defaults_tl
+ \@@_defaults_def:nn
+ \cs_generate_from_arg_count:NNVo \@@_tmp:w \cs_set:Npn
+ \l_@@_current_arg_int \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \cs_generate_from_arg_count:NNnn { NNVo }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_defaults_def:nn
+ {
+ \int_incr:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \exp_args:NV \@@_defaults_def:nnn \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_defaults_def:nnn #1#2#3
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ {
+ {
+ \exp_not:N \exp_not:n
+ {
+ \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#2}
+ { \exp_not:o {#3} }
+ { \exp_not:n { ## #1 } }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_args_process:}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_args_process_loop:nn, \@@_args_process_aux:n}
+% Loop through arguments (stored in \cs{l_@@_args_tl}) and the
+% corresponding processors (in \cs{l_@@_process_all_tl})
+% simultaneously, apply all processors for each argument and store the
+% result back into \cs{l_@@_args_tl}. To allow processors to depend
+% on other arguments, for every processor define a temporary auxiliary
+% that receives all arguments \cs{l_@@_args_tl}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_args_process:
+ {
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_args_ii_tl
+ \@@_tl_mapthread_function:NNN
+ \l_@@_args_tl
+ \l_@@_process_all_tl
+ \@@_args_process_loop:nn
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_args_tl \l_@@_args_ii_tl
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_args_process_loop:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \ProcessedArgument {#1}
+ \tl_if_novalue:nF {#1}
+ { \tl_map_function:nN {#2} \@@_args_process_aux:n }
+ \tl_put_right:No \l_@@_args_ii_tl
+ { \exp_after:wN { \ProcessedArgument } }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_args_process_aux:n #1
+ {
+ \cs_generate_from_arg_count:NNnn \@@_tmp:w \cs_set:Npn
+ { \tl_count:N \l_@@_args_tl } {#1}
+ \exp_args:NNNo \exp_after:wN \@@_tmp:w \l_@@_args_tl
+ { \ProcessedArgument }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_start_expandable:nNNNNn}
+% This is called for all expandable commands. |#6| is the signature,
+% responsible for grabbing arguments. |#5| is used to determine
+% default values (or is |?| if there are none). |#4| is the code to run.
+% |#2|~and~|#3| are functions (named after the command) that grab a single
+% argument in the input stream (|#3|~is~short). The argument specification |#1| is
+% only used by diagnostic functions. Same as for the non-expandable
+% version, this starts with \cs{group_align_safe_begin:}, which
+% expands to nothing, so may be safely used in an expandable context.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_start_expandable:nNNNNn #1#2#3#4#5#6
+ {
+ \group_align_safe_begin:
+ #6 \@@_end_expandable:NNw #5 #4 \q_@@ #2#3
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_end_expandable:NNw}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_end_expandable_aux:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_end_expandable_aux:nNNNN}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnnNNn}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnw}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_end_expandable_defaults:nw}
+% Followed by a function |#1| to determine default values (or |?| if
+% there are no defaults), the code
+% |#2|, arguments that have been grabbed, then \cs{q_@@} and two generic
+% grabbers. The idea to find default values is similar to the
+% non-expandable case but we cannot define an auxiliary function, so
+% at every step in the loop we need to go through all arguments
+% searching for which ones started out as |-NoValue-| and replacing
+% these by the newly computed values. In fact we need to keep track
+% of three versions of all arguments: the original version, the
+% previous version with default values, and the currently built
+% version (first argument of \cs{@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnnNNn}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_end_expandable:NNw #1#2
+ { \@@_end_expandable_aux:w #1#2 \prg_do_nothing: }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_end_expandable_aux:w #1#2#3 \q_@@
+ { \exp_args:No \@@_end_expandable_aux:nNNNN {#3} #1 #2 }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_end_expandable_aux:nNNNN #1#2#3#4#5
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_charcode:NNT ? #2 { \exp_after:wN \use_iv:nnnn }
+ \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnnNNn {#1} { } {#1} #2#3
+ { } { } { } { } { } { } { } { } { } { }
+ {
+ \msg_expandable_error:nnf { cmd } { loop-in-defaults }
+ { \exp_args:Nf \tl_trim_spaces:n { \token_to_str:N #4 } }
+ \use_iv:nnnn
+ }
+ \q_stop
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnnNNn #1#2#3#4#5#6
+ {
+ #6
+ \str_if_eq:nnTF {#1} {#2}
+ { \use_i_delimit_by_q_stop:nw { \group_align_safe_end: #5 #1 } }
+ {
+ \exp_args:No \@@_tl_mapthread_function:nnN
+ { #4 #1 } {#3}
+ \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnw
+ \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnnNNn { } {#1} {#3} #4 #5
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnw #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#2}
+ { \exp_args:No \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nw {#1} }
+ { \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nw {#2} }
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nw
+ #1#2 \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnnNNn #3
+ { #2 \@@_end_expandable_defaults:nnnNNn { #3 {#1} } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Normalizing the argument specifications}
+%
+% The goal here is to expand aliases and check that the argument
+% specification is valid before the main parsing run. If it is not
+% valid the entire set up is abandoned to avoid any strange internal
+% errors. A function is provided for each argument type that will grab
+% any extra data items and call the loop function after performing the
+% following checks and tasks.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Check that each argument has the correct number of data items
+% associated with it, and that where a single character is required,
+% one has actually been supplied.
+% \item Check that processors and the markers~|+| and~|!| are followed
+% by an argument for which they make sense, and are not redundant.
+% \item Check the absence of forbidden types for expandable commands,
+% namely \texttt{G}/\texttt{v} always, and \texttt{l}/\texttt{u}
+% after optional arguments (\pkg{xparse} may have inserted braces
+% due to a failed search for an optional argument).
+% \item Check that no optional argument is followed by a mandatory
+% argument with the same delimiter, as otherwise the optional
+% argument could never be omitted.
+% \item Keep track in \cs{l_@@_some_long_bool} and
+% \cs{l_@@_some_short_bool} of whether the command has some
+% long/short arguments.
+% \item Keep track in \cs{l_@@_grab_expandably_bool} of whether all
+% arguments are \texttt{m}/\texttt{l}/\texttt{u} type and short
+% arguments appear before long ones, in which case they can be
+% grabbed expandably just as safely as they could be grabbed
+% nonexpandably. Regardless of that, arguments of expandable
+% commands will be grabbed expandably and arguments of environments
+% will not (because the list of arguments built by non-expandable
+% grabbing is used to pass them to the end-environment code).
+% \end{itemize}
+% Further checks happen at the end of the loop:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item that there are at most $9$ arguments;
+% \item that an expandable command does not end with an optional
+% argument (this case is detected by using the fact that
+% \cs{l_@@_last_delimiters_tl} is cleared by every mandatory argument
+% and filled by every optional argument).
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_normalize_arg_spec:n}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n}
+% Loop through the argument specification, calling an auxiliary
+% specific to each argument type. If any argument is unknown stop the
+% definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_arg_spec:n #1
+ {
+ \int_zero:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_arg_spec_tl
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_some_obey_spaces_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_some_long_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_some_short_bool
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n #1
+ \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_stop
+ \int_compare:nNnT \l_@@_current_arg_int > 9
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { too-many-arguments }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ {
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { expandable-ending-optional }
+ { \iow_char:N \\ \l_@@_function_tl } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ { \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_environment_bool
+ { \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n #1
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop:n {#1}
+ \int_incr:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \cs_if_exist_use:cF { @@_normalize_type_ \tl_to_str:n {#1} :w }
+ {
+ \bool_lazy_any:nTF
+ {
+ { \str_if_eq_p:nn {#1} { G } }
+ { \str_if_eq_p:nn {#1} { g } }
+ { \str_if_eq_p:nn {#1} { l } }
+ { \str_if_eq_p:nn {#1} { u } }
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { xparse-argument-type }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { unknown-argument-type }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}
+% {
+% \@@_normalize_type_d:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_e:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_o:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_O:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_r:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_s:w,
+% }
+% These argument types are aliases of more general ones, for example
+% with the default argument |-NoValue-|. To easily insert that marker
+% expanded in the definitions we call \cs{@@_tmp:w} with the argument
+% |-NoValue-|. For argument types that need additional data, check
+% that the data is present (not \cs{q_recursion_tail}) before
+% proceeding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_tmp:w #1
+ {
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_d:w ##1##2
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {##2} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \@@_normalize_type_D:w {##1} {##2} {#1}
+ }
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_e:w ##1
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {##1} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \@@_normalize_type_E:w {##1} { }
+ }
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_o:w
+ { \@@_normalize_type_D:w [ ] {#1} }
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_O:w
+ { \@@_normalize_type_D:w [ ] }
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_r:w ##1##2
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {##2} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \@@_normalize_type_R:w {##1} {##2} {#1}
+ }
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_s:w
+ { \@@_normalize_type_t:w * }
+ }
+\exp_args:No \@@_tmp:w { \c_novalue_tl }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}
+% {
+% \@@_normalize_type_>:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_+:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_!:w,
+% }
+% Check that these prefixes have arguments, namely that the next token
+% is not \cs{q_recursion_tail}, and remember to leave it after the
+% looping macro. Processors are forbidden in expandable commands.
+% If all is good, store the prefix in the cleaned up
+% \cs{l_@@_arg_spec_tl}, and decrement the argument number as prefixes
+% do not correspond to arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_normalize_type_>:w } #1#2
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {#2} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { processor-in-expandable }
+ { \iow_char:N \\ \l_@@_function_tl } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_arg_spec_tl { > { \tl_trim_spaces:n {#1} } }
+ \int_decr:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n {#2}
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_normalize_type_+:w } #1
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {#1} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_long_bool
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { two-markers }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { + }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \int_decr:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n {#1}
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_normalize_type_!:w } #1
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {#1} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { two-markers }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { ! }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_some_obey_spaces_bool
+ \int_decr:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n {#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}
+% {
+% \@@_normalize_type_D:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_E:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_t:w,
+% }
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_normalize_E_unique_check:w}
+% Optional argument types. Check that all required data is present
+% (and consists of single characters if applicable) and check for
+% forbidden types for expandable commands. For \texttt{E}-type
+% require that there is at least one embellishment, that each one is a
+% single character, and that there aren't more optional arguments than
+% embellishments; also remember that each embellishment counts as one
+% argument for \cs{l_@@_current_arg_int}. Then in each case
+% store the data in \cs{l_@@_arg_spec_tl}, and
+% for later checks store in \cs{l_@@_last_delimiters_tl} the tokens
+% whose presence determines whether there is an optional argument (for
+% braces store |{}|, seen later as an empty delimiter).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_D:w #1#2#3
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {#3} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \@@_single_token_check:n {#1} \@@_allowed_token_check:N #1
+ \@@_single_token_check:n {#2}
+ \@@_add_arg_spec:n { D #1 #2 {#3} }
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl {#1}
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_E:w #1#2
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {#2} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \tl_if_blank:nT {#1} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \tl_map_function:nN {#1} \@@_single_token_check:n
+ \tl_map_function:nN {#1} \@@_allowed_token_check:N
+ \@@_normalize_E_unique_check:w #1 \q_nil \q_stop
+ \int_compare:nNnT { \tl_count:n {#2} } > { \tl_count:n {#1} }
+ { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \@@_add_arg_spec:n { E {#1} {#2} }
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl {#1}
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ \int_add:Nn \l_@@_current_arg_int { \tl_count:n {#1} - 1 }
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_E_unique_check:w #1#2 \q_stop
+ {
+ \quark_if_nil:NF #1
+ {
+ \tl_if_in:nnT {#2} {#1} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \@@_normalize_E_unique_check:w #2 \q_stop
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_t:w #1
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:Nn #1 { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \@@_single_token_check:n {#1} \@@_allowed_token_check:N #1
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_arg_spec_tl
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool { ! }
+ t \exp_not:n {#1}
+ }
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl {#1}
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}
+% {
+% \@@_normalize_type_m:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_R:w,
+% \@@_normalize_type_v:w
+% }
+% Mandatory arguments. First check the required data is present,
+% consists of single characters where applicable, and that the argument
+% type is allowed for expandable commands if applicable. For the
+% \texttt{m} and \texttt{R} argument types check that they do not
+% follow some optional argument with that delimiter as otherwise the
+% optional argument could not be omitted. Then save data in
+% \cs{l_@@_arg_spec_tl}, count the mandatory argument, and empty the
+% list of last delimiters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_m:w
+ {
+ \@@_delimiter_check:nnn { } { m } { \iow_char:N \{ }
+ \@@_add_arg_spec_mandatory:n { m }
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_R:w #1#2#3
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {#3} { \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn }
+ \@@_single_token_check:n {#1} \@@_allowed_token_check:N #1
+ \@@_single_token_check:n {#2}
+ \@@_delimiter_check:nnn {#1} { R/r } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ \@@_add_arg_spec_mandatory:n { R #1 #2 {#3} }
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_v:w
+ {
+ \@@_normalize_check_gv:N v
+ \@@_add_arg_spec_mandatory:n { v }
+ \@@_normalize_arg_spec_loop:n
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_normalize_type_b:w}
+% This argument type is not allowed for commands. This is only
+% allowed at the end of the argument specification, hence we check
+% that |#1| is the end.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_type_b:w #1
+ {
+ \bool_if:NF \l_@@_environment_bool
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { invalid-command-arg }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { b }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl
+ \@@_add_arg_spec:n { b }
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop:n {#1}
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { arg-after-body }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_single_token_check:n}
+% Checks that the argument is a single (non-space) token (possibly
+% surrounded by spaces), and aborts the definition otherwise.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_single_token_check:n #1
+ {
+ \tl_trim_spaces_apply:nN {#1} \tl_if_single_token:nF
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { not-single-token }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_allowed_token_check:N}
+% Some tokens are now allowed as delimiters for some argument types,
+% notably implicit begin/end-group tokens (|\bgroup|/|\egroup|).
+% The major problem with these tokens is that for |\peek_...| functions,
+% a literal~|{|$_1$. is virtually indistinguishable from a |\bgroup| or
+% other token which was |\let| to a~|{|$_1$, and the same goes
+% for~|}|$_2$. All other tokens can be easily distingushed from their
+% implicit counterparts by grabbing them and looking at the string
+% length (see \cs{@@_token_if_cs:NTF}), but for begin/end group tokens
+% that is not possible without the risk of mistakenly grabbing the
+% entire brace group (potentially leading to a~\texttt{!~Runaway argument}
+% error) or trying to grab a |}|$_2$, leading to
+% an~\verb|! Argument of \dots has an extra }| error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_allowed_token_check:N #1
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_meaning:NNTF #1 \c_group_begin_token
+ { \use:n }
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_meaning:NNTF #1 \c_group_end_token
+ { \use:n }
+ { \use_none:n }
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxxx { cmd } { forbidden-implicit-group-token }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_meaning:NNTF #1 \c_group_begin_token
+ { begin } { end }
+ }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_normalize_check_gv:N, \@@_normalize_check_lu:N}
+% Called for arguments that are always forbidden, or forbidden after
+% an optional argument, for expandable commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_check_gv:N #1
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { invalid-expandable-argument-type }
+ { \iow_char:N \\ \l_@@_function_tl } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_normalize_check_lu:N #1
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ {
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { invalid-after-optional-expandably }
+ { \iow_char:N \\ \l_@@_function_tl } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_delimiter_check:nnn}
+% Called for \texttt{m} and \texttt{R} arguments. Checks that the
+% leading token does not coincide with the token denoting the presence
+% of a previous optional argument. Instead of dealing with braces for
+% the \texttt{m}-type we use an empty delimiter to denote that case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_delimiter_check:nnn #1#2#3
+ {
+ \tl_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl
+ {
+ \tl_if_eq:nnT {##1} {#1}
+ {
+ \msg_warning:nnxx { cmd } { optional-mandatory }
+ {#2} {#3}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_bad_arg_spec:wn, \@@_bad_def:wn}
+% If the argument specification is wrong, this provides an escape from
+% the entire definition process.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_bad_arg_spec:wn #1 \@@_break_point:n #2
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { bad-arg-spec }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { \tl_to_str:n {#2} }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_bad_def:wn #1 \@@_break_point:n #2 { }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_arg_spec:n, \@@_add_arg_spec_mandatory:n}
+% When adding an argument to the argument specification, set the
+% \texttt{some_long} or \texttt{some_short} booleans as appropriate
+% and clear the booleans keeping track of |+| and |!| markers.
+% Before that, test for a short argument following some long
+% arguments: this is forbidden for expandable commands and prevents
+% grabbing arguments expandably.
+%
+% For mandatory arguments do some more work, in particular complain if
+% they were preceeded by~|!|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_arg_spec:n #1
+ {
+ \bool_lazy_and:nnT
+ { ! \l_@@_long_bool }
+ { \l_@@_some_long_bool }
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_expandable_bool
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnx { cmd } { inconsistent-long }
+ { \iow_char:N \\ \l_@@_function_tl }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool
+ }
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_long_bool
+ { \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_some_long_bool }
+ { \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_some_short_bool }
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_arg_spec_tl
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_long_bool { + }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool { ! }
+ \exp_not:n {#1}
+ }
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_arg_spec_mandatory:n #1
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_some_obey_spaces_bool
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { non-trailing-obey-spaces }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_bad_def:wn
+ }
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl
+ \@@_add_arg_spec:n {#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Preparing the signature: general mechanism}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_prepare_signature:n}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_prepare_signature:N}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_prepare_signature_bypass:N}
+% Actually creating the signature uses the same loop approach as
+% normalizing the signature. There are first a number of variables which need
+% to be set to track what is going on. Many of these variables are unused
+% when defining expandable commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_prepare_signature:n #1
+ {
+ \int_zero:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+ \int_zero:N \l_@@_m_args_int
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_defaults_bool
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_defaults_tl
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_process_all_tl
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_process_one_tl
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_process_some_bool
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_signature_tl
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N #1 \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_stop
+ \bool_if:NF \l_@@_expandable_bool { \@@_flush_m_args: }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The main looping function does not take an argument, but carries out the
+% reset on the processor boolean. This is split off from the rest of the
+% process so that when actually setting up processors the flag-reset can
+% be bypassed.
+%
+% For each known argument type there is an appropriate function to actually
+% do the addition to the signature. These are separate for expandable and
+% standard functions, as the approaches are different.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ {
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_prefixed_bool
+ \@@_prepare_signature_bypass:N
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_prepare_signature_bypass:N #1
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop:N #1
+ \use:c
+ {
+ @@_add
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool { _expandable }
+ _type_ \token_to_str:N #1 :w
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Setting up a standard signature}
+%
+% Each argument-adding function appends to the signature a grabber (and
+% for some types, the delimiters or default value), except the one for
+% \texttt{m} arguments. These are collected and added to the signature
+% all at once by \cs{@@_flush_m_args:}, called for every other argument
+% type. All of the functions then call the loop function
+% \cs{@@_prepare_signature:N}. Default values of arguments are
+% collected by \cs{@@_add_default:n} rather than being stored with the
+% argument; this function and \cs{@@_add_default:} are also responsible
+% for keeping track of \cs{l_@@_current_arg_int}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_+:w}
+% Making the next argument long means setting the flag. The \texttt{m}
+% arguments are recorded here as
+% this has to be done for every case where there is then a long argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_add_type_+:w }
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_prefixed_bool
+ \@@_prepare_signature_bypass:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_!:w}
+% Much the same for controlling trailing optional arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_add_type_!:w }
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_prefixed_bool
+ \@@_prepare_signature_bypass:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_>:w}
+% When a processor is found, the processor code is stored. It will be
+% used by \cs{@@_args_process:} once arguments are all found. Here too
+% the loop calls \cs{@@_prepare_signature_bypass:N} rather than
+% \cs{@@_prepare_signature:N} so that the flag is not reset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_add_type_>:w } #1
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_prefixed_bool
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_process_some_bool
+ \tl_put_left:Nn \l_@@_process_one_tl { {#1} }
+ \@@_prepare_signature_bypass:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_b:w}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_type_b:w
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \@@_add_default:
+ \@@_add_grabber:N b
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_D:w}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_type_D:w #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \@@_add_default:n {#3}
+ \@@_add_grabber:N D
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl { #1 #2 }
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_E:w}
+% The \texttt{E}-type argument needs a special handling of default
+% values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_type_E:w #1#2
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \@@_add_default_E:nn {#1} {#2}
+ \@@_add_grabber:N E
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl { {#1} }
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_m:w}
+% The \texttt{m} type is special as short arguments which are not
+% post-processed are simply counted at this stage. Thus there is a check
+% to see if either of these cases apply. If so, a one-argument grabber
+% is added to the signature. On the other hand, if a standard short
+% argument is required it is simply counted at this stage, to be
+% added later using \cs{@@_flush_m_args:}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_type_m:w
+ {
+ \@@_add_default:
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_prefixed_bool
+ { \@@_add_grabber:N m }
+ { \int_incr:N \l_@@_m_args_int }
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_R:w}
+% The \texttt{R}-type argument is very similar to the \texttt{D}-type.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_type_R:w #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \@@_add_default:n {#3}
+ \@@_add_grabber:N R
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl { #1 #2 }
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_t:w}
+% Setting up a \texttt{t} argument means collecting one token for the test,
+% and adding it along with the grabber to the signature.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_type_t:w #1
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \@@_add_default:
+ \@@_add_grabber:N t
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_type_v:w}
+% At this stage, the \texttt{v} argument is identical to \texttt{l}
+% except that since the grabber may fail to read a verbatim argument
+% we need a default value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_type_v:w
+ {
+ \@@_flush_m_args:
+ \exp_args:No \@@_add_default:n \c_novalue_tl
+ \@@_add_grabber:N v
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_flush_m_args:}
+% As \texttt{m} arguments are simply counted, there is a need to add
+% them to the token register in a block. As this function can only
+% be called if something other than \texttt{m} turns up, the flag can
+% be switched here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_flush_m_args:
+ {
+ \int_compare:nNnT \l_@@_m_args_int > 0
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_signature_tl
+ { \exp_not:c { @@_grab_m_ \int_use:N \l_@@_m_args_int :w } }
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_process_all_tl
+ { \prg_replicate:nn { \l_@@_m_args_int } { { } } }
+ }
+ \int_zero:N \l_@@_m_args_int
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_grabber:N}
+% To keep the various checks needed in one place, adding the grabber
+% to the signature is done here. The only questions are whether the
+% grabber should be long or not, and whether to obey spaces. The
+% \cs{l_@@_obey_spaces_bool} boolean can only be \texttt{true} for
+% trailing optional arguments. In that case spaces will not be
+% ignored when looking for that optional argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_grabber:N #1
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_signature_tl
+ {
+ \exp_not:c
+ {
+ @@_grab_ #1
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_long_bool { _long }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool { _obey_spaces }
+ :w
+ }
+ }
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_process_all_tl
+ { { \exp_not:o \l_@@_process_one_tl } }
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_process_one_tl
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_default:n, \@@_add_default:, \@@_add_default_E:nn}
+% Store the default value of an argument, or rather code that gives
+% that default value (it may involve other arguments). This is
+% \cs{c_novalue_tl} for arguments with no actual default or with
+% default |-NoValue-|; and (in a brace group) \cs{prg_do_nothing:}
+% followed by a default value for others. For \texttt{E}-type
+% arguments, pad the defaults |#2| with some \cs{c_novalue_tl}
+% until there are as many as embellishments~|#1|. These functions are
+% also used when defining expandable commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_default:n #1
+ {
+ \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#1}
+ { \@@_add_default: }
+ {
+ \int_incr:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_defaults_bool
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_defaults_tl { { \prg_do_nothing: #1 } }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_default:
+ {
+ \int_incr:N \l_@@_current_arg_int
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_defaults_tl { \c_novalue_tl }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_default_E:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_map_function:nN {#2} \@@_add_default:n
+ \prg_replicate:nn
+ { \tl_count:n {#1} - \tl_count:n {#2} }
+ { \@@_add_default: }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Setting up expandable types}
+%
+% The approach here is not dissimilar to that for standard types, but fewer types
+% are supported. There is
+% also a need to define the per-function auxiliaries: this is done here, while
+% the general grabbers are dealt with later.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_+:w}
+% We have already checked that short arguments are before long
+% arguments, so \cs{l_@@_long_bool} only changes from \texttt{false}
+% to \texttt{true} once (and there is no need to reset it after each
+% argument). Also knock back the argument count because |+| is not an
+% argument. Continue the loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_add_expandable_type_+:w }
+ {
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_D:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NNNn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NNN}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NN}
+% The set up for \texttt{D}-type arguments involves constructing a
+% rather complex auxiliary which is used
+% repeatedly when grabbing. There is an auxiliary here so that the
+% \texttt{R}-type can share code readily: |#1| is |D| or~|R|.
+% The |_aux:NN| auxiliary is needed if the two delimiting tokens are
+% identical: in contrast to the non-expandable route, the grabber here
+% has to act differently for this case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_D:w
+ { \@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NNNn D }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NNNn #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \@@_add_default:n {#4}
+ \tl_if_eq:nnTF {#2} {#3}
+ { \@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NN #1 #2 }
+ { \@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NNN #1 #2 #3 }
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NNN #1#2#3
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_long_bool
+ { \cs_set:cpx }
+ { \cs_set_nopar:cpx }
+ { \l_@@_expandable_aux_name_tl } ##1 ##2 #2 ##3 \q_@@ ##4 #3
+ { ##1 {##2} {##3} {##4} }
+ \@@_add_expandable_grabber:nn {#1}
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { \l_@@_expandable_aux_name_tl }
+ \exp_not:n { #2 #3 }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NN #1#2
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_long_bool
+ { \cs_set:cpx }
+ { \cs_set_nopar:cpx }
+ { \l_@@_expandable_aux_name_tl } ##1 #2 ##2 #2
+ { ##1 {##2} }
+ \@@_add_expandable_grabber:nn { #1_alt }
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { \l_@@_expandable_aux_name_tl }
+ \exp_not:n {#2}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_E:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_E_aux:n}
+% For each embellishment, use \cs{@@_get_grabber:NN} to obtain an
+% auxiliary delimited by that token and store a pair constituted of
+% the auxiliary and the token in \cs{l_@@_tmpb_tl}, before appending
+% the whole set of these pairs to the signature, and an equal number
+% of |-NoValue-| markers (regardless of the default values of
+% arguments). Set the current argument appropriately.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_E:w #1#2
+ {
+ \@@_add_default_E:nn {#1} {#2}
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_tmpb_tl
+ \tl_map_function:nN {#1} \@@_add_expandable_type_E_aux:n
+ \@@_add_expandable_grabber:nn
+ { E \bool_if:NT \l_@@_long_bool { _long } }
+ {
+ { \exp_not:o \l_@@_tmpb_tl }
+ {
+ \prg_replicate:nn { \tl_count:n {#1} }
+ { { \c_novalue_tl } }
+ }
+ }
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_E_aux:n #1
+ {
+ \@@_get_grabber:NN #1 \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_tmpb_tl
+ { \exp_not:o \l_@@_tmpa_tl \exp_not:N #1 }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_m:w}
+% Unlike the standard case, when working expandably each argument is always
+% grabbed separately.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_m:w
+ {
+ \@@_add_default:
+ \@@_add_expandable_grabber:nn
+ { m \bool_if:NT \l_@@_long_bool { _long } } { }
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_R:w}
+% The \texttt{R}-type is very similar to the \texttt{D}-type
+% argument, and so the same internals are used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_R:w
+ { \@@_add_expandable_type_D_aux:NNNn R }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_type_t:w}
+% An auxiliary delimited by |#1| is built now. It will be used to
+% test for the presence of that token.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_type_t:w #1
+ {
+ \@@_add_default:
+ \@@_get_grabber:NN #1 \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ \@@_add_expandable_grabber:nn { t }
+ {
+ \exp_not:o \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ \exp_not:N #1
+ }
+ \@@_prepare_signature:N
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_expandable_grabber:nn}
+% This is called for all arguments to place the right grabber in the
+% signature.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_expandable_grabber:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_signature_tl
+ { \exp_not:c { @@_expandable_grab_ #1 :w } #2 }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_grabber:NN}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_grabber_auxi:NN}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_grabber_auxii:NN}
+% Given a token |#1|, defines an expandable function delimited by that
+% token and stores it in the token list~|#2|. The function is named
+% after the token, unless that function name is already taken by some
+% other grabber (this can happen in the rare case where delimiters
+% with different category codes are used in the same document): in
+% that case use a global counter to get a unique name. Since the
+% grabbers are not named after \pkg{xparse} commands they should not
+% be used to get material from the input stream.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_grabber:NN #1#2
+ {
+ \cs_set:Npn \@@_tmp:w ##1 #1 {##1}
+ \exp_args:Nc \@@_get_grabber_auxi:NN
+ { @@_grabber_ \token_to_str:N #1 :w } #2
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_grabber_auxi:NN #1#2
+ {
+ \cs_if_eq:NNTF \@@_tmp:w #1
+ { \tl_set:Nn #2 {#1} }
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:NTF #1
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g_@@_grabber_int
+ \exp_args:Nc \@@_get_grabber_auxi:NN
+ {
+ @@_grabber_
+ - \int_use:N \g_@@_grabber_int :w
+ }
+ #2
+ }
+ { \@@_get_grabber_auxii:NN #1 #2 }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_grabber_auxii:NN #1#2
+ {
+ \cs_set_eq:NN #1 \@@_tmp:w
+ \tl_set:Nn #2 {#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Grabbing arguments}
+%
+% All of the grabbers follow the same basic pattern. The initial
+% function stores in \cs{l_@@_signature_tl} the code to grab further
+% arguments, defines (the function in) \cs{l_@@_fn_tl} that will grab
+% the argument, and calls it.
+%
+% Defining \cs{l_@@_fn_tl} means determining whether to use
+% \cs{cs_set:Npn} or \cs{cs_set_nopar:Npn}, and for optional arguments
+% whether to skip spaces. Once the argument is found, \cs{l_@@_fn_tl}
+% calls \cs{@@_add_arg:n}, responsible for calling processors and
+% grabbing further arguments.
+%
+% \begin{macro}
+% {
+% \@@_grab_b:w,
+% \@@_grab_b_long:w,
+% \@@_grab_b_obey_spaces:w,
+% \@@_grab_b_long_obey_spaces:w,
+% \@@_grab_b_aux:NNw,
+% \@@_grab_b_end:Nw
+% }
+% This uses the well-tested code of \texttt{D}-type arguments,
+% skipping the peeking step because the \texttt{b}-type argument is
+% always present, and adding a cleanup stage at the end by hijacking
+% the signature. The clean-up consists of properly
+% dealing with \cs{l_@@_args_tl} and also putting back the \cs{end}
+% that served as an end-delimiter: this \cs{end} receives the
+% environment name as its argument and is run normally. The
+% \texttt{D}-type code stores the argument found (body of the
+% environment) as a brace group in \cs{l_@@_args_tl} and depending on
+% the presence of a prefix~|!| we trim spaces or not before adding
+% this braced argument into the saved \cs{l_@@_args_tl}.
+% The strange \verb*|\begin | control sequence is there for display
+% purposes only: it has to look like |\begin| in the terminal but
+% not to delimited arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_b:w
+ { \@@_grab_b_aux:NNw \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npn \tl_trim_spaces:n }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_b_long:w
+ { \@@_grab_b_aux:NNw \cs_set_protected:Npn \tl_trim_spaces:n }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_b_obey_spaces:w
+ { \@@_grab_b_aux:NNw \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npn \exp_not:n }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_b_long_obey_spaces:w
+ { \@@_grab_b_aux:NNw \cs_set_protected:Npn \exp_not:n }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_b_aux:NNw #1#2#3 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnN \begin \end {#3} #1
+ \tl_put_left:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl { \@@_grab_b_end:Nw #2 }
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_saved_args_tl \l_@@_args_tl
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_args_tl
+ \exp_args:Nc \l_@@_fn_tl { begin ~ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_b_end:Nw #1#2 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_args_tl
+ {
+ \exp_not:V \l_@@_saved_args_tl
+ { \exp_after:wN #1 \l_@@_args_tl }
+ }
+ #2
+ \@@_run_code:
+ \end
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D_long:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D_obey_spaces:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D_long_obey_spaces:w}
+% The generic delimited argument grabber. The auxiliary function does
+% a peek test before calling \cs{@@_grab_D_call:Nw}, so that the
+% optional nature of the argument works as expected.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_D:w #1#2#3 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnNN #1 #2 {#3} \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npn
+ \@@_peek_nonspace_remove:NTF
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_D_long:w #1#2#3 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnNN #1 #2 {#3} \cs_set_protected:Npn
+ \@@_peek_nonspace_remove:NTF
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_D_obey_spaces:w #1#2#3 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnNN #1 #2 {#3} \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npn
+ \@@_peek_meaning_remove:NTF
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_D_long_obey_spaces:w #1#2#3 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnNN #1 #2 {#3} \cs_set_protected:Npn
+ \@@_peek_meaning_remove:NTF
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D_aux:NNnNN}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D_aux:NNnN}
+% This is a bit complicated. The idea is that, in order to check for
+% nested optional argument tokens (\texttt{[[...]]} and so on) the
+% argument needs to be grabbed without removing any braces at all. If
+% this is not done, then cases like |[{[}]| fail. So after testing for
+% an optional argument, it is collected piece-wise. Inserting a quark
+% prevents loss of braces, and there is then a test to see if there are
+% nested delimiters to handle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnNN #1#2#3#4#5
+ {
+ \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnN #1#2 {#3} #4
+ #5 #1
+ { \@@_grab_D_call:Nw #1 }
+ { \@@_add_arg:o \c_novalue_tl }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Inside the \enquote{standard} grabber, there is a test to see if the
+% grabbed argument is entirely enclosed by braces. There are a couple of
+% extra factors to allow for: the argument might be entirely empty, and
+% spaces at the start and end of the input must be retained around a brace
+% group. Also notice that a \emph{blank} argument might still contain
+% spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnN #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#3}
+ \exp_after:wN #4 \l_@@_fn_tl ##1 #2
+ {
+ \tl_if_in:nnTF {##1} {#1}
+ { \@@_grab_D_nested:NNnN #1 #2 {##1} #4 }
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:oTF { \use_none:n ##1 }
+ { \@@_add_arg:o { \use_none:n ##1 } }
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:eeTF
+ { \exp_not:o { \use_none:n ##1 } }
+ { { \exp_not:o { \use_ii:nnn ##1 \q_nil } } }
+ { \@@_add_arg:o { \use_ii:nn ##1 } }
+ { \@@_add_arg:o { \use_none:n ##1 } }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D_nested:NNnN}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D_nested:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_nesting_a_tl}
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_nesting_b_tl}
+% \begin{macro}{\q_@@}
+% Catching nested optional arguments means more work. The aim here is
+% to collect up each pair of optional tokens without \TeX{} helping out,
+% and without counting anything. The code above will already have
+% removed the leading opening token and a closing token, but the
+% wrong one. The aim is then to work through the material grabbed
+% so far and divide it up on each opening token, grabbing a closing
+% token to match (thus working in pairs). Once there are no opening
+% tokens, then there is a second check to see if there are any
+% opening tokens in the second part of the argument (for things
+% like |[][]|). Once everything has been found, the entire collected
+% material is added to the output as a single argument. The only tricky part
+% here is ensuring that any grabbing function that might run away is named
+% after the function currently being parsed and not after \pkg{xparse}. That
+% leads to some rather complex nesting! There is also a need to prevent the
+% loss of any braces, hence the insertion and removal of quarks along the
+% way.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_nesting_a_tl
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_nesting_b_tl
+\quark_new:N \q_@@
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_D_nested:NNnN #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_nesting_a_tl
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_nesting_b_tl
+ \exp_after:wN #4 \l_@@_fn_tl ##1 #1 ##2 \q_@@ ##3 #2
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:No \l_@@_nesting_a_tl { \use_none:n ##1 #1 }
+ \tl_put_right:No \l_@@_nesting_b_tl { \use_i:nn #2 ##3 }
+ \tl_if_in:nnTF {##2} {#1}
+ {
+ \l_@@_fn_tl
+ \q_nil ##2 \q_@@ \ERROR
+ }
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_nesting_a_tl
+ { \@@_grab_D_nested:w \q_nil ##2 \q_stop }
+ \tl_if_in:NnTF \l_@@_nesting_b_tl {#1}
+ {
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_tmpa_tl \l_@@_nesting_b_tl
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_nesting_b_tl
+ \exp_after:wN \l_@@_fn_tl \exp_after:wN
+ \q_nil \l_@@_tmpa_tl \q_nil \q_@@ \ERROR
+ }
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:No \l_@@_nesting_a_tl
+ \l_@@_nesting_b_tl
+ \@@_add_arg:V \l_@@_nesting_a_tl
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ \l_@@_fn_tl #3 \q_nil \q_@@ \ERROR
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_grab_D_nested:w #1 \q_nil \q_stop
+ { \exp_not:o { \use_none:n #1 } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_D_call:Nw}
+% For \texttt{D} and \texttt{R}-type arguments, to avoid losing any
+% braces, a token needs to be inserted before the argument to be grabbed.
+% If the argument runs away because the closing token is missing then this
+% inserted token shows up in the terminal. Ideally, |#1| would therefore be
+% used directly, but that is no good as it will mess up the rest of the
+% grabber. Instead, a copy of |#1| with an altered category code is used,
+% as this will look right in the terminal but will not mess up the grabber.
+% The only issue then is that the category code of |#1| is unknown. So there
+% is a quick test to ensure that the inserted token can never be matched by
+% the grabber. (This assumes that the open and close delimiters are not the
+% same character with different category codes, but that really should not
+% happen in any sensible document-level syntax.)
+% An exception is when |#1| is a control sequence token, in which case the
+% character-token treatment is no good because if hit with \cs{token_to_str:N}
+% it would add sputios tokens to the argument. In this case a different
+% branch is taken. The token inserted is then the same \meta{csname} as |#1|,
+% but with a space appended, so that the grabber don't see it as another
+% of the same delimiter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected_nopar:Npn \@@_grab_D_call:Nw #1
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_catcode:NNTF + #1
+ {
+ \exp_after:wN \exp_after:wN \exp_after:wN
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \char_generate:nn { `#1 } { 11 }
+ }
+ {
+ \@@_token_if_cs:NTF #1
+ {
+ \exp_after:wN \l_@@_fn_tl
+ \cs:w \cs_to_str:N #1 ~ \cs_end:
+ }
+ {
+ \exp_after:wN \l_@@_fn_tl
+ \token_to_str:N #1
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}
+% {
+% \@@_grab_E:w, \@@_grab_E_long:w,
+% \@@_grab_E_obey_spaces:w, \@@_grab_E_long_obey_spaces:w
+% }
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_E:nnNN}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_E_loop:NnN}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_E_finalise:}
+% Everything here needs to point to a loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_E:w #1#2 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_E:nnNN {#1} {#2}
+ \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npn
+ \@@_peek_nonspace_remove:NTF
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_E_long:w #1#2 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_E:nnNN {#1} {#2}
+ \cs_set_protected:Npn
+ \@@_peek_nonspace_remove:NTF
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_E_obey_spaces:w #1#2 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_E:nnNN {#1} {#2}
+ \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npn
+ \@@_peek_meaning_remove:NTF
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_E_long_obey_spaces:w #1#2 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_E:nnNN {#1} {#2}
+ \cs_set_protected:Npn
+ \@@_peek_meaning_remove:NTF
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A loop is needed here to allow a random ordering of keys. These are
+% searched for one at a time, with any not found needing to be tracked:
+% they can appear later. The grabbed values are held in a property list
+% which is then turned into an ordered list to be passed back to the user.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_E:nnNN #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \exp_after:wN #3 \l_@@_fn_tl ##1##2##3
+ {
+ \prop_put:Nnn \l_@@_tmp_prop {##1} {##3}
+ \@@_grab_E_loop:NnN #4 { } ##2 \q_recursion_stop
+ }
+ \prop_clear:N \l_@@_tmp_prop
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#2}
+ \cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_grab_E_finalise:
+ {
+ \tl_map_inline:nn {#1}
+ {
+ \prop_get:NnNF \l_@@_tmp_prop {####1} \l_@@_tmpb_tl
+ { \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_tmpb_tl \c_novalue_tl }
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_args_tl
+ { { \exp_not:V \l_@@_tmpb_tl } }
+ }
+ \l_@@_signature_tl \@@_run_code:
+ }
+ \@@_grab_E_loop:NnN #4 { } #1 \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_stop
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_E_loop:NnN #1#2#3#4 \q_recursion_stop
+ {
+ \cs_if_eq:NNTF #3 \q_recursion_tail
+ { \@@_grab_E_finalise: }
+ {
+ #1 #3
+ { \l_@@_fn_tl #3 {#2#4} }
+ { \@@_grab_E_loop:NnN #1 {#2#3} #4 \q_recursion_stop }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_E_finalise: { }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_long:w}
+% Collecting a single mandatory argument is quite easy.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_m:w #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npn \l_@@_fn_tl ##1
+ { \@@_add_arg:n {##1} }
+ \l_@@_fn_tl
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_m_long:w #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_protected:Npn \l_@@_fn_tl ##1
+ { \@@_add_arg:n {##1} }
+ \l_@@_fn_tl
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_1:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_2:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_3:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_4:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_5:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_6:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_7:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_8:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_9:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn}
+% Grabbing 1--8 mandatory arguments is done by giving 8--1 known
+% arguments to a 9-argument function that stores them in
+% \cs{l_@@_args_tl}. For simplicity, grabbing 9 mandatory arguments
+% is done by grabbing 5 then 4 arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected_nopar:Npn \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn #1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8#9
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:No \l_@@_args_tl
+ { #1 {#2} {#3} {#4} {#5} {#6} {#7} {#8} {#9} }
+ \l_@@_signature_tl \@@_run_code:
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_grab_m_1:w } #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_eq:NN \l_@@_fn_tl \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \use_none:nnnnnnn { } { } { } { } { } { } { }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_grab_m_2:w } #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_eq:NN \l_@@_fn_tl \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \use_none:nnnnnn { } { } { } { } { } { }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_grab_m_3:w } #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_eq:NN \l_@@_fn_tl \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \use_none:nnnnn { } { } { } { } { }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_grab_m_4:w } #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_eq:NN \l_@@_fn_tl \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \use_none:nnnn { } { } { } { }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_grab_m_5:w } #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_eq:NN \l_@@_fn_tl \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \use_none:nnn { } { } { }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_grab_m_6:w } #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_eq:NN \l_@@_fn_tl \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \use_none:nn { } { }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_grab_m_7:w } #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_eq:NN \l_@@_fn_tl \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \use_none:n { }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_grab_m_8:w } #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_eq:NN \l_@@_fn_tl \@@_grab_m_aux:Nnnnnnnnn
+ \l_@@_fn_tl \prg_do_nothing:
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:cpx { @@_grab_m_9:w }
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { @@_grab_m_5:w }
+ \exp_not:c { @@_grab_m_4:w }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_R:w, \@@_grab_R_long:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_R_aux:NNnN}
+% The grabber for \texttt{R}-type arguments is basically the same as
+% that for \texttt{D}-type ones, but always skips spaces (as it is mandatory)
+% and has a hard-coded error message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_R:w #1#2#3 \@@_run_code:
+ { \@@_grab_R_aux:NNnN #1 #2 {#3} \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npn }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_R_long:w #1#2#3 \@@_run_code:
+ { \@@_grab_R_aux:NNnN #1 #2 {#3} \cs_set_protected:Npn }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_R_aux:NNnN #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \@@_grab_D_aux:NNnN #1 #2 {#3} #4
+ \@@_peek_nonspace_remove:NTF #1
+ { \@@_grab_D_call:Nw #1 }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { missing-required }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: }
+ { \token_to_str:N #1 }
+ \@@_add_arg:o \c_novalue_tl
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_t:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_t_obey_spaces:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_t_aux:NNw}
+% Dealing with a token is quite easy. Check the match, remove the
+% token if needed and add a flag to the output.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_t:w
+ { \@@_grab_t_aux:NNw \@@_peek_nonspace_remove:NTF }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_t_obey_spaces:w
+ { \@@_grab_t_aux:NNw \@@_peek_meaning_remove:NTF }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_t_aux:NNw #1#2#3 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#3}
+ \exp_after:wN \cs_set_protected:Npn \l_@@_fn_tl
+ {
+ #1 #2
+ { \@@_add_arg:n { \BooleanTrue } }
+ { \@@_add_arg:n { \BooleanFalse } }
+ }
+ \l_@@_fn_tl
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_v_arg_tl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_v_arg_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_long:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_aux:w}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_group_end:}
+% The opening delimiter is the first non-space token, and is never
+% read verbatim. This is required by consistency with the case where
+% the preceding argument was optional and absent: then \TeX{} has
+% already read and tokenized that token when looking for the optional
+% argument. The first thing is thus to check is that this delimiter
+% is a character, and to distinguish the case of a left brace (in that
+% case, \cs{group_align_safe_end:} is needed to compensate for the
+% begin-group character that was just seen). Then set verbatim
+% catcodes with \cs{@@_grab_v_aux_catcodes:}.
+%
+% The group keep catcode changes local, and
+% \cs{group_align_safe_begin/end:} allow to use a character
+% with category code~$4$ (normally |&|) as the delimiter (all commands
+% do \cs{group_align_safe_begin/end:}, so there's no need to do that
+% again here).
+% It is ended by \cs{@@_grab_v_group_end:}, which smuggles
+% the collected argument out of the group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v:w
+ {
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \@@_grab_v_aux:w
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_long:w
+ {
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_long_bool
+ \@@_grab_v_aux:w
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux:w #1 \@@_run_code:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_signature_tl {#1}
+ \group_begin:
+ \tex_escapechar:D = 92 \scan_stop:
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_v_arg_tl
+ \peek_remove_spaces:n
+ {
+ \peek_meaning_remove:NTF \c_group_begin_token
+ {
+ \group_align_safe_end:
+ \@@_grab_v_bgroup:
+ }
+ {
+ \peek_N_type:TF
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_test:N }
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n { } }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_group_end:
+ {
+ \exp_args:NNNo
+ \group_end:
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_v_arg_tl { \l_@@_v_arg_tl }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_aux_test:N}
+% \begin{macro}
+% {
+% \@@_grab_v_aux_loop:N,
+% \@@_grab_v_aux_loop:NN,
+% \@@_grab_v_aux_loop_end:
+% }
+% Check that the opening delimiter is a character, setup category codes,
+% then start reading tokens one by one, keeping the delimiter as an argument.
+% If the verbatim was not nested, we will be grabbing one character
+% at each step. Unfortunately, it can happen that what follows the
+% verbatim argument is already tokenized. Thus, we check at each step
+% that the next token is indeed a \enquote{nice}
+% character, \emph{i.e.}, is not a character with
+% category code $1$ (begin-group), $2$ (end-group)
+% or $6$ (macro parameter), nor the space character,
+% with category code~$10$ and character code~$32$,
+% nor a control sequence.
+% The partially built argument is stored in \cs{l_@@_v_arg_tl}.
+% If we ever meet a token which we cannot grab (non-N-type),
+% or which is not a character according to
+% \cs{@@_grab_v_token_if_char:NTF}, then we bail out with
+% \cs{@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n}. Otherwise, we stop at the first
+% character matching the delimiter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_test:N #1
+ {
+ \@@_grab_v_token_if_char:NTF #1
+ {
+ \@@_grab_v_aux_put:N #1
+ \@@_grab_v_aux_catcodes:
+ \@@_grab_v_aux_loop:N #1
+ }
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n {#1} #1 }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_loop:N #1
+ {
+ \peek_N_type:TF
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_loop:NN #1 }
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n { } }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_loop:NN #1#2
+ {
+ \@@_grab_v_token_if_char:NTF #2
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_charcode:NNTF #1 #2
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_loop_end: }
+ {
+ \@@_grab_v_aux_put:N #2
+ \@@_grab_v_aux_loop:N #1
+ }
+ }
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n {#2} #2 }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_loop_end:
+ {
+ \@@_grab_v_group_end:
+ \@@_add_arg:x { \tl_tail:N \l_@@_v_arg_tl }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_v_nesting_int}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\int_new:N \l_@@_v_nesting_int
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_bgroup:}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_bgroup_loop:}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_bgroup_loop:N}
+% If the opening delimiter is a left brace, we keep track of
+% how many left and right braces were encountered so far in
+% \cs{l_@@_v_nesting_int} (the methods used for optional
+% arguments cannot apply here), and stop as soon as it reaches~$0$.
+%
+% Some care was needed when removing the opening delimiter, which
+% has already been assigned category code~$1$: using
+% \cs{peek_meaning_remove:NTF} in the \cs{@@_grab_v_aux:w}
+% function would break within alignments. Instead, we first
+% convert that token to a string, and remove the result as a
+% normal undelimited argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npx \@@_grab_v_bgroup:
+ {
+ \exp_not:N \@@_grab_v_aux_catcodes:
+ \exp_not:n { \int_set:Nn \l_@@_v_nesting_int { 1 } }
+ \exp_not:N \@@_grab_v_aux_put:N \iow_char:N \{
+ \exp_not:N \@@_grab_v_bgroup_loop:
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_bgroup_loop:
+ {
+ \peek_N_type:TF
+ { \@@_grab_v_bgroup_loop:N }
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n { } }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_bgroup_loop:N #1
+ {
+ \@@_grab_v_token_if_char:NTF #1
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_charcode:NNTF \c_group_end_token #1
+ {
+ \int_decr:N \l_@@_v_nesting_int
+ \int_compare:nNnTF \l_@@_v_nesting_int > 0
+ {
+ \@@_grab_v_aux_put:N #1
+ \@@_grab_v_bgroup_loop:
+ }
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_loop_end: }
+ }
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_charcode:NNT \c_group_begin_token #1
+ { \int_incr:N \l_@@_v_nesting_int }
+ \@@_grab_v_aux_put:N #1
+ \@@_grab_v_bgroup_loop:
+ }
+ }
+ { \@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n {#1} #1 }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_aux_catcodes:}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n}
+% The approach for short verbatim arguments is to make the end-line
+% character a macro parameter character: this is forbidden by the
+% rest of the code. Then the error branch can check what caused the
+% bail out and give the appropriate error message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_catcodes:
+ {
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \do \char_set_catcode_other:N
+ \dospecials
+ \tex_endlinechar:D = `\^^M \scan_stop:
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_long_bool
+ { \char_set_catcode_other:n { \tex_endlinechar:D } }
+ { \char_set_catcode_parameter:n { \tex_endlinechar:D } }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_abort:n #1
+ {
+ \@@_grab_v_group_end:
+ \exp_after:wN \exp_after:wN \exp_after:wN
+ \peek_meaning_remove:NTF \char_generate:nn { \tex_endlinechar:D } { 6 }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxxx { cmd } { verbatim-newline }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: }
+ { \tl_to_str:N \l_@@_v_arg_tl }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_add_arg:o \c_novalue_tl
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxxx { cmd } { verbatim-tokenized }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: }
+ { \tl_to_str:N \l_@@_v_arg_tl }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \@@_add_arg:o \c_novalue_tl
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_aux_put:N}
+% Storing one token in the collected argument. Most tokens are
+% converted to category code $12$, with the exception of active
+% characters, and spaces (not sure what should be done for those).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_put:N #1
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_v_arg_tl
+ {
+ \token_if_active:NTF #1
+ { \exp_not:N #1 } { \token_to_str:N #1 }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_token_if_char:NTF}
+% This function assumes that the escape character is printable.
+% Then the string representation of control sequences is at least
+% two characters, and \cs{str_tail:n} only removes the escape
+% character. Macro parameter characters are doubled by
+% \cs{tl_to_str:n}, and will also yield a non-empty result,
+% hence are not considered as characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_token_if_char:NTF #1
+ { \str_if_eq:eeTF { } { \str_tail:n {#1} } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_arg:n, \@@_add_arg:V, \@@_add_arg:o, \@@_add_arg:x}
+% When an argument is found it is stored, then further arguments are
+% grabbed by calling \cs{l_@@_signature_tl}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_add_arg:n #1
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_args_tl { {#1} }
+ \l_@@_signature_tl \@@_run_code:
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_add_arg:n { V , o , x }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Grabbing arguments expandably}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_D:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNn}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNnnn}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_D:Nw}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_D:nnNNNwNN}
+% The first step is to grab the first token or group. The generic grabbers
+% \cs{\meta{function}}\verb*| | and \cs{\meta{function}}\verb*| | are just after \cs{q_@@}, we go and find
+% them (and use the long one).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_D:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { #2 { \@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNn #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We then wish to test whether |#7|, which we just grabbed, is exactly |#2|.
+% A preliminary test is whether their string representations coincide, then
+% expand the only grabber function we have, |#1|, once: the two strings below
+% are equal if and only if |#7| matches |#2| exactly.\footnote{It is obvious
+% that if \texttt{\#7} matches \texttt{\#2} then the strings are equal. We
+% must check the converse. The right-hand-side of \cs{str_if_eq:onTF} does
+% not end with \texttt{\#3}, implying that the grabber function took
+% everything as its arguments. The first brace group can only be empty if
+% \texttt{\#7} starts with \texttt{\#2}, otherwise the brace group preceding
+% \texttt{\#7} would not vanish. The third brace group is empty, thus the
+% \cs{q_@@} that was used by our grabber \texttt{\#1} must be the one
+% that we inserted (not some token in \texttt{\#7}), hence the second brace
+% group contains the end of \texttt{\#7} followed by \texttt{\#2}. Since this
+% is \texttt{\#2} on the right-hand-side, and no brace can be lost there,
+% \texttt{\#7} must contain nothing else than its leading \texttt{\#2}.}
+% The preliminary test is needed as |#7| could validly contain
+% \tn{par} (because a later mandatory argument could be long) and our
+% grabber may be short. If
+% |#7| does not match |#2|, then the optional argument is missing, we use the
+% default |-NoValue-|, and put back the argument |#7| in the input stream.
+%
+% If it does match, then interesting things need to be done. We will grab the
+% argument piece by piece, with the following pattern:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \meta{grabber} \Arg{tokens} \\
+% ~~\cs{q_nil} \Arg{piece 1} \meta{piece 2} \cs{ERROR} \cs{q_@@}\\
+% ~~\cs{q_nil} \meta{input stream}
+% \end{quote}
+% The \meta{grabber} will find an opening delimiter in \meta{piece 2}, take
+% the \cs{q_@@} as a second delimiter, and find more material delimited
+% by the closing delimiter in the \meta{input stream}. We then move the part
+% before the opening delimiter from \meta{piece 2} to \meta{piece 1}, and the
+% material taken from the \meta{input stream} to the \meta{piece 2}. Thus,
+% the argument moves gradually from the \meta{input stream} to the
+% \meta{piece 2}, then to the \meta{piece 1} when we have made sure to find
+% all opening and closing delimiters. This two-step process ensures that
+% nesting works: the number of opening delimiters minus closing delimiters in
+% \meta{piece 1} is always equal to the number of closing delimiters in
+% \meta{piece 2}. We stop grabbing arguments once the \meta{piece 2} contains
+% no opening delimiter any more, hence the balance is reached, and the final
+% argument is \meta{piece 1} \meta{piece 2}.
+% The indirection via \cs{@@_tmp:w} allows to insert |-NoValue-| expanded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_tmp:w #1
+ {
+ \cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNn ##1##2##3##4 \q_@@ ##5##6##7
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:nnTF {##2} {##7}
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:onTF
+ { ##1 { } { } ##7 ##2 \q_@@ ##3 }
+ { { } {##2} { } }
+ }
+ { \use_ii:nn }
+ {
+ ##1
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNnnn ##1##2##3##4 \q_@@ ##5##6 }
+ \q_nil { } ##2 \ERROR \q_@@ \ERROR
+ }
+ { ##4 {#1} \q_@@ ##5 ##6 {##7} }
+ }
+ }
+\exp_args:No \@@_tmp:w { \c_novalue_tl }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this stage, |#7| is \cs{q_nil} \Arg{piece 1} \meta{more for piece 1},
+% and we want to concatenate all that, removing \cs{q_nil}, and keeping the
+% opening delimiter |#2|. Simply use \cs{use_ii:nn}. Also, |#8| is
+% \meta{remainder of piece 2} \cs{ERROR}, and |#9| is \cs{ERROR} \meta{more
+% for piece 2}. We concatenate those, replacing the two \cs{ERROR} by the
+% closing delimiter |#3|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNnnn #1#2#3#4 \q_@@ #5#6#7#8#9
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nof \@@_expandable_grab_D:nnNNNwNN
+ { \use_ii:nn #7 #2 }
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_D:Nw #3 \exp_stop_f: #8 #9 }
+ #1#2#3 #4 \q_@@ #5 #6
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_D:Nw #1#2 \ERROR \ERROR { #2 #1 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Armed with our two new \meta{pieces}, we are ready to loop. However, we
+% must first see if \meta{piece 2} (here |#2|) contains any opening
+% delimiter |#4|. Again, we expand |#3|, this time removing its whole output
+% with \cs{use_none:nnn}. The test is similar to \cs{tl_if_in:nnTF}. The
+% token list is empty if and only if |#2| does not contain the opening
+% delimiter. In that case, we are done, and put the argument (from which we
+% remove a spurious pair of delimiters coming from how we started the loop).
+% Otherwise, we go back to looping with
+% \cs{@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNnnn}. The code to deal with brace stripping
+% is much the same as for the non-expandable case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_D:nnNNNwNN #1#2#3#4#5#6 \q_@@ #7#8
+ {
+ \exp_args:No \tl_if_empty:oTF
+ { #3 { \use_none:nnn } #2 \q_@@ #5 #4 \q_@@ #5 }
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:oTF { \use_none:nn #1#2 }
+ { \@@_put_arg_expandable:ow { \use_none:nn #1#2 } }
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:eeTF
+ { \exp_not:o { \use_none:nn #1#2 } }
+ { { \exp_not:o { \use_iii:nnnn #1#2 \q_nil } } }
+ { \@@_put_arg_expandable:ow { \use_iii:nnn #1#2 } }
+ { \@@_put_arg_expandable:ow { \use_none:nn #1#2 } }
+ }
+ #6 \q_@@ #7 #8
+ }
+ {
+ #3
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNnnn #3#4#5#6 \q_@@ #7 #8 }
+ \q_nil {#1} #2 \ERROR \q_@@ \ERROR
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:NNwNNn}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:Nwn}
+% When the delimiters are identical, nesting is not possible and a simplified
+% approach is used. The test concept here is the same as for the case where
+% the delimiters are different but there cannot be any nesting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { #2 { \@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:NNwNNn #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 } }
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_tmp:w #1
+ {
+ \cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:NNwNNn ##1##2##3 \q_@@ ##4##5##6
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:nnTF {##6} {##2}
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:onTF
+ { ##1 { } ##6 ##2 ##2 }
+ { { } ##2 }
+ }
+ { \use_ii:nn }
+ {
+ ##1
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:NNwn ##4 ##5 ##3 \q_@@ }
+ ##6 \ERROR
+ }
+ { ##3 {#1} \q_@@ ##4 ##5 {##6} }
+ }
+ }
+\exp_args:No \@@_tmp:w { \c_novalue_tl }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:NNwn #1#2#3 \q_@@ #4
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:oTF { \use_none:n #4 }
+ { \@@_put_arg_expandable:ow { \use_none:n #4 } }
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:eeTF
+ { \exp_not:o { \use_none:n #4 } }
+ { { \exp_not:o { \use_ii:nnn #4 \q_nil } } }
+ { \@@_put_arg_expandable:ow { \use_ii:nn #4 } }
+ { \@@_put_arg_expandable:ow { \use_none:n #4 } }
+ }
+ #3 \q_@@ #1 #2
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_E:w, \@@_expandable_grab_E_long:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_E_aux:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_E_test:nnw}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_E_loop:nnnNNw}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_E_find:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_E_find:nnw}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_E_end:nnw}
+% We keep track of long/short by placing the appropriate grabber as
+% the third token after \cs{q_@@}; it is eventually removed by the
+% \texttt{end:nnw} auxiliary. The \texttt{aux:w} auxiliary will be
+% called repeatedly with two arguments: the set
+% of pairs \meta{parser} \meta{token}, and the set of arguments found
+% so far (initially all |{-NoValue-}|). At each step, grab what
+% follows in the input stream then call the \texttt{loop:nnnNNw}
+% auxiliary to compare it with each possible embellishment in turn.
+% This auxiliary's |#1| is what was found in the input, |#2| collects
+% \meta{parser} \meta{token} pairs that did not match, |#3| collects
+% the corresponding arguments found previously, |#4| and |#5| is the
+% current pair, |#6| is the remaining pairs, |#7| is empty or two
+% \cs{q_nil}, and |#8| is the current argument. If none of the pairs
+% matched (determined by \cs{quark_if_nil:NTF}) then call the
+% \texttt{end} auxiliary to stop looking for embellishments,
+% remembering to put what was grabbed in the input back where it
+% belongs, and storing the arguments found just before \cs{q_@@}. If
+% the current argument |#8| is not |-NoValue-| or if the input |#1|
+% does not match |#5| (see \texttt{t}-type arguments below for a
+% similar \cs{str_if_eq:onTF} test) then carry on the loop.
+% Otherwise, we found a new embellishment: grab the corresponding
+% argument in the input using the \texttt{find:w} auxiliary. To avoid
+% losing braces around that auxiliary's argument we include a
+% space, which will be eliminated in the next loop through
+% embellishments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_E:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_E_aux:w #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 #3 }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_E_long:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_E_aux:w #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 #2 }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_E_aux:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3#4
+ { #2 { \@@_expandable_grab_E_test:nnw #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 #4 } }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_E_test:nnw #1#2#3 \q_@@ #4#5#6#7
+ {
+ \@@_expandable_grab_E_loop:nnnNNw {#7} { } { }
+ #1 \q_nil \q_nil \q_nil \q_mark #2 \q_nil
+ #3 \q_@@ #4 #5 #6
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_E_loop:nnnNNw
+ #1#2#3#4#5#6 \q_nil #7 \q_mark #8
+ {
+ \quark_if_nil:NTF #4
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_E_end:nnw {#1} {#3} }
+ {
+ \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#8}
+ { \str_if_eq:onTF { #4 { } #1 #5 } {#5} }
+ { \use_ii:nn }
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_E_find:w { #2 #4 #5 #6 } {#3} ~ }
+ {
+ \@@_expandable_grab_E_loop:nnnNNw
+ {#1} { #2 #4 #5 } { #3 {#8} }
+ #6 \q_nil #7 \q_mark
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_E_find:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3#4
+ { #4 { \@@_expandable_grab_E_find:nnw #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 #4 } }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_E_find:nnw #1#2#3 \q_nil #4 \q_@@ #5#6#7#8
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_E_aux:w {#1} { #2 {#8} #3 } #4 \q_@@ #5 #6 #7 }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_E_end:nnw #1#2#3 \q_@@ #4#5#6
+ { #3 #2 \q_@@ #4 #5 {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_m:w, \@@_expandable_grab_m_long:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_m_aux:wNn}
+% The mandatory case is easy: find the auxiliary after the \cs{q_@@},
+% and use it directly to grab the argument, then correctly position
+% the argument before \cs{q_@@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_m:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { #3 { \@@_expandable_grab_m_aux:wNn #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 } }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_m_long:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { #2 { \@@_expandable_grab_m_aux:wNn #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 } }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_m_aux:wNn #1 \q_@@ #2#3#4
+ { #1 {#4} \q_@@ #2 #3 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_R:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_R_aux:NNNwNNn}
+% Much the same as for the \texttt{D}-type argument, with only the lead-off
+% function varying.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_R:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { #2 { \@@_expandable_grab_R_aux:NNNwNNn #1 \q_@@ #2#3 } }
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_tmp:w #1
+ {
+ \cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_R_aux:NNNwNNn ##1##2##3##4 \q_@@ ##5##6##7
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:nnTF {##7} {##2}
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:onTF
+ { ##1 { } { } ##7 ##2 \q_@@ ##3 }
+ { { } {##2} { } }
+ }
+ { \use_ii:nn }
+ {
+ ##1
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_D:NNNwNNnnn ##1##2##3##4 \q_@@ ##5##6 }
+ \q_nil { } ##2 \ERROR \q_@@ \ERROR
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_expandable_error:nnff { cmd } { missing-required }
+ { \exp_args:Nf \tl_trim_spaces:n { \token_to_str:N ##5 } }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {##2} }
+ ##4 {#1} \q_@@ ##5 ##6 {##7}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\exp_args:No \@@_tmp:w { \c_novalue_tl }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_R_alt:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_R_alt_aux:NNwNNn}
+% When the delimiters are identical, nesting is not possible and a simplified
+% approach is used. The test concept here is the same as for the case where
+% the delimiters are different.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_R_alt:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { #2 { \@@_expandable_grab_R_alt_aux:NNwNNn #1 \q_@@ #2#3 } }
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_tmp:w #1
+ {
+ \cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_R_alt_aux:NNwNNn ##1##2##3 \q_@@ ##4##5##6
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:nnTF {##6} {##2}
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:onTF
+ { ##1 { } ##6 ##2 ##2 }
+ { { } ##2 }
+ }
+ { \use_ii:nn }
+ {
+ ##1
+ { \@@_expandable_grab_D_alt:NNwn ##4 ##5 ##3 \q_@@ }
+ ##6 \ERROR
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_expandable_error:nnff { cmd } { missing-required }
+ { \exp_args:Nf \tl_trim_spaces:n { \token_to_str:N ##4 } }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {##2} }
+ ##3 {#1} \q_@@ ##4 ##5 {##6}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\exp_args:No \@@_tmp:w { \c_novalue_tl }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_t:w}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_expandable_grab_t_aux:NNwn}
+% As for a \texttt{D}-type argument, here we compare the grabbed tokens using
+% the only parser we have in order to work out if |#2| is exactly equal to
+% the output of the grabber.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_t:w #1 \q_@@ #2#3
+ { #2 { \@@_expandable_grab_t_aux:NNwn #1 \q_@@ #2 #3 } }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_expandable_grab_t_aux:NNwn #1#2#3 \q_@@ #4#5#6
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:onTF { #1 { } #6 #2 } {#2}
+ { #3 { \BooleanTrue } \q_@@ #4 #5 }
+ { #3 { \BooleanFalse } \q_@@ #4 #5 {#6} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]
+% {\@@_put_arg_expandable:nw, \@@_put_arg_expandable:ow}
+% A useful helper, to store arguments when they are ready.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_put_arg_expandable:nw #1#2 \q_@@ { #2 {#1} \q_@@ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_put_arg_expandable:nw { o }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Argument processors}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_bool_reverse:N}
+% A simple reversal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_bool_reverse:N #1
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF #1
+ { \tl_set:Nn \ProcessedArgument { \c_false_bool } }
+ { \tl_set:Nn \ProcessedArgument { \c_true_bool } }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_split_list_seq, \l_@@_split_list_tl}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_list:nn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_list_multi:nn, \@@_split_list_multi:nV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_list_single:Nn}
+% Splitting can take place either at a single token or at a longer
+% identifier. To deal with single active tokens, a two-part procedure is
+% needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\seq_new:N \l_@@_split_list_seq
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_split_list_tl
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_split_list:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_if_single:nTF {#1}
+ {
+ \token_if_cs:NTF #1
+ { \@@_split_list_multi:nn {#1} {#2} }
+ { \@@_split_list_single:Nn #1 {#2} }
+ }
+ { \@@_split_list_multi:nn {#1} {#2} }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_split_list_multi:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \seq_set_split:Nnn \l_@@_split_list_seq {#1} {#2}
+ \tl_clear:N \ProcessedArgument
+ \seq_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_split_list_seq
+ { \tl_put_right:Nn \ProcessedArgument { {##1} } }
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_split_list_multi:nn { nV }
+\group_begin:
+\char_set_catcode_active:N \^^@
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_split_list_single:Nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_split_list_tl {#2}
+ \group_begin:
+ \char_set_lccode:nn { `\^^@ } { `#1 }
+ \tex_lowercase:D
+ {
+ \group_end:
+ \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l_@@_split_list_tl { ^^@ }
+ } {#1}
+ \@@_split_list_multi:nV {#1} \l_@@_split_list_tl
+ }
+\group_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_argument:nnn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_argument_aux:nnnn}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_split_argument_aux:n}
+% \begin{macro}[rEXP]{\@@_split_argument_aux:wn}
+% Splitting to a known number of items is a special version of splitting
+% a list, in which the limit is hard-coded and where there will always be
+% exactly the correct number of output items. An auxiliary function is
+% used to save on working out the token list length several times.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_split_argument:nnn #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_split_list:nn {#2} {#3}
+ \exp_args:Nf \@@_split_argument_aux:nnnn
+ { \tl_count:N \ProcessedArgument }
+ {#1} {#2} {#3}
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_split_argument_aux:nnnn #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \int_compare:nNnF {#1} = { #2 + 1 }
+ {
+ \int_compare:nNnTF {#1} > { #2 + 1 }
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nx \ProcessedArgument
+ {
+ \exp_last_unbraced:NnNo
+ \@@_split_argument_aux:n
+ { #2 + 1 }
+ \use_none_delimit_by_q_stop:w
+ \ProcessedArgument
+ \q_stop
+ }
+ \msg_error:nnxxx { cmd } { split-excess-tokens }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {#3} } { \int_eval:n { #2 + 1 } }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {#4} }
+ }
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nx \ProcessedArgument
+ {
+ \prg_replicate:nn { #2 + 1 - (#1) }
+ { { \exp_not:V \c_novalue_tl } }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Auxiliaries to leave exactly the correct number of arguments in
+% \cs{ProcessedArgument}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_argument_aux:n #1
+ { \prg_replicate:nn {#1} { \@@_split_argument_aux:wn } }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_argument_aux:wn #1 \use_none_delimit_by_q_stop:w #2
+ {
+ \exp_not:n { {#2} }
+ #1
+ \use_none_delimit_by_q_stop:w
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_trim_spaces:n}
+% This one is almost trivial.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_trim_spaces:n #1
+ { \tl_set:Nx \ProcessedArgument { \tl_trim_spaces:n {#1} } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Access to the argument specification}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_arg_spec_error:N, \@@_get_arg_spec_error:n}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_arg_spec_error_aux:n}
+% Provide an informative error when trying to get the argument
+% specification of a non-\pkg{xparse} command or environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_arg_spec_error:N #1
+ {
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_environment_bool
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_fn_tl {#1}
+ \@@_get_arg_spec_error_aux:n { \cs_if_exist:NTF #1 }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_arg_spec_error:n #1
+ {
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_environment_bool
+ \str_set:Nx \l_@@_environment_str {#1}
+ \@@_get_arg_spec_error_aux:n
+ { \cs_if_exist:cTF { \l_@@_environment_str } }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_arg_spec_error_aux:n #1
+ {
+ #1
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnx { cmd } { non-xparse }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: }
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnx { cmd } { unknown }
+ { \@@_environment_or_command: }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_arg_spec:NTF}
+% If the command is not an \pkg{xparse} command, complain. If it is,
+% its second \enquote{item} is the argument specification.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_arg_spec:NTF #1#2#3
+ {
+ \__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF #1
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nx \ArgumentSpecification { \tl_item:Nn #1 { 2 } }
+ #2
+ }
+ {#3}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Rolling forward from 2020-10-01 is tricky because the entire |ltcmd|
+% module is new, but the user-level commands have the same name, so only
+% these will clash. To work around that, in |latexrelease| mode we will
+% (temporarily) disable \cs{__kernel_chk_if_free_cs:N} for this final
+% part of the code, then restore at the end.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_chk_if_free_cs:N \__kernel_chk_if_free_cs:N
+%<latexrelease>\cs_gset_eq:NN \__kernel_chk_if_free_cs:N \use_none:n
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\ArgumentSpecification}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \ArgumentSpecification
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_arg_spec:N}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_arg_spec:n}
+% Recovering the argument specification is now trivial.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_arg_spec:N #1
+ {
+ \@@_get_arg_spec:NTF #1 { }
+ { \@@_get_arg_spec_error:N #1 }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_arg_spec:n #1
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nc \@@_get_arg_spec:NTF
+ { environment~ \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ { }
+ { \@@_get_arg_spec_error:n {#1} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_show_arg_spec:N}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_show_arg_spec:n}
+% Showing the argument specification simply means finding it and then
+% calling the \cs{tl_show:N} function.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_arg_spec:N #1
+ {
+ \@@_get_arg_spec:NTF #1
+ { \tl_show:N \ArgumentSpecification }
+ { \@@_get_arg_spec_error:N #1 }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_arg_spec:n #1
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nc \@@_get_arg_spec:NTF
+ { environment~ \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ { \tl_show:N \ArgumentSpecification }
+ { \@@_get_arg_spec_error:n {#1} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Utilities}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_check_definable:nNT, \@@_check_definable_aux:nN}
+% Check that a token list is appropriate as a first argument of
+% \cs{NewDocumentCommand} and similar functions and otherwise
+% produce an error. First trim whitespace to allow for spaces around
+% the actual command to be defined. If the result has multiple
+% tokens, it is not a valid argument. The single token is a control
+% sequence exactly if its string representation has more than one
+% character (using \cs{token_to_str:N} rather than \cs{tl_to_str:n}
+% to avoid problems with macro parameter characters, and setting
+% \cs{tex_escapechar:D} to prevent it from being non-printable).
+% Finally, check for an active character: this is done by lowercasing
+% the token to fix its character code (arbitrarily to that of~|?|)
+% and comparing the result to an active~|?|. Both control sequences
+% and active characters are valid arguments, and non-active character
+% tokens are not. In all cases, the group opened to keep assignments
+% local must be closed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_check_definable:nNT #1
+ { \tl_trim_spaces_apply:nN {#1} \@@_check_definable_aux:nN }
+\group_begin:
+ \char_set_catcode_active:n { `? }
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_check_definable_aux:nN #1#2
+ {
+ \group_begin:
+ \tl_if_single_token:nTF {#1}
+ {
+ \int_set:Nn \tex_escapechar:D { 92 }
+ \exp_args:Nx \tl_if_empty:nTF
+ { \exp_args:No \str_tail:n { \token_to_str:N #1 } }
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nx \char_set_lccode:nn
+ { ` \str_head:n {#1} } { `? }
+ \tex_lowercase:D { \tl_if_eq:nnTF {#1} } { ? }
+ { \group_end: \use_iii:nnn }
+ { \group_end: \use_i:nnn }
+ }
+ { \group_end: \use_iii:nnn }
+ }
+ { \group_end: \use_ii:nnn }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { not-definable }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {#1} } { \token_to_str:N #2 }
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { not-one-token }
+ { \tl_to_str:n {#1} } { \token_to_str:N #2 }
+ }
+ }
+\group_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_token_if_cs:NTF}
+% Based on the definition of \cs{@@_check_definable_aux:nN} above, but
+% only checks for an actual control sequence (\emph{i.e.},
+% \cs[no-index]{\meta{anything}}). \cs{tex_escapechar:D} is
+% temporarily changed to a known value and then it checks if
+% |\string#1| contains more than one character: if it does, it's a
+% control sequence. This test differs from \cs{token_if_cs:NTF} for
+% example in \verb|\token_if_cs:NTF \c_group_begin_token {T}{F}|,
+% where \cs{token_if_cs:NTF} returns false.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_token_if_cs:NTF #1
+ {
+ \group_begin:
+ \int_set:Nn \tex_escapechar:D { 92 }
+ \exp_args:Nx \tl_if_empty:nTF
+ { \exp_args:No \str_tail:n { \token_to_str:N #1 } }
+ { \group_end: \use_ii:nn }
+ { \group_end: \use_i:nn }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_tl_mapthread_function:NNN, \@@_tl_mapthread_function:nnN}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_tl_mapthread_loop:w}
+% Analogue of \cs{seq_mapthread_function:NNN} for token lists.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_tl_mapthread_function:NNN #1#2#3
+ {
+ \exp_after:wN \exp_after:wN
+ \exp_after:wN \@@_tl_mapthread_loop:w
+ \exp_after:wN \exp_after:wN
+ \exp_after:wN #3
+ \exp_after:wN #1
+ \exp_after:wN \q_recursion_tail
+ \exp_after:wN \q_mark
+ #2
+ \q_recursion_tail
+ \q_recursion_stop
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_tl_mapthread_function:nnN #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_tl_mapthread_loop:w #3
+ #1 \q_recursion_tail \q_mark
+ #2 \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_stop
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_tl_mapthread_loop:w #1#2#3 \q_mark #4
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop:n {#2}
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop:n {#4}
+ #1 {#2} {#4}
+ \@@_tl_mapthread_loop:w #1#3 \q_mark
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{2021/04/19}{Renamed \cs{__cmd_cmd_if_xparse:NTF} to
+% \cs{__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF} for cross-module usage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_cmd_if_xparse_aux:N}
+%
+% To determine whether the command is an \pkg{xparse} command check
+% that its |arg_spec| is empty (this also excludes non-macros) and
+% that its |replacement_spec| starts with either
+% \cs{@@_start:nNNnnn} (non-expandable command) or
+% \cs{@@_start_expandable:nNNNNn} (expandable command) or
+% \cs{@@_start_env:nnnnn} (environment).
+%
+% This conditional is needed in several kernel modules and is
+% therefore has a kernel-internal name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF #1
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nf \str_case_e:nnTF
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nf \tl_if_empty:nT { \cs_argument_spec:N #1 }
+ {
+ \exp_last_unbraced:Nf \@@_cmd_if_xparse_aux:w
+ { \cs_replacement_spec:N #1 } ~ \q_stop
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ { \token_to_str:N \@@_start:nNNnnn } { }
+ { \token_to_str:N \@@_start_expandable:nNNNNn } { }
+ { \token_to_str:N \@@_start_env:nnnnn } { }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_cmd_if_xparse_aux:w #1 ~ #2 \q_stop {#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_peek_nonspace:NTF, \@@_peek_nonspace_remove:NTF, \@@_peek_nonspace_aux:nNNTF}
+% Collect spaces in a loop, and put the collected spaces back in the
+% false branch of a call to \cs{peek_meaning:NTF} or
+% \cs{peek_meaning_remove:NTF}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_peek_nonspace:NTF
+ { \@@_peek_nonspace_aux:nNNTF { } \@@_peek_meaning:NTF }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_peek_nonspace_remove:NTF
+ { \@@_peek_nonspace_aux:nNNTF { } \@@_peek_meaning_remove:NTF }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_peek_nonspace_aux:nNNTF #1#2#3#4#5
+ {
+ \peek_meaning_remove:NTF \c_space_token
+ { \@@_peek_nonspace_aux:nNNTF { #1 ~ } #2 #3 {#4} {#5} }
+ { #2 #3 { #4 } { #5 #1 } }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_peek_meaning:NTF, \@@_peek_meaning_remove:NTF}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_peek_cs_check_equal:NNN, \@@_peek_meaning_aux:NNTF, \@@_peek_true_remove:NNw}
+% Peek ahead for a token with a given meaning. In case the search
+% token is a control sequence, also check that the \meta{csname} is
+% the same as the control sequence peeked at. This extra verification
+% is necessary when the command is delimited by control sequence tokens
+% (as opposed to character tokens), and we want the the exact same
+% control sequence to match.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_peek_meaning:NTF
+ { \@@_peek_meaning_aux:NNTF \c_false_bool }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_peek_meaning_remove:NTF
+ { \@@_peek_meaning_aux:NNTF \c_true_bool }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_peek_meaning_aux:NNTF #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_tmpa_tl {#3}
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_tmpb_tl {#4}
+ \peek_meaning:NTF #2
+ {
+ \token_if_eq_meaning:NNTF #2 \c_group_begin_token
+ { \@@_peek_true_remove:Nw #1 }
+ {
+ \@@_token_if_cs:NTF #2
+ { \@@_peek_cs_check_equal:NNN #1 #2 }
+ { \@@_peek_true_remove:Nw #1 }
+ }
+ }
+ { \l_@@_tmpb_tl }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_peek_cs_check_equal:NNN #1#2#3
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:nnTF {#2} {#3}
+ { \@@_peek_true_remove:Nw #1 }
+ { \l_@@_tmpb_tl }
+ #3
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_peek_true_remove:Nw #1
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF #1
+ {
+ \tex_afterassignment:D \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_tmp:w
+ }
+ { \l_@@_tmpa_tl }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Messages}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\c_@@_ignore_def_tl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ { \\ \\ LaTeX~will~ignore~this~entire~definition. }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_environment_or_command:}
+% Two texts used in several messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_environment_or_command:
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_environment_bool
+ { environment ~ ' \l_@@_environment_str ' }
+ {
+ command ~ '
+ \exp_args:Nf \tl_trim_spaces:n
+ { \exp_after:wN \token_to_str:N \l_@@_fn_tl }
+ '
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Some messages intended as errors when defining commands/environments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { arg-after-body }
+ { In~the~definition~of~#1,~b~(body)~argument~must~be~last. }
+ {
+ The~'body'~argument~type~is~followed~by~'#2'~in~the~argument~
+ specification~of~the~#1.~This~is~not~allowed.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { bad-arg-spec }
+ { Bad~argument~specification~'#2'~for~#1. }
+ {
+ The~argument~specification~provided~was~not~valid:~
+ one~or~more~mandatory~pieces~of~information~were~missing.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { command-already-defined }
+ { Command~'#1'~already~defined! }
+ {
+ You~have~used~#2~
+ with~a~command~that~already~has~a~definition. \\ \\
+ The~existing~definition~of~'#1'~will~not~be~altered.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { command-not-yet-defined }
+ { Command ~'#1'~not~yet~defined! }
+ {
+ You~have~used~#2~
+ with~a~command~that~was~never~defined.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { environment-already-defined }
+ { Environment~'#1'~already~defined! }
+ {
+ You~have~used~\NewDocumentEnvironment
+ with~an~environment~that~already~has~a~definition. \\ \\
+ The~existing~definition~of~'#1'~will~not~be~altered.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { environment-not-yet-defined }
+ { Environment~'#1'~not~yet~defined! }
+ {
+ You~have~used~\RenewDocumentEnvironment
+ with~an~environment~that~was~never~defined.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { expandable-ending-optional }
+ {
+ Argument~specification~'#2'~for~expandable~command~'#1'~
+ ends~with~optional~argument.
+ }
+ {
+ Expandable~commands~must~have~a~final~mandatory~argument~
+ (or~no~arguments~at~all).~You~cannot~have~a~terminal~optional~
+ argument~with~expandable~commands.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { inconsistent-long }
+ { Inconsistent~long~arguments~for~expandable~command~'#1'. }
+ {
+ The~arguments~for~an~expandable~command~must~not~involve~short~
+ arguments~after~long~arguments.~You~have~tried~to~mix~the~two~types.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { invalid-command-arg }
+ { Argument~type~'#2'~not~available~for~#1. }
+ {
+ The~letter~'#2'~can~only~be~used~in~environment~argument~
+ specifications,~not~for~commands.
+ \\ \\
+ LaTeX~will~ignore~this~entire~definition.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { invalid-expandable-argument-type }
+ { Argument~type~'#2'~not~available~for~expandable~command~'#1'. }
+ {
+ The~letter~'#2'~specifies~an~argument~type~which~cannot~be~used~
+ in~an~expandable~command.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { invalid-after-optional-expandably }
+ {
+ Argument~type~'#2'~not~available~after~optional~argument~
+ for~expandable~command~'#1'.
+ }
+ {
+ The~letter~'#2'~specifies~an~argument~type~which~cannot~be~used~
+ in~an~expandable~command~after~an~optional~argument.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { non-trailing-obey-spaces }
+ { Prefix~'!'~used~before~mandatory~argument~'#2'~of~#1. }
+ {
+ The~prefix~'!'~can~only~apply~to~trailing~optional~arguments.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { not-definable }
+ { First~argument~of~'#2'~must~be~a~command. }
+ {
+ The~first~argument~of~'#2'~should~be~the~document~command~that~will~
+ be~defined.~The~provided~argument~'#1'~is~a~character.~Perhaps~a~
+ backslash~is~missing?
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { not-one-token }
+ { First~argument~of~'#2'~must~be~a~command. }
+ {
+ The~first~argument~of~'#2'~should~be~the~document~command~that~will~
+ be~defined.~The~provided~argument~'#1'~contains~more~than~one~
+ token.~Perhaps~a~backslash~is~missing?
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { not-single-token }
+ {
+ Argument~delimiter~'#2'~for~the~#1~should~be~
+ a~single~non-space~token.
+ }
+ {
+ The~argument~specification~provided~was~not~valid:~in~a~place~
+ where~a~single~token~is~required,~LaTeX~found~'#2'.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { forbidden-implicit-group-token }
+ { Argument~delimiter~'#2'~for~the~#1~is~not~allowed. }
+ {
+ The~argument~specification~provided~was~not~valid:~the~implicit~
+ #3-group~token~'#2'~is~not~allowed~as~an~argument~delimiter.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { processor-in-expandable }
+ { Argument~processor~'>{#2}'~cannot~be~used~for~the~expandable~command~'#1'. }
+ {
+ The~argument~specification~for~#1~contains~a~processor~function:~
+ this~is~only~supported~for~standard~robust~commands.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { too-many-arguments }
+ { Too~many~arguments~in~argument~specification~'#2'~of~#1. }
+ {
+ The~argument~specification~provided~has~more~than~9~arguments.~
+ This~cannot~be~implemented.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { two-markers }
+ { Two~'#2'~apply~to~the~same~argument~in~argument~specification~of~#1. }
+ {
+ The~argument~specification~provided~has~two~markers~'#2'~applying~
+ to~the~same~argument;~these~are~redundant.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { unknown-argument-type }
+ { Unknown~argument~type~'#2'~for~the~#1. }
+ {
+ The~letter~'#2'~does~not~specify~a~known~argument~type.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { xparse-argument-type }
+ { Deprecated~argument~type~'#2'~for~the~#1~requires~xparse. }
+ {
+ The~letter~'#2'~specifies~a~known~argument~type~that~requires~
+ the~xparse~package.
+ \c_@@_ignore_def_tl
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Errors when using commands/environments. The \texttt{if-boolean}
+% message is always used in expandable errors. The
+% \texttt{loop-in-defaults} and \texttt{missing-required} messages can
+% be expandable or not expandable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnn { cmd } { if-boolean }
+ { Invalid~use~\iow_char:N\\IfBooleanTF~{#1} }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { loop-in-defaults }
+ { Defaults~of~#1~have~circular~dependency. }
+ {
+ The~default~values~of~two~or~more~arguments~of~the~#1~
+ depend~on~each~other~in~a~way~that~cannot~be~resolved.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { missing-required }
+ { Missing~required~argument~for~#1. }
+ {
+ The~current~#1~expects~an~argument~starting~with~'#2'.~
+ LaTeX~did~not~find~it,~and~will~insert~a~default~value~to~be~processed.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { non-xparse }
+ { \str_uppercase:n #1~not~defined~using~xparse. }
+ {
+ You~have~asked~for~the~argument~specification~for~the~#1,~
+ but~this~was~not~defined~using~xparse.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { split-excess-tokens }
+ { Too~many~'#1'~tokens~when~trying~to~split~argument. }
+ {
+ LaTeX~was~asked~to~split~the~input~'#3'~
+ at~each~occurrence~of~the~token~'#1',~up~to~a~maximum~of~#2~parts.~
+ There~were~too~many~'#1'~tokens.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { unknown }
+ { Unknown~document~#1. }
+ {
+ You~have~asked~for~the~argument~specification~for~the~#1,~
+ but~it~is~not~defined.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { verbatim-newline }
+ { Verbatim~argument~of~#1~ended~by~end~of~line. }
+ {
+ The~verbatim~argument~of~the~#1~cannot~contain~more~than~one~line,~
+ but~the~end~
+ of~the~current~line~has~been~reached.~You~may~have~forgotten~the~
+ closing~delimiter.
+ \\ \\
+ LaTeX~will~ignore~'#2'.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { verbatim-tokenized }
+ { The~verbatim~#1~cannot~be~used~inside~an~argument. }
+ {
+ The~#1~takes~a~verbatim~argument.~
+ It~may~not~appear~within~the~argument~of~another~function.~
+ It~received~an~illegal~token \tl_if_empty:nF {#3} { ~'#3' } .
+ \\ \\
+ LaTeX~will~ignore~'#2'.
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Intended more for information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnn { cmd } { define-command }
+ {
+ Defining~command~#1~
+ with~sig.~'#2'~\msg_line_context:.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnn { cmd } { define-environment }
+ {
+ Defining~environment~'#1'~
+ with~sig.~'#2'~\msg_line_context:.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnn { cmd } { redefine-command }
+ {
+ Redefining~command~#1~
+ with~sig.~'#2'~\msg_line_context:.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnn { cmd } { redefine-environment }
+ {
+ Redefining~environment~'#1'~
+ with~sig.~'#2'~\msg_line_context:.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnn { cmd } { optional-mandatory }
+ {
+ Since~the~mandatory~argument~'#1'~has~the~same~delimiter~'#2'~
+ as~a~previous~optional~argument,~it~will~not~be~possible~to~
+ omit~all~optional~arguments~when~calling~this~command.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnn { cmd } { unsupported-let }
+ {
+ The~command~'#1'~was~undefined~but~not~the~associated~commands~
+ '#1~code'~and/or~'#1~defaults'.~Maybe~you~tried~using~
+ \iow_char:N\\let.~This~may~lead~to~an~infinite~loop.
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{User functions}
+%
+% The user functions are more or less just the internal functions
+% renamed.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BooleanFalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\BooleanTrue}
+% Design-space names for the Boolean values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \BooleanFalse \c_false_bool
+\cs_new_eq:NN \BooleanTrue \c_true_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NewDocumentCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\RenewDocumentCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvideDocumentCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareDocumentCommand}
+% The user macros are pretty simple wrappers around the internal ones.
+% There is however a check that the first argument is a single token,
+% possibly surrounded by spaces (hence the strange \cs{use:nnn}), and
+% is definable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \NewDocumentCommand #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \NewDocumentCommand
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:NTF #1
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { command-already-defined }
+ { \use:nnn \token_to_str:N #1 { } }
+ { \token_to_str:N \NewDocumentCommand }
+ }
+ { \@@_declare_cmd:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \RenewDocumentCommand #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \RenewDocumentCommand
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:NTF #1
+ { \@@_declare_cmd:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { command-not-yet-defined }
+ { \use:nnn \token_to_str:N #1 { } }
+ { \token_to_str:N \RenewDocumentCommand }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \ProvideDocumentCommand #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \ProvideDocumentCommand
+ { \cs_if_exist:NF #1 { \@@_declare_cmd:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} } }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareDocumentCommand #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \DeclareDocumentCommand
+ { \@@_declare_cmd:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NewDocumentEnvironment}
+% \begin{macro}{\RenewDocumentEnvironment}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvideDocumentEnvironment}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareDocumentEnvironment}
+% Very similar for environments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \NewDocumentEnvironment #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:cTF {#1}
+ { \msg_error:nnx { cmd } { environment-already-defined } {#1} }
+ { \@@_declare_env:nnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \RenewDocumentEnvironment #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:cTF {#1}
+ { \@@_declare_env:nnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} }
+ { \msg_error:nnx { cmd } { environment-not-yet-defined } {#1} }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \ProvideDocumentEnvironment #1#2#3#4
+ { \cs_if_exist:cF {#1} { \@@_declare_env:nnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} } }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareDocumentEnvironment #1#2#3#4
+ { \@@_declare_env:nnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NewExpandableDocumentCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\RenewExpandableDocumentCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvideExpandableDocumentCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareExpandableDocumentCommand}
+% The expandable versions are essentially the same as the basic
+% functions. The strange \cs{use:nnn} is there in case |#1| is
+% surrounded with spaces, as can happen with usual document catcodes
+% in \cs{RenewExpandableDocumentCommand} |{| |\!| |}| \ldots{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \NewExpandableDocumentCommand #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \NewExpandableDocumentCommand
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:NTF #1
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { command-already-defined }
+ { \use:nnn \token_to_str:N #1 { } }
+ { \token_to_str:N \NewExpandableDocumentCommand }
+ }
+ { \@@_declare_expandable_cmd:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \RenewExpandableDocumentCommand #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \RenewExpandableDocumentCommand
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:NTF #1
+ { \@@_declare_expandable_cmd:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { command-not-yet-defined }
+ { \use:nnn \token_to_str:N #1 { } }
+ { \token_to_str:N \RenewExpandableDocumentCommand }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \ProvideExpandableDocumentCommand #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \ProvideExpandableDocumentCommand
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:NF #1
+ { \@@_declare_expandable_cmd:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareExpandableDocumentCommand #1#2#3
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \DeclareExpandableDocumentCommand
+ { \@@_declare_expandable_cmd:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IfBooleanT, \IfBooleanF, \IfBooleanTF}
+% The logical \meta{true} and \meta{false} statements are just the
+% normal \cs{c_true_bool} and \cs{c_false_bool} so \cs{bool_if:NTF} is
+% almost enough. However, this code-level function blows up badly
+% when passed invalid input. We want \cs{IfBooleanTF} to accept a
+% single (non-space) token equal to \cs{c_true_bool} or
+% \cs{c_false_bool}, possibly surrounded by spaces. If the input is
+% blank or multiple items, jump to the error and pick the false
+% branch. If the input, ignoring spaces (we do this by omitting
+% braces in the \cs{tl_if_single_token:nF} test), is not a single
+% token then jump to the error as well. It is then safe to compare
+% the token to the two booleans, picking the appropriate branch. If
+% neither matches, we jump to the error as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \IfBooleanTF #1
+ {
+ \tl_if_single:nF {#1}
+ { \prg_break:n { \use:n } }
+ \tl_if_single_token:nF #1
+ { \prg_break:n { \use:n } }
+ \token_if_eq_meaning:NNT #1 \c_true_bool
+ { \prg_break:n { \use_ii:nnn } }
+ \token_if_eq_meaning:NNT #1 \c_false_bool
+ { \prg_break:n { \use_iii:nnn } }
+ \prg_break:n { \use:n }
+ \prg_break_point:
+ {
+ \msg_expandable_error:nnn { cmd } { if-boolean } {#1}
+ \use_ii:nn
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \IfBooleanT #1#2 { \IfBooleanTF {#1} {#2} { } }
+\cs_new:Npn \IfBooleanF #1 { \IfBooleanTF {#1} { } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IfNoValueT, \IfNoValueF, \IfNoValueTF}
+% Simple re-naming.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \IfNoValueF \tl_if_novalue:nF
+\cs_new_eq:NN \IfNoValueT \tl_if_novalue:nT
+\cs_new_eq:NN \IfNoValueTF \tl_if_novalue:nTF
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfValueT, \IfValueF, \IfValueTF}
+% Inverted logic.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \IfValueF { \tl_if_novalue:nT }
+\cs_new:Npn \IfValueT { \tl_if_novalue:nF }
+\cs_new:Npn \IfValueTF #1#2#3 { \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#1} {#3} {#2} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProcessedArgument}
+% Processed arguments are returned using this name, which is reserved
+% here although the definition will change.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \ProcessedArgument
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ReverseBoolean, \SplitArgument, \SplitList, \TrimSpaces}
+% Simple copies.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \ReverseBoolean \@@_bool_reverse:N
+\cs_new_eq:NN \SplitArgument \@@_split_argument:nnn
+\cs_new_eq:NN \SplitList \@@_split_list:nn
+\cs_new_eq:NN \TrimSpaces \@@_trim_spaces:n
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProcessList}
+% To support \cs{SplitList}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \ProcessList \tl_map_function:nN
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GetDocumentCommandArgSpec}
+% \begin{macro}{\GetDocumentEnvironmentArgSpec}
+% \begin{macro}{\ShowDocumentCommandArgSpec}
+% \begin{macro}{\ShowDocumentEnvironmentArgSpec}
+% More simple mappings, with a check that the argument is a single
+% control sequence or active character.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \GetDocumentCommandArgSpec #1
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \GetDocumentCommandArgSpec
+ { \@@_get_arg_spec:N #1 }
+ }
+\cs_new_eq:NN \GetDocumentEnvironmentArgSpec \@@_get_arg_spec:n
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \ShowDocumentCommandArgSpec #1
+ {
+ \@@_check_definable:nNT {#1} \ShowDocumentCommandArgSpec
+ { \@@_show_arg_spec:N #1 }
+ }
+\cs_new_eq:NN \ShowDocumentEnvironmentArgSpec \@@_show_arg_spec:n
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Finally as promised, restore \cs{__kernel_chk_if_free_cs:N}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\cs_gset_eq:NN \__kernel_chk_if_free_cs:N \@@_chk_if_free_cs:N
+%<latexrelease>\cs_undefine:N \@@_chk_if_free_cs:N
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{ltcmd}%
+%<latexrelease> {Document~command~parser}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndModuleRelease
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+%<latexrelease>\@ifundefined{ExplSyntaxOff}{}{\latexrelease@postexpl}
+%<latexrelease>\catcode`\^^@=\@latexrelease@catcode@null\relax
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We need to stop DocStrip treating |@@| in a special way at this point.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmdhooks.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmdhooks.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..40cd55e52c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmdhooks.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1094 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: ltcmdhooks.dtx (C) Copyright 2020-2021
+%% Frank Mittelbach, Phelype Oleinik, LaTeX Team
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+%%% From File: ltcmdhooks.dtx
+%
+\def\ltcmdhooksversion{v1.0b}
+\def\ltcmdhooksdate{2021/05/26}
+%
+%
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+%\usepackage{ltcmdhooks}
+\makeatletter
+\providecommand\footref[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref{#1}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@footnotemark}
+\makeatother
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{ltcmdhooks.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\fmi[1]{\marginpar{\footnotesize FMi: #1}}
+% \providecommand\pho[1]{\marginpar{\footnotesize PhO: #1}}
+% \providecommand\phoinline[1]{\begin{quote}\itshape\footnotesize PhO: #1\end{quote}}
+%
+% \title{The \texttt{ltcmdhooks} module\thanks{This file has version
+% \ltcmdhooksversion\ dated \ltcmdhooksdate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\
+% Project.}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Phelype Oleinik}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file implements generic hooks for (arbitrary) commands.
+% In theory every command \tn[no-index]{\meta{name}} offers now two
+% associated hooks to which code can be added using \tn{AddToHook}
+% or \tn{AddToHookNext}.\footnote{In practice this is not supported
+% for all types of commands, see section~\ref{sec:look-ahead} for
+% the restrictions that apply and what happens if one tries to use
+% this with commands for which this is not supported.} These are
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\hook{cmd/\meta{name}/before}]
+%
+% This hook is executed at the very start of the command
+% execution after its arguments (if any) are parsed. The hook
+% \meta{code} is wrapped in the command inside a call to
+% \cs{UseHook}|{cmd/|\meta{name}|/before}|, so the arguments
+% passed to the command are \emph{not} available in the hook
+% \meta{code}.
+%
+% \item[\hook{cmd/\meta{name}/after}]
+%
+% This hook is similar to \hook{cmd/\meta{name}/before}, but it is
+% executed at the very end of the command body. This hook is
+% implemented as a reversed hook.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% The hooks are not physically present before
+% \verb=\begin{document}= (i.e., using a command in the preamble
+% will never execute them) and if nobody has declared any code for
+% them, then they are not added to the command code ever. For
+% example, if we have the following definition
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand\foo[2]{Code #1 for #2!}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% then executing \verb=\foo{A}{B}= will simply run
+% \verb*=Code A for B!=
+% as it was always the case. However, if somebody, somewhere (e.g.,
+% in a package) adds
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \AddToHook{cmd/foo/before}{<before code>}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% then, after |\begin{document}| the definition of \cs[no-index]{foo} will be:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \renewcommand\foo[2]{\UseHook{cmd/foo/before}Code #1 for #2!}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% and similarly \verb=\AddToHook{cmd/foo/after}{<after code>}=
+% alters the definition to
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \renewcommand\foo[2]{Code #1 for #2!\UseHook{cmd/foo/after}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% In other words, the mechanism is similar to what \pkg{etoolbox}
+% offers with \tn{pretocmd} and \tn{apptocmd} with the important
+% differences
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+%
+% that code can be prepended or appended (i.e., added to the
+% hooks) even if the command itself is not defined, because the
+% defining package has not yet been loaded
+%
+% \item
+%
+% and that by using the hook management interface it is now
+% possible to define how the code chunks added in these places
+% are ordered, if different packages want to add code at these
+% points.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Restrictions and Operational details}
+% \label{sec:restrictions}
+%
+% Adding arbitrary material to commands is tricky because most of the
+% time we do not know what the macro expects as arguments when expanding
+% and \TeX{} doesn't have a reliable way to see that, so some guesswork
+% has to be employed.
+%
+% \subsection{Patching}
+%
+% The code here tries to find out if a command was defined with
+% \tn{newcommand} or \tn{DeclareRobustCommand} or
+% \tn{NewDocumentCommand}, and if so it \emph{assumes} that the argument
+% specification of the command is as expected (which is not fail-proof,
+% if someone redefines the internals of these commands in devious ways,
+% but is a reasonable assumption).
+%
+% If the command is one of the defined types, the code here does a
+% sandboxed expansion of the command such that it can be redefined again
+% exactly as before, but with the hook code added.
+%
+% If however the command is not a known type (it was defined with
+% \tn{def}, for example), then the code uses an approach similar to
+% \pkg{etoolbox}'s \tn{patchcmd} to retokenize the command with the hook
+% code in place. This procedure, however, is more likely to fail if the
+% catcode settings are not the same as the ones at the time of command's
+% definition, so not always adding a hook to a command will work.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Timing}
+%
+% When \cs{AddToHook} (or its \pkg{expl3} equivalent) is called with
+% a generic |cmd| hook, say, \hook{cmd/foo/before}, for the first time
+% (that is, no code was added to that same hook before), in the preamble
+% of a document, it will store a patch instruction for that command
+% until |\begin{document}|, and only then all the commands which had
+% hooks added will be patched in one go. That means that no command in
+% the preamble will have hooks patched into them.
+%
+% At |\begin{document}| all the delayed patches will be executed, and
+% if the command doesn't exist the code is still added to the hook,
+% but it will not be executed. After |\begin{document}|, when
+% \cs{AddToHook} is called with a generic |cmd| hook the first time,
+% the command will be immediately patched to include the hook, and if
+% it doesn't exist or if it can't be patched for any reason, an error
+% is thrown; if \cs{AddToHook} was already used in the preamble no new
+% patching is attempted.
+%
+% This has the consequence that a command defined or redefined after
+% |\begin{document}| only uses generic |cmd| hook code if
+% \cs{AddToHook} is called for the first time after the definition is
+% made, or if the command explicitly uses the generic hook in its
+% definition by declaring it with \cs{NewHookPair} adding \cs{UseHook} as
+% part of the code.\footnote{We might change this behavior in the main
+% document slightly after gaining some usage experience.}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Commands that look ahead}
+% \label{sec:look-ahead}
+%
+% Some commands are defined in different ``steps'' and they look ahead
+% in the input stream to find more arguments. If you try to add some
+% code to the \hook{cmd/\meta{name}/after} hook of such command, it will
+% not work, and it is not possible to detect that programmatically, so
+% the user has to know (or find out) which commands can or cannot have
+% hooks attached to them.
+%
+% One good example is the \tn{section} command. You can add something
+% to the \hook{cmd/section/before} hook, but if you try to add something
+% to the \hook{cmd/section/after} hook, \tn{section} will no longer
+% work. That happens because the \tn{section} macro takes no argument,
+% but instead calls a few internal \LaTeX{} macros to look for the
+% optional and mandatory arguments. By adding code to the
+% \hook{cmd/section/after} hook, you get in the way of that scanning.
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Package Author Interface}
+%
+% The \hook{cmd} hooks are, by default, available for all commands
+% that can be patched to add the hooks. For some commands, however,
+% the very beginning or the very end of the code is not the best place
+% to put the hooks, for example, if the command looks ahead for
+% arguments (see section~\ref{sec:look-ahead}).
+%
+% If you are a package author and you want to add the hooks to your
+% own commands in the proper position you can define the command and
+% manually add the \cs{UseHook} calls inside the command in the proper
+% positions, and manually define the hooks with \cs{NewHook} or
+% \cs{NewReversedHook}. When the hooks are explicitly defined,
+% patching is not attempted so you can make sure your command works
+% properly. For example, an (admittedly not really useful) command
+% that typesets its contents in a framed box with width optionally
+% given in parentheses:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand\fancybox{\@ifnextchar({\@fancybox}{\@fancybox(5cm)}}
+% \def\@fancybox(#1)#2{\fbox{\parbox{#1}{#2}}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% If you try that definition, then add some code after it with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \AddToHook{cmd/fancybox/after}{<code>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% and then use the \cs[no-index]{fancybox} command you will see that it
+% will be completely broken, because the hook will get executed in the
+% middle of parsing for optional \texttt{(...)} argument.
+%
+% If, on the other hand, you want to add hooks to your command you can
+% do something like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand\fancybox{\@ifnextchar({\@fancybox}{\@fancybox(5cm)}}
+% \def\@fancybox(#1)#2{\fbox{%
+% \UseHook{cmd/fancybox/before}%
+% \parbox{#1}{#2}%
+% \UseHook{cmd/fancybox/after}}}
+% \NewHook{cmd/fancybox/before}
+% \NewReversedHook{cmd/fancybox/after}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% then the hooks will be executed where they should and no patching
+% will be attempted. It is important that the hooks are declared with
+% \cs{NewHook} or \cs{NewReversedHook}, otherwise the command hook
+% code will try to patch the command. Note also that the call to
+% |\UseHook{cmd/fancybox/before}| does not need to be in the
+% definition of \cs[no-index]{fancybox}, but anywhere it makes sense
+% to insert it (in this case in the internal
+% \cs[no-index]{@fancybox}).
+%
+% Alternatively, if for whatever reason your command does not support
+% the generic hooks provided here, you can disable a hook with
+% \cs{DisableHook}\footnote{Please use \cs{DisableHook} if at all, only
+% on hooks that you \enquote{own}, i.e., for commands that your
+% package or class defines and not second guess
+% whether or not hooks of other packages should get disabled!}, so
+% that when someone tries to add code to it they will get an error.
+% Or if you don't want the error, you can simply declare the hook with
+% \cs{NewHook} and never use it.
+%
+%
+% The above approach is useful for really complex commands where for
+% one or the other reason the hooks can't be placed at the very
+% beginning and end of the command body and some hand-crafting is
+% needed. However, in the example above the real (and in fact only)
+% issue is the cascading argument parsing in the style developed long
+% ago in \LaTeX~2.09. Thus, a much simpler solution for this case is
+% to replace it with the modern \cs{NewDocumentCommand} syntax and
+% define the command as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareDocumentCommand\fancybox{D(){5cm}m}{\fbox{\parbox{#1}{#2}}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% If you do that then both hooks automatically work and are patched
+% into the right places.
+%
+% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \subsection{Execution plan}
+%
+% To add |before| and |after| hooks to a command we will need to peek
+% into the definition of a command, which is always a tricky thing to
+% do. Some cases are easy because we know how the command was defined,
+% so we can assume how its \meta{parameter text} looks like (for example
+% a command defined with \tn{newcommand} may have an optional argument
+% followed by a run of mandatory arguments), so we can just expand that
+% command and make it grab |#1|, |#2|, etc.\@ as arguments and
+% define it all back with the hooks added.
+%
+% Life's usually not that easy, so with some commands we can't do that
+% (a |#1| might as well be |#|$_{12}$|1|$_{12}$ instead of the expected
+% |#|$_{6}$|1|$_{12}$, for example) so we need to resort to ``patching''
+% the command: read its \tn{meaning}, and tokenize it again with
+% \tn{scantokens} and hope for the best.
+%
+% So the overall plan is:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% Check if a command is of a known type (that is, defined with
+% \tn{newcommand}\footnote{It's not always possible to reliably
+% detect this case because a command defined with no optional
+% argument is indistinguishable from a \tn{def}ed command.},
+% \cs[no-index]{DeclareRobustCommand}, or
+% \cs[no-index]{New(Expandable)DocumentCommand}), and if is, take
+% appropriate action.
+% \item
+% If the command is not a known type, we'll check if the command can
+% be patched. Two things will prevent a command from being
+% patched: if it was defined in a nonstandard catcode setting, or
+% if it is an internal expl3 command with |__|\meta{module} in its
+% name, in which case we refuse to patch.
+% \item
+% If the command was defined in nonstandard catcode settings, we
+% will try a few standard ones to try our best to carry out the
+% pathing. If this doesn't help either, the code will give up and
+% throw an error.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=hook>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0b}{2021/05/24}{Use \cs{msg_...} instead of \cs{__kernel_msg...}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+%<latexrelease>\NewModuleRelease{2021/06/01}{ltcmdhooks}
+%<latexrelease> {The~hook~management~system~for~commands}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Variables}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[int]{\g_hook_patch_action_list_tl}
+% Pairs of |\if<cmd>..\patch<cmd>| to be used with
+% \tn{robust@command@act} when looking for a known patching
+% rule. This token list is exposed because we see some future
+% applications (with very specialized packages, such as
+% \pkg{etoolbox} that may want to extend the pairs processed. It is
+% not meant for general use which is why it is not documented in
+% the interface documentation above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \g_hook_patch_action_list_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_patch_num_args_int}
+% The number of arguments in a macro being patched.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\int_new:N \l_@@_patch_num_args_int
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_patch_prefixes_tl}
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_patch_param_text_tl}
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_patch_replacement_tl}
+% The prefixes and parameters of the definition for the macro being
+% patched.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_patch_prefixes_tl
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_patch_param_text_tl
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_patch_replacement_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_delayed_patches_prop}
+% A list containing the patches delayed to |\begin{document}|, so that
+% patching is not attempted twice.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prop_new:N \g_@@_delayed_patches_prop
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_debug:x}
+% A helper for patching debug info.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_debug:x #1
+ { \@@_debug:n { \iow_term:x { [lthooks]~#1 } } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Variants}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[int]{\tl_rescan:nV}
+% \pkg{expl3} function variants used throughout the code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_rescan:nn { nV }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Patching or delaying}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_try_put_cmd_hook:n,\@@_try_put_cmd_hook:w}
+% Before |\begin{document}| all patching is delayed.
+% This function is called from within \cs{AddToHook}, when code is
+% added to a generic |cmd| hook is newly declared. It checks whether
+% the patch position is valid, then proceeds to trying to patch or
+% delaying to |\begin{document}| if in the preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_put_cmd_hook:n #1
+ { \@@_try_put_cmd_hook:w #1 / / / \s_@@_mark {#1} }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_put_cmd_hook:w
+ #1 / #2 / #3 / #4 \s_@@_mark #5
+ {
+ \@@_debug:n { \iow_term:n { ->~Adding~cmd~hook~to~'#2'~(#3): } }
+ \str_case:nnTF {#3}
+ { { before } { } { after } { } }
+ { \exp_args:Nc \@@_patch_cmd_or_delay:Nnn {#2} {#2} {#3} }
+ { \msg_error:nnnn { hooks } { wrong-cmd-hook } {#2} {#3} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_cmd_or_delay:Nnn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_cmd_begindocument_code:}
+% In the preamble, \cs{@@_patch_cmd_or_delay:Nnn} just adds the patch
+% instruction to a property list to be executed later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_cmd_or_delay:Nnn #1 #2 #3
+ {
+ \@@_debug:n { \iow_term:n { ->~Add~generic~cmd~hook~for~#2~(#3). } }
+ \@@_debug:n
+ { \iow_term:n { !~In~the~preamble:~delaying. } }
+ \prop_gput:Nnn \g_@@_delayed_patches_prop { #2 / #3 }
+ { \@@_cmd_try_patch:nn {#2} {#3} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The delayed patches are added to a property list to prevent
+% duplication, and the code stored in the property list for each
+% key is executed. The function \cs{@@_patch_cmd_or_delay:Nnn} is
+% also redefined to be \cs{@@_patch_command:Nnn} so that no further
+% delaying is attempted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_cmd_begindocument_code:
+ {
+ \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_patch_cmd_or_delay:Nnn \@@_patch_command:Nnn
+ \prop_map_function:NN \g_@@_delayed_patches_prop { \use_ii:nn }
+ \prop_gclear:N \g_@@_delayed_patches_prop
+ \cs_undefine:N \@@_cmd_begindocument_code:
+ }
+\g@addto@macro \@kernel@after@begindocument
+ { \@@_cmd_begindocument_code: }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_cmd_try_patch:nn}
+% At |\begin{document}| tries patching the command if the hook
+% was not manually created in the meantime. If the document does not
+% exist, no error is raised here as it may hook into a package that
+% wasn't loaded. Hooks added to commands in the document body still
+% raise an error if the command is not defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_cmd_try_patch:nn #1 #2
+ {
+ \@@_debug:n
+ { \iow_term:x { ->~\string\begin{document}~try~cmd / #1 / #2. } }
+ \@@_if_declared:nTF { cmd / #1 / #2 }
+ {
+ \@@_debug:n
+ { \iow_term:n { .->~Giving~up:~hook~already~created. } }
+ }
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist:cT {#1}
+ { \exp_args:Nc \@@_patch_command:Nnn {#1} {#1} {#2} }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patching commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_command:Nnn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_check:NNnn}
+% \begin{macro}[TF]{\@@_if_public_command:N}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_if_public_command:w}
+% \cs{@@_patch_command:Nnn} will do some sanity checks on the
+% argument to detect if it is possible to add hooks to the command,
+% and raises an error otherwise. If the command can contain hooks,
+% then it uses \tn{robust@command@act} to find out what type is the
+% command, and patch it accordingly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_command:Nnn #1 #2 #3
+ {
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { analyzing~'\token_to_str:N #1' }
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { \token_to_str:N #1 = \token_to_meaning:N #1 }
+ \@@_patch_check:NNnn \cs_if_exist:NTF #1 { undef }
+ {
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { ++~control~sequence~is~defined }
+ \@@_patch_check:NNnn \token_if_macro:NTF #1 { macro }
+ {
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { ++~control~sequence~is~a~macro }
+ \@@_patch_check:NNnn \@@_if_public_command:NTF #1 { expl3 }
+ {
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { ++~macro~is~not~private }
+ \robust@command@act
+ \g_hook_patch_action_list_tl #1
+ \@@_retokenize_patch:Nnn { #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And here's the auxiliary used above:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_check:NNnn #1 #2 #3 #4
+ {
+ #1 #2 {#4}
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { hooks } { cant-patch }
+ { \token_to_str:N #2 } {#3}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and a conditional \cs{@@_if_public_command:N} to check if a command
+% has |__| in its name (no other checking is performed). Primitives
+% with |:D| in their name could be included here, but they are already
+% discarded in the \cs{token_if_macro:NTF} test above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\use:x
+ {
+ \prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn
+ \exp_not:N \@@_if_public_command:N ##1 { TF }
+ {
+ \exp_not:N \exp_last_unbraced:Nf
+ \exp_not:N \@@_if_public_command:w
+ { \exp_not:N \cs_to_str:N ##1 }
+ \tl_to_str:n { _ _ } \s_@@_mark
+ }
+ }
+\exp_last_unbraced:NNNNo
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_if_public_command:w
+ #1 \tl_to_str:n { _ _ } #2 \s_@@_mark
+ {
+ \tl_if_empty:nTF {#2}
+ { \prg_return_true: }
+ { \prg_return_false: }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Patching by expansion and redefinition}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[int]{\g_hook_patch_action_list_tl}
+% This is the list of known command types and the function that
+% patches the command hooks into them. The conditionals are taken
+% from \tn{ShowCommand}, \tn{NewCommandCopy} and
+% \cs{__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF} defined in \texttt{ltcmd}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_gset:Nn \g_hook_patch_action_list_tl
+ {
+ { \@if@DeclareRobustCommand \@@_patch_DeclareRobustCommand:Nnn }
+ { \@if@newcommand \@@_patch_newcommand:Nnn }
+ { \__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF \@@_cmd_patch_xparse:Nnn }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_DeclareRobustCommand:Nnn}
+% At this point we know that the commands can be patched by expanding
+% then redefining. These are the cases of commands defined with
+% \tn{newcommand} with an optional argument or with
+% \tn{DeclareRobustCommand}.
+%
+% With \cs{@@_patch_DeclareRobustCommand:Nnn} we check if the command
+% has an optional argument (with a test counter-intuitively called
+% \tn{@if@newcommand}). If so, we forward the action to
+% \cs{@@_patch_newcommand:Nnn}, otherwise call the patching engine
+% \cs{@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn} with a \cs{c_false_bool} to
+% indicate that there is no optional argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_DeclareRobustCommand:Nnn #1
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nc \@if@newcommand { \cs_to_str:N #1 ~ }
+ { \exp_args:Nc \@@_patch_newcommand:Nnn }
+ { \exp_args:NNc \@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn \c_false_bool }
+ { \cs_to_str:N #1 ~ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_newcommand:Nnn}
+% If the command was defined with \tn{newcommand} and an optional
+% argument, call the patching engine with a \cs{c_true_bool} to flag
+% the presence of an optional argument, and with
+% \cs[no-index]{\string\command} to patch the actual code for
+% \cs[no-index]{command}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_newcommand:Nnn #1
+ {
+ \exp_args:NNc \@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn \c_true_bool
+ { \c_backslash_str \cs_to_str:N #1 }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_cmd_patch_xparse:Nnn}
+% And for commands defined by the \pkg{xparse} commands use this
+% for patching:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_cmd_patch_xparse:Nnn #1
+ {
+ \exp_args:NNc \@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn \c_false_bool
+ { \cs_to_str:N #1 ~ code }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_make_prefixes:w}
+% Now the real action begins. Here we have in |#1| a boolean
+% indicating if the command has a |[|\ldots|]|-delimited argument, in
+% |#2| the command control sequence, in |#3| the name of the command
+% (note that |#1|${}\ne{}$|\csname#2\endcsname| at this point!), and
+% in |#4| the hook position, either |before| or |after|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn #1 #2 #3 #4
+ {
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { ++~command~can~be~patched~without~rescanning }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We'll start by counting the number of arguments in the command by
+% counting the number of characters in the \cs{cs_argument_spec:N} of
+% the macro, divided by two, and subtracting one if the command has an
+% optional argument (that is, an extra |[]| in its
+% \meta{parameter text}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \int_set:Nn \l_@@_patch_num_args_int
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nf \str_count:n { \cs_argument_spec:N #2 } / 2
+ \bool_if:NT #1 { -1 }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now build two token lists:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{l_@@_patch_param_text_tl}] will contain the
+% \meta{parameter text} to be used when redefining the macro. It
+% should be identical to the \meta{parameter text} used when
+% originally defining that macro.
+% \item[\cs{l_@@_patch_replacement_tl}] will contain braced pairs of
+% |#|$_{12}$\meta{num} to feed to the macro when expanded. This
+% token list as well as the previous will have the first item
+% surrounded by |[|\ldots|]| in the case of an optional argument.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \int_compare:nNnTF { \l_@@_patch_num_args_int } > { \c_zero_int }
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_patch_param_text_tl
+ { \bool_if:NTF #1 { [####1] } { ####1 } }
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_patch_replacement_tl
+ { \bool_if:NTF #1 { [####1] } { {####1} } }
+ \int_step_inline:nnn { 2 } { \l_@@_patch_num_args_int }
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_patch_param_text_tl { ## ####1 }
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_patch_replacement_tl { { ## ####1 } }
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_patch_param_text_tl
+ \tl_clear:N \l_@@_patch_replacement_tl
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, before redefining, we need to also get the prefixes used
+% when defining the command. Here we ensure that the \tn{escapechar}
+% is printable, otherwise a macro defined with prefixes
+% |\protected \long| will have it \tn{meaning} printed as
+% |protectedlong|, making life unnecessarily complicated. Here the
+% \tn{escapechar} is changed to |/|, then we loop between pairs of
+% |/|\ldots|/| extracting the prefixes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \group_begin:
+ \int_set:Nn \tex_escapechar:D { `\/ }
+ \use:x
+ {
+ \group_end:
+ \tl_set:Nx \exp_not:N \l_@@_patch_prefixes_tl
+ { \exp_not:N \@@_make_prefixes:w \cs_prefix_spec:N #2 / / }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now that all the needed tools are ready, without further ado we'll
+% redefine the command |#2|. The definition uses the prefixes
+% gathered in \cs{l_@@_patch_prefixes_tl}, a primitive \cs{tex_def:D}
+% to avoid adding extra prefixes, and the \meta{parameter text} from
+% \cs{l_@@_patch_param_text_tl}.
+%
+% Then finally, in the body of the definition, we insert
+% \hook{cmd/\#3/before} if |#4| is |before|, the code of the
+% command expanded once grabbing the parameters in
+% \cs{l_@@_patch_replacement_tl}, and \hook{cmd/\#3/after} if |#4| is
+% |after|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \use:x
+ {
+ \l_@@_patch_prefixes_tl \tex_def:D
+ \exp_not:N #2 \exp_not:V \l_@@_patch_param_text_tl
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:nnT {#4} { before }
+ { \exp_not:N \UseHook { cmd / #3 / #4 } }
+ \exp_args:No \exp_not:o
+ { \exp_after:wN #2 \l_@@_patch_replacement_tl }
+ \str_if_eq:nnT {#4} { after }
+ { \exp_not:N \UseHook { cmd / #3 / #4 } }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here's the auxiliary that makes the prefix control sequences for the
+% redefinition. Each item has to be \cs{tl_trim_spaces:n}'d because
+% the last item (and not any other) has a trailing space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_make_prefixes:w / #1 /
+ {
+ \tl_if_empty:nF {#1}
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { tex_ \tl_trim_spaces:n {#1} :D }
+ \@@_make_prefixes:w /
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Patching by retokenization}
+%
+% At this point we've drained the possibilities of patching a command by
+% expansion-and-redefinition, so we have to resort to patching by
+% retokenizing the command. Patching by retokenization is done by
+% getting the \tn{meaning} of the command, doing the necessary
+% manipulations on the generated string, and the retokenizing that again
+% by using \tn{scantokens}.
+%
+% Patching by retokenization is definitely a riskier business, because
+% it relies that the tokens printed by \tn{meaning} produce the exact
+% same tokens as the ones in the original definition. That is, the
+% catcode régime must be exactly(ish) the same, and there is no way of
+% telling except by trial and error.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_retokenize_patch:Nnn}
+% This is the macro that will control the whole process. First we'll
+% try out one final, rather trivial case, of a command with no
+% arguments; that is, a token list. This case can be patched with
+% the expand-and-redefine routine but it has to be the very last case
+% tested for, because most (all?) robust commands start with a
+% top-level macro with no arguments, so testing this first would
+% short-circuit \tn{robust@command@act} and the top-level macros would
+% be incorrectly patched. In that case, we just check if the
+% \cs{cs_argument_spec:N} is empty, and call
+% \cs{@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_retokenize_patch:Nnn #1 #2 #3
+ {
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { ..~command~can~only~be~patched~by~rescanning }
+ \str_if_eq:eeTF { \cs_argument_spec:N #1 } { }
+ { \@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn \c_false_bool #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Otherwise, we start the actual patching by retokenization job. The
+% code calls \cs{@@_try_patch_with_catcodes:Nnnnw} with a different
+% catcode setting:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The current catcode setting;
+% \item Switching the catcode of |@|;
+% \item Switching the \pkg{expl3} syntax on or off;
+% \item Both of the above.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% If patching succeeds, \cs{@@_try_patch_with_catcodes:Nnnnw} has the
+% side-effect of patching the macro |#1| (which may be an internal
+% from the command whose name is~|#2|).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ {
+ \int_compare:nNnTF { \char_value_catcode:n {`\@ } } = { 12 }
+ { \exp_not:N \makeatletter } { \exp_not:N \makeatother }
+ }
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_tmpb_tl
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l__kernel_expl_bool
+ { \ExplSyntaxOff } { \ExplSyntaxOn }
+ }
+ \use:x
+ {
+ \exp_not:N \@@_try_patch_with_catcodes:Nnnnw
+ \exp_not:n { #1 {#2} {#3} }
+ { \prg_do_nothing: }
+ { \exp_not:V \l_@@_tmpa_tl } % @
+ { \exp_not:V \l_@@_tmpb_tl } % _:
+ {
+ \exp_not:V \l_@@_tmpa_tl % @
+ \exp_not:V \l_@@_tmpb_tl % _:
+ }
+ }
+ \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_stop
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If no catcode setting succeeds, give up and raise an error. The
+% command isn't changed in any way in that case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \msg_error:nnxx { hooks } { cant-patch }
+ { \c_backslash_str #2 } { retok }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_try_patch_with_catcodes:Nnnnw}
+% This function is a simple wrapper around
+% \cs{@@_cmd_if_scanable:NnTF} and \cs{@@_patch_retokenize:Nnnn} if
+% the former returns \meta{true}, plus some debug messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_patch_with_catcodes:Nnnnw #1 #2 #3 #4
+ {
+ \quark_if_recursion_tail_stop_do:nn {#4} { \use:n }
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { ++~trying~to~patch~by~retokenization }
+ \@@_cmd_if_scanable:NnTF {#1} {#4}
+ {
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { ++~macro~can~be~retokenized~cleanly }
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { ==~retokenizing~macro~now }
+ \@@_patch_retokenize:Nnnn #1 {#2} {#3} {#4}
+ \use_i_delimit_by_q_recursion_stop:nw \use_none:n
+ }
+ {
+ \@@_patch_debug:x { --~macro~cannot~be~retokenized~cleanly }
+ \@@_try_patch_with_catcodes:Nnnnw #1 {#2} {#3}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}[int]{\kerneltmpDoNotUse}
+% This is an oddity required to be safe (as safe as reasonably
+% possible) when patching the command. The entirety of
+% \begin{quote}
+% \meta{prefixes} \tn{def} \meta{cs} \meta{parameter text}
+% |{|\meta{replacement text}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will go through \tn{scantokens}. The \meta{parameter text} and
+% \meta{replacement text} are what we are trying to retokenize, so not
+% much worry there. The other items, however, should ``just work'',
+% so some care is needed to not use too fancy catcode settings.
+% Therefore we can't use an \pkg{expl3}-named macro for \meta{cs}, nor
+% the \pkg{expl3} versions of \tn{def} or the \meta{prefixes}.
+% That is why the definitions that will eventually go into
+% \tn{scantokens} will use the oddly (but hopefully clearly)-named
+% \cs{kerneltmpDoNotUse}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \kerneltmpDoNotUse !
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \phoinline{Maybe this can be avoided by running the \meta{parameter text}
+% and the \meta{replacement text} separately through \tn{scantokens}
+% and then putting everything together at the end.}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_required_catcodes:}
+% Here are the catcode settings that are \emph{mandatory} when
+% retokenizing commands. These are the minimum necessary settings to
+% perform the definitions: they identify control sequences, which
+% must be escaped with |\|$_0$, delimit the definition with |{|$_1$
+% and |}|$_2$, and mark parameters with |#|$_6$. Everything else may
+% be changed, but not these.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_required_catcodes:
+ {
+ \char_set_catcode_escape:N \\
+ \char_set_catcode_group_begin:N \{
+ \char_set_catcode_group_end:N \}
+ \char_set_catcode_parameter:N \#
+ % \int_set:Nn \tex_endlinechar:D { -1 }
+ % \int_set:Nn \tex_newlinechar:D { -1 }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \phoinline{\pkg{etoolbox} sets the \tn{endlinechar} and \tn{newlinechar}
+% when patching, but as far as I tested these didn't make much of
+% a difference, so I left them out for now. Maybe
+% \tn{newlinechar}|=-1| avoids a space token being added after the
+% definition.}
+% \phoinline{If the patching is split by \meta{parameter text} and
+% \meta{replacement text}, then only \# will have to stay in that
+% list.}
+% \phoinline{Actually now that we patch
+% \texttt{\cs{UseHook}\{cmd/foo/before\}}, all the tokens there need
+% to have the right catcodes, so this list now includes all
+% lowercase letters, U and H, the slash, and whatever characters in
+% the command name\ldots sigh\ldots}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}[TF]{\@@_cmd_if_scanable:Nn}
+% Here we'll do a quick test if the command being patched can in fact
+% be retokenized with the specific catcode setting without changing
+% in meaning. The test is straightforward:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item apply \tn{meaning} to the command;
+% \item split the \meta{prefixes}, \meta{parameter text} and
+% \meta{replacement text} and arrange them as
+% \begin{quote}
+% \meta{prefixes}\tn{def}\cs{kerneltmpDoNotUse}%^^A
+% \meta{parameter text}|{|\meta{replacement text}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \item rescan that with the given catcode settings, and do
+% the definition; then finally
+% \item compare \cs{kerneltmpDoNotUse} with the original command.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% If both are \tn{ifx}-equal, the command can be safely patched.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn \@@_cmd_if_scanable:Nn #1 #2 { TF }
+ {
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \kerneltmpDoNotUse \scan_stop:
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_tmp:w \scan_stop:
+ \use:x
+ {
+ \cs_set:Npn \@@_tmp:w
+ ####1 \tl_to_str:n { macro: } ####2 -> ####3 \s_@@_mark
+ { ####1 \def \kerneltmpDoNotUse ####2 {####3} }
+ \tl_set:Nx \exp_not:N \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ { \exp_not:N \@@_tmp:w \token_to_meaning:N #1 \s_@@_mark }
+ }
+ \tl_rescan:nV { #2 \@@_patch_required_catcodes: } \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ \token_if_eq_meaning:NNTF #1 \kerneltmpDoNotUse
+ { \prg_return_true: }
+ { \prg_return_false: }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_patch_retokenize:Nnnn}
+% Then, if \cs{@@_cmd_if_scanable:NnTF} returned true, we can go on
+% and patch the command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_patch_retokenize:Nnnn #1 #2 #3 #4
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Start off by making some things \tn{relax} to avoid lots of
+% \tn{noexpand} below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \kerneltmpDoNotUse \scan_stop:
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_tmp:w \scan_stop:
+ \use:x
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we'll define \cs{@@_tmp:w} such that it splits the \tn{meaning}
+% of the macro (|#1|) into its three parts:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \def\makelabel#1{\texttt{\#\#\#\##1}}
+% \item \meta{prefixes}
+% \item \meta{parameter text}
+% \item \meta{replacement text}
+% \end{enumerate}
+% and arrange that a complete definition, then place the |before|
+% or |after| hooks around the \meta{replacement text}:
+% accordingly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_set:Npn \@@_tmp:w
+ ####1 \tl_to_str:n { macro: } ####2 -> ####3 \s_@@_mark
+ {
+ ####1 \def \kerneltmpDoNotUse ####2
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:nnT {#3} { before }
+ { \token_to_str:N \UseHook { cmd / #2 / #3 } }
+ ####3
+ \str_if_eq:nnT {#3} { after }
+ { \token_to_str:N \UseHook { cmd / #2 / #3 } }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we just have to get the \tn{meaning} of the command being
+% patched and pass it through the meat grinder above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nx \exp_not:N \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ { \exp_not:N \@@_tmp:w \token_to_meaning:N #1 \s_@@_mark }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now rescan with the given catcode settings (overridden by the
+% \cs{@@_patch_required_catcodes:}), and implicitly (by using the
+% rescanned token list) carry out the definition from above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_rescan:nV { #4 \@@_patch_required_catcodes: } \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And to close, copy the newly-defined command into the old name and
+% the patching is finally completed:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_set_eq:NN #1 \kerneltmpDoNotUse
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Messages}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { wrong-cmd-hook }
+ {
+ Generic~hook~`cmd/#1/#2'~is~invalid.
+% The~hook~should~be~`cmd/#1/before'~or~`cmd/#1/after'.
+ }
+ {
+ You~tried~to~add~a~generic~hook~to~command~\iow_char:N \\#1,~but~`#2'~
+ is~an~invalid~component.~Only~`before'~or~`after'~are~allowed.
+ }
+\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { cant-patch }
+ {
+ Generic~hooks~cannot~be~added~to~'#1'.
+ }
+ {
+ You~tried~to~add~a~hook~to~'#1',~but~LaTeX~was~unable~to~
+ patch~the~command~because~it~\@@_unpatchable_cases:n {#2}.
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_unpatchable_cases:n #1
+ {
+ \str_case:nn {#1}
+ {
+ { undef } { doesn't~exist }
+ { macro } { is~not~a~macro }
+ { expl3 } { is~a~private~expl3~macro }
+ { retok } { can't~be~retokenized~cleanly }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{ltcmdhooks}%
+%<latexrelease> {The~hook~management~system~for~commands}
+%<latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The command \cs{@@_cmd_begindocument_code:} is used in an
+% internal hook, so we need to make sure it has a harmless
+% definition after rollback as that will not remove it from the
+% kernel hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\cs_set_eq:NN \@@_cmd_begindocument_code: \prg_do_nothing:
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndModuleRelease
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
index b779d27fb6c..d65b3aee94f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltcntrl.dtx}
- [2014/04/21 v1.0h LaTeX Kernel (program control)]
+ [2020/12/04 v1.0h LaTeX Kernel (program control)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltcntrl.dtx}
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\@for}
% \changes{v1.0d}{1995/04/24}
-% {Dont expand second argument with \cs{edef}: /1317 (DPC)}
+% {Don't expand second argument with \cs{edef}: /1317 (DPC)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@for#1:=#2\do#3{%
\expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
index 5dc1c8866d7..445cac2f2e4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltcounts.dtx}
- [2018/04/22 v1.1l LaTeX Kernel (Counters)]
+ [2020/12/04 v1.1l LaTeX Kernel (Counters)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltcounts.dtx}
@@ -630,7 +630,7 @@
% always selects the correct branch in an |\ifmmode| switch with
% the usual disadvantage of ruining kerning. For the application we
% use it for here that shouldn't matter. The alternative would be
-% to mimic |\IeC| from \textsf{inputenc} but then it wil have the
+% to mimic |\IeC| from \textsf{inputenc} but then it will have the
% disadvantage of choosing the wrong branch if appearing at the
% beginning of an alignment cell. However, users of e\TeX\ will be
% pleasantly surprised to get the best of both worlds and no bad
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
index 920c1acde6d..4f39d922cce 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltdefns.dtx}
- [2020/11/25 v1.5o LaTeX Kernel (definition commands)]
+ [2021/05/27 v1.5p LaTeX Kernel (definition commands)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltdefns.dtx}
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
-% \subsection{Initex initialisations}
+% \subsection{Initex initializations}
%
% \task{???}{This section needs extension}
%
@@ -858,7 +858,7 @@
% |\CheckCommand| takes the same arguments as |\newcommand|. If
% the command already exists, with the same definition, then
% nothing happens, otherwise a warning is issued. Useful for
-% checking the current state befor a macro package starts
+% checking the current state before a macro package starts
% redefining things. Currently two macros are considered to have
% the same definition if they are the same except for different
% default arguments. That is, if the old definition was:
@@ -1217,11 +1217,12 @@
% top-level definition to have the right kind of structure, but
% this is somewhat problematical as we then have to distinguish
% between \cs{long} macros and others and also take into account
-% that sometimes the top-level is deliberately dones manually (like
+% that sometimes the top-level is deliberately done manually (like
% with \cs{begin}).
%
% The macro firstly checks if the control sequence in question exists
% at all.
+% \changes{v1.5p}{2021/05/26}{Normalize error message in \cs{MakeRobust}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\MakeRobust}{\MakeRobust}%
@@ -1230,7 +1231,7 @@
\count@=\escapechar
\escapechar=`\\
\@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}{%
- \@latex@error{The control sequence `\string#1' is undefined!%
+ \@latex@error{Command `\string#1' is undefined!%
\MessageBreak There is nothing here to make robust}%
\@eha
}%
@@ -1259,7 +1260,7 @@
\noexpand\protect\expandafter\noexpand
\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname}%
}%
- {\@latex@info{The control sequence `\string#1' is already robust}}%
+ {\@latex@info{Command `\string#1' is already robust}}%
}%
\escapechar=\count@
}%
@@ -1363,12 +1364,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\kernel@make@fragile}
-% The opposite of |\MakeRobust| execpt that it doesn't do many
+% The opposite of |\MakeRobust| except that it doesn't do many
% checks as it is internal to the kernel. Why does one want such a
% thing?
% Only for compatibility reasons if \texttt{latexrelease} requests
% a rollback of the kernel. For this reason we pretend that this
-% command existed in all earler versions of \LaTeX{} i.e., we are
+% command existed in all earlier versions of \LaTeX{} i.e., we are
% not rolling it back since we need it precisely then. But we have
% to get it into the \texttt{latexrelease} file so that a roll
% forward is possible too.
@@ -1452,7 +1453,7 @@
% robust commands. This code will then be used to test if a command is
% robust, considered the different types of robustness, and then either copy
% that definition, if \cs{DeclareCommandCopy} (or similar) is used, or show
-% the definition of the command, if \cs{ShowCommmand} is used.
+% the definition of the command, if \cs{ShowCommand} is used.
%
% \begin{macro}{\robust@command@act}
% \changes{v1.5k}{2020/08/19}{Made \cs{robust@command@act}
@@ -1471,7 +1472,7 @@
% \ldots
% \end{quote}
% \cs{robust@command@act} will iterate over the \meta{action-list}, evaluating
-% each \meta{if-type-$n$}\meta{robust-cmd}|{|\meta{true}|}{|\meta{false}|}|.
+% each \meta{if-type-$n$} \meta{robust-cmd} |{|\meta{true}|}{|\meta{false}|}|.
% If the \meta{if-type-$n$} conditional returns \meta{true}, then
% \meta{act-type-$n$}\meta{act-arg} is executed, and the loop ends. If the
% conditional returns \meta{false}, then \meta{if-type-$n+1$} is executed in
@@ -1711,7 +1712,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@showcommandlisthook}
% The initial definition of \cs{@showcommandlisthook} contains the same tests
% as used for copying, but \cs{@show@...} commands instead of \cs{@copy@...}.
-% Same as before, it is initialised to cope with \cs{DeclareRobustCommand} and
+% Same as before, it is initialized to cope with \cs{DeclareRobustCommand} and
% \cs{newcommand} with optional arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@showcommandlisthook{%
@@ -2283,7 +2284,7 @@
%
% The primitive |\-| command adds a discretionary hyphen using the
% current font's |\hyphenchar|. Monospace fonts are usually declared
-% with |\hyphenchar| set to $-1$ to suppress hyhenation.
+% with |\hyphenchar| set to $-1$ to suppress hyphenation.
%
% \LaTeX, from \LaTeX2.09 in 1986 defined |\-| by
% \begin{verbatim}
@@ -2419,7 +2420,8 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\g@addto@macro}
-% Globally add to the end of a macro.
+% Globally add to the end of a macro.
+% This macro is used by the kernel to add to its internal hooks.
% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}{Made global}
% \changes{v0.2w}{1994/01/31}
% {Use toks register to avoid `hash' problems}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
index 3abd49aced5..36a1ca616cd 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltdirchk.dtx}
- [2020/08/21 v1.3a LaTeX Kernel (System Dependent Parts)]
+ [2021/01/15 v1.3a LaTeX Kernel (System Dependent Parts)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltdirchk.dtx}
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
% {Add unstripped module,
% so that dircheck.dtx may be used with initex}
% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/08}
-% {Reorganise driver module into `new style'}
+% {Reorganize driver module into `new style'}
% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}
% {Change name from dircheck.dtx}
% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}
@@ -81,13 +81,13 @@
% \changes{v1.0w}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Documentation improvements.}
%
%
-% \section{\LaTeX\ System Dependent Initialisations}
+% \section{\LaTeX\ System Dependent Initializations}
%
% \changes{v0.2g}{1994/01/21}
-% {Improve documentation, reorganise docstrip module}
+% {Improve documentation, reorganize docstrip module}
%
% This file implements the semi-automatic determination of various
-% system dependent parts of the initialisation. The actual definitions
+% system dependent parts of the initialization. The actual definitions
% may be placed in a file |texsys.cfg|. Thus for operating systems for
% which the tests here do not result in acceptable settings, a `hand
% written' |texsys.cfg| may be produced.
@@ -127,14 +127,16 @@
% |\input@path| should expand to a list of such directories, each in a
% |{}| group.
%
+% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\filename@parse}
% After a call of the form: |\filename@parse{|\meta{filename}|}|, the
-% three macros |\filename@area|,|\filename@base|,|\filename@ext| should
+% three macros |\filename@area|, |\filename@base| and |\filename@ext| should
% be defined to be the `area' (or directory), basename and
% extension respectively. If there was no extension specified in
% \meta{filename}, |\filename@ext| should be |\let| to |\relax| (so this
% case may be tested with |\@ifundefined{filename@ext}| and, perhaps a
% default extension substituted).
+% \end{sloppypar}
%
% Normally one would not need to define this macro in |texsys.cfg| as
% the automatic tests can supply parsers that work with UNIX and VMS and
@@ -153,7 +155,7 @@
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@TeXversion}
% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/23}{Document \cs{@TeXversion}}
-% |\@TeXversion| is now set automatically by the initialisation tests
+% |\@TeXversion| is now set automatically by the initialization tests
% in this file. You should not need to set it in |texsys.cfg|, however
% the following documentation is left for information. \LaTeX\ does
% not set this variable exactly, the automatic tests set it to:\\
@@ -206,7 +208,7 @@
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
-% \section{Initialisation}
+% \section{Initialization}
% As this file is read at a very early stage, some definitions that
% are normally considered to be part of the format must be made here.
%
@@ -470,18 +472,20 @@
% |{}| group.
%
%
+% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\filename@parse}
% After a call of the form: |\filename@parse{|\meta{filename}|}|, the
-% three macros |\filename@area|,|\filename@base|,|\filename@ext| should
+% three macros |\filename@area|, |\filename@base|, |\filename@ext| should
% be defined to be the `area' (or directory), basename and
% extension respectively. If there was no extension specified in
% \meta{filename}, |\filename@ext| should be |\let| to |\relax| (so this
% case may be tested with |\@ifundefined{filename@ext}| and, perhaps a
% default extension substituted).
+% \end{sloppypar}
%
% Normally one would not need to define this macro in |texsys.cfg| as
% the automatic tests can supply parsers that work with UNIX and VMS
-% syntax, as well as a basic parser that willcover many other cases.
+% syntax, as well as a basic parser that will cover many other cases.
% However some operating systems may need a `hand produced' parser
% in which case it should be defined in this file.
%
@@ -794,7 +798,7 @@
% to supply the correct information to the prompts. Now the interaction
% is omitted. After the format is made the installer can attempt to run
% the test document |ltxcheck.tex| through \LaTeXe. This will check,
-% amongst other things, whether |texsys.cfg| will need to be edited and
+% among other things, whether |texsys.cfg| will need to be edited and
% the format remade.
%
% \begin{macro}{\input@path}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx
index 9a606ea8c1d..7f480a0171f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx
index 7f9019ede31..6d7ec3ff60b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2019-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltexpl.dtx}
- [2020/12/18 v1.2h LaTeX Kernel (expl3-dependent code)]
+ [2021/04/20 v1.3c LaTeX Kernel (expl3-dependent code)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltexpl.dtx}
@@ -82,33 +82,60 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {kernel@enddocument hooks}{Define kernel enddocument Hooks}%
-\let\@kernel@after@enddocument\@empty
-\let\@kernel@after@enddocument@afterlastpage\@empty
+%<latexrelease> {kernel@enddocument hooks}{Define several kernel hooks}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We only initialize these kernel hooks if they are not already
+% existing. Otherwise they would be set to \cs{@empty} on rollback
+% which would be wrong because code that has been added to to them
+% may still have to be executed in the rollback situation . Instead
+% code that writes to them needs to handle the rollback as needed.
+% It is likely that we have to change that approach in the future,
+% but for now it should do.
+% (It is enough to test only for the existence of one hook, as all
+% got added at the same time.)
+% \changes{v1.3c}{2021/04/20}{Don't empty kernel hooks on rollback}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@kernel@after@enddocument\@undefined
+ \let \@kernel@after@enddocument \@empty
+ \let \@kernel@after@enddocument@afterlastpage \@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@kernel@before@begindocument,\@kernel@after@begindocument}
+% For the similar reasons we also define those that are used in
+% \cs{document} because they too get material added to in early modules.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \@kernel@before@begindocument \@empty
+ \let \@kernel@after@begindocument \@empty
+\fi
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {kernel@enddocument hooks}{Define kernel enddocument Hooks}%
+%<latexrelease> {kernel@enddocument hooks}{Define several kernel hooks}
%<latexrelease>\let\@kernel@after@enddocument\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\@kernel@after@enddocument@afterlastpage\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\let\@kernel@before@begindocument\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\@kernel@after@begindocument\@undefined
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
% First define some blank commands, so that in case something goes wrong while
% loading \textsf{expl3}, we won't get strange \texttt{Undefined control
% sequence} errors.
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2021/01/24}{Define \pkg{expl3} hooks conditionally}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
%<latexrelease> {\@expl@sys@load@backend@@}{Roll forward support}%
-\def\@expl@sys@load@backend@@{}
-\def\@expl@push@filename@@{}
-\def\@expl@push@filename@aux@@{}
-\def\@expl@pop@filename@@{}
+\def\reserved@a#1{\ifdefined#1\else\def#1{}\fi}
+\reserved@a\@expl@sys@load@backend@@
+\reserved@a\@expl@push@filename@@
+\reserved@a\@expl@push@filename@aux@@
+\reserved@a\@expl@pop@filename@@
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -188,7 +215,9 @@
% In \texttt{2ekernel} mode, an error is fatal and building the format
% is aborted. Use \verb=\batchmode \read -1 to \tokenlist=, which errors
% with
-% \verb=! Emergency stop. (cannot \read from terminal in nonstop modes)=
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% ! Emergency stop. (cannot \read from terminal in nonstop modes)
+%\end{verbatim}
% and aborts the \TeX{} run. In \texttt{latexrelease} mode, raise an
% error and do nothing. Both ways, the error message shows the minimum
% \textsf{expl3} engine requirements.
@@ -214,7 +243,7 @@
%</2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
% We do not support a roll forward across 2019. You need to start
-% with 2019 if you want to get to 2020 or beyond.
+% with 2019 if you want to get to 2020 or beyond.
% \changes{v1.2g}{2020/11/24}{Support for roll forward (gh/434)}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*latexrelease>
@@ -225,21 +254,18 @@
--- I'm giving up!\MessageBreak\MessageBreak
Note that manually loading the expl3 package\MessageBreak
from your distribution is not enough}%
- \@@end % die
+ \batchmode \read -1 to \reserved@a
%</latexrelease>
}%
- {%
- \input expl3.ltx
- \ifdefined\NewDocumentCommand
- \else
- \IfFileExists{xparse.ltx}
- {\input xparse.ltx }
- {}%
- \fi
- }%
+ {\input expl3.ltx }%
}
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To support roll-forward for the case where \textsf{xparse} is fully
+% integrated into the kernel, we do not need to repeat the complex test
+% above as we can simply look for the marker command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
%<latexrelease> {expl3}{Pre-load expl3}%
%<latexrelease>\IfFileExists{expl3.ltx}
@@ -262,39 +288,12 @@
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
% \end{macrocode}
%
-%
-% Starting with 2020-10 the kernel contains most of the
-% \texttt{xparse} interfaces loaded above. These interfaces are
-% later used to define various user command. However, if somebody
-% with an earlier installation tries to roll forward (using a
-% \texttt{latexrelease} package from a newer release) this will not
-% work as the earlier kernel doesn't contain commands such as
-% \cs{NewDocumentCommand}.
-%
-% We therefore add code into \texttt{latexrelease.sty} to load the
-% \texttt{xparse} package of the current installation instead. this
-% may not work if the installation is really old, but roll forward
-% can't do miracles.
-%
-% If the kernel is 2020-10 or later \cs{NewDocumentCommand} is
-% already known (whether or not you roll forward or back) so
-% nothing happens, but if you start from am earlier kernel the
-% \texttt{xparse} package gets loaded by \texttt{latexrelease}.
-% \changes{v1.2g}{2020/11/24}{Load xparse in latexrelease if needed (gh/434)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {\NewDocumentCommand}{Emergency loading xparse}%
-%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\ifdefined\NewDocumentCommand \else
-%<latexrelease> \RequirePackage{xparse}
-%<latexrelease>\fi
-%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
-% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2021/01/21}
+% {Move \pkg{xparse} rollback code to \texttt{ltcmd.dtx}}
%
% \subsection{Using expl3 code}
%
-% In order to ease the implemantation of some new features in
+% In order to ease the implementation of some new features in
% \LaTeXe\ we may (temporarily) use some coding based on the
% \pkg{expl3}-code.
% Such macros will eventually vanish and may be changed
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx
index b4f716748a8..5d0acc8fdfb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
-%%
-%% File: ltfilehook.dtx (C) Copyright 2020 Frank Mittelbach,
-%% Phelype Oleinik & LaTeX Team
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2020-2021
+% Frank Mittelbach, Phelype Oleinik & LaTeX Team
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
% -------------------------------------------
@@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
%%% From File: ltfilehook.dtx
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\ltfilehookversion{v1.0e}
-\providecommand\ltfilehookdate{2021/01/07}
+\providecommand\ltfilehookversion{v1.0k}
+\providecommand\ltfilehookdate{2021/05/25}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%<*driver>
@@ -55,6 +55,10 @@
}
\ExplSyntaxOff
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{}
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{}
+
+
\usepackage{structuredlog} % for demonstration
\EnableCrossrefs
@@ -75,7 +79,7 @@
% \ltfilehookversion\ dated \ltfilehookdate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\
% Project.}}
%
-% \author{Frank Mittelbach}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach, Phelype Oleinik, \LaTeX{} Project Team}
%
% \maketitle
%
@@ -339,9 +343,12 @@
%
% \subsection{High-level interfaces for \LaTeX{}}
%
-% We do not provide any high-level \LaTeX{} commands (like
-% \pkg{filehook} or \pkg{scrlfile} do) but think that for package
-% writers the commands from for hook management are sufficient.
+% We do not provide any additional wrappers around the hooks (like
+% \pkg{filehook} or \pkg{scrlfile} do) because we believe that for
+% package writers the high-level commands from the hook management,
+% e.g., \cs{AddToHook}, etc.\
+% are sufficient and in fact easier to work with, given that the hooks
+% have consistent naming conventions.
%
%
%
@@ -371,7 +378,7 @@
% \em
% Please do not misuse this functionality and replace a file with
% another unless if really needed and only if the new version is
-% implementating the same functionality as the original one!
+% implementing the same functionality as the original one!
% \end{quote}
% \end{function}
%
@@ -447,6 +454,7 @@
%
%
% \section{The Implementation}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -455,6 +463,8 @@
%<@@=filehook>
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \changes{v1.0k}{2021/05/24}{Use \cs{msg_...} instead of \cs{__kernel_msg...}}
+%
%
% \subsection{Document and package-level commands}
%
@@ -517,7 +527,7 @@
% }
% A utility macro to trigger \pkg{expl3}'s file-parsing and lookup,
% and return a normalized representation of the file name. If the
-% queried file doesn't exist, no normalisation takes place.
+% queried file doesn't exist, no normalization takes place.
% The output of \cs{@@_file_parse_full_name:nN} is passed on to the
% |#2|---a 3-argument macro that takes the \meta{path}, \meta{base},
% and \meta{ext} parts of the file name.
@@ -578,9 +588,13 @@
% places don't use \cs{InputIfFileExists} directly (\cs{include}) or
% need \cs{CurrentFile} earlier (\cs{@onefilewithoptions}), so these
% are manually used elsewhere as well.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2021/03/18}
+% {Define \cs{g_@@_input_file_seq} to avoid losing data when
+% rolling back.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\tl_new:N \l_@@_internal_tl
-\seq_new:N \g_@@_input_file_seq
+\seq_if_exist:NF \g_@@_input_file_seq
+ { \seq_new:N \g_@@_input_file_seq }
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_file_push:
{
\seq_gpush:Nx \g_@@_input_file_seq
@@ -594,7 +608,7 @@
\seq_gpop:NNTF \g_@@_input_file_seq \l_@@_internal_tl
{ \exp_after:wN \@@_file_pop_assign:nnnn \l_@@_internal_tl }
{
- \msg_error:nnn { hooks } { should-not-happen }
+ \msg_error:nnn { kernel } { should-not-happen }
{ Tried~to~pop~from~an~empty~file~name~stack. }
}
}
@@ -619,6 +633,7 @@
% When rolling forward the following expl3 functions may not be defined.
% If we roll back the code does nothing.
% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/11/24}{Support for roll forward (gh/434)}
+% \InternalDetectionOff
% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
%<latexrelease> {\file_parse_full_name_apply:nN}{Roll forward help}%
@@ -640,7 +655,8 @@
%<latexrelease> {
%<latexrelease> \tl_if_empty:nTF {#3}
%<latexrelease> { \__file_parse_full_name_base:nw { } #2 . \s__file_stop {#1} }
-%<latexrelease> { \__file_parse_full_name_area:nw { #1 / #2 } #3 \s__file_stop }
+%<latexrelease> { \__file_parse_full_name_area:nw { #1 / #2 }
+%<latexrelease> #3 \s__file_stop }
%<latexrelease> }
%<latexrelease>\cs_new:Npn \__file_parse_full_name_base:nw #1 #2 . #3 \s__file_stop
%<latexrelease> {
@@ -654,7 +670,8 @@
%<latexrelease> }
%<latexrelease> { \__file_parse_full_name_tidy:nnnN {#1} { .#2 } }
%<latexrelease> }
-%<latexrelease> { \__file_parse_full_name_base:nw { #1 . #2 } #3 \s__file_stop }
+%<latexrelease> { \__file_parse_full_name_base:nw { #1 . #2 }
+%<latexrelease> #3 \s__file_stop }
%<latexrelease> }
%<latexrelease>\cs_new:Npn \__file_parse_full_name_tidy:nnnN #1 #2 #3 #4
%<latexrelease> {
@@ -672,6 +689,7 @@
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
+% \InternalDetectionOn
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<@@=>
@@ -844,6 +862,17 @@
%<latexrelease>\long\def \InputIfFileExists#1#2{%
%<latexrelease> \IfFileExists{#1}%
%<latexrelease> {#2\@addtofilelist{#1}\@@input \@filef@und}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Also undo the internal command as some packages unfortunately test
+% for their existence instead of using \cs{IfFormatAtLeastTF}.
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2021/02/08}{Undo the internal for robust
+% \cs{InputIfFileExists} in rollback (gh/494)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\expandafter\let\csname InputIfFileExists \endcsname\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\let\@input@file@exists@with@hooks\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\unqu@tefilef@und\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
@@ -894,7 +923,8 @@
@file-subst@
\@@_subst_file_normalize:Nn \use_ii_iii:nnn {#1}
}
- { \@@_subst_file_normalize:Nn \@@_file_name_compose:nnn {#2} }
+ { \@@_subst_file_normalize:Nn \@@_file_name_compose:nnn
+ {#2} }
\group_end:
}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_subst_remove:n #1
@@ -957,12 +987,18 @@
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% We are not fully rolling back the file substitutions in case a
+% rollback encounters a package that contains them, but is itself
+% not setup for rollback. So we just bypass them and hope for the
+% best.
+% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/12/04}{Don't drop file substitution commands on
+% rollback}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
%<latexrelease> {\declare@file@substitution}{File substitution}%
%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\let \declare@file@substitution \@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let \undeclare@file@substitution \@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let \declare@file@substitution \@gobbletwo
+%<latexrelease>\let \undeclare@file@substitution \@gobble
%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<*2ekernel>
@@ -981,6 +1017,7 @@
% \subsection{Selecting a file (\cs{set@curr@file})}
%
% \begin{macro}{\set@curr@file,\@curr@file,\@curr@file@reqd}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{2021/01/31}{set \cs{protect} to \cs{string} gh/481}
% Now we hook into \cs{set@curr@file} to resolve a possible file
% substitution, and add \cs{@expl@@@filehook@set@curr@file@@nNN}
% at the end, after \cs{@curr@file} is set.
@@ -988,7 +1025,7 @@
% A file name is built using
% \cs{expandafter}\cs{string}\cs{csname}\meta{filename}\cs{endcsname}
% to avoid expanding utf8 active characters. The \cs{csname} expands
-% the normalisation machinery and the routine to resolve a file
+% the normalization machinery and the routine to resolve a file
% substitution, returning a control sequence with the same name as the
% file.
%
@@ -1001,14 +1038,18 @@
% false positives. Here we define \cs{csname\cs{endcsname}} to
% expand to itself to avoid it matching the definition of some other
% control sequence.
+% \changes{v1.0i}{2021/04/20}
+% {Make \string~ expand to a string (tracks change in l3kernel)}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
%<latexrelease> {\set@curr@file}{Setting current file name}%
\def\set@curr@file#1{%
\begingroup
\escapechar\m@ne
+ \let\protect\string
+ \edef~{\string~}%
\expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\endcsname
\expandafter{\csname\endcsname}%
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1018,7 +1059,7 @@
% actual loaded file. \cs{@curr@file} is resolved first, to check if
% a substitution happens. If it doesn't,
% \cs{@expl@@@filehook@if@file@replaced@@TF} short-cuts and just copies
-% \cs{@curr@file}, otherwise the full normalisation procedure is
+% \cs{@curr@file}, otherwise the full normalization procedure is
% executed.
%
% At this stage the file name is parsed and normalized, but if the
@@ -1046,6 +1087,29 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\set@curr@file}{Setting current file name}%
+%<latexrelease>\def\set@curr@file#1{%
+%<latexrelease> \begingroup
+%<latexrelease> \escapechar\m@ne
+%<latexrelease> \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\endcsname
+%<latexrelease> \expandafter{\csname\endcsname}%
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@@@filehook@if@no@extension@@nTF{#1}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@tempswatrue}{\@tempswafalse}%
+%<latexrelease> \@kernel@make@file@csname\@curr@file
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@@@filehook@resolve@file@subst@@w {#1}%
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@@@filehook@if@file@replaced@@TF
+%<latexrelease> {\@kernel@make@file@csname\@curr@file@reqd
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@@@filehook@normalize@file@name@@w{#1}%
+%<latexrelease> \if@tempswa \@expl@@@filehook@drop@extension@@N\@curr@file@reqd \fi}%
+%<latexrelease> {\if@tempswa \@expl@@@filehook@drop@extension@@N\@curr@file \fi
+%<latexrelease> \global\let\@curr@file@reqd\@curr@file}%
+%<latexrelease> \@expl@@@filehook@clear@replacement@flag@@
+%<latexrelease> \endgroup}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2019/10/01}%
%<latexrelease> {\set@curr@file}{Setting current file name}%
%<latexrelease>\def\set@curr@file#1{%
@@ -1097,7 +1161,8 @@
\expandafter\ifx\csname\endcsname#1%
.tex\else\string#1\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
-%
+%
+% \begin{sloppypar}
% Then we call \cs{@expl@@@filehook@set@curr@file@@nNN} once for
% \cs{@curr@file} to set \cs[no-index]{CurrentFile(Path)Used} and once for
% \cs{@curr@file@reqd} to set \cs[no-index]{CurrentFile(Path)}.
@@ -1107,6 +1172,7 @@
% \cs{@curr@file} and \cs{@curr@file@reqd} differ. This macro is
% issued separate from \cs{set@curr@file} because it changes
% \cs{CurrentFile}, and side-effects would quickly get out of control.
+% \end{sloppypar}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@filehook@set@CurrentFile{%
\@expl@@@filehook@set@curr@file@@nNN{\@curr@file}%
@@ -1170,13 +1236,13 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@@_resolve_file_subst:w}
% \begin{macro}{\@@_normalize_file_name:w}
% \begin{macro}{\@@_file_name_compose:nnn}
-% Start by sanitising the file with \cs{@@_file_parse_full_name:nN}
+% Start by sanitizing the file with \cs{@@_file_parse_full_name:nN}
% then do \cs{@@_file_subst_begin:nnn}\Arg{path}\Arg{name}\Arg{ext}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {\@@_resolve_file_subst:w}{Replace files detect loops}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@@_resolve_file_subst:w}{Replace files detect loops}%
\ExplSyntaxOn
\cs_new:Npn \@@_resolve_file_subst:w #1 \@nil
{ \@@_file_parse_full_name:nN {#1} \@@_file_subst_begin:nnn }
@@ -1195,7 +1261,7 @@
% a flag to remember if a substitution happened. We use this in
% \cs{set@curr@file} to short-circuit some of it in case no
% substitution happened (by far the most common case, so it's worth
-% optimising). The flag raised during the file substitution algorithm
+% optimizing). The flag raised during the file substitution algorithm
% must be explicitly cleared after the \cs{@@_if_file_replaced:TF}
% conditional is no longer needed, otherwise further uses of
% \cs{@@_if_file_replaced:TF} will wrongly return true.
@@ -1258,8 +1324,8 @@
% the macro below, \cs{@@_file_subst_loop:cc} is called with
% \cs[no-index]{@file-subst@\meta{file}} and
% \cs[no-index]{@file-subst@\cs[no-index]{@file-subst@\meta{file}}};
-% that is, the substitution of \meta{file} and the substution of that
-% substution: the Tortoise walks one step while the Hare walks two.
+% that is, the substitution of \meta{file} and the substitution of that
+% substitution: the Tortoise walks one step while the Hare walks two.
%
% Within \cs{@@_file_subst_loop:NN} the two substitutions are
% compared, and if they lead to the same file it means that there is
@@ -1275,7 +1341,7 @@
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {\@@_file_subst_tortoise_hare:nn}{Tortoise and Hare}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@@_file_subst_tortoise_hare:nn}{Tortoise and Hare}%
\ExplSyntaxOn
\cs_new:Npn \@@_file_subst_tortoise_hare:nn #1 #2 #3
{
@@ -1428,7 +1494,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%<@@=>
% \end{macrocode}
-%
+% \InternalDetectionOff
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
@@ -1474,7 +1540,7 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_eq:NN \@expl@@@filehook@file@push@@
- \__filehook_file_push:
+ \__filehook_file_push:
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1486,6 +1552,7 @@
\cs_new_eq:NN \@expl@@@filehook@file@pop@assign@@nnnn
\__filehook_file_pop_assign:nnnn
% \end{macrocode}
+% \InternalDetectionOn
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1545,7 +1612,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@_log_file_record:n}
-% This macro is responsible for increasing and decresing the file
+% This macro is responsible for increasing and decreasing the file
% nesting level, as well as printing to the log. The argument is
% either |STOPTART| or |STOP| and the action it takes on the nesting
% integer depends on that.
@@ -1664,8 +1731,8 @@
% \Finale
%
%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\endinput
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
index 99be77c8449..bcaac582208 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltfiles.dtx}
- [2020/10/04 v1.2j LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)]
+ [2021/04/17 v1.2m LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltfiles.dtx}
@@ -49,6 +49,9 @@
\providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{}
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{}
+
\begin{document}
\MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{latex}
\maketitle
@@ -192,19 +195,6 @@
% \end{oldcomments}
%
%
-% \task{???}{Do we use @unused or mainaux?}
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \begin{macro}{\@unused}
-% Allocate read stream for testing and output stream.
-% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/11/07}
-% {move here from ltdefns, remove duplicate \cs{@mainaux}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newread\@inputcheck
-\newwrite\@unused
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
% \begin{macro}{\@mainaux}
% \begin{macro}{\@partaux}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -334,7 +324,7 @@
% locally in the output routine. In particular it allows hyphenation
% in the page head even if the page break happens in verbatim.
% If this has already been set by a package, set to the value of |\language|
-% at this spoint.
+% at this point.
% \changes{v1.1n}{2017/03/10}{Save language default}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\document@default@language\m@ne
@@ -456,18 +446,25 @@
% harmless), however, in more complicated scenarios where several
% full documents are combined to a single document it might get
% applied several times with harmful effects. We therefore
-% explicitly drop it at this point. the coing is somewhat obscure
+% explicitly drop it at this point. the coding is somewhat obscure
% due to the name of the macro which requires constructing.
+% \InternalDetectionOff
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef \@kernel@after@begindocument@before {%
\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname
__hook env/document/begin\endcsname
\noexpand\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
+% \InternalDetectionOn
%
+% These internal hooks are already declared earlier (in
+% \texttt{ltexpl}) so that other modules could write to them.
+% \changes{v1.2m}{2021/04/17}{Move \cs{@kernel@before@begindocument} and
+% \cs{@kernel@after@begindocument} init earlier so that other modules can
+% write to the hooks}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\let \@kernel@before@begindocument \@empty
-\let \@kernel@after@begindocument \@empty
+%\let \@kernel@before@begindocument \@empty
+%\let \@kernel@after@begindocument \@empty
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
@@ -710,15 +707,15 @@
\@latex@error{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha
\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% Here the normalisation will add |.tex| for all files, (it uses the
-% the same normalisation as the hooks), so we need to remove that
+% Here the normalization will add |.tex| for all files, (it uses
+% the same normalization as the hooks), so we need to remove that
% manually. \cs{@strip@tex@ext} does that.
% \begin{macrocode}
\set@curr@file{#1}%
\edef\@curr@file{\@strip@tex@ext\@curr@file}%
% \end{macrocode}
% For historical reasons \cs{@include} expects an argument
-% delimited by a space. This is kept (though uncessary now) to avoid
+% delimited by a space. This is kept (though unnecessary now) to avoid
% errors in other packages that use \cs{@include} directly.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\@include\expandafter{\@curr@file} % deliberate space
@@ -726,13 +723,13 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Here in \cs{includeonly} we also need to strip |.tex| after
-% normalisation:
+% normalization:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\includeonly#1{%
\@partswtrue
% \end{macrocode}
% Because the argument to |\includeonly| is a comma-separated list
-% of filenames where there may be comma's precedeing some of the
+% of filenames where there may be comma's preceding some of the
% filenames or trailing them. Therefore we need to take the list
% apart, remove the unwanted spaces while leaving the spaces
% \emph{in} the filenames intact.
@@ -996,10 +993,11 @@
% A side effect of the new code is that we will see quotes around
% file name displays where there haven't been any before.
%
-% For compatibilty with existing code using |{abc}.tex| or |{one.two}.png|
-% an initial brace group is discarded before expansion and |\string| is applied
-% The content of the brace group is discarded. This means that a leading space
-% will be lost unless protected (by |{ }| or |" "| or |\space|) but filenames
+% For compatibility with existing code using |{abc}.tex| or
+% |{one.two}.png|, an initial brace group is discarded before
+% expansion and |\string| is applied. The content of the brace
+% group is discarded. This means that a leading space will be lost
+% unless protected (by |{ }| or |" "| or |\space|) but filenames
% with a space are hopefully rare.
%
% \changes{v1.2a}{2019/07/01}{Support UTF-8}
@@ -1058,7 +1056,7 @@
%
% \changes{v1.2a}{2019/07/01}{Support UTF-8}
% \changes{v1.2b}{2019/08/27}{Make command robust}
-% \changes{v1.2d}{2019/10/26}{dont quote name}
+% \changes{v1.2d}{2019/10/26}{don't quote name}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\IfFileExists[1]{%
\set@curr@file{#1}%
@@ -1066,30 +1064,114 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\quote@name}{Quote file names}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\quote@name\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\quote@@name\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\unquote@name\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\long\def \IfFileExists#1#2#3{%
+%<latexrelease> \openin\@inputcheck#1 %
+%<latexrelease> \ifeof\@inputcheck
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\input@path\@undefined
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+%<latexrelease> \else
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{\@iffileonpath{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \else
+%<latexrelease> \closein\@inputcheck
+%<latexrelease> \edef\@filef@und{#1 }%
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{#2}%
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \reserved@a}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists@}
% \changes{v0.9b}{1993/12/04}{Macro added}
% \changes{v0.9p}{1994/01/18}{New Definition}
% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/25}{(CAR) added \cs{long}}
-% \changes{v1.2d}{2019/10/26}{quote on openin}%
+% \changes{v1.2d}{2019/10/26}{quote on openin}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{2021/03/12}{Allow unbalanced conditionals (gh/530)}
% Argument |#1| is |\@curr@file| so catcode 12 string with no quotes.
+%
+% The original definition picked up arguments |#2| and |#3| in a
+% way that they couldn't contain unbalanced conditionals. A better
+% implementation would have been not to pick up the arguments at
+% all but instead use the usual \cs{@firstoftwo} and
+% \cs{secondoftwo}. However, that changes how |#| is interpreted
+% and so we can't do that nowaways without invalidating a lot of
+% code. Therefore the somewhat curious construction near the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\IfFileExists@}{manage unbalanced conditionals}
\long\def \IfFileExists@#1#2#3{%
\openin\@inputcheck"#1" %
\ifeof\@inputcheck
\ifx\input@path\@undefined
- \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+ \let\reserved@a\@secondoftwo
\else
- \def\reserved@a{\@iffileonpath{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+ \def\reserved@a{\@iffileonpath{#1}}%
\fi
\else
\closein\@inputcheck
\edef\@filef@und{"#1" }%
- \def\reserved@a{#2}%
+ \let\reserved@a\@firstoftwo
\fi
- \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is just there so that any |#| inside |#2| or |#3| needs
+% doubling (as that was the case in the past).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\reserved@a
+ \expandafter{\reserved@a{#2}{#3}}%
+\reserved@a}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2019/10/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\IfFileExists@}{manage unbalanced conditionals}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\long\def \IfFileExists@#1#2#3{%
+%<latexrelease> \openin\@inputcheck"#1" %
+%<latexrelease> \ifeof\@inputcheck
+%<latexrelease> \ifx\input@path\@undefined
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+%<latexrelease> \else
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{\@iffileonpath{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \else
+%<latexrelease> \closein\@inputcheck
+%<latexrelease> \edef\@filef@und{"#1" }%
+%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{#2}%
+%<latexrelease> \fi
+%<latexrelease> \reserved@a}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\IfFileExists@}{manage unbalanced conditionals}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\IfFileExists@\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\@iffileonpath}
% If the file is not found by |\openin|, and |\input@path| is defined,
% look in all the directories specified in |\input@path|.
@@ -1103,6 +1185,10 @@
% \changes{v1.2d}{2019/10/26}{quote on openin}%
% \changes{v1.2f}{2019/11/11}{make \cs{@filef@und} match quoting used on \cs{openin}}%
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2019/10/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@iffileonpath}{Quote file names}
\long\def\@iffileonpath#1{%
\let\reserved@a\@secondoftwo
\expandafter\@tfor\expandafter\reserved@b\expandafter
@@ -1122,28 +1208,7 @@
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\quote@name}{Quote file names}%
-%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\let\quote@name\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\quote@@name\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\unquote@name\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\let\IfFileExists@\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\long\def \IfFileExists#1#2#3{%
-%<latexrelease> \openin\@inputcheck#1 %
-%<latexrelease> \ifeof\@inputcheck
-%<latexrelease> \ifx\input@path\@undefined
-%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{#3}%
-%<latexrelease> \else
-%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{\@iffileonpath{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
-%<latexrelease> \fi
-%<latexrelease> \else
-%<latexrelease> \closein\@inputcheck
-%<latexrelease> \edef\@filef@und{#1 }%
-%<latexrelease> \def\reserved@a{#2}%
-%<latexrelease> \fi
-%<latexrelease> \reserved@a}
+%<latexrelease> {\quote@name}{Quote file names}
%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\long\def\@iffileonpath#1{%
%<latexrelease> \let\reserved@a\@secondoftwo
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
index aa4219723af..19f82934aa6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltfinal.dtx}
- [2020-09-26 v2.2j LaTeX Kernel (Final Settings)]
+ [2021/04/18 v2.2o LaTeX Kernel (Final Settings)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltfinal.dtx}
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
%
%
% \section{Final settings}
-% This section contains the final settings for \LaTeX. It initialises
+% This section contains the final settings for \LaTeX. It initializes
% some debugging and typesetting parameters, sets the default
% |\catcode|s and uc/lc codes, and inputs the hyphenation file.
%
@@ -90,6 +90,9 @@
% \changes{v2.0s}{2016/10/15}{Tidy up status of char 127}
% \changes{v2.2i}{2020/08/21}{Integration of new hook management interface}
%
+%
+%
+%
% \subsection{Debugging}
%
% By default, \LaTeX{} shows statistics:
@@ -150,7 +153,7 @@
%\begin{macro}{\newXeTeXintercharclass}
% \changes{v2.0a}{2014/12/30}{macro added}
% \changes{v2.0b}{2015/01/23}{use reserved count 257}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2015/04/28}{define \cs{xe@alloc@intercharclass} for compatibility with older xelatex initilisation}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2015/04/28}{define \cs{xe@alloc@intercharclass} for compatibility with older xelatex initialization}
%\begin{macro}{\xe@alloc@intercharclass}
%\begin{macro}{\e@alloc@intercharclass@top}
% \changes{v2.0j}{2016/01/04}{Start allocation at one not three}
@@ -239,7 +242,73 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-%
+% \begin{macro}{trace_stack_levels}
+% Now define the Lua function to emulate \cs{tracingstacklevels} and
+% install it in the \texttt{input_level_string} callback.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In \texttt{latexrelease} mode we always remove the function from
+% the callback, then add the correct version later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\ifx\directlua\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\else
+%<latexrelease> \directlua{%
+%<latexrelease> if luatexbase.callbacktypes['input_level_string'] and %
+%<latexrelease> luatexbase.in_callback('input_level_string','tracingstacklevels') then
+%<latexrelease> luatexbase.remove_from_callback('input_level_string','tracingstacklevels')
+%<latexrelease> end}%
+%<latexrelease>\fi
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}{trace_stack_levels}%
+%<latexrelease> {Lua trace_stack_levels function}%
+\ifx\directlua\@undefined
+\else
+%<*2ekernel>
+ \expanded{%
+ \everyjob{\the\everyjob
+ \noexpand%\directlua
+%</2ekernel>
+ \directlua{%
+ local function trace_stack_levels (input_ptr)
+ local tracingstacklevels = tex.count.tracingstacklevels
+ if tex.tracingmacros > 0 or input_ptr < tracingstacklevels then
+ if tracingstacklevels > 0 then
+ if input_ptr < tracingstacklevels then
+ return "\string\n\string~" .. string.rep(".",input_ptr)
+ else
+ return "\string~\string~"
+ end
+ else
+ return "\string\n"
+ end
+ else
+ return ""
+ end
+ end
+%<latexrelease> if luatexbase.callbacktypes['input_level_string'] then
+ luatexbase.add_to_callback('input_level_string',
+ trace_stack_levels,'tracingstacklevels')
+%<latexrelease> end
+ }%
+%<*2ekernel>
+ }}%
+%</2ekernel>
+\fi
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then for the full rollback, just do nothing, since the function
+% was already taken out of the rollback above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{trace_stack_levels}%
+%<latexrelease> {Lua trace_stack_levels function}%
+%<latexrelease>% Nothing here
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
% The default values of the picture and |\fbox| parameters:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -522,12 +591,13 @@
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2017/04/15}%
-%<latexrelease> {\document@default@language}{Save language for hyphenation}%
+%<latexrelease> {\document@default@language}{Save language for hyphenation}%
\let\document@default@language\m@ne
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\document@default@language}{Save language for hyphenation}%
+%<latexrelease> {\document@default@language}{Save language for hyphenation}%
+%
%<latexrelease>\let\document@default@language\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<*2ekernel>
@@ -562,6 +632,52 @@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% For pdf\TeX\ preload and enable automatic glyph to Unicode mapping
+% for more reliable copy and paste support.
+% \changes{v2.2l}{2021/01/21}{Load glyphtounicode.tex for pdf\TeX}
+% \changes{v2.2m}{2021/02/25}{Improve speed of ToUnicode everyjob loading code}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\pdfgentounicode}{Preload glyphtounicode}%
+\ifx \pdfgentounicode \@undefined \else
+%<*2ekernel>
+ \ifnum 0=0%
+ \ifdefined\pdftexversion
+% \pdftexversion<140 does not have \pdfgentounicode, so we only check higher values
+ \ifnum \pdftexversion=140 \ifnum\pdftexrevision<22 1\fi\fi
+ \fi
+ \relax
+%</2ekernel>
+ \input glyphtounicode
+%<*2ekernel>
+ \else
+ \begingroup
+ \everyeof{\noexpand}\endlinechar-1
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \everyjob{\the\everyjob\@@input glyphtounicode }%
+ }\x
+ \fi
+%</2ekernel>
+ \pdfgentounicode=1
+\fi
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When rolling back we can't unload the glyphtounicode mappings, but we
+% can reset |\pdfgentounicode| to ensure that they aren't used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\pdfgentounicode}{Preload glyphtounicode}%
+%<latexrelease>\ifx \pdfgentounicode \@undefined \else
+%<latexrelease> \pdfgentounicode=0
+%<latexrelease>\fi
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \subsection{Input encoding}
%
% \changes{v2.1a}{2018/03/25}{default to UTF-8}
@@ -632,7 +748,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\UseRawInputEncoding}
% \changes{v2.1a}{2018/03/25}{Macro added}
-% Reset 8 bit characters to catcode 12 so the input endcoing matches the ``Raw''
+% Reset 8 bit characters to catcode 12 so the input encoding matches the ``Raw''
% font encoding.
% Useful for special behaviours, or for compatibility with older \LaTeX\ formats.
% \changes{v2.1b}{2018/04/06}{Undo changes to \cs{DeclareFontEncoding@} and
@@ -939,7 +1055,7 @@
\expandafter\reserved@a\@uclclist\reserved@b{\reserved@b\@gobble}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Tell UTF-8 processing to process chars even though we are in an \cs{protected@edef}.
-% \changes{v2.1h}{2019/09/14}{Expand UTF8 chrs when case changing (github/177)}
+% \changes{v2.1h}{2019/09/14}{Expand UTF8 chars when case changing (github/177)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\UTF@two@octets@noexpand\@empty
\let\UTF@three@octets@noexpand\@empty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
index dee9a10197e..ed25db3ed10 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
%
%<*driver>
% \fi
-\ProvidesFile{ltfloat.dtx}[2020/04/09 v1.2d LaTeX Kernel (Floats)]
+\ProvidesFile{ltfloat.dtx}[2021/03/03 v1.2f LaTeX Kernel (Floats)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltfloat.dtx}
@@ -356,7 +356,7 @@
% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}
% {Missing percents reinserted after 4, 8: these are not numbers.}
% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Old version reinstated temporarily}
-% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Sanitisation added temporarily}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Sanitization added temporarily}
% The first part of this sets the count register that stores all
% the information about the type and fps of the float.
%
@@ -574,7 +574,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setnobreak}
% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Macro added}
-% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unnecessary \cs{global} before
% \cs{@nobreak...}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def \@setnobreak{%
@@ -588,7 +588,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setminipage}
% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Macro added}
-% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unnecessary \cs{global} before
% \cs{@minipage...}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def \@setminipage{%
@@ -734,7 +734,7 @@
% {Use new \cs{color@hbox} concept.}
% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Corrected position of \cs{outer@nobreak}}
% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Added reset of minipage flag}
-% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unnecessary \cs{global} before
% \cs{@minipage...}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@minipagefalse
@@ -1002,9 +1002,14 @@
% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Added \cs{@setminipage} etc}
% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Added resetting of size and font}
% \changes{v1.1m}{1995/05/25}{(CAR) Resettings moved to hook}
-% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unnecessary \cs{global} before
% \cs{@minipage...}}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{2021/02/03}{Explicitly end with \cs{par} (gh/489)}
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@savemarbox}{Explicit par for marginpar}%
\long\def \@savemarbox #1#2{%
\global\setbox #1%
\color@vbox
@@ -1012,12 +1017,35 @@
\hsize\marginparwidth
\@parboxrestore
\@marginparreset
- #2%
+ #2\par
\@minipagefalse
\outer@nobreak
}%
\color@endbox
}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@savemarbox}{Explicit par for marginpar}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\long\def \@savemarbox #1#2{%
+%<latexrelease> \global\setbox #1%
+%<latexrelease> \color@vbox
+%<latexrelease> \vtop{%
+%<latexrelease> \hsize\marginparwidth
+%<latexrelease> \@parboxrestore
+%<latexrelease> \@marginparreset
+%<latexrelease> #2%
+%<latexrelease> \@minipagefalse
+%<latexrelease> \outer@nobreak
+%<latexrelease> }%
+%<latexrelease> \color@endbox
+%<latexrelease>}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -1026,7 +1054,7 @@
%
% The rational for allowing these normally global flags to be set
% locally here, via |\@parboxrestore| was stated originally by
-% Donald Arsenau and extended by Chris Rowley.
+% Donald Arseneau and extended by Chris Rowley.
% It is because these flags are only set globally to
% true by section commands, and these should never appear within
% marginals or floats or, indeed, in any group; and they are only ever
@@ -1480,7 +1508,13 @@
% {Removed \cs{normalcolor} (again)}
% \changes{v1.1t}{1997/11/19}
% {Missing percent, again}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{2021/02/10}{Explicitly run \cs{par} at the end of footnote text
+% in preparation for paragraph hooks}
% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@footnotetext}{footnotetext tagging}%
\long\def\@footnotetext#1{\insert\footins{%
\reset@font\footnotesize
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
@@ -1493,7 +1527,32 @@
\color@begingroup
\@makefntext{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+ \par
\color@endgroup}}%
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@footnotetext}{footnotetext tagging}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\long\def\@footnotetext#1{\insert\footins{%
+%<latexrelease> \reset@font\footnotesize
+%<latexrelease> \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+%<latexrelease> \splittopskip\footnotesep
+%<latexrelease> \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+%<latexrelease> \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+%<latexrelease> \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+%<latexrelease> \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+%<latexrelease> }%
+%<latexrelease> \color@begingroup
+%<latexrelease> \@makefntext{%
+%<latexrelease> \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+%<latexrelease> \color@endgroup}}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -1558,10 +1617,51 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@mpfn{footnote}
\def\thempfn{\thefootnote}
-%</2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footref}
+% This command generates a footnote mark. The value is produced by
+% referencing a \cs{label} placed into a \cs{footnote} elsewhere
+% (can be one in the main galley or in a minipage).
+% \changes{v1.2f}{2021/02/16}{\cs{footref} added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\footref}{Add footref}%
+\def\footref#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref{#1}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@footnotemark
+}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We don't remove it when rolling back so that packages offered it
+% in the past do not need to alter their behavior in a rollback
+% situation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\footref}{Add footref}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease> % \let\footref\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \Finale
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
index 0a44d5acf1e..5f70053a688 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltfntcmd.dtx}
- [2019/12/17 v3.4c LaTeX Kernel (Font commands)]
+ [2020/12/05 v3.4c LaTeX Kernel (Font commands)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltfntcmd.dtx}
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@
% character in an unsloped font; we believe (in early 2003) that
% this is perhaps inefficient but not dangerous.
%
-% It also now checks for empty contents of the text command and optimises
+% It also now checks for empty contents of the text command and optimizes
% this case. Some care is also taken to check that doing dangerous
% things in vertical mode is avoided.
%
@@ -539,7 +539,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmaybe@ic}
% \changes{v3.4a}{2009/12/14}{Macro added}
-% Switch used soley within |\maybe@ic| not interfering with other
+% Switch used solely within |\maybe@ic| not interfering with other
% switches.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmaybe@ic
@@ -585,7 +585,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\do \t@st@ic
% \end{macrocode}
-% Frank thinks that the next bit it is inefficient if done after
+% Frank thinks that the next bit is inefficient if done after
% the second change. Chris thinks that most all of this is
% inefficient for the commonest cases: but that is the price of a
% cleverer algorithm. It is certainly needed to deal with the use
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx
index a66a26cd39c..86c84b111fb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2019-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
%
%
\ProvidesFile{ltfssaxes.dtx}
- [2020/08/21 v1.0g LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Axes handing)]
+ [2021/03/18 v1.0i LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Axes handing)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\begin{document}
@@ -68,11 +68,11 @@
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
-% Everything in the this file got introduced 2020/02/02, so we do a
-% single rollback (for now).
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2020/12/04}{Reorganized the rollback data}
+%
+% Everything in the this file got introduced 2020/02/02, so we use large rollback
+% chunks, only interrupted if necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*2ekernel>
-%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontSeriesChangeRule}{Series change rules}%
@@ -168,13 +168,13 @@
% request (i.e., second argument).
%
% In particular this is also true for cases involving \texttt{m},
-% e.g., \texttt{bm} (bold medium width) which automatially gets
+% e.g., \texttt{bm} (bold medium width) which automatically gets
% reduced result in \texttt{b} or \texttt{mc} (medium weight
% condensed) which becomes \texttt{c} as a result.
%
% \item
%
-% Only a few entries have ``alterative'' values and perhaps most of
+% Only a few entries have ``alternative'' values and perhaps most of
% them should get dropped. Or maybe not \ldots{} needs some thought
% perhaps.
%
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@
% to stay with \texttt{b} when a change to \texttt{c} is requested
% and \texttt{bc} doesn't exist, than to go to first change the
% shape to \texttt{n} and then find that \texttt{bc/n} doesn't
-% exist either and thus ending up wth \texttt{m/n}.
+% exist either and thus ending up with \texttt{m/n}.
%
% \item
%
@@ -678,21 +678,59 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
-
-
+% Supporting rollback \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontSeriesChangeRule}{Series change rules}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\DeclareFontSeriesChangeRule\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
% \subsection{Changing to a new series}
%
%
-
-% \begin{macro}{\if@forced@series}
-% If the series gets forced we need to know that fact later on.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\fontseries}{delay fontseries update}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fontseries}
+% The \cs{fontseries} command takes one argument which is the requested new
+% font series. In the orginal implementation it simply saved the
+% expanded value in \cs{f@series}. Now we do a bit more processing
+% and look up the final value in the font series data base. This is
+% done by \cs{merge@font@series}. But the lookup should be done
+% within the target family and call to \cs{fontseries} might be
+% followed by a \cs{fontfamily} call. So we delay the processing to
+% \cs{selectfont} and only record the necessary action in
+% \cs{delayed@f@adjustment}.
% \changes{v1.0c}{2020/02/10}{Switch \cs{if@forced@series} added}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2020/12/04}{Distangle series and shape update (gh/444)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@forced@series
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseries[1]{\@forced@seriesfalse
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\delayed@f@adjustment\expandafter
+ {\delayed@f@adjustment\delayed@merge@font@series{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
+% \begin{macro}{\delayed@f@adjustment}
+% The macro holding the delayed action(s) for use in \cs{selectfont}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\delayed@f@adjustment\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% \begin{macro}{\fontseriesforce}
% To change unconditionally to a new series you can use
% \cs{fontseriesforce}. Of course, if the series doesn't exist for
@@ -700,24 +738,69 @@
% dependency on the current series.
% \changes{v1.0c}{2020/02/10}{Switch \cs{if@forced@series} added}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseriesforce[1]{\@forced@seriestrue\edef\f@series{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseriesforce[1]{\@forced@seriestrue
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\delayed@f@adjustment\expandafter
+ {\delayed@f@adjustment\edef\f@series{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \begin{macro}{\fontseries}
-% The \cs{fontseries} command takes one argument which is the requested new
-% font series. In the orginal implementation it simply saved the
-% expanded value in \cs{f@series}. Now we do a bit more processing
-% and look up the final value in the font series data base. This is
-% done by \cs{merge@font@series}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@forced@series}
+% If the series gets forced we need to know that fact later on.
% \changes{v1.0c}{2020/02/10}{Switch \cs{if@forced@series} added}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseries[1]{\@forced@seriesfalse\merge@font@series{#1}}
+\newif\if@forced@series
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-
-
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
+%<latexrelease> {\fontseries}{delay fontseries update}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseries[1]{\@forced@seriesfalse
+%<latexrelease> \merge@font@series{#1}}
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseriesforce[1]{\@forced@seriestrue
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@series{#1}}
+%<latexrelease>\let\delayed@f@adjustment\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For a roll forward we may have to define \cs{if@forced@series}
+% but this needs doing in a way that \TeX{} doesn't see it when
+% skipping over conditionals.
+% \changes{v1.0i}{2021/03/18}
+% {Fix rollforward definition.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\expandafter\newif\csname if@forced@series\endcsname
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\fontseries}{delay fontseries update}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseries[1]{\edef\f@series{#1}}
+%<latexrelease>\let\fontseriesforce\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
+%<latexrelease> {\merge@font@series}{Merge series values}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\merge@font@series}
% We look up the data base value by expanding the right command
% twice. If no such value exist then the result will be \cs{relax}
@@ -734,9 +817,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-
-
-
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\merge@font@series@}
% This now defines the new \cs{f@series}:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -758,11 +841,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we check if the desired result for the series
% (\texttt{\#1}) exists for the font family and the current shape.
-% As the \texttt{.fd} is perhaps not loaded yet, we first
-% have to do that, otherwise the test would fail even if the face
-% is actually available.
+% All this happens inside \cs{selectfont} which has already taken care to load
+% the \texttt{.fd}, file if necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \maybe@load@fontshape
\edef\reserved@a{\f@encoding /\f@family /#1/\f@shape}%
\ifcsname \reserved@a \endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -798,9 +879,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% It is possible that the previous font and the new one are
% actually identical (and the font was not found because it still
-% needs loading) in which case a warning would look rather odd. So
-% we make a quick check for that (which is the reason why we defined
-% \cs{@reserveda} above.
+% needs loading) in which case a warning would look rather odd. So
+% we make a quick check for that (which is the reason why we
+% defined \cs{@reserveda} above instead of doing inline testing
+% inside \cs{ifcsname}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@font@shape@subst@warning{%
\edef\reserved@b{\curr@fontshape}%
@@ -814,13 +896,71 @@
%
%
%
+% \begin{macro}{\merge@font@series@without@substitution,
+% \merge@font@series@without@substitution@,
+% \delayed@merge@font@series}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2020/12/22}{Distangle series and shape update (gh/444)}
+%
+% \cs{merge@font@series@without@substitution} works like
+% \cs{merge@font@series}, i.e., it looks up the combination in the
+% rule base and if there exists an entry it uses it and if not it
+% uses the new series value. However, it doesn't check if there is
+% actually a font face with the new series value as
+% \cs{merge@font@series} does. This simplified command is used in
+% \cs{selectfont} at a point where other font attributes are not
+% yet updated so that checking the font face might result incorrect
+% in substitutions.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\merge@font@series@without@substitution#1{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \merge@font@series@without@substitution@
+ \csname series@\f@series @#1\endcsname
+ {#1}%
+ \@nil
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\merge@font@series@without@substitution@#1#2#3\@nil{%
+ \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@empty
+ \set@target@series{#2}%
+ \else
+ \set@target@series{#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\delayed@merge@font@series}
+%
+% When we delay the merge action in \cs{fontseries} we first
+% attempt to use merging without substitution. If that results in a
+% non-existing font face the merge is redone in \cs{selectfont}
+% using a version with substitution. See \cs{selectfont} for details.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2020/12/22}{Distangle series and shape update
+% (gh/444)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\delayed@merge@font@series\merge@font@series@without@substitution
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maybe@load@fontshape}
% A small helper that we use a couple of times: try loading a
% fontshape (in a group because \cs{try@load@fontshape} normalizes
-% catcodes).
+% catcodes and we also want to change \cs{typeout} so that it
+% doesn't report missing \texttt{.fd} files on the terminal).
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\maybe@load@fontshape{\begingroup\try@load@fontshape\endgroup}
+\def\maybe@load@fontshape{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let \typeout \@font@info
+ \try@load@fontshape
+ \endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -845,7 +985,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% We need to \cs{edef} the argument first in case it starts with a
% conditional. Then we check (and perhaps drop) an ``m'' from the
-% value andassign the result to \cs{f@series}.
+% value and assign the result to \cs{f@series}.
% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/02/27}{Drop ``m'' only in a specific set of values (gh/293)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\f@series{#1}%
@@ -916,6 +1056,30 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% Supporting rollback \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\merge@font@series}{Merge series values}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@series\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@series@\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\@font@shape@subst@warning\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@series@without@substitution\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@series@without@substitution@\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\delayed@merge@font@series\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\maybe@load@fontshape\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\set@target@series\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\series@maybe@drop@one@m\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\series@drop@one@m\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+
@@ -925,6 +1089,12 @@
% that is desirable), essentially building in an ``sc''
% axis).
%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
+%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontShapeChangeRule}{Font shape change rules}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFontShapeChangeRule}
@@ -948,8 +1118,9 @@
% resets everything and \texttt{up} changes italic or slanted to
% upright and \texttt{ulc} undoes small caps.
%
-% So we now offer \cs{normalshape} (using \cs{shapedefault} which is normally the same as
-% calling both \cs{ulcshape} and \cs{upshape}, only more efficient.
+% So we now offer \cs{normalshape} (using \cs{shapedefault} which
+% is normally the same as calling both \cs{ulcshape} and
+% \cs{upshape}, only more efficient.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ulcshape}
@@ -1080,7 +1251,7 @@
% \texttt{n}. This is the way \texttt{fontspec} implemented its
% version on this interface, so this rule means we are also
% compatible with the way \texttt{fontspec} behaved. Still it
-% remains an odditywhic I would rather liked to have avoided.
+% remains an oddity which I would rather liked to have avoided.
% \begin{macrocode}
%\DeclareFontShapeChangeRule {sc}{up} {sc} {}
\DeclareFontShapeChangeRule {sc}{up} {n} {}
@@ -1100,7 +1271,7 @@
% \texttt{ulc} in \cs{f@series} which most certainly doesn't
% exist. So when a font is later selected that would result in a
% substitution (so no harm done really). Alternatively, we could in
-% this case use \texttt{n} as aternative, which may be a bit
+% this case use \texttt{n} as alternative, which may be a bit
% faster, but such a setup would be so weird in the first place
% that this isn't worth the effort.
%
@@ -1134,26 +1305,97 @@
\DeclareFontShapeChangeRule {sw}{up} {n} {}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% Supporting rollback \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontShapeChangeRule}{Font shape change rules}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\DeclareFontShapeChangeRule\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\ulcshape\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\ulcdefault\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\swshape\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\swdefault\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\sscshape\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\sscdefault\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
%
% \subsection{Changing to a new shape}
%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\fontshape}{Font shape change}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\fontshape}
% Again the \cs{fontshape} now has to do a lookup to get to its new
% value in \cs{f@shape}. The method is exactly the same as in
% \cs{fontseries}.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2020/12/04}{Distangle series and shape update (gh/444)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshape[1]{\merge@font@shape{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshape[1]
+ {\expandafter\def\expandafter\delayed@f@adjustment\expandafter
+ {\delayed@f@adjustment\delayed@merge@font@shape{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fontshapeforce}
% The unconditional version:
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2020/12/04}{Distangle series and shape update (gh/444)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshapeforce[1]{\edef\f@shape{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshapeforce[1]
+ {\expandafter\def\expandafter\delayed@f@adjustment\expandafter
+ {\delayed@f@adjustment\edef\f@shape{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+%
+% Supporting rollback \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
+%<latexrelease> {\fontshape}{Font shape change}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshape[1]{\merge@font@shape{#1}}
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshapeforce[1]{\edef\f@shape{#1}}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\fontshape}{Font shape change}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshape [1]{\edef\f@shape{#1}}
+%<latexrelease>\let\fontshapeforce\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+
+
+
+
+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
+%<latexrelease> {\merge@font@shape}{Font shape change rules}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\merge@font@shape}
% Look up the database entry (if existing) and act accordingly.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1178,9 +1420,12 @@
\ifx\reserved@a\@empty
\edef\f@shape{#2}%
\else
- \maybe@load@fontshape
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{reserved@a} is used in \cs{@font@shape@subst@warning} so we
+% have to define it in addition to do the \cs{ifcsname} test
+% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\reserved@a{\f@encoding /\f@family /\f@series/#1}%
- \ifcsname \reserved@a\endcsname
+ \ifcsname \reserved@a\endcsname
\edef\f@shape{#1}%
\else
\ifcsname \f@encoding /\f@family /\f@series/#2\endcsname
@@ -1197,6 +1442,38 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
+% \begin{macro}{\merge@font@shape@without@substitution,
+% \merge@font@shape@without@substitution@,
+% \delayed@merge@font@shape}
+% See definition of \cs{selectfont} for how these macros are used.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2020/12/22}{Distangle series and shape update (gh/444)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\merge@font@shape@without@substitution#1{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \merge@font@shape@without@substitution@
+ \csname shape@\f@shape @#1\endcsname
+ {#1}%
+ \@nil
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\merge@font@shape@without@substitution@#1#2#3\@nil{%
+ \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@empty
+ \edef\f@shape{#2}%
+ \else
+ \edef\f@shape{#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\delayed@merge@font@shape\merge@font@shape@without@substitution
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalshape}
%
@@ -1255,52 +1532,41 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% Supporting rollback \ldots
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontSeriesChangeRule}{Series change rules}%
+%<latexrelease> {\merge@font@shape}{Font shape change rules}%
%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseries[1]{\edef\f@series{#1}}
%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshape [1]{\edef\f@shape{#1}}
-%<latexrelease>\let\fontseriesforce\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\fontshapeforce\@undefined
%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\let\DeclareFontSeriesChangeRule\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@series\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@series@\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\@font@shape@subst@warning\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\maybe@load@fontshape\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\set@target@series\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\series@maybe@drop@one@m\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\series@drop@one@m\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\DeclareFontShapeChangeRule\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@shape\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@shape@\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@shape@without@substitution\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\merge@font@shape@without@substitution@\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let\delayed@merge@font@shape\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\let\normalshape\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\ulcshape\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\ulcdefault\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\swshape\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\swdefault\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\sscshape\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\sscdefault\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let\normalshape\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
% \end{macrocode}
% This is always called in \cs{document} so don't make it undefined.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\let\reinstall@nfss@defs\relax
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
-%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
%
+%
+%
% This initializes the 2020/02/02 extensions to NFSS after any changes
% in the preamble.
% \changes{v1.0g}{2020/08/21}{Integration of new hook management interface}
% \begin{macrocode}
-%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
%<latexrelease> {\reinstall@nfss@defs}{NFSS series init}%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
index 30f500b6e4e..df265d0b0fc 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
%
%
\ProvidesFile{ltfssbas.dtx}
- [2020/12/10 v3.2h LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Basic Macros)]
+ [2021/04/26 v3.2i LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Basic Macros)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\begin{document}
@@ -896,15 +896,35 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
-%<latexrelease> {\usefont}{Drop m in usefont}%
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\usefont}{Force font face}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\usefont[4]{\fontencoding{#1}%
\edef\f@family{#2}%
\set@target@series{#3}%
- \edef\f@shape{#4}\selectfont
+ \edef\f@shape{#4}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Any earlier \cs{fontseries}, etc.\ should be canceled and we
+% should switch unconditionally to the requested font face so we
+% drop any code that may have been stored in
+% \cs{delayed@f@adjustment}.
+% \changes{v3.2i}{2021/04/26}{Unconditionally switch to the requested
+% font face (gh/444)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\delayed@f@adjustment\@empty
+ \selectfont
\ignorespaces}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
+%<latexrelease> {\usefont}{Drop m in usefont}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\usefont[4]{\fontencoding{#1}%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@family{#2}%
+%<latexrelease> \set@target@series{#3}%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@shape{#4}\selectfont
+%<latexrelease> \ignorespaces}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
%<latexrelease> {\usefont}{Drop m in usefont}%
%<latexrelease>
@@ -1403,7 +1423,7 @@
% The idea for this macro is stolen from the \texttt{substitutefont}
% package by Günter Milde, with some modifications and a new name.
%
-% Its purpose is to provide characters in a special encoding tht
+% Its purpose is to provide characters in a special encoding that
% are not available in the current font family to be taken from a
% different family that is visually compatible (or not if you
% choose badly). For example, you can match the GFS Didot Greek
@@ -1422,7 +1442,7 @@
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
-%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontFamilySubstitution}{Provide family substituation}%
+%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontFamilySubstitution}{Provide family substitution}%
\begingroup
\nfss@catcodes
\gdef\DeclareFontFamilySubstitution#1#2#3{%
@@ -1432,7 +1452,7 @@
% is better to handle that differently.
%
% Of course the families may still need loading at
-% this point and so we arange for this. Otherwise we might run into
+% this point and so we arrange for this. Otherwise we might run into
% trouble because the necessary \cs{DeclareFontFamily} has not been
% seen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1476,7 +1496,7 @@
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontFamilySubstitution}{Provide family substituation}%
+%<latexrelease> {\DeclareFontFamilySubstitution}{Provide family substitution}%
%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\let\DeclareFontFamilySubstitution\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
@@ -1503,11 +1523,11 @@
\noexpand\@nil}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Initialize all those internal variables which may or may not have
-% values in the first seconds of NFSS' bootstraping process. Later
+% values in the first seconds of NFSS' bootstrapping process. Later
% on such values will be updated when an encoding is selected, etc.
%
% We definitely don't want to set |\f@encoding|; we can set all the
-% others since if they are left ``blank'' any selection would grap
+% others since if they are left ``blank'' any selection would grab
% ``error default values'' as well. However, this probably should
% go also---and now it did.
% \changes{v2.1n}{1994/05/14}{Don't set \cs{f@encoding}}
@@ -1559,7 +1579,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2015/01/01}{\wrong@fontshape}%
-%<latexrelease> {Font substituation in preamble}%
+%<latexrelease> {Font substitution in preamble}%
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
\def\wrong@fontshape{%
\csname D@\f@encoding\endcsname % install defaults if in math
@@ -1600,9 +1620,9 @@
% corresponding \texttt{.fd} file may not been loaded
% yet. Therefore we try this now. Otherwise equating the requested
% font shape with the finally selected fontshape below will fail
-% and can result in ``NFSS tables corruped''. After begin document
+% and can result in ``NFSS tables corrupted''. After begin document
% that will not happen as all \texttt{.fd} files involved in
-% substituation are loaded at |\begin{document}|.
+% substitution are loaded at |\begin{document}|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\try@load@fontshape
@@ -1681,7 +1701,7 @@
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\wrong@fontshape}%
-%<latexrelease> {Font substituation in preamble}%
+%<latexrelease> {Font substitution in preamble}%
%<latexrelease>\def\wrong@fontshape{%
%<latexrelease> \csname D@\f@encoding\endcsname
%<latexrelease> \edef\reserved@a{\csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname}%
@@ -1856,7 +1876,7 @@
% it modifies the corresponding macro |\mv@|\meta{version}
% so that it calls |\getanddefine@fonts| directly in future as well.
% We use the macro |\extract@alph@from@version| to do this.
-% It takes the math alphabet identifer |#1| and the math version
+% It takes the math alphabet identifier |#1| and the math version
% macro as arguments.
% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1944,7 +1964,7 @@
\use@mathgroup##1{#2}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v2.1t}{1994/10/15}{Warn if math alpha is used outside math}
-% In addtion it defines the alphabet the way it should be used from
+% In addition it defines the alphabet the way it should be used from
% now on.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef#3{\relax\ifmmode \else \non@alpherr#3\fi
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
index 8583fb1a9b4..03be855127d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
%
%
\ProvidesFile{ltfsscmp.dtx}
- [2015/06/23 v3.0f LaTeX Kernel (NFSS1 Compatibility)]
+ [2020/12/05 v3.0f LaTeX Kernel (NFSS1 Compatibility)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\begin{document}
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@
\in@{pt}{#3}% not a proof but a good chance
\ifin@
% \end{macrocode}
-% We grap also everything after pt and discard it if people have
+% We grab also everything after pt and discard it if people have
% forgotten to place a percent sign there.
% \changes{v2.1d}{1994/02/10}{scan away stuff after pt}
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
index 291cd1368f2..9710d543829 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
%
%
\ProvidesFile{ltfssdcl.dtx}
- [2020/03/19 v3.0v LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Declarative Interface)]
+ [2021/02/15 v3.0w LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Declarative Interface)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\begin{document}
@@ -490,7 +490,11 @@
in version \math@version}%
\@eha
\fi
- \else \expandafter\non@alpherr\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% extra \cs{expandafter} to remove the \cs{expandafter} added below
+% \changes{v3.0w}{2021/02/115}{fix for (gh/501)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\non@alpherr\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% If the legacy interface is used, e.g., \verb=$\sf -1$= the math
% alphabet \verb=#1= does not take an argument so we better do not
@@ -747,7 +751,7 @@
\@font@info{Redeclaring symbol font `#1'}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.0f}{1997/11/13}
-% {(DPC) Really update \cs{group@list} dont
+% {(DPC) Really update \cs{group@list} don't
% leave new version in \cs{toks@}. latex/2661}
% Update the group list.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1526,7 +1530,7 @@
\def\set@mathdelimiter#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
% \end{macrocode}
% We use \cs{protected} not \cs{MakeRobust} so that
-% \verb=\bigl\lfoor= etc.\ works inside \cs{protected@edef}.
+% \verb=\bigl\lfoor= etc.\ works inside the argument of \cs{protected@edef}.
% \changes{v3.0s}{2019/08/27}{Make math delimiters robust}
% \changes{v3.0t}{2020/01/20}{fix for gh/251}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1733,7 +1737,7 @@
\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% If it is undefined, fine otherwise check if it is a math alphabet
-% defined via |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|:
+% defined via \\ |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|:
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\edef\reserved@a{%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
index fbea725c1df..b06fc161b08 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
%
%
\ProvidesFile{ltfssini.dtx}
- [2020/10/08 v3.2e LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Initialisation)]
+ [2021/04/26 v3.2h LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Initialisation)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\begin{document}
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
%
% \GetFileInfo{ltfssini.dtx}
% \title{A new font selection scheme for \TeX{} macro packages\\
-% (Initialisation)\thanks
+% (Initialization)\thanks
% {This file has version number
% \fileversion\ dated \filedate}}
%
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
% \changes{v3.1d}{2019/08/27}{Make various commands robust}
%
%
-% \section{NFSS Initialisation}
+% \section{NFSS Initialization}
%
% \iffalse
%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@
\else
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \changes{v3.1g}{2020/02/05}{Clarrified error text}
+% \changes{v3.1g}{2020/02/05}{Clarified error text}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@latex@error{Wrong syntax for \string\DeclareFontSeriesDefault}%
{Mandatory first argument must be 'md' or 'bf'.}
@@ -431,7 +431,7 @@
%<+debug> \series@change@debug{No series preparation (forced \f@series)\on@line}%
\fontfamily#2%
\else
-%<+debug> \series@change@debug{Prepearing for switching to #1 (#2)\on@line}%
+%<+debug> \series@change@debug{Preparing for switching to #1 (#2)\on@line}%
\expand@font@defaults
% \end{macrocode}
% We prepare for changing the current series. We have to find it
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@
% \item \cs{bfseries} is called for a family using \texttt{bx}
% (e.g., CMR)
% \item Switch to a font family that is none of the meta
-% families, e.g., via \verb=\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont=
+% families, e.g., via \verb=\fontfamily{ptm}\allowbreak\verb=\selectfont=
% \item Then none of the real meta families, match but the final
% \verb=\@elt{??}= will.
% \item Therefore if the current series is \cs{mddefault} or
@@ -493,7 +493,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{target@series@value} may contain something like
% \texttt{cm} (coming from a default) and so we can't directly
-% asign it to \cs{f@series} be have to drop any surplus \texttt{m}
+% assign it to \cs{f@series} be have to drop any surplus \texttt{m}
% first.
% \changes{v3.1j}{2020/02/25}{Drop surplus ``m'' from
% \cs{target@series@value} (gh/291)}
@@ -513,7 +513,7 @@
% In this macro used in the look you basically find the nested
% \cs{ifx}s from the outline above. The only difference is that is
% it is parameterized instead of being written out and only for one
-% block of tests because the code is called reatedly when looping
+% block of tests because the code is called repeatedly when looping
% over the meta family list. From the list we get each meta family
% name in turn.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -665,7 +665,7 @@
% the now current series value (in \cs{f@series}).
%
% But what should happen if \cs{seriesdefault} got explicitly
-% changed? In that case the explicit change should surive and we
+% changed? In that case the explicit change should survive and we
% should not alter \cs{seriesdefault}. This is solved by comparing
% the current value of \cs{seriesdefault} with a kernel version
% saved in the format and if they differ we do not call
@@ -915,9 +915,9 @@
%\end{verbatim}
% We have to do the testing while the current family is still
% unchanged but we have to do the adjustment of the series after it
-% got changed (because the new family might has different sets
-% ofshapes available and we certainly don't want to see
-% substituation going on. So we use \cs{target@series@value} to
+% got changed (because the new family might have different sets
+% of shapes available and we certainly don't want to see
+% substitution going on. So we use \cs{target@series@value} to
% hold the target series (if any).
%\begin{verbatim}
% \let\target@series@value\@empty
@@ -1088,6 +1088,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
+% \changes{v3.2g}{2021/03/18}
+% {Add legacy hook definitions for rollback.}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
@@ -1140,6 +1142,9 @@
%<latexrelease> \prepare@family@series@update{tt}\ttdefault
%<latexrelease> \@ttfamilyhook
%<latexrelease> \selectfont}
+%<latexrelease>\let\@rmfamilyhook\@empty
+%<latexrelease>\let\@sffamilyhook\@empty
+%<latexrelease>\let\@ttfamilyhook\@empty
%<latexrelease>
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -1183,7 +1188,7 @@
% to different NFSS axis values it becomes important to have the
% ability to determine the current context as we can no longer look
% at \cs{f@series} to answer a question such as ``am I currently
-% typsetting in a bold typeface?''
+% typesetting in a bold typeface?''
%
% This is provided by the test \cs{IfFontSeriesContextTF}. It takes
% three arguments:
@@ -1221,7 +1226,7 @@
\DeclareRobustCommand\IfFontSeriesContextTF[1]{%
\expand@font@defaults
% \end{macrocode}
-% In the beginning we haven't found the context we are loking for.
+% In the beginning we haven't found the context we are looking for.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@font@series@contextfalse
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1238,7 +1243,7 @@
\expandafter\edef\csname ??def@ult\endcsname{\f@family}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we run through the meta family list (currently containing
-% just the three values) followed by the artifical meta family
+% just the three values) followed by the artificial meta family
% \texttt{??} and test each of them in turn using
% \cs{test@font@series@context} as the testing command.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1264,7 +1269,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\test@font@series@context}
% This tests the context (stored in \cs{requested@test@context})
-% and updates the bookean if the right context is found.
+% and updates the boolean if the right context is found.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\test@font@series@context#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1307,8 +1312,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-
-
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\if@font@series@context}
% The boolean to signal if we found the requested font series context.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1334,19 +1340,21 @@
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
-
-
-
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
%
% \section{Supporting nested emphasis}
%
% By default \LaTeXe{} supports two levels of nested emphasis: if
% the current font has an upright shape then it switches to
% \cs{itshape} otherwise to \cs{eminnershape} (which defaults to
-% \cs{upshape}). This means nested emphasis will ocssilate between
+% \cs{upshape}). This means nested emphasis will oscillate between
% italic and upright shapes.
%
-% Sometimes it would be nice to allow for a more lengthly sequence,
+% Sometimes it would be nice to allow for a more lengthy sequence,
% but instead of providing a fixed one \LaTeX{} now offers a
% general mechanism that allows to define arbitrary sequences.
%
@@ -1377,7 +1385,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareEmphSequence}
%
% \cs{DeclareEmphSequence} expects a clist of declaration. Spaces in the
-% argument are dropped to avoid surious spaces in the output. The
+% argument are dropped to avoid spurious spaces in the output. The
% declarations are additive. At the very end the shape is reset
% using |\emreset| and |\emforce| so that this case is never
% skipped.\footnote{Maybe we should not add \cs{emforce} but allow
@@ -1401,9 +1409,9 @@
\let\emfontdeclare@clist\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-
-
-
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\emrest}
% Reset the font to upright and upper/lower case. With the default rules
% using \cs{shapedefault} does that for us but to be on the safe side we
@@ -1412,12 +1420,13 @@
\DeclareRobustCommand\emreset{\upshape\ulcshape}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-
-
-
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\em}
-% The new definition for \cs{em} (and implicitly \cs{emph} is like
-% it was before if \cs{emfontdeclare@clist} is empty.
+%
+% The new definition for \cs{em} (and implicitly \cs{emph}) is the
+% same as before as long as \cs{emfontdeclare@clist} is empty.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\em{%
\@nomath\em
@@ -1479,7 +1488,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifx\csname \curr@fontshape/\f@size\em@force
% \end{macrocode}
-% For the comparison with \cs{ifx} we have to exand
+% For the comparison with \cs{ifx} we have to expand
% \cs{em@currfont} once as the relevant info is inside.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\endcsname
@@ -1761,7 +1770,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
%<latexrelease> {\normalfont}{Add hook to \normalfont}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\normalfont{%
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1774,6 +1783,15 @@
\edef\f@series{\seriesdefault}%
\edef\f@shape{\shapedefault}%
% \end{macrocode}
+% Any earlier \cs{fontseries}, etc.\ should be canceled and we
+% should switch unconditionally to the requested font face so we
+% drop any code that may have been stored in
+% \cs{delayed@f@adjustment}.
+% \changes{v3.2h}{2021/04/26}{Unconditionally switch to the requested
+% font face (gh/444)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\delayed@f@adjustment\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{v3.2b}{2020/08/21}{Integration of new hook management interface}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1785,18 +1803,54 @@
\@defaultfamilyhook % hookname from 2020/02 will vanish
\selectfont}
% \end{macrocode}
-%
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\reset@font\normalfont
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
-%
+%
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.2g}{2021/03/18}
+% {Add missing 2020/02/02 latexrelease entry.}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\normalfont}{Add hook to \normalfont}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\normalfont{%
+%<latexrelease> \fontencoding\encodingdefault
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@family{\familydefault}%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@series{\seriesdefault}%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@shape{\shapedefault}%
+%<latexrelease> \UseHook{normalfont}%
+%<latexrelease> \@defaultfamilyhook % hookname from 2020/02 will vanish
+%<latexrelease> \selectfont}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\reset@font\normalfont
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
+%<latexrelease> {\normalfont}{Add hook to \normalfont}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\normalfont{%
+%<latexrelease> \fontencoding\encodingdefault
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@family{\familydefault}%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@series{\seriesdefault}%
+%<latexrelease> \edef\f@shape{\shapedefault}%
+%<latexrelease> \@defaultfamilyhook
+%<latexrelease> \selectfont}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\reset@font\normalfont
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\@defaultfamilyhook\@empty
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
%<latexrelease> {\normalfont}{Add hook to \normalfont}%
%<latexrelease>
@@ -1863,8 +1917,20 @@
% \changes{v3.1c}{2019/07/09}{Explicitly set some defaults}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fontfamily{cmr}
-\fontseries{m}
-\fontshape{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.2f}{2020/12/04}{Adjust start values for series and shape (gh/444)}
+% Previously the default values for series and shape were set by
+% calling \cs{fontseries} and \cs{fontshape}, but their action is
+% now delayed until \cs{selectfont} which isn't called inside the
+% format (to avoid unnecessarily loading a font that may never get used).
+% We therefore have to set \cs{f@series} and \cs{f@shape} directly instead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\f@series{m} % \fontseries{m}
+\def\f@shape{n} % \fontshape{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\fontsize{10}{10}
% \end{macrocode}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
index 055f408ceb3..c6aec105ba5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -30,14 +30,14 @@
% \iffalse
%%% From File: ltfsstrc.dtx
%% Copyright (C) 1989-97 by Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf.
-%% Copyright (C) 1994-97 by LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved.
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-97 by LaTeX Project. All rights reserved.
%
-%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/05/16]
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2021/06/01]
%<package>\ProvidesPackage{tracefnt}
-%<package> [2019/10/11 v3.0l Standard LaTeX package (font tracing)]
+%<package> [2020/12/22 v3.0n Standard LaTeX package (font tracing)]
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{ltfsstrc.dtx}
-% [2020/02/03 v3.0l LaTeX Kernel (NFSS tracing)]
+% [2021/04/26 v3.0o LaTeX Kernel (NFSS tracing)]
%
% \iffalse
%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@
% special package file named \texttt{trace.sty}.\footnote{This package
% is not in distribution at the moment (and probably doesn't any
% longer work). Think of this part of the code as being historical
-% artefacts.}
+% artifacts.}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<+debug> \input trace.sty
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -420,19 +420,25 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease|package>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\selectfont}{Add hook to \selectfont}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
%
-% \changes{v1.0j}{1990/02/18}
-% {Redefine unprotected version \cs{p@selectfont}
-% instead of \cs{selectfont}.}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\selectfont}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1990/02/18}
+% {Redefine unprotected version \cs{p@selectfont}
+% instead of \cs{selectfont}.}
% \changes{v1.1a}{1989/12/16}{Changed order of calls.}
% \changes{v2.3f}{1994/05/12}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}}
% The macro |\selectfont| is called whenever a font change must
% take place.
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*2ekernel|package>
\DeclareRobustCommand\selectfont
{%
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -456,6 +462,77 @@
\ifx\f@linespread\baselinestretch \else
\set@fontsize\baselinestretch\f@size\f@baselineskip \fi
% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The series and shape updates are only prepared by
+% \cs{fontseries} and \cs{fontshape} but not executed until after
+% we are ready to change the font face. This way they happen after
+% a possibly new family is set which is important because they
+% look at the available font faces in that family and alter the
+% selection based on availibility. Several calls to \cs{fontseries}
+% or \cs{fontshape} are delayed in the order in which they appear,
+% so that by switching them one can work around missing
+% intermediate font faces and avoid substitutions.
+%
+% We first attempt to do the merge without any substitution. As we
+% might end up with a non-existing font face we may have to restart
+% and therefore save the current values of \cs{f@series} and
+% \cs{f@shape} before the merge.
+%
+% But first we make a quick test to see if there are any delayed
+% actions, because if not it is pointless to make all the
+% assignments and try loading a missing fontshape.
+%
+% \changes{v3.0n}{2020/12/22}{Execute delayed series and shape updates (gh/444)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\delayed@f@adjustment\@empty
+ \else
+ \let\f@shape@saved\f@shape
+ \let\f@series@saved\f@series
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The we run the delayed adjustments (which is using the
+% \cs{..@without@substitution} commands
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \delayed@f@adjustment
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We then check if the resulting cominbation is valid but for this
+% we have to make sure the the appropiate \texttt{.fd} is loaded if
+% that hasn't happened so far.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \maybe@load@fontshape
+ \ifcsname \f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/\f@shape \endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this macro is defined then we are good and no further action
+% is necessary.
+%
+% Otherwise the combination is not valid, so we redo the merge but
+% this time with substitutions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \let\f@shape\f@shape@saved
+ \let\f@series\f@series@saved
+ \let\delayed@merge@font@shape\merge@font@shape
+ \let\delayed@merge@font@series\merge@font@series
+ \delayed@f@adjustment
+ \let\delayed@merge@font@shape\merge@font@shape@without@substitution
+ \let\delayed@merge@font@series\merge@font@series@without@substitution
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now the series and shape values are updated and we clear
+% \cs{delayed@f@adjustment}. This is important because on the next
+% execution of \cs{selectfont} we should not mistakenly redo the
+% delayed actions if there wasn't any series or shape change.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\delayed@f@adjustment\@empty
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the series was forced we should now cancel that in case the
+% next series change is done with some low-level setting to
+% \cs{f@series}.
+% \changes{v3.0o}{2021/04/26}{Unset the forced series boolean when reaching
+% \cs{selectfont} (gh/444)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@forced@seriesfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
% Then we generate the internal name of the font
% by concatenating {\em family}, {\em series},
% {\em shape}, and current {\em size},
@@ -478,18 +555,13 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\font@name
% \end{macrocode}
-% If |\tracingfonts| is
-% greater than 2 we also show the font switch.
-% We do this before |\glb@settings| is called since this
-% macro might redefine |\font@name|.
-% \changes{v1.0k}{1990/03/14}{Added code for TeX3.}
-% \changes{v1.0i}{1990/02/16}{Changed \cs{f@size} to \cs{lcl@currsize}
-% (see fam file).}
+%
+% After switching fonts we run a hook, so that packages can make
+% last minute alterations based on the new font (originally provided
+% in \pkg{everysel} but using a different interface).
+% \changes{v3.0m}{2020/12/03}{Install a hook in \cs{selectfont} (gh/444)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*trace>
- \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
- \@font@info{Switching to \font@name}\fi
-%</trace>
+ \UseHook{selectfont}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally we call |\size@update|. This macro is normally empty but
% will contain actions (like setting the |\baselineskip|) that have
@@ -514,11 +586,69 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
+% \begin{macro}{selectfont}
+% Declare the hook used in selecfont in the kernel, but not
+% inside the \pkg{tracefnt} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<-trace>\NewHook{selectfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% If |\tracingfonts| is
+% greater than 2 we also show the font switch inside \cs{selectfont}.
+% We do this by adding this code to the hook in the \pkg{tracefnt} package:
+% macro might redefine |\font@name|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+\AddToHook{selectfont}
+ {\ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+ \@font@info{Switching to \font@name}\fi}
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease|package>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% With \cs{selectfont} having different definitions in different
+% kernels we also have to provide them in the \texttt{tracefnt}
+% package to support rollback. In packages that works a bit
+% differently and therefore we have to provide an empty block there.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<package> {\selectfont}{Add hook to \selectfont}%
+%<package>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease|package>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease|package> {\selectfont}{Add hook to \selectfont}%
+%<latexrelease|package>
+%<latexrelease|package>\DeclareRobustCommand\selectfont
+%<latexrelease|package> {%
+%<latexrelease|package> \ifx\f@linespread\baselinestretch \else
+%<latexrelease|package> \set@fontsize\baselinestretch\f@size\f@baselineskip \fi
+%<latexrelease|package> \xdef\font@name{%
+%<latexrelease|package> \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname}%
+%<latexrelease|package> \pickup@font
+%<latexrelease|package> \font@name
+%<latexrelease|package> \size@update
+%<latexrelease|package> \enc@update
+%<latexrelease|package> }
+%<latexrelease|package>
+%<latexrelease|package>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
%
% \begin{macro}{\set@fontsize}
% The macro |\set@fontsize| does the actual work. First it assigns
% new values to |\f@size|, |\f@baselineskip| and |\f@linespread|.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|package>
\def\set@fontsize#1#2#3{%
\@defaultunits\@tempdimb#2pt\relax\@nnil
\edef\f@size{\strip@pt\@tempdimb}%
@@ -1245,7 +1375,7 @@
% Now, we are through with the case of a simple size, except for
% calling the size function. This will be handled later, as it is
% the same mechanism for all types of size specification. We will
-% now proceed to macors for extraction of size range specification.
+% now proceed to macros for extraction of size range specification.
%
%
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx
index 0a04c38efbd..20e172a57f2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
-%%
-%% File: lthooks.dtx (C) Copyright 2020 Frank Mittelbach,
-%% Phelype Oleinik & LaTeX Team
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2020-2021
+% Frank Mittelbach, Phelype Oleinik & LaTeX Team
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
% -------------------------------------------
@@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
%%% From File: lthooks.dtx
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lthooksversion{v1.0h}
-\def\lthooksdate{2021/01/07}
+\def\lthooksversion{v1.0n}
+\def\lthooksdate{2021/05/26}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%<*driver>
@@ -54,6 +54,9 @@
}
\ExplSyntaxOff
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{}
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{}
+
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
\begin{document}
@@ -64,10 +67,13 @@
% \fi
%
%
-% \long\def\fmi#1{\begin{quote}\itshape FMi: #1\end{quote}}
-% \long\def\pho#1{\begin{quote}\itshape PhO: #1\end{quote}}
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \providecommand\fmi[1]{\marginpar{\footnotesize FMi: #1}}
+% \providecommand\fmiinline[1]{\begin{quote}\itshape\footnotesize FMi: #1\end{quote}}
+% \providecommand\pho[1]{\marginpar{\footnotesize PhO: #1}}
+% \providecommand\phoinline[1]{\begin{quote}\itshape\footnotesize PhO: #1\end{quote}}
%
-% \newcommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
%
%
% \title{The \texttt{lthooks} package\thanks{This package has version
@@ -119,14 +125,15 @@
%
% \subsection{\LaTeXe\ interfaces}
%
-% \subsubsection{Declaring hooks and using them in code}
+% \subsubsection{Declaring hooks}
%
-% With two exceptions, hooks have to be declared before they can be
-% used. The exceptions are hooks in environments (i.e., executed at
-% \cs{begin} and \cs{end}) and hooks run when loading files,
-% e.g. before and after a package is loaded, etc. Their hook names
-% depend on the environment or the file name and so declaring them
-% beforehand is difficult.
+% With a few exceptions, hooks have to be declared before they can
+% be used. The exceptions are the generic hooks for commands,
+% environments (i.e., executed at \cs{begin} and \cs{end}) and
+% hooks run when loading files, e.g. before and after a package is
+% loaded, etc. Their hook names depend on the command,
+% environment or the
+% file name and so declaring them beforehand is not practical.
%
%
% \begin{function}{\NewHook}
@@ -173,6 +180,62 @@
% \end{function}
%
%
+% \subsubsection{Special declarations for hooks}
+%
+% The declarations here should normally not be used. They are available
+% to provide support for special use cases mainly involving
+% generic command hooks.
+%
+% \begin{function}{\DisableHook}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{DisableHook} \Arg{hook}
+% \end{syntax}
+% After this declaration the \meta{hook} is no longer usable: Any
+% attempt to add further code to it will result in an error and any
+% use, e.g., via \cs{UseHook}, will simply do nothing.
+%
+% This is intended to be used with generic command hooks (see
+% \texttt{ltcmdhooks-doc}) as depending on the definition of the
+% command such generic hooks may be unusable. If that is known, a
+% package developer can disable such hooks up front.
+%
+% The \meta{hook} can be specified using the dot-syntax to denote
+% the current package name. See section~\ref{sec:default-label}.
+% \end{function}
+%
+%
+% \begin{function}{\ProvideHook}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{ProvideHook} \Arg{hook}
+% \end{syntax}
+% Like \cs{NewHook} but does nothing if the hook was previously
+% declared with \cs{NewHook}. This declaration should only be used
+% in special situations, e.g., when command of another package
+% need to be altered and it is is not clear if for that command a
+% generic hook was already explicitly declared before.
+%
+% Normally \cs{NewHook} should be used instead.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\ProvideReversedHook}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{ProvideReversedHook} \Arg{hook}
+% \end{syntax}
+% Like \cs{NewReversedHook} but does nothing if the hook was
+% previously declared as a reversed hook.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\ProvideMirroredHookPair}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{ProvideMirroredHookPair} \Arg{hook-1} \Arg{hook-2}
+% \end{syntax}
+% A shorthand for
+% \cs{ProvideHook}\Arg{hook-1}\cs{ProvideReversedHook}\Arg{hook-2}.
+% \end{function}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Using hooks in code}
%
%
% \begin{function}{\UseHook}
@@ -198,7 +261,7 @@
% Some hooks are only used (and can be only used) in one place, for
% example, those in \verb=\begin{document}= or
% \verb=\end{document}=. Once we have passed that point adding to
-% the hook through a defined \cs{\meta{addto-cmd}} command (e.g.,
+% the hook through a defined \cs[no-index]{\meta{addto-cmd}} command (e.g.,
% \cs{AddToHook} or \cs{AtBeginDocument}, etc.\@) would have no
% effect (as would the use of such a command inside the hook code
% itself). It is therefore customary to redefine
@@ -209,10 +272,12 @@
% consumed and any further attempt to add to it will result in
% executing the code to be added immediately.
%
-% \fmi{Maybe add an error version as well?}
+% \fmiinline{Maybe add an error version as well?}
%
% The \meta{hook} \emph{cannot} be specified using the dot-syntax.
-% A leading |.| is treated literally.
+% A leading |.| is treated literally. See
+% section~\ref{sec:default-label} for details.
+
% \end{function}
%
%
@@ -261,9 +326,10 @@
% that label, the removal order takes action and the code is not
% added.
%
-% If the optional argument is \texttt{*}, then all code chunks are
+% If the optional \meta{label} argument is \texttt{*}, then all code chunks are
% removed. This is rather dangerous as it drops code from other
-% packages one may not know about!
+% packages one may not know about and should therefore not by used
+% by packages but only in document preambles!
%
% The \meta{hook} and \meta{label} can be specified using the
% dot-syntax to denote the current package name.
@@ -296,7 +362,7 @@
%\end{verbatim}
% because that only \enquote{adds} a further empty chunk of code to
% the hook. Adding \cs{normalsize} would work but that means the hook
-% then contained \cs{small}\cs{normalsize} which means to font size
+% then contained \cs{small}\cs{normalsize} which means two font size
% changes for no good reason.
%
% The above is only needed if one wants to typeset several quotes in a
@@ -356,10 +422,9 @@
% \meta{label} throughout the sub-packages in order to avoid
% that the labels change if you internally reorganize your code.
%
-% Except for \cs{UseHook}, \cs{UseOneTimeHook}, \cs{IfHookEmptyTF}, and
-% \cs{IfHookExistsTF} (and their \pkg{expl3} interfaces \cs{hook_use:n},
-% \cs{hook_use_once:n}, \cs{hook_if_empty:nTF}, and
-% \cs{hook_if_exist:nTF}), all \meta{hook}
+% Except for \cs{UseHook}, \cs{UseOneTimeHook} and \cs{IfHookEmptyTF}
+% (and their \pkg{expl3} interfaces \cs{hook_use:n},
+% \cs{hook_use_once:n} and \cs{hook_if_empty:nTF}, all \meta{hook}
% and \meta{label} arguments are processed in the same way: first,
% spaces are trimmed around the argument, then it is fully expanded
% until only character tokens remain. If the full expansion of the
@@ -367,8 +432,8 @@
% token, a low-level \TeX{} error is raised (namely, the \meta{hook} is
% expanded using \TeX's \cs{csname}\ldots\cs{endcsname}, as such,
% Unicode characters are allowed in \meta{hook} and \meta{label}
-% arguments). The arguments of \cs{UseHook}, \cs{UseOneTimeHook},
-% \cs{IfHookEmptyTF}, and \cs{IfHookExistsTF} are
+% arguments). The arguments of \cs{UseHook}, \cs{UseOneTimeHook}, and
+% \cs{IfHookEmptyTF} are
% processed much in the same way except that spaces are not trimmed
% around the argument, for better performance.
%
@@ -422,8 +487,7 @@
% this syntax is not available in \cs{UseHook} (and \cs{hook_use:n})
% because the hook is most of the time used outside of the package file
% in which it was defined. This syntax is also not available in the hook
-% conditionals \cs{IfHookEmptyTF} (and \cs{hook_if_empty:nTF}) and
-% \cs{IfHookExistsTF} (and \cs{hook_if_exist:nTF}) because these
+% conditionals \cs{IfHookEmptyTF} (and \cs{hook_if_empty:nTF}), because these
% conditionals are used in some performance-critical parts of the hook
% management code, and because they are usually used to refer to other
% package's hooks, so the dot-syntax doesn't make much sense.
@@ -432,7 +496,7 @@
% it in logical parts, but still use the main package name as
% \meta{label}, then the \meta{default label} can be set using
% \cs{SetDefaultHookLabel} or
-% \cs{PushDefaultHookLabel}..\cs{PopDefaultHookLabel}.
+% \cs{PushDefaultHookLabel}\verb={..}=\,\ldots\cs{PopDefaultHookLabel}.
%
% \begin{function}{\PushDefaultHookLabel,\PopDefaultHookLabel}
% \begin{syntax}
@@ -595,7 +659,7 @@
% There can only be a single relation between two labels for a
% given hook,
% i.e., a later \cs{DeclareHookrule} overwrites any previous
-% delcaration.
+% declaration.
%
% The \meta{hook} and \meta{label} can be specified using the
% dot-syntax to denote the current package name.
@@ -648,9 +712,10 @@
% \item exist and be non-empty; and
% \item not exist (in which case emptiness doesn't apply);
% \end{itemize}
-% Hooks are a bit more complicated: they have four possible states.
-% A hook may exist or not, and either way it may or may not be empty.
-% This means that even a hook that doesn't exist may be non-empty.
+% Hooks are a bit more complicated:
+% a hook may exist or not, and either way it may or may not be empty.
+% This means that even a hook that doesn't exist may be non-empty and
+% it can also be disabled.
%
% This seemingly strange state may happen when, for example, package~$A$
% defines hook \hook{A/foo}, and package $B$ adds some code to that
@@ -661,11 +726,17 @@
% querying the existence of a hook doesn't imply its emptiness, neither
% does the other way around.
%
+% Given that code or rules can be added to a hook even if it doesn't
+% physically exist yet, means that a querying its existence has no
+% real use case (in contrast to other variables that can only be
+% update if they have already been declared). For that reason only the
+% test for emptiness has a public interface.
+%
% A hook is said to be empty when no code was added to it, either to
% its permanent code pool, or to its ``next'' token list. The hook
% doesn't need to be declared to have code added to its code pool.
% A hook is said to exist when it was declared with \cs{NewHook} or
-% some variant thereof. Generic \hook{file} and \hook{env} hooks are
+% some variant thereof. Generic hooks such as \hook{file} and \hook{env} hooks are
% automatically declared when code is added to them.
%
% \begin{function}[EXP]{\IfHookEmptyTF}
@@ -673,7 +744,8 @@
% \cs{IfHookEmptyTF} \Arg{hook} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code}
% \end{syntax}
% Tests if the \meta{hook} is empty (\emph{i.e.}, no code was added to
-% it using either \cs{AddToHook} or \cs{AddToHookNext}), and
+% it using either \cs{AddToHook} or \cs{AddToHookNext}) or such code
+% was removed again (via \cs{RemoveFromHook}), and
% branches to either \meta{true code} or \meta{false code} depending
% on the result.
%
@@ -681,30 +753,7 @@
% A leading |.| is treated literally.
% \end{function}
%
-% \begin{function}[EXP]{\IfHookExistsTF}
-% \begin{syntax}
-% \cs{IfHookExistsTF} \Arg{hook} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code}
-% \end{syntax}
-% Tests if the \meta{hook} exists (if it was created with either
-% \cs{NewHook}, \cs{NewReversedHook}, or \cs{NewMirroredHookPair}), and
-% branches to either \meta{true code} or \meta{false code} depending
-% on the result.
-%
-% The existence of a hook usually doesn't mean much from the viewpoint
-% of code that tries to add/remove code from that hook, since package
-% loading order may vary, thus the creation of hooks is asynchronous
-% to adding and removing code from it, so this test should be used
-% sparingly.
-%
-% Generic hooks are declared at the time code is added to them, so the
-% result of \cs{hook_if_exist:n} will change once code is added to
-% said hook (unless the hook was previously declared).
-%
-% The \meta{hook} \emph{cannot} be specified using the dot-syntax.
-% A leading |.| is treated literally.
-% \end{function}
%
-% \fmi{Would be helpful if we provide some use cases}
%
% \subsubsection{Displaying hook code}
%
@@ -807,7 +856,7 @@
% \meta{label-2}, in that order, as detailed in \cs{DeclareHookRule}.
% If the relation is \texttt{default} it means that that rule applies
% to \meta{label-1} and \meta{label-2} in \emph{all} hooks, (unless
-% overrided by a non-default relation).
+% overridden by a non-default relation).
%
% Finally, line~14 lists the labels in the hook after sorting;
% that is, in the order they will be executed when the hook is used.
@@ -819,7 +868,7 @@
% \begin{syntax}
% \cs{DebugHooksOn}
% \end{syntax}
-% Turn the debugging of hook code on or off. This displays changes
+% Turn the debugging of hook code on or off. This displays most changes
% made to the hook data structures. The output is rather coarse and
% not really intended for normal use.
% \end{function}
@@ -856,6 +905,53 @@
%
%
%
+% \begin{function}{\hook_disable:n}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{hook_disable:n} \Arg{hook}
+% \end{syntax}
+% Marks \Arg{hook} as disabled. Any further attempt to add code to
+% it or declare it, will result in an error and any call to
+% \cs{hook_use:n} will simply do nothing.
+%
+% This declaration is intended for use with generic hooks that are
+% known not to work (see \texttt{ltcmdhooks-doc}) if they receive
+% code.
+%
+% The \meta{hook} can be specified using the dot-syntax to denote
+% the current package name. See section~\ref{sec:default-label}.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\hook_provide:n}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{hook_provide:n} \Arg{hook}
+% \end{syntax}
+% Like \cs{hook_new:n} but does nothing if the hook was previously
+% declared with \cs{hook_new:n}. This declaration should only be used
+% in special situations, e.g., when a command of another package
+% needs to be altered and it is is not clear if for that command a
+% generic \hook{cmd} hook was already explicitly declared before.
+%
+% Normally \cs{hook_new:n} should be used instead.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\hook_provide_reversed:n}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{hook_provide_reversed:n} \Arg{hook}
+% \end{syntax}
+% Like \cs{hook_new_reversed:n} but does nothing if the hook was
+% previously declared as a reversed hook.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\hook_provide_pair:nn}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{hook_provide_pair:nn} \Arg{hook-1} \Arg{hook-2}
+% \end{syntax}
+% A shorthand for
+% \cs{hook_provide:n}\Arg{hook-1}\cs{hook_provide_reversed:n}\Arg{hook-2}.
+% \end{function}
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{function}{\hook_use:n}
% \begin{syntax}
% \cs{hook_use:n} \Arg{hook}
@@ -968,28 +1064,6 @@
% A leading |.| is treated literally.
% \end{function}
%
-% \begin{function}[pTF]{\hook_if_exist:n}
-% \begin{syntax}
-% \cs{hook_if_exist:nTF} \Arg{hook} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code}
-% \end{syntax}
-% Tests if the \meta{hook} exists (if it was created with either
-% \cs{NewHook}, \cs{NewReversedHook}, or \cs{NewMirroredHookPair}), and
-% branches to either \meta{true code} or \meta{false code} depending
-% on the result.
-%
-% The existence of a hook usually doesn't mean much from the viewpoint
-% of code that tries to add/remove code from that hook, since package
-% loading order may vary, thus the creation of hooks is asynchronous
-% to adding and removing code from it, so this test should be used
-% sparingly.
-%
-% Generic hooks are declared at the time code is added to them, so the
-% result of \cs{hook_if_exist:n} will change once code is added to
-% said hook (unless the hook was previously declared).
-%
-% The \meta{hook} \emph{cannot} be specified using the dot-syntax.
-% A leading |.| is treated literally.
-% \end{function}
%
% \begin{function}{\hook_show:n,\hook_log:n}
% \begin{syntax}
@@ -1259,8 +1333,8 @@
% For that reason such code is not using the hook management, but
% instead private kernel commands directly before or after a public
% hook with the following naming
-% convention: \cs{@kernel@before@\meta{hookname}} or
-% \cs{@kernel@after@\meta{hookname}}. For example, in
+% convention: \cs{@kernel@before@\meta{hook}} or
+% \cs{@kernel@after@\meta{hook}}. For example, in
% \cs{enddocument} you find
%\begin{verbatim}
% \UseHook{enddocument}%
@@ -1336,20 +1410,14 @@
% Like \cs{AtBeginDocument} but for the \hook{enddocument} hook.
% \end{function}
%
-%
-%
-% \begin{function}{\AtBeginDvi}
-% \begin{syntax}
-% \cs{AtBeginDvi} \oarg{label} \Arg{code}
-% \end{syntax}
-% This hook is discussed in conjunction with the shipout hooks.
-% \end{function}
+% There is also \cs{AtBeginDvi} which is discussed in conjunction
+% with the shipout hooks.
%
% \bigskip
%
% The few hooks that existed previously in \LaTeXe{} used internally
% commands such as \cs{@begindocumenthook} and packages sometimes
-% augemented them directly rather than working through
+% augmented them directly rather than working through
% \cs{AtBeginDocument}. For that reason there is currently support
% for this, that is, if the system detects that such an internal
% legacy hook command contains code it adds it to the new hook
@@ -1415,7 +1483,7 @@
%
% The hooks are only executed if \cs{begin}\Arg{env} and
% \cs{end}\Arg{env} is used. If the environment code is executed
-% via low-level calls to \cs{\meta{env}} and \cs{end\meta{env}}
+% via low-level calls to \cs[no-index]{\meta{env}} and \cs[no-index]{end\meta{env}}
% (e.g., to avoid the environment grouping) they are not
% available. If you want them available in code using this method,
% you would need to add them yourself, i.e., write something like
@@ -1458,6 +1526,38 @@
% \end{function}
%
%
+% \subsubsection{Generic hooks for commands}
+%
+% Similar to environments there are now (at least in theory) two
+% generic hooks available for any \LaTeX{} command. These are
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\hook{cmd/\meta{name}/before}]
+%
+% This hook is executed at the very start of the command
+% execution.
+%
+% \item[\hook{cmd/\meta{name}/after}]
+% This hook is executed at the very end of the command body. It is
+% implemented as a reversed hook.
+% \end{description}
+% In practice there are restrictions and especially the
+% \hook{after} hook works only with a subset of commands. Details
+% about these restrictions are documented in
+% \texttt{ltcmdhooks-doc.pdf} or with code in
+% \texttt{ltcmdhooks-code.pdf}.
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generic hooks provided by file loading operations}
+%
+% There are several hooks added to \LaTeX{}'s process of loading
+% file via its high-level interfaces such as \cs{input},
+% \cs{include}, \cs{usepackage}, \cs{RequirePackage}, etc. These
+% are documented in \texttt{ltfilehook-doc.pdf} or with code in
+% \texttt{ltfilehook-code.pdf}.
+%
+%
%
% \subsubsection{Hooks provided by \cs{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}}
% \label{sec:begindocument-hooks}
@@ -1557,7 +1657,9 @@
% generates material for further pages. It is the right place to
% do some final housekeeping and possibly write out some
% information to the \texttt{.aux} file (which is still open at
-% this point to receive data). It is also the correct place to
+% this point to receive data, but since there will be no more pages you
+% need to write to it using \cs{immediate}\cs{write}). It is also the
+% correct place to
% set up any testing code to be run when the \texttt{.aux} file
% is re-read in the next step.
%
@@ -1615,7 +1717,7 @@
%
%
% It is in also possible to use the generic \hook{env/document/end}
-% hook which is execuded by \cs{end}, i.e., just in front of the
+% hook which is executed by \cs{end}, i.e., just in front of the
% first hook above. Note however that the other generic \cs{end}
% environment hook, i.e., \hook{env/document/after} will never get
% executed, because by that time \LaTeX{} has finished the document
@@ -1624,7 +1726,7 @@
%
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Hooks provided \cs{shipout} operations}
+% \subsubsection{Hooks provided by \cs{shipout} operations}
% \label{sec:shipout}
%
% There are several hooks and mechanisms added to \LaTeX{}'s
@@ -1633,14 +1735,6 @@
% \texttt{ltshipout-code.pdf}.
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Hooks provided by file loading operations}
-%
-% There are several hooks added to \LaTeX{}'s
-% process of loading file via its high-level interfaces such as
-% \cs{input}, \cs{include}, \cs{usepackage}, etc. These are documented in
-% \texttt{ltfilehook-doc.pdf} or with code in
-% \texttt{ltfilehook-code.pdf}.
-%
%
% \subsubsection{Hooks provided in NFSS commands}
%
@@ -1709,27 +1803,20 @@
% \section{The Implementation}
%
%
-% \subsection{Loading further extensions}
-%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<@@=hook>
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \changes{v1.0i}{2021/03/18}{Use \cs{NewModuleRelease}.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{2021/05/24}{Use \cs{msg_...} instead of \cs{__kernel_msg...}}
%
-% At the moment the whole module rolls back in one go, but if we
-% make any modifications in later releases this will then need
-% splitting.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {\NewHook}{The hook management}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
\ExplSyntaxOn
+%<latexrelease>\NewModuleRelease{2020/10/01}{lthooks}
+%<latexrelease> {The~hook~management~system}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-%
% \subsection{Debugging}
%
% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_debug_bool}
@@ -1772,9 +1859,11 @@
%
% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_str_compare:nn}
% Private copy of \cs{__str_if_eq:nn}
+% \InternalDetectionOff
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_str_compare:nn \__str_if_eq:nn
% \end{macrocode}
+% \InternalDetectionOn
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Declarations}
@@ -1857,8 +1946,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}{\tl_gremove_once:Nx,\tl_show:x,\tl_log:x}
-% Some variants of \pkg{expl3} functions. \fmi{should be moved to expl3}
+% \begin{macro}[int]{\tl_gremove_once:Nx,\tl_show:x,\tl_log:x}
+% Some variants of \pkg{expl3} functions.
+% \fmiinline{should probably be moved to expl3}
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_gremove_once:Nn { Nx }
\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_show:n { x }
@@ -1950,25 +2040,30 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
+%
% \subsection{Providing new hooks}
%
-% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_..._code_prop,\@@~...,\@@_next~...}
+% \subsubsection{The data structures of a hook}
%
-% Hooks have a \meta{name} and for each hook we have to provide a number of
-% data structures. These are
+% \DescribeMacro{\g_@@_\meta{hook}_code_prop}
+% \DescribeMacro{\@@\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}}
+% \DescribeMacro{\@@_next\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}}
+% Hooks have a name (called \meta{hook} in the description below)
+% and for each hook we have to
+% provide a number of data structures. These are
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\cs{g_@@_\meta{name}_code_prop}] A property list holding the code
+% \item[\cs{g_@@_\meta{hook}_code_prop}] A property list holding the code
% for the hook in separate chunks. The keys are by default the
% package names that add code to the hook, but it is possible
% for packages to define other keys.
%
-% \item[{\cs[no-index]{g_@@_\meta{name}_rule_\meta{label1}\string|\meta{label2}_tl}}]
+% \item[{\cs[no-index]{g_@@_\meta{hook}_rule_\meta{label1}\string|\meta{label2}_tl}}]
% A token list holding the relation between \meta{label1} and
-% \meta{label2} in the \meta{name}. The \meta{labels} are lexically
+% \meta{label2} in the \meta{hook}. The \meta{labels} are lexically
% (reverse) sorted to ensure that two labels always point to the same
-% token list. For global rules, the \meta{name} is |??|.
+% token list. For global rules, the \meta{hook} name is |??|.
%
-% \item[\cs{@@~\meta{name}}] The code that is actually executed
+% \item[\cs{@@\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}}] The code that is actually executed
% when the hook is called in the document is stored in this token
% list. It is constructed from the code chunks applying the
% information.
@@ -1977,54 +2072,194 @@
% and to make it simpler to normalize hook names in
% \cs{@@_make_name:n}.
%
-% \item[\cs{g_@@_\meta{name}_reversed_tl}] Some hooks are
+% \item[\cs{g_@@_\meta{hook}_reversed_tl}] Some hooks are
% \enquote{reversed}. This token list stores a |-| for such hook
% so that it can be identified. The |-| character is used because
% $\meta{reversed}1$ is $+1$ for normal hooks and $-1$ for reversed
% ones.
+
+% \item[{\cs[no-index]{g_@@_\meta{hook}_declared_tl}}] This token
+% list serves as marker for the hook being officially declared. Its
+% existence is tested to raise an error in case another declaration
+% is attempted.
%
-% \item[\cs{@@_toplevel~\meta{name}}] This token list stores the code
+% \item[\cs{@@_toplevel\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}}] This token list stores the code
% inserted in the hook from the user's document, in the |top-level|
% label. This label is special, and doesn't participate in sorting.
% Instead, all code is appended to it and executed after (or before,
% if the hook is reversed) the normal
% hook code, but before the |next| code chunk.
%
-% \item[\cs{@@_next~\meta{name}}] Finally there is extra code
-% (normally empty) that is used on the next invocation of the hook
-% (and then deleted). This can be used to define some special
-% behavior for a single occasion from within the document. This token
-% list follows the same naming scheme than the main \cs{@@~\meta{name}}
-% token list. It is called \cs{@@_next~\meta{name}} rather than
-% \cs{@@~next_\meta{name}} because otherwise a hook whose name is
-% |next_|\meta{name} would clash with the next code-token list of the
-% hook called \meta{name}.
+% \item[\cs{@@_next\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}}] Finally there is
+% extra code (normally empty) that is used on the next invocation
+% of the hook (and then deleted). This can be used to define some
+% special behavior for a single occasion from within the document.
+% This token list follows the same naming scheme than the main
+% \cs{@@\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}} token list. It is called
+% \cs{@@_next\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}} rather than
+% \cs[no-index]{@@\textvisiblespace next_\meta{hook}} because
+% otherwise a hook whose name is |next_|\meta{hook} would clash
+% with the next code-token list of the hook called \meta{hook}.
%
% \end{description}
-% \end{macro}
%
%
+% \subsubsection{On the existence of hooks}
+% \label{sec:existence}
+%
+% A hook may be in different states of existence. Here we give an
+% overview of internal commands to set up hooks and explain how the
+% different states are distinguished. The actual implementation
+% then follows in the next sections.
%
+% One problem we have to solve is, that we need to be able to add
+% code to hooks (e.g., with \cs{AddToHook}) even if that code has
+% not been declared yet. For example, one package needs to write
+% into a hook of another package, but that package ay not get
+% loaded or only loaded later. Another problem most hooks require
+% declaration but this is not the case for the generic hooks.
%
-% \begin{macro}{\hook_new:n}
-% The \cs{hook_new:n} declaration declare a new hook and expects
+% We therefore distinguish the following states for a hook and they
+% are managed with four different tests: structure existence
+% (\cs{@@_if_structure_exist:nTF}), creation
+% (\cs{@@_if_usable:nTF}), declaration (\cs{@@_if_declared:nTF})
+% and disabled or not (\cs{@@_if_disabled:nTF})
+% \begin{description}
+% \setlist[itemize]{leftmargin=5cm,format=\cs}
+% \item[not existing]
+%
+% Nothing is known about the hook so far. This state can be
+% detected with \cs{@@_if_structure_exist:nTF}
+% (which uses the false branch).
+%
+% In this state the hook can be declared, disabled, rules can be
+% defined or code could be added to it, but it is not possible
+% to use the hook (with \cs{UseHook}).
+
+% \item[basic data structure set up]
+%
+% A hook is this state when its basic data structure has been
+% set up (using \cs{@@_init_structure:n}). The data structure setup happens
+% automatically when commands such as \cs{AddToHook} are used
+% and the hook is at that point in state \enquote{not existing}.
+%
+% In this state the four tests give the following results:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item [@@_if_structure_exist:nTF] returns |true|.
+% \item [@@_if_usable:nTF] returns |false|.
+% \item [@@_if_declared:nTF] returns |false|.
+% \item [@@_if_disabled:nTF] returns |false|.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% The allowed acctions are the same as in the \enquote{not
+% existing} state.
+%
+% \item[declared]
+%
+% A hook is in this state it is not disabled and was explicity declared (e.g.,
+% with \cs{NewHook}). In this case the four tests give the
+% following results:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item [@@_if_structure_exist:nTF] returns |true|.
+% \item [@@_if_usable:nTF] returns |true|.
+% \item [@@_if_declared:nTF] returns |true|.
+% \item [@@_if_disabled:nTF] returns |false|.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item[usable]
+%
+% A hook is in this state if it is not disabled, was not
+% explicitly declared but nevertheless is allowed to be used
+% (with \cs{UseHook} or \cs{hook_use:n}). This state is only
+% possible for generic hooks as they do not need to be
+% declared. Therefore such hooks move directly from state
+% \enquote{not existing} to \enquote{usable} the moment a
+% declaration such as \cs{AddToHook} wants to add to the hook
+% data structure. In this state the tests give the following
+% results:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item [@@_if_structure_exist:nTF] returns |true|.
+% \item [@@_if_usable:nTF] returns |true|.
+% \item [@@_if_declared:nTF] returns |false|.
+% \item [@@_if_disabled:nTF] returns |false|.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+% \item[disabled]
+%
+% A hook in any state is moved to this state when
+% \cs{DisableHook} is used. This changes the tests to give the
+% following results:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item [@@_if_structure_exist:nTF] \emph{unchanged}.
+% \item [@@_if_usable:nTF] returns |false|.
+% \item [@@_if_declared:nTF] returns |true|.
+% \item [@@_if_disabled:nTF] returns |true|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% The structure test is unchanged (if the hook was unknown before it is
+% false, otherwise true). The usable test returns false so that
+% any \cs{UseHook} will bypass the hook from now on. The
+% declared test returns true so that any further \cs{NewHook}
+% generates an error and the disabled test returns true so that
+% \cs{AddToHook} can return an error.
+% \fmiinline{maybe it should do this only after begin document?}
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Setting hooks up}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hook_new:n,\@@_new:n}
+% The \cs{hook_new:n} declaration declares a new hook and expects
% the hook \meta{name} as its argument, e.g.,
% \hook{begindocument}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_new:n #1
{ \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_new:n {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_new:n #1
{
% \end{macrocode}
-% We check for one of the internal data structures and if it
-% already exists we complain.
+% We check if the hook was already \emph{explicitly} declared with
+% \cs{hook_new:n}, and if it already exists we complain, otherwise set
+% the \enquote{created} flag for the hook so that it errors next time
+% \cs{hook_new:n} is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \hook_if_exist:nTF {#1}
+ \@@_if_declared:nTF {#1}
{ \msg_error:nnn { hooks } { exists } {#1} }
+ {
+ \tl_new:c { g_@@_#1_declared_tl }
+ \@@_make_usable:n {#1}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_make_usable:n}
+%
+% This initializes all hook data structures for the hook but if
+% used on its own doesn't mark the hook as declared (as
+% \cs{hook_new:n} does, so a later \cs{hook_new:n} on that hook will
+% not result in an error. This command is internally used by
+% \cs{hook_gput_code:n} when adding code to a generic hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_make_usable:n #1
+ {
% \end{macrocode}
-% Otherwise we add the hook name to the list of all hooks and
-% allocate the necessary data structures for the new hook.
+% Now we check if the hook's data structure can be safely created
+% without \pkg{expl3} raising errors, then
+% we add the hook name to the list of all hooks and
+% allocate the necessary data structures for the new hook,
+% otherwise just do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_exist:cF { @@~#1 }
{
\seq_gput_right:Nn \g_@@_all_seq {#1}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -2035,12 +2270,12 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Now ensure that the base data structure for the hook exists:
% \begin{macrocode}
- \@@_declare:n {#1}
+ \@@_init_structure:n {#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{g_@@_\meta{hook}_labels_clist} holds the sorted list of
% labels (once it got sorted). This is used only for debugging.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \clist_new:c {g_@@_#1_labels_clist}
+ \clist_new:c { g_@@_#1_labels_clist }
% \end{macrocode}
% Some hooks should reverse the default order of code chunks. To
% signal this we have a token list which is empty for normal hooks
@@ -2062,23 +2297,30 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@_include_legacy_code_chunk:n {#1}
- }
+ }
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
-% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare:n}
-% This function declares the basic data structures for a hook without
-% actually declaring the hook itself. This is needed to allow adding
-% to undeclared hooks. Here it is unnecessary to check whether all
-% variables exist, since all three are declared at the same time
-% (either all of them exist, or none).
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_init_structure:n}
+% This function declares the basic data structures for a hook
+% without explicit declaring the hook itself. This is needed to
+% allow adding to undeclared hooks. Here it is unnecessary to
+% check whether all variables exist, since all three are declared
+% at the same time (either all of them exist, or none).
+%
+% It creates the hook code pool
+% (\cs[no-index]{g_@@_\meta{hook}_code_prop}) and the |top-level|
+% and |next| token lists. A hook is initialized with
+% \cs{@@_init_structure:n} the first time anything is added to it.
+% Inizializing a hook just with \cs{@@_init_structure:n} will not
+% make it usable with \cs{hook_use:n}.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare:n #1
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_init_structure:n #1
{
- \@@_if_exist:nF {#1}
+ \@@_if_structure_exist:nF {#1}
{
\prop_new:c { g_@@_#1_code_prop }
\tl_new:c { @@_toplevel~#1 }
@@ -2110,6 +2352,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\hook_new_pair:nn}
% A shorthand for declaring a normal and a (matching) reversed hook in one go.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2160,6 +2405,140 @@
%
%
%
+% \subsubsection{Disabling and providing hooks}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hook_disable:n}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_disable:n}
+% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\@@_if_disabled:n}
+%
+% Disables a hook by creating its
+% \cs[no-index]{g_@@_\meta{hook}_declared_tl} so that the hook
+% errors when used with \cs{hook_new:n}, then it undefines
+% \cs{@@\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}} so that it may not be executed.
+%
+% This does not clear any code that may be already stored in the
+% hook's structure, but doesn't allow adding more code.
+% \cs{@@_if_disabled:nTF} uses that specific combination to check
+% if the hook is disabled.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\hook_disable:n}{Disable~hooks}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_disable:n #1
+ { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_disable:n {#1} }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_disable:n #1
+ {
+ \tl_gclear_new:c { g_@@_#1_declared_tl }
+ \cs_undefine:c { @@~#1 }
+ }
+\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_disabled:n #1 { p, T, F, TF }
+ {
+ \bool_lazy_and:nnTF
+ { \tl_if_exist_p:c { g_@@_#1_declared_tl } }
+ { ! \tl_if_exist_p:c { @@~#1 } }
+ { \prg_return_true: }
+ { \prg_return_false: }
+ }
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}
+%<latexrelease> {\hook_disable:n}{Disable~hooks}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_disable:n #1 {}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hook_provide:n}
+% \begin{macro}{\hook_provide_reversed:n}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_provide:n}
+% The \cs{hook_provide:n} declaration declares a new hook if it
+% wasn't declared already, in which case it only checks that the
+% already existing hook is not a reversed hook.
+% The \cs{hook_provide_reversed:n} does the same for reversed hooks.
+% \hook{begindocument}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\hook_provide:n}{Providing~hooks}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_provide:n #1
+ { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_provide:nn {#1} { } }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_provide_reversed:n #1
+ { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_provide:nn {#1} { - } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_provide:nn #1 #2
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the hook to be provided was disabled we warn (for now --- this
+% may change).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_if_disabled:nTF {#1}
+ { \msg_warning:nnn { hooks } { provide-disabled } {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we check if it was already declared.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \@@_if_declared:nTF {#1}
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Issue an error if we try to provide a a hook that is reversed and
+% the already existing one is not (or vice versa).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \str_if_eq:eeF { \tl_use:c { g_@@_#1_reversed_tl } } {#2}
+ { \msg_error:nnn { hooks } { provide-error } {#1} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If it wasn't declared, we declared as a normal or reversed hook
+% as appropriate.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \tl_new:c { g_@@_#1_declared_tl }
+ \@@_make_usable:n {#1}
+ \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#1_reversed_tl } {#2}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hook_provide_pair:nn}
+% A shorthand for providing a normal and a (matching) reversed hook in one go.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_provide_pair:nn #1#2
+ { \hook_provide:n {#1} \hook_provide_reversed:n {#2} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}
+%<latexrelease> {\hook_provide:n}{Providing~hooks}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_provide_reversed:n #1 {}
+%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_provide:n #1 {}
+%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_provide_pair:nn #1#2 {}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
% \subsection{Parsing a label}
%
% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_parse_label_default:n}
@@ -2231,7 +2610,7 @@
{
\tl_if_empty:NTF \@currname
{
- \msg_expandable_error:nnn { hooks } { should-not-happen }
+ \msg_expandable_error:nnn { kernel } { should-not-happen }
{ Empty~default~label. }
\@@_make_name:n { label-missing }
}
@@ -2243,15 +2622,15 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_make_name:n,\@@_make_name:w}
-% Provides a standard sanitisation of a hook's name.
+% Provides a standard sanitization of a hook's name.
% It uses \cs{cs:w} to build a control sequence out of the hook name,
% then uses \cs{cs_to_str:N} to get the string representation of that,
% without the escape character. \cs{cs:w}-based expansion is used
% instead of |e|-based because Unicode characters don't behave well
-% inside \cs{expanded}. The macro adds the \cs{@@~} prefix to the
+% inside \cs{expanded}. The macro adds the \cs[no-index]{@@\textvisiblespace} prefix to the
% hook name to reuse the hook's code token list to build the csname
% and avoid leaving \enquote{public} control sequences defined
-% (as~\cs{relax}) in TeX's memory.
+% (as~\cs[no-index]{relax}) in TeX's memory.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new:Npn \@@_make_name:n #1
{
@@ -2311,6 +2690,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
+%
+% \subsection{Adding or removing hook code}
+%
% \begin{macro}{\hook_gput_code:nnn}
% \begin{macro}{\@@_gput_code:nnn,\@@_gput_code:nxv,\@@_hook_gput_code_do:nnn}
%
@@ -2320,6 +2702,9 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_gput_code:nnn #1 #2
{ \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nnn \@@_gput_code:nnn {#1} {#2} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_gput_code:nnn #1 #2 #3
{
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -2343,7 +2728,7 @@
% If no removal is queued, we are free to add. Start by checking if
% the hook exists.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \hook_if_exist:nTF {#1}
+ \@@_if_usable:nTF {#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% If so we simply add (or append) the new code to the property list
% holding different chunks for the hook. At \verb=\begin{document}=
@@ -2364,10 +2749,17 @@
% declare it as a generic hook, if its name matches one of the valid
% patterns.
% \begin{macrocode}
- { \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} }
+ {
+ \@@_if_disabled:nTF {#1}
+ { \msg_error:nnn { hooks } { hook-disabled } {#1} }
+ { \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} }
+ }
}
}
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_gput_code:nnn { nxv }
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -2379,7 +2771,7 @@
% However, first some debugging info if debugging is enabled:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@_debug:n{\iow_term:x{****~ Add~ to~
- \hook_if_exist:nF {#1} { undeclared~ }
+ \@@_if_usable:nF {#1} { undeclared~ }
hook~ #1~ (#2)
\on@line\space <-~ \tl_to_str:n{#3}} }
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -2387,9 +2779,9 @@
% If there's code already there, then append \verb=#3= to that,
% otherwise just put \verb=#3=. If the current label is |top-level|,
% the code is added to a dedicated token list
-% \cs[no-index]{@@_toplevel~\meta{hook}} that goes at the end of the
+% \cs{@@_toplevel\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}} that goes at the end of the
% hook (or at the beginning, for a reversed hook), just before
-% \cs[no-index]{@@_next~\meta{hook}}.
+% \cs[no-index]{@@_next\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\str_if_eq:nnTF {#2} { top-level }
{
@@ -2397,9 +2789,9 @@
{
% \end{macrocode}
% If the hook's basic structure does not exist, we need to declare it
-% with \cs{@@_declare:n}.
+% with \cs{@@_init_structure:n}.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \@@_declare:n {#1}
+ \@@_init_structure:n {#1}
\@@_tl_gput_right:cn { @@_toplevel~#1 } {#3}
}
{ \msg_error:nnn { hooks } { misused-top-level } {#1} }
@@ -2424,14 +2816,15 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_gput_undeclared_hook:nnn #1 #2 #3
{
- \@@_declare:n {#1}
+ \@@_init_structure:n {#1}
\@@_hook_gput_code_do:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_next_hook:nn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn,
+% \@@_try_declaring_generic_next_hook:nn}
+%
% These entry-level macros just pass the arguments along to the
% common \cs{@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nNNnn} with the right
% functions to execute when some action is to be taken.
@@ -2458,13 +2851,14 @@
\hook_gput_next_code:nn \@@_gput_next_do:nn
}
% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}{
-% \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nNNnn,
-% \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn
-% }
-% \begin{macro}[TF]{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn}
-% \cs{@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nNNnn} now splits the hook name
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nNNnn,
+% \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn}
+%
+% \cs{@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nNNnn}
+% now splits the hook name
% at the first \texttt{/} (if any) and first checks if it is a
% file-specific hook (they require some normalization) using
% \cs{@@_if_file_hook:wTF}. If not then check it is one of a
@@ -2482,12 +2876,24 @@
}
{ \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn {#1} }
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn #1 #2 #3
{
\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wnTF #1 / / / \scan_stop: {#1}
{ #2 }
{ #3 } {#1}
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}[TF]{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn}{Support~cmd~hooks}
\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn
#1 / #2 / #3 / #4 \scan_stop: #5 { TF }
{
@@ -2496,31 +2902,70 @@
{
\prop_if_in:NnTF \c_@@_generics_prop {#1}
{
- \hook_if_exist:nF {#5} { \hook_new:n {#5} }
+ \@@_if_usable:nF {#5}
+ {
% \end{macrocode}
-% After having declared the hook we check the second component (for
-% file hooks) or the third component for environment hooks) and
-% if it is on the list of components for which we should have declared
-% a reversed hook we alter the hook data structure accordingly.
+% If the hook doesn't exist yet we check if it is a \texttt{cmd}
+% hook and if so we attempt patching the command in addition to
+% declaring the hook.
+%
+% For some commands this will not be possible, in which case
+% \cs{@@_patch_cmd_or_delay:Nnn} (defined in \texttt{ltcmdhooks})
+% will generate an appropriate error message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \str_if_eq:nnT {#1} { cmd }
+ { \@@_try_put_cmd_hook:n {#5} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Declare the hook always even if it can't really be used (error
+% message generated elsewhere).
+%
+% Here we use \cs{@@_make_usable:n}, so that a \cs{hook_new:n} is still
+% possible later.
% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_make_usable:n {#5}
+ }
\prop_if_in:NnTF \c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop {#2}
{ \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#5_reversed_tl } { - } }
{
\prop_if_in:NnT \c_@@_generics_reversed_iii_prop {#3}
{ \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#5_reversed_tl } { - } }
}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now that we know that the hook is declared we can add the code to it.
-% \begin{macrocode}
\prg_return_true:
}
{ \prg_return_false: }
}
}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn}{Support~cmd~hooks}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn
+%<latexrelease> #1 / #2 / #3 / #4 \scan_stop: #5 { TF }
+%<latexrelease> {
+%<latexrelease> \tl_if_empty:nTF {#2}
+%<latexrelease> { \prg_return_false: }
+%<latexrelease> {
+%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnTF \c_@@_generics_prop {#1}
+%<latexrelease> {
+%<latexrelease> \@@_if_declared:nF {#5} { \hook_new:n {#5} }
+%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnTF \c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop {#2}
+%<latexrelease> { \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#5_reversed_tl } { - } }
+%<latexrelease> {
+%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnT \c_@@_generics_reversed_iii_prop {#3}
+%<latexrelease> { \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#5_reversed_tl } { - } }
+%<latexrelease> }
+%<latexrelease> \prg_return_true:
+%<latexrelease> }
+%<latexrelease> { \prg_return_false: }
+%<latexrelease> }
+%<latexrelease> }
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\@@_if_file_hook:w}
@@ -2529,7 +2974,7 @@
% |file/before/foo.tex|). If it is a file-specific hook, then it
% executes the \meta{true} branch, otherwise \meta{false}.
%
-% A file-specific hook is \texttt{file/\meta{position}/\meta{name}}.
+% A file-specific hook is \hook{file/\meta{position}/\meta{name}}.
% If any of these parts don't exist, it is a general file hook or not
% a file hook at all, so the conditional evaluates to \meta{false}.
% Otherwise, it checks that the first part is |file| and that the
@@ -2595,14 +3040,16 @@
% Property list holding the generic names. We don't provide any user
% interface to this as this is meant to be static.
% \begin{description}
+% \item[\texttt{cmd}]
+% The generic hooks used for commands.
% \item[\texttt{env}]
% The generic hooks used in \cs{begin} and \cs{end}.
-% \item[\texttt{file}]
+% \item[\texttt{file}, \texttt{package}, \texttt{class}, \texttt{include}]
% The generic hooks used when loading a file
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\prop_const_from_keyval:Nn \c_@@_generics_prop
- {env=,file=,package=,class=,include=}
+ {cmd=,env=,file=,package=,class=,include=}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -2629,11 +3076,11 @@
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_gremove_code:nn #1 #2
{
% \end{macrocode}
-% First check that the hook code pool exists. \cs{hook_if_exist:nTF}
+% First check that the hook code pool exists. \cs{@@_if_usable:nTF}
% isn't used here because it should be possible to remove code from a
% hook before its defined (see section~\ref{sec:querying}).
% \begin{macrocode}
- \@@_if_exist:nTF {#1}
+ \@@_if_structure_exist:nTF {#1}
{
% \end{macrocode}
% Then remove the chunk and run \cs{@@_update_hook_code:n} so
@@ -2641,9 +3088,9 @@
% \verb=\begin{document}=.
%
% If all code is to be removed, clear the code pool
-% \cs[no-index]{g_@@_\meta{hook}_code_prop}, the top-level code
-% \cs[no-index]{@@_toplevel~\meta{hook}}, and the next-execution code
-% \cs[no-index]{@@_next~\meta{hook}}.
+% \cs{g_@@_\meta{hook}_code_prop}, the top-level code
+% \cs{@@_toplevel\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}}, and the next-execution code
+% \cs{@@_next\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\str_if_eq:nnTF {#2} {*}
{
@@ -2656,7 +3103,7 @@
% If the label is |top-level| then clear the token list, as all code
% there is under the same label. Marked removal is not implemented
% for |top-level| because it is hard to reliably know that no code
-% was added to \cs[no-index]{@@_toplevel~\meta{hook}} (granted that
+% was added to \cs{@@_toplevel\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}} (granted that
% an empty code could be interpreted as that, but then it differs in
% behaviour from other labels, in which an empty chunk is still valid
% for removal). Besides, it doesn't make much (if any) sense for
@@ -2680,7 +3127,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally update the code, if the hook exists.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \hook_if_exist:nT {#1}
+ \@@_if_usable:nT {#1}
{ \@@_update_hook_code:n {#1} }
}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -2775,10 +3222,10 @@
% disadvantage of that being not really distinguishable from a real
% hook name. I now have settled for \texttt{??} which needs some
% gymnastics to get it into the csname, but since this is used a
-% lot things should be fast, so this is not done with \texttt{c}
+% lot, the code should be fast, so this is not done with \texttt{c}
% expansion in the code later on.
%
-% \cs{@@~??} isn't used, but it has to be defined to trick
+% \cs{@@\textvisiblespace??} isn't used, but it has to be defined to trick
% the code into thinking that \verb=??= is actually a hook.
% \begin{macrocode}
\prop_new:c {g_@@_??_code_prop}
@@ -2799,14 +3246,12 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\hook_gset_rule:nnnn}
% \begin{macro}{\@@_gset_rule:nnnn}
-%
-% \fmi{needs docu correction given new implementation}
-%
% With
% \cs{hook_gset_rule:nnnn}\Arg{hook}\Arg{label1}\Arg{relation}\Arg{label2}
% a relation is defined between the two code labels for the given
% \meta{hook}. The special hook \texttt{??} stands for \emph{any}
-% hook describing a default rule.
+% hook, which sets a default rule (to be used if no other relation
+% between the two hooks exist).
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_gset_rule:nnnn #1#2#3#4
{
@@ -2814,14 +3259,14 @@
{#1} {#2} {#3} {#4}
}
% \end{macrocode}
-%
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_gset_rule:nnnn #1#2#3#4
{
% \end{macrocode}
% First we ensure the basic data structure of the hook exists:
% \begin{macrocode}
- \@@_declare:n {#1}
+ \@@_init_structure:n {#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we clear any previous relationship between both labels.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2898,9 +3343,11 @@
% together in hook |#1|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_rule_incompatible-error_gset:nnn } #1#2#3
- { \@@_tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } { xE } }
+ { \@@_tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl }
+ { xE } }
\cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_rule_incompatible-warning_gset:nnn } #1#2#3
- { \@@_tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } { xW } }
+ { \@@_tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl }
+ { xW } }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -2937,7 +3384,7 @@
{
\if_int_compare:w \@@_str_compare:nn {#1} {#2} > 0 \exp_stop_f:
\prg_return_true:
- \else
+ \else:
\prg_return_false:
\fi:
}
@@ -3037,13 +3484,13 @@
% If there aren't any code
% chunks for the current hook, there is no point in even starting
% the sorting routine so we make a quick test for that and in that
-% case just update \cs{@@~\meta{hook}} to hold the |top-level| and
+% case just update \cs{@@\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}} to hold the |top-level| and
% |next| code chunks. If there are code chunks we call
% \cs{@@_initialize_single:NNn} and pass to it ready made csnames
% as they are needed several times inside. This way we save a bit
% on processing time if we do that up front.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \hook_if_exist:nT {#1}
+ \@@_if_usable:nT {#1}
{
\prop_if_empty:cTF {g_@@_#1_code_prop}
{
@@ -3096,7 +3543,7 @@
% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_tl_csname:n,\@@_seq_csname:n}
% It is faster to pass a single token and expand it when necessary
% than to pass a bunch of character tokens around.
-% \fmi{note to myself: verify}
+% \fmiinline{note to myself: verify}
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new:Npn \@@_tl_csname:n #1 { l_@@_label_#1_tl }
\cs_new:Npn \@@_seq_csname:n #1 { l_@@_label_#1_seq }
@@ -3160,7 +3607,7 @@
% a way that one can omit a lot of tests and I have mimicked that as
% far as possible. The result is a restriction I do not test for at
% the moment: a label can't be equal to the number 0! \fmi{Needs
-% checking for, just in case}
+% checking for, just in case ... maybe}
%
% ^^A #1 <- \@@~#1
% ^^A #2 <- \g_@@_#1_labels_clist
@@ -3301,7 +3748,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% This is not really the information one needs in the error case
-% but will do for now \ldots \fmi{fix}
+% but will do for now \ldots \fmi{improve output on a rainy day}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@_debug_label_data:N \l_@@_work_prop
\iow_term:x{====================}
@@ -3572,15 +4019,20 @@
{ \@@_log_cmd:x { >~#1 } }
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_log_line_indent:x #1
{ \@@_log_cmd:x { >~\@spaces #1 } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_log:nN #1 #2
{
\@@_preamble_hook:n {#1}
\@@_log_cmd:x { ^^J ->~The~hook~'#1': }
% \end{macrocode}
-%
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
- \hook_if_exist:nF {#1}
- { \@@_log_line:x { is~not~declared! } }
+ \@@_if_usable:nF {#1}
+ { \@@_log_line:x { The~hook~is~not~declared. } }
+ \@@_if_disabled:nT {#1}
+ { \@@_log_line:x { The~hook~is~disabled. } }
\hook_if_empty:nTF {#1}
{ #2 { The~hook~is~empty } }
{
@@ -3598,7 +4050,7 @@
\@@_log_line:x
{
Document-level~(top-level)~code
- \hook_if_exist:nT {#1}
+ \@@_if_usable:nT {#1}
{ ~(executed~\@@_if_reversed:nTF {#1} {first} {last} ) } :
}
\@@_log_line_indent:x
@@ -3649,7 +4101,7 @@
% to that hook) and not empty
% \begin{macrocode}
\bool_lazy_and:nnTF
- { \hook_if_exist_p:n {#1} }
+ { \@@_if_usable_p:n {#1} }
{ ! \hook_if_empty_p:n {#1} }
{
\@@_log_line:x
@@ -3671,10 +4123,12 @@
}
}
{
+ \@@_log_line:x { Execution~order: }
#2
{
- Hook~ \hook_if_exist:nTF {#1}
- {code~pool~empty} {not~declared}
+ \@spaces Not~set~because~the~hook~ \@@_if_usable:nTF {#1}
+ { code~pool~is~empty }
+ { is~\@@_if_disabled:nTF {#1} {disabled} {undeclared} }
}
}
}
@@ -3766,25 +4220,37 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+%
+%
+%
% \subsection{Specifying code for next invocation}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hook_gput_next_code:nn}
-% \begin{macro}{%
-% \@@_gput_next_code:nn,
-% \@@_gput_next_do:nn,
-% \@@_gput_next_do:Nnn,
-% \@@_clear_next:n
-% }
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_gput_next_code:nn #1
{ \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_gput_next_code:nn {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_gput_next_code:nn,
+% \@@_gput_next_do:nn,
+% \@@_gput_next_do:Nnn,
+% \@@_clear_next:n}
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_gput_next_code:nn #1 #2
{
- \@@_declare:n {#1}
- \hook_if_exist:nTF {#1}
- { \@@_gput_next_do:nn {#1} {#2} }
- { \@@_try_declaring_generic_next_hook:nn {#1} {#2} }
+ \@@_if_disabled:nTF {#1}
+ { \msg_error:nnn { hooks } { hook-disabled } {#1} }
+ {
+ \@@_init_structure:n {#1}
+ \@@_if_usable:nTF {#1}
+ { \@@_gput_next_do:nn {#1} {#2} }
+ { \@@_try_declaring_generic_next_hook:nn {#1} {#2} }
+ }
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_gput_next_do:nn #1
{
\exp_args:Nc \@@_gput_next_do:Nnn
@@ -3813,7 +4279,11 @@
{ \cs_gset_eq:cN { @@_next~#1 } \c_empty_tl }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
%
% \subsection{Using the hook}
%
@@ -3840,7 +4310,7 @@
% them causes an update, so \cs{hook_use:n} can be made expandable.
% This one is better not protected so that it can expand into nothing
% if containing no code. Also important in case of generic hooks that
-% we do not generate a \cs{relax} as a side effect of checking for a
+% we do not generate a \cs[no-index]{relax} as a side effect of checking for a
% csname. In contrast to the \TeX{} low-level
% \verb=\csname ...\endcsname= construct \cs{tl_if_exist:c} is
% careful to avoid this.
@@ -3877,7 +4347,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_use:wn}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@_try_file_hook:n,\@@_if_exist_use:n}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_try_file_hook:n,\@@_if_usable_use:n}
% \cs{@@_use:wn} does a quick check to test if the current hook is a
% file hook: those need a special treatment. If it is not, the hook
% does not exist. If it is, then \cs{@@_try_file_hook:n} is called,
@@ -3887,7 +4357,7 @@
%
% If it is a file-specific hook, it passes through the same
% normalization as during declaration, and then it is used if defined.
-% \cs{@@_if_exist_use:n} checks if the hook exist, and calls
+% \cs{@@_if_usable_use:n} checks if the hook exist, and calls
% \cs{@@_preamble_hook:n} if so, then uses the hook.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new:Npn \@@_use:wn #1 / #2 \s_@@_mark #3
@@ -3896,16 +4366,22 @@
{ \@@_try_file_hook:n {#3} }
{ } % Hook doesn't exist
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_file_hook:n #1
{
\@@_if_file_hook:wTF #1 / / \s_@@_mark
{
- \exp_args:Ne \@@_if_exist_use:n
+ \exp_args:Ne \@@_if_usable_use:n
{ \exp_args:Ne \@@_file_hook_normalize:n {#1} }
}
- { \@@_if_exist_use:n {#1} } % file/ generic hook (e.g. file/before)
+ { \@@_if_usable_use:n {#1} } % file/ generic hook (e.g. file/before)
}
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_if_exist_use:n #1
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_if_usable_use:n #1
{
\tl_if_exist:cT { @@~#1 }
{
@@ -3928,7 +4404,6 @@
% hook name, since \cs{hook_use:n} and \cs{hook_use_once:n} are
% documented to not trim spaces.
%
-% \pho{Should this raise an error if the hook doesn't exist?}
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_use_once:n #1
{
@@ -3952,9 +4427,10 @@
% exist, in which case emptiness doesn't apply (though
% \cs{tl_if_empty:N} returns false in this case).
%
-% Hooks are a bit more complicated: they have four possible states.
+% Hooks are a bit more complicated: they have several other states as
+% discussed in \ref{sec:existence}.
% A hook may exist or not, and either way it may or may not be empty
-% (even a hook that doesn't exist may be non-empty).
+% (even a hook that doesn't exist may be non-empty) or may be disabled.
%
% A hook is said to be empty when no code was added to it, either to
% its permanent code pool, or to its ``next'' token list. The hook
@@ -3964,19 +4440,19 @@
% In this case it is important that the code added by package $B$ is
% remembered until package $A$ is loaded).
%
-% A hook is said to exist when it was declared with \cs{hook_new:n} or
-% some variant thereof.
-%
+% All other states can only be queried with internal tests as the
+% different states are irrelevant for package code.
+
% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\hook_if_empty:n}
% Test if a hook is empty (that is, no code was added to that hook).
% A \meta{hook} being empty means that all three of its
-% \cs[no-index]{g_@@_\meta{hook}_code_prop}, its
-% \cs[no-index]{@@_toplevel~\meta{hook}} and its
-% \cs[no-index]{@@_next~\meta{hook}} are empty.
+% \cs{g_@@_\meta{hook}_code_prop}, its
+% \cs{@@_toplevel\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}} and its
+% \cs{@@_next\textvisiblespace\meta{hook}} are empty.
% \begin{macrocode}
\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \hook_if_empty:n #1 { p , T , F , TF }
{
- \@@_if_exist:nTF {#1}
+ \@@_if_structure_exist:nTF {#1}
{
\bool_lazy_and:nnTF
{ \prop_if_empty_p:c { g_@@_#1_code_prop } }
@@ -3993,8 +4469,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\hook_if_exist:n}
-% A canonical way to test if a hook exists. A hook exists if the
+%
+% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\@@_if_usable:n}
+% A hook is usable if the
% token list that stores the sorted code for that hook,
% \cs[no-index]{@@~\meta{hook}}, exists. The property list
% \cs[no-index]{g_@@_\meta{hook}_code_prop} cannot be used here
@@ -4002,7 +4479,7 @@
% if such hook was already declared, or even if it will ever be
% (for example, in case the package that defines it isn't loaded).
% \begin{macrocode}
-\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \hook_if_exist:n #1 { p , T , F , TF }
+\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_usable:n #1 { p , T , F , TF }
{
\tl_if_exist:cTF { @@~#1 }
{ \prg_return_true: }
@@ -4011,13 +4488,15 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\@@_if_exist:n}
-% An internal check if the hook has already been declared with
-% \cs{@@_declare:n}. This means that the hook was already used somehow
+% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\@@_if_structure_exist:n}
+%
+% An internal check if the hook has already its basic internal
+% structure set up with
+% \cs{@@_init_structure:n}. This means that the hook was already used somehow
% (a code chunk or rule was added to it), but it still wasn't declared
% with \cs{hook_new:n}.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_exist:n #1 { p , T , F , TF }
+\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_structure_exist:n #1 { p , T , F , TF }
{
\prop_if_exist:cTF { g_@@_#1_code_prop }
{ \prg_return_true: }
@@ -4025,6 +4504,22 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\@@_if_declared:n}
+%
+% Internal test to check if the hook was officially declared with
+% \cs{hook_new:n} or a variant.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_declared:n #1 { p, T, F, TF }
+ {
+ \tl_if_exist:cTF { g_@@_#1_declared_tl }
+ { \prg_return_true: }
+ { \prg_return_false: }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\@@_if_reversed:n}
% An internal conditional that checks if a hook is reversed.
@@ -4043,11 +4538,21 @@
%
% \subsection{Messages}
%
+% Hook errors are LaTeX kernel errors:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prop_gput:Nnn \g_msg_module_type_prop { hooks } { LaTeX }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And so are kernel errors (this should move elsewhere eventually).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prop_gput:Nnn \g_msg_module_type_prop { kernel } { LaTeX }
+%\prop_gput:Nnn \g_msg_module_name_prop { kernel } { } % <-- currently not working
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { labels-incompatible }
{
- Labels~`#1'~and~`#2'~are~incompatible
- \str_if_eq:nnF {#3} {??} { ~in~hook~`#3' } .~
+ Labels~'#1'~and~'#2'~are~incompatible
+ \str_if_eq:nnF {#3} {??} { ~in~hook~'#3' } .~
\int_compare:nNnTF {#4} = { 1 }
{ The~ code~ for~ both~ labels~ will~ be~ dropped. }
{ You~ may~ see~ errors~ later. }
@@ -4058,17 +4563,28 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { exists }
- { Hook~`#1'~ has~ already~ been~ declared. }
+ { Hook~'#1'~ has~ already~ been~ declared. }
{ There~ already~ exists~ a~ hook~ declaration~ with~ this~
name.\\
Please~ use~ a~ different~ name~ for~ your~ hook.}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { hook-disabled }
+ { Cannot~add~code~to~disabled~hook~'#1'. }
+ {
+ The~hook~'#1'~you~tried~to~add~code~to~was~previously~disabled~
+ with~\iow_char:N\\hook_disable:n~or~\iow_char:N\\DisableHook,~so~
+ it~cannot~have~code~added~to~it.
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\msg_new:nnn { hooks } { empty-label }
{
Empty~code~label~\msg_line_context:.~
- Using~`\@@_currname_or_default:'~instead.
+ Using~'\@@_currname_or_default:'~instead.
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -4082,26 +4598,26 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { unknown-rule }
- { Unknown~ relationship~ `#3'~
- between~ labels~ `#2'~ and~ `#4'~
- \str_if_eq:nnF {#1} {??} { ~in~hook~`#1' }. ~
+ { Unknown~ relationship~ '#3'~
+ between~ labels~ '#2'~ and~ '#4'~
+ \str_if_eq:nnF {#1} {??} { ~in~hook~'#1' }. ~
Perhaps~ a~ missspelling?
}
{
The~ relation~ used~ not~ known~ to~ the~ system.~ Allowed~ values~ are~
- `before'~ or~ `<',~
- `after'~ or~ `>',~
- `incompatible-warning',~
- `incompatible-error',~
- `voids'~ or~
- `unrelated'.
+ 'before'~ or~ '<',~
+ 'after'~ or~ '>',~
+ 'incompatible-warning',~
+ 'incompatible-error',~
+ 'voids'~ or~
+ 'unrelated'.
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { misused-top-level }
{
- Illegal~\iow_char:N \\AddToHook{#1}[top-level]{...}.\\
+ Illegal~use~of~\iow_char:N \\AddToHook{#1}[top-level]{...}.\\
'top-level'~is~reserved~for~the~user's~document.
}
{
@@ -4115,22 +4631,13 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\msg_new:nnn { hooks } { set-top-level }
{
- You~cannot~change~the~default~label~#1~`top-level'.~Illegal \\
+ You~cannot~change~the~default~label~#1~'top-level'.~Illegal \\
\use:nn { ~ } { ~ } \iow_char:N \\#2{#3} \\
\msg_line_context:.
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\msg_new:nnn { hooks } { ddhl-deprecated }
- {
- \iow_char:N \\DeclareDefaultHookLabel~is~deprecated.\\
- Use~\iow_char:N \\SetDefaultHookLabel~instead.\\ \\
- The~deprecated~name~will~be~removed~in~the~next~release.
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
\msg_new:nnn { hooks } { extra-pop-label }
{
Extra~\iow_char:N \\PopDefaultHookLabel. \\
@@ -4139,18 +4646,47 @@
\msg_new:nnn { hooks } { missing-pop-label }
{
Missing~\iow_char:N \\PopDefaultHookLabel. \\
- The~label~`#1'~was~pushed~but~never~popped.~Something~is~wrong.
+ The~label~'#1'~was~pushed~but~never~popped.~Something~is~wrong.
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\msg_new:nnn { hooks } { should-not-happen }
+\msg_new:nnn { kernel } { should-not-happen }
{
- ERROR!~This~should~not~happen.~#1 \\
+ This~should~not~happen.~#1 \\
Please~report~at~https://github.com/latex3/latex2e.
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnn { hooks } { provide-disabled }
+ {
+ Cannot~ provide~ hook~ '#1'~ because~ it~ is~ disabled!
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { provide-error }
+ {
+ Hook~'#1'~ already~ declared~ as~ a~
+ \@@_if_reversed:nTF {#1} { reversed } { normal }~ hook!
+ }
+ {
+ You~ attempted~ to~ provide~ the~ hook~'#1'~ as~ a~
+ \@@_if_reversed:nTF {#1} { normal } { reversed }~ hook,~ but~ it~
+ was~ already~ previously~ declared~ as~ a~
+ \@@_if_reversed:nTF {#1} { reversed } { normal }~ hook.~
+ A~ redeclaration~ is~ not~ possible.
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
% \subsection{\LaTeXe{} package interface commands}
%
%
@@ -4164,6 +4700,44 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\hook_provide:n}{Providing~hooks}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvideHook,\ProvideReversedHook,\ProvideMirroredHookPair}
+% Providing new hooks \ldots
+% \changes{v1.0m}{2021/04/29}{Add \cs{ProvideHook} etc.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NewDocumentCommand \ProvideHook { m }{ \hook_provide:n {#1} }
+\NewDocumentCommand \ProvideReversedHook { m }{ \hook_provide_reversed:n {#1} }
+\NewDocumentCommand \ProvideMirroredHookPair { mm }{ \hook_provide_pair:nn {#1}{#2} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DisableHook}
+% Disabling a (generic) hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NewDocumentCommand \DisableHook { m }{ \hook_disable:n {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}
+%<latexrelease> {\hook_provide:n}{Providing~hooks}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\def \ProvideHook#1{}
+%<latexrelease>\def \ProvideReversedHook#1{}
+%<latexrelease>\def \ProvideMirroredHookPair#1#2{}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\AddToHook}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4192,7 +4766,10 @@
% \begin{macro}{\SetDefaultHookLabel}
% \begin{macro}{\PushDefaultHookLabel}
% \begin{macro}{\PopDefaultHookLabel}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareDefaultHookLabel}
+%
+% \fmiinline{Docu task: At some point this code for this should be moved to the
+% label section earlier and here we should keep only the interface commands.}
+%
% \begin{macro}{\@@_curr_name_push:n,\@@_curr_name_push_aux:n}
% \begin{macro}{\@@_curr_name_pop:}
% \begin{macro}{\@@_end_document_label_check:}
@@ -4216,8 +4793,11 @@
% the stack to support roll forward. But in some rare cases,
% \pkg{latexrelease} may be loaded inside another package (notably
% \pkg{platexrelease}), so we'll first push the |top-level| entry:
+% \changes{v1.0i}{2021/03/18}
+% {Only add \texttt{top-level} if not already there.}
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<latexrelease>\seq_gput_right:Nn \g_@@_name_stack_seq { top-level }
+%<latexrelease>\seq_if_empty:NT \g_@@_name_stack_seq
+%<latexrelease> { \seq_gput_right:Nn \g_@@_name_stack_seq { top-level } }
% \end{macrocode}
% then we dissect the \cs{@currnamestack}, adding \cs{@currname} to
% the stack:
@@ -4233,9 +4813,12 @@
%<latexrelease> \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_tail
%<latexrelease> \q_recursion_tail \q_recursion_stop
% \end{macrocode}
-% and finalle set the default label to be the \cs{@currname}:
+% and finally set the default label to be the \cs{@currname}:
+% \changes{v1.0i}{2021/03/18}
+% {Remove the (empty) \enquote{top-level} from \cs{@currnamestack}.}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\tl_gset:Nx \g_@@_hook_curr_name_tl { \@currname }
+%<latexrelease>\seq_gpop_right:NN \g_@@_name_stack_seq \l_@@_tmpa_tl
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Two commands keep track of the stack: when a file is input,
@@ -4274,7 +4857,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% At the end of the document we want to check if there was no
-% \cs{@@_curr_name_push:} without a matching \cs{@@_curr_name_pop:}
+% \cs{@@_curr_name_push:n} without a matching \cs{@@_curr_name_pop:}
% (not a critical error, but it might indicate that something else is
% not quite right):
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4316,11 +4899,6 @@
}
{ \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_hook_curr_name_tl {#1} }
}
-\NewDocumentCommand \DeclareDefaultHookLabel { m }
- {
- \msg_error:nn { hooks } { ddhl-deprecated }
- \SetDefaultHookLabel {#1}
- }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The label is only automatically updated with \cs{@onefilewithoptions}
@@ -4360,7 +4938,6 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
%
%
%
@@ -4413,7 +4990,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\ClearHookRule}
% A special setup rule that removes an existing relation.
% Basically {@@_rule_gclear:nnn} plus fixing the property list for debugging.
-% \fmi{Need an L3 interface, or maybe it should get dropped?}
+% \fmiinline{Needs perhaps an L3 interface, or maybe it should get dropped?}
% \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand \ClearHookRule { m m m }
{ \hook_gset_rule:nnnn {#1}{#2}{unrelated}{#3} }
@@ -4421,19 +4998,33 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\IfHookExistsTF,\IfHookEmptyTF}
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\IfHookEmptyTF}
% Here we avoid the overhead of \pkg{xparse}, since \cs{IfHookEmptyTF}
% is used in \cs{end} (that is, every \LaTeX{} environment). As a
% further optimisation, use \cs{let} rather than \cs{def} to avoid one
% expansion step.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\cs_new_eq:NN \IfHookExistsTF \hook_if_exist:nTF
\cs_new_eq:NN \IfHookEmptyTF \hook_if_empty:nTF
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\IfHookExistsTF}
+% Marked for removal and no longer documented in the doc section!
+% \phoinline{\cs{IfHookExistsTF} is used in \texttt{jlreq.cls},
+% \texttt{pxatbegshi.sty}, \texttt{pxeverysel.sty},
+% \texttt{pxeveryshi.sty}, so the public name may be an alias of the
+% internal conditional for a while. Regardless, those packages' use for
+% \cs{IfHookExistsTF} is not really correct and can be changed.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \IfHookExistsTF \@@_if_usable:nTF
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%5
%
% \subsection{Internal commands needed elsewhere}
%
@@ -4449,6 +5040,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@expl@@@initialize@all@@,
% \@expl@@@hook@curr@name@pop@@}
%
+% \InternalDetectionOff
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_eq:NN \@expl@@@initialize@all@@
\__hook_initialize_all:
@@ -4458,29 +5050,25 @@
\cs_new_eq:NN \@expl@@@hook@curr@name@pop@@
\__hook_curr_name_pop:
% \end{macrocode}
+% \InternalDetectionOn
% \end{macro}
%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ExplSyntaxOff
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
% Rolling back here doesn't undefine the interface commands as they
% may be used in packages without rollback functionality. So we
% just make them do nothing which may or may not work depending on
% the code usage.
% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/10/04}{Definition \cs{AddToHookNext} was supposed
-% to be for \cs{AddToHook} vize versa (gh/401)}
+% to be for \cs{AddToHook} vice versa (gh/401)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\NewHook}{The hook management}%
+%<latexrelease> {lthooks}{The~hook~management}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\def \NewHook#1{}
+%<latexrelease>\def \NewReversedHook#1{}
+%<latexrelease>\def \NewMirroredHookPair#1#2{}
%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\def\NewHook#1{}
-%<latexrelease>\def\NewReversedHook#1{}
-%<latexrelease>\def\NewMirroredHookPair#1#2{}
+%<latexrelease>\def \DisableHook #1{}
%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\long\def\AddToHookNext#1#2{}
%<latexrelease>
@@ -4508,7 +5096,9 @@
%<latexrelease>\long\def \IfHookExistsTF #1#2#3{#3}
%<latexrelease>\long\def \IfHookEmptyTF #1#2#3{#2}
%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\EndModuleRelease
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
index 71ab081c669..9244db06423 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
%\iffalse This is a META comment
%
% File `lthyphen.dtx'.
-% Copyright (C) 1994-94 LaTeX3 project, Frank Mittelbach and
+% Copyright (C) 1994-94 LaTeX Project, Frank Mittelbach and
% Rainer Sch\"opf, all rights reserved.
%
%\fi
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
index dcb88e83e98..75a80cd4390 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
index f5b63ed35ea..1be147547ec 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltlength.dtx}
- [2019/08/27 v1.1d LaTeX Kernel (Lengths)]
+ [2020/12/05 v1.1d LaTeX Kernel (Lengths)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltlength.dtx}
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@
% This macro takes the contents of the skip register that is
% supplied as its argument and removes the fractional part to make
% it a whole number of points. This can be used in class files to
-% avoid values like |345.4666666pt| when calulating a dimension.
+% avoid values like |345.4666666pt| when calculating a dimension.
% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@settopoint#1{\divide#1\p@\multiply#1\p@}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
index 653e4e2edd2..fecb3125880 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltlists.dtx}
- [2020/04/24 v1.0t LaTeX Kernel (List Environments)]
+ [2020/12/05 v1.0t LaTeX Kernel (List Environments)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltlists.dtx}
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@
% the entire environment is a single item. It is defined by
% letting |\quotation| == |\list{}{...}\item\relax|. (Note the
% |\relax|, there in case the first character in the environment is a
-% '['.) The spacing parameters provide a great deal of flexability in
+% '['.) The spacing parameters provide a great deal of flexibility in
% designing the format, including the ability to let the indentation of
% the first paragraph be different from that of the subsequent ones.
%
@@ -589,7 +589,7 @@
% when not inlabel flag is false}
% Because |\par| is sometimes made a no-op it is possible for a missing
% |\item| to produce a loop that does not fill memory and so never gets
-% trapped by \TeX. We thus need to trap this here by seting |\par| to
+% trapped by \TeX. We thus need to trap this here by setting |\par| to
% count the number of times a paragraph ii is called with no progress
% being made started.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -729,7 +729,7 @@
% If a section heading changes |\clubpenalty| to keep lines
% after it together then this modification is restored via the
% |\everypar| mechanism at the start of the next paragraph. As we
-% destroy the contents of this token here we explicity set
+% destroy the contents of this token here we explicitly set
% |\clubpenalty| back to its default.
% \changes{v1.0t}{2015/05/10}{Explicitly reset \cs{clubpenalty} before
% clearing \cs{everypar}; see also pr/0462 and pr/4065}
@@ -807,7 +807,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@item}
-% \changes{v1.0l}{1996/07/26}{Remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1996/07/26}{Remove unnecessary \cs{global} before
% \cs{@minipage...}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@item[#1]{%
@@ -889,7 +889,7 @@
\everypar{}%
\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v1.0l}{1996/07/26}{Remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1996/07/26}{Remove unnecessary \cs{global} before
% \cs{@nobreak...}}
% \changes{v1.0m}{1996/10/23}{\cs{@nobreak...} moved into the
% \cs{everypar} and not executed unconditionally, see above}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
index 6784cb41c00..132eaf636f7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx
index 8573b3e6ca6..3b9a3377312 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2015-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 2015-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
\ProvidesFile{ltluatex.dtx}
%</driver>
%<*tex>
-[2020/09/25 v1.1s
+[2021/04/18 v1.1t
%</tex>
%<plain> LuaTeX support for plain TeX (core)
%<*tex>
@@ -38,6 +38,10 @@
%</tex>
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{}
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{}
+
\GetFileInfo{ltluatex.dtx}
\begin{document}
\title{\filename\\(Lua\TeX{}-specific support)}
@@ -129,7 +133,7 @@
% \DescribeMacro{\newluachunkname}
% |newluachunkname{|\meta{chunkname}|}|\\
% Allocates a number for Lua chunk register, indexed from~$1$.
-% Also enters the name of the regiser (without backslash) into the
+% Also enters the name of the register (without backslash) into the
% \verb|lua.name| table to be used in stack traces.
%
% \noindent
@@ -204,6 +208,7 @@
% The number is returned and also \meta{name} argument is added to the
% |lua.name| array at that index.
%
+% \begin{sloppypar}
% \noindent
% \DescribeMacro{new_luafunction}
% |luatexbase.new_luafunction(|\meta{functionname}|)|\\
@@ -211,6 +216,7 @@
% with |\luafunction|, |\lateluafunction|, and |\luadef|,
% indexed from~$1$. The optional \meta{functionname} argument
% is just used for logging.
+% \end{sloppypar}
%
% These functions all require access to a named \TeX{} count register
% to manage their allocations. The standard names are those defined
@@ -582,7 +588,7 @@
% \changes{v1.0a}{2015/09/24}{Macro added}
% Category code tables are allocated with a limit half of that used by Lua\TeX{}
% for everything else. At the end of allocation there needs to be an
-% initialisation step. Table~$0$ is already taken (it's the global one for
+% initialization step. Table~$0$ is already taken (it's the global one for
% current use) so the allocation starts at~$1$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\e@alloc@ccodetable@count\@undefined
@@ -779,8 +785,8 @@
% \subsection{Lua loader}
% \changes{v1.1r}{2020/08/10}{Load ltluatex Lua module during format building}
%
-% Lua code loaded in the format often has to to be loaded again at the
-% beginning of every job, so we define a helper whch allows us to avoid
+% Lua code loaded in the format often has to be loaded again at the
+% beginning of every job, so we define a helper which allows us to avoid
% duplicated code:
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1113,9 +1119,10 @@ luatexbase.registernumber = registernumber
%
% \begin{macro}{new_attribute}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2015/09/24}{Function added}
-% \changes{v1.1c}{2017/02/18}{Parameterise count used in tracking}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{2017/02/18}{Parameterize count used in tracking}
% As attributes are used for Lua manipulations its useful to be able
% to assign from this end.
+% \InternalDetectionOff
% \begin{macrocode}
local attributes=setmetatable(
{},
@@ -1143,12 +1150,13 @@ local function new_attribute(name)
end
luatexbase.new_attribute = new_attribute
% \end{macrocode}
+% \InternalDetectionOn
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Custom whatsit allocation}
%
% \begin{macro}{new_whatsit}
-% \changes{v1.1c}{2017/02/18}{Parameterise count used in tracking}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{2017/02/18}{Parameterize count used in tracking}
% Much the same as for attribute allocation in Lua.
% \begin{macrocode}
local whatsit_count_name = whatsit_count_name or "e@alloc@whatsit@count"
@@ -1169,7 +1177,7 @@ luatexbase.new_whatsit = new_whatsit
% \subsection{Bytecode register allocation}
%
% \begin{macro}{new_bytecode}
-% \changes{v1.1c}{2017/02/18}{Parameterise count used in tracking}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{2017/02/18}{Parameterize count used in tracking}
% Much the same as for attribute allocation in Lua.
% The optional \meta{name} argument is used in the log if given.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1192,7 +1200,7 @@ luatexbase.new_bytecode = new_bytecode
% \subsection{Lua chunk name allocation}
%
% \begin{macro}{new_chunkname}
-% \changes{v1.1c}{2017/02/18}{Parameterise count used in tracking}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{2017/02/18}{Parameterize count used in tracking}
% As for bytecode registers but also store the name in the
% |lua.name| table.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1404,6 +1412,7 @@ local callbacktypes = callbacktypes or {
% \changes{v1.1j}{2019/06/18}{make\_extensible added}
% \changes{v1.1j}{2019/06/18}{font\_descriptor\_objnum\_provider added}
% \changes{v1.1l}{2020/02/02}{glyph\_info added}
+% \changes{v1.1t}{2021/04/18}{input\_level\_string added}
% \begin{macrocode}
define_font = exclusive,
glyph_info = exclusive,
@@ -1411,6 +1420,7 @@ local callbacktypes = callbacktypes or {
glyph_stream_provider = exclusive,
make_extensible = exclusive,
font_descriptor_objnum_provider = exclusive,
+ input_level_string = exclusive,
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.0m}{2016/02/11}{pdf\_stream\_filter\_callback removed}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1469,7 +1479,7 @@ end
% functions in inverse order.
% \item[exclusive] is for functions with more complex signatures; functions in
% this type of callback are \emph{not} combined: An error is raised if
-% a second callback is registered..
+% a second callback is registered.
% \end{description}
%
% Handler for |data| callbacks.
@@ -1735,7 +1745,7 @@ luatexbase.add_to_callback = add_to_callback
%
% \begin{macro}{remove_from_callback}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2015/09/24}{Function added}
-% \changes{v1.0k}{2015/12/02}{adjust initialisation of cb local (PHG)}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{2015/12/02}{adjust initialization of cb local (PHG)}
% \changes{v1.0k}{2015/12/02}{Give more specific error messages (PHG)}
% \changes{v1.1m}{2020/03/07}{Do not call callback.register for user-defined callbacks}
% Remove a function from a callback. First check arguments.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
index 770367c8a30..aadb96fb023 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltmath.dtx}
- [2020/11/09 v1.2h LaTeX Kernel (Math Setup)]
+ [2021/04/20 v1.2i LaTeX Kernel (Math Setup)]
% \iffalse
%</driver>
%
@@ -529,7 +529,7 @@
%
% Originally \LaTeX{} only provided a small set of spacing commands
% for use in text and math, some of the commands like \cs{;} were
-% only supported in manth mode. \texttt{amsmath} normalized and
+% only supported in math mode. \texttt{amsmath} normalized and
% provided all of them in text and math. This code has now been
% moved to the kernel so that it is generally available.
%
@@ -961,11 +961,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@eqncr}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{2021/04/20}{Use \cs{protected} for \cs{\bslash} variant (gh/548)}
% \begin{macro}{\@xeqncr}
% \begin{macro}{\@yeqncr}
% \changes{v1.0y}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Use \cs{@testopt} /1911}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@eqncr{%
+\protected\def\@eqncr{%
{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@ifstar{%
\global\@eqpen\@M\@yeqncr
@@ -1033,8 +1034,9 @@
\let\@seqncr=\@eqncr
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \changes{v1.2i}{2021/04/20}{Use \cs{protected} for \cs{\bslash} variant (gh/548)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{eqnarray*}{\def\@eqncr{\nonumber\@seqncr}\eqnarray}
+\@namedef{eqnarray*}{\protected\def\@eqncr{\nonumber\@seqncr}\eqnarray}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1101,7 +1103,7 @@
% To put the equation number on the left side of an equation we
% have to use a little trick. The number is shifted |\displaywidth|
% to the left inside a box of (approximately) zero width. This
-% fails when the quation is too wide, the equation number than may
+% fails when the equation is too wide, the equation number than may
% overprint the equation itself.
% \changes{v1.2y classes}{1995/01/12}{Added \cs{normalcolor}}
% \changes{v1.3c classes}{1995/05/25}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
index cf7f3c836be..8bae3f9bfa3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltmiscen.dtx}
- [2020/12/18 v1.1x LaTeX Kernel (Misc. Environments)]
+ [2021/02/08 v1.1y LaTeX Kernel (Misc. Environments)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltmiscen.dtx}
@@ -214,6 +214,7 @@
% \changes{v1.1i}{2000/05/19}
% {Reset \cs{AtEndDocument} for latex/3060}
% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@kernel@before@enddocument
\UseOneTimeHook{enddocument}%
\@kernel@after@enddocument
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -390,6 +391,35 @@
%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\@kernel@before@enddocument}
+% The \cs{@kernel@before@enddocument} hook is slightly different
+% because we initialize it with \cs{par} so that \cs{enddocument} always
+% returns to vertical mode as its first action.
+% \changes{v1.1x}{2020/10/26}{\cs{enddocument} should always start out in
+% vmode (gh/385)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@kernel@before@enddocument}{kernel before hook}%
+\def\@kernel@before@enddocument{\par}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The rollback code renders it harmless.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {\@kernel@before@enddocument}{kernel before hook}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let\@kernel@before@enddocument\@empty
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@testdef}
@@ -838,6 +868,15 @@
%<latexrelease> \expandafter\endgroup\if@endpe\@doendpe\fi
%<latexrelease> \if@ignore\@ignorefalse\ignorespaces\fi}
%<latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Also undo the internal commands as some packages unfortunately test
+% for their existence instead of using \cs{IfFormatAtLeastTF}.
+% \changes{v1.1y}{2021/02/08}{Undo the internals for robust \cs{begin}
+% and \cs{end} in rollback (gh/494)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\expandafter\let\csname begin \endcsname\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\expandafter\let\csname end \endcsname\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<*2ekernel>
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
index c6bfc149b7c..eb2ecd1e537 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -37,14 +37,14 @@
%<TS1>\ProvidesFile{ts1enc.def}[2001/06/05 v3.0e (jk/car/fm)
%<TU>\ProvidesFile{tuenc.def}
%<package>\ProvidesPackage{fontenc}
-%<OT1|T1|OMS|OML|OT4|TU|package> [2020/08/10 v2.0s
+%<OT1|T1|OMS|OML|OT4|TU|package> [2021/04/29 v2.0v
%<OT1|T1|OMS|OML|OT4|TS1|TU> Standard LaTeX file]
%<package> Standard LaTeX package]
%
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltoutenc.dtx}
- [2020/08/10 v2.0s LaTeX Kernel (font encodings)]
+ [2021/04/29 v2.0v LaTeX Kernel (font encodings)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltoutenc.dtx}
@@ -421,7 +421,7 @@
% for |\textdollar| in \texttt{OT1} is a hack since \$ and \pounds{}
% actually share the same slot in this encoding. Thus if such a glyph
% becomes available in a different encoding (e.g., \texttt{TS1}) one
-% would like to get rid of the flacky one and make the default
+% would like to get rid of the flaky one and make the default
% definition point to the new encoding. In such a case defining
%\begin{verbatim}
% \DeclareTextSymbol{\textdollar}{TS1}{36}
@@ -841,7 +841,7 @@
% avoid that (they are some hidden inside \cs{maybe@load@fontshape}).
% As we don't have to load the fontshape in this case
% (as that happened in the box above if necessary, we simply
-% disable that part of the code temporaily.
+% disable that part of the code temporarily.
% We also ignore \cs{ignorespaces} which has the same issue and may
% show up as part of \cs{normalfont} if that is used.
% \changes{v2.0m}{2019/12/18}{Avoid code that breaks \cs{accent}}
@@ -1717,6 +1717,17 @@
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textemdash}{OT1}{124}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textendash}{OT1}{123}
% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \verb=\nobreak\hskip\z@= is there to prevent a break after
+% the hyphen but allow later breaks in the remainder of the word.
+% \changes{v2.0u}{2021/02/19}{Add \cs{textnonbreakinghyphen}, \cs{textfiguredash}
+% and \cs{texthorizontalbar} (gh/404)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textnonbreakinghyphen}{OT1}{\mbox{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textfiguredash} {OT1}{\textendash}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\texthorizontalbar} {OT1}{\textemdash}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% Using the ligatures helps with OT1 fonts that have
% |\textexclamdown| and |\textquestiondown| in unusual positions.
% \changes{v1.95}{2002/06/17}{Definition of \cs{textexclamdown} changed (pr/3368)}
@@ -2045,6 +2056,19 @@
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdollar}{T1}{`\$}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textemdash}{T1}{22}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textendash}{T1}{21}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \verb=\nobreak\hskip\z@= is there to prevent a break after
+% the hyphen but allow later breaks in the remainder of the word.
+% \changes{v2.0u}{2021/02/19}{Add \cs{textnonbreakinghyphen}, \cs{textfiguredash}
+% and \cs{texthorizontalbar} (gh/404)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textnonbreakinghyphen}{T1}{\mbox{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textfiguredash} {T1}{\textendash}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\texthorizontalbar} {T1}{\textemdash}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textexclamdown}{T1}{189}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textgreater}{T1}{`\>}
%\DeclareTextSymbol{\texthyphenchar}{T1}{127}
@@ -2538,7 +2562,7 @@
%
% The tie accent was borrowed from the |cmmi| font. The tc fonts
% now provide four tie accents, the first two are done in the
-% classical way with assymetric glyphs hanging out of their boxes;
+% classical way with asymmetric glyphs hanging out of their boxes;
% the new ties are centered in their boxes like all other accents.
% They need a name: please tell us if you know what to call them.
%
@@ -2550,7 +2574,7 @@
\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalnewtie}{TS1}{29}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Compund word marks.
+% Compound word marks.
%
% The text companion fonts contain two compound word marks of
% different heights, one has |cap_height|, the other |asc_height|.
@@ -2583,8 +2607,31 @@
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotesingle}{TS1}{39}
% \end{macrocode}
% "28 = 40
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasteriskcentered}{TS1}{42}
+%
+% The symbol \cs{textasteriskcentered} ``\textasteriskcentered'' is
+% supposed to be always available in \texttt{TS1} and that is
+% important as it is used in footnote symbols. However, in a few
+% fonts it is missing even though they are otherwise fairly
+% complete. We therefore use a rather elaborate method and check if
+% the slot has a glyph and if not produce a poor man's version by
+% using a normal ``*'' slightly enlarged and somewhat lowered.
+% The main application for this symbol is in footnote symbols and
+% there it should produce a comparable size and show a similar placement.
+% \changes{v2.0t}{2021/02/17}{Special definition for
+% \cs{textasteriskcentered} when missing in TS1 (gh/502)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasteriskcentered}{TS1}{42} % that's wanted
+\DeclareTextCommand \textasteriskcentered{TS1}{% % and that's needed
+ \iffontchar\font 42 \char42 \else
+ \begingroup\fontencoding{T1}%
+ \fontsize
+ {\the\dimexpr1.3\dimexpr\f@size pt\relax}%
+ {\f@baselineskip}%
+ \selectfont
+ \raisebox{-0.7ex}[\dimexpr\height-0.7ex][0pt]{*}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
% \end{macrocode}
% Note that '054 is a comma and '056 is a full stop: these make
% numbers using oldstyle digits easier to input.
@@ -2837,7 +2884,7 @@
%<*TU>
% \end{macrocode}
% In the base interface the Unicode encoding is always known as TU
-% But we parameterise the encoding name to allow for modelling
+% But we parameterize the encoding name to allow for modelling
% differences in Unicode support by different fonts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand\UnicodeEncodingName{TU}
@@ -3106,8 +3153,34 @@
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbaht} \UnicodeEncodingName{"0E3F}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\SS} \UnicodeEncodingName{"1E9E}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcompwordmark} \UnicodeEncodingName{"200C}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0u}{2021/02/19}{Add \cs{textnonbreakinghyphen}, \cs{textfiguredash}
+% and \cs{texthorizontalbar} (gh/404)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textnonbreakinghyphen} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2011}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textfiguredash} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2012}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textendash} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2013}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textemdash} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2014}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\texthorizontalbar} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2015}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Unfortunately some fonts do not implement \texttt{"2011}, \texttt{"2012} and/or
+% \texttt{"2015} (including the \LaTeX{} default fonts for Unicode
+% engines) so we provide some approximations if the glyph is
+% missing, like we do for \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{T1}.
+%
+% The \verb=\nobreak\hskip\z@= is there to prevent a break after
+% the hyphen but allow later breaks in the remainder of the word.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textnonbreakinghyphen} \UnicodeEncodingName
+ {\iffontchar\font "2011 \char "2011 \else \mbox{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@ \fi}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textfiguredash} \UnicodeEncodingName
+ {\iffontchar\font "2012 \char "2012 \else \char "2013 \fi}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\texthorizontalbar} \UnicodeEncodingName
+ {\iffontchar\font "2015 \char "2015 \else \char "2014 \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbardbl} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2016}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquoteleft} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2018}
\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquoteright} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2019}
@@ -3159,15 +3232,17 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Not all fonts have U+2217 but using U+002A requires some adjustment.
+% \changes{v2.0t}{2021/02/17}{Adjust values for
+% \cs{textasteriskcentered} To match TS1 definition (gh/502)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTextCommand{\textasteriskcentered}\UnicodeEncodingName{%
\iffontchar\font"2217 \char"2217 \else
\begingroup
\fontsize
- {\the\dimexpr1.2\dimexpr\f@size pt\relax}%
+ {\the\dimexpr1.3\dimexpr\f@size pt\relax}%
{\f@baselineskip}%
\selectfont
- \raisebox{-0.6ex}[\dimexpr\height-0.6ex][0pt]{*}%
+ \raisebox{-0.7ex}[\dimexpr\height-0.7ex][0pt]{*}%
\endgroup
\fi
}
@@ -3393,8 +3468,19 @@
\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\v} {o}{"01D2}
\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\v} {U}{"01D3}
\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\v} {u}{"01D4}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0v}{2021/04/29}{Add composites for
+% \texttt{\protect\string\ae/\protect\string\AE/\ae/\AE} (gh/552)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\'} \AE{"01FC}
+\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\'} {Æ}{"01FC}
+\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\'} \ae{"01FD}
+\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\'} {æ}{"01FD}
\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\=} \AE{"01E2}
+\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\=} {Æ}{"01E2}
\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\=} \ae{"01E3}
+\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\=} {æ}{"01E3}
\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\v} {G}{"01E6}
\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\v} {g}{"01E7}
\DeclareUnicodeComposite{\v} {K}{"01E8}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
index 17d62e11e8a..1330b5c44eb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
index 35d049b9590..b1b3a240965 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltoutput.dtx}
- [2020/08/21 v1.4f LaTeX Kernel (Output Routine)]
+ [2021/05/05 v1.4g LaTeX Kernel (Output Routine)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltoutput.dtx}
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
% \iffalse
% LATEX VERSION 2e
% Copyright (C) 1992 by Leslie Lamport
-% Copyright (C) 1994-2000 by Leslie Lamport, LaTeX3 project
+% Copyright (C) 1994-2000 by Leslie Lamport, LaTeX Project
%
% LaTeX 2e kernel file for the output routine.
%
@@ -1134,7 +1134,7 @@
\global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
\ifx \@dbltoplist \@empty
\else
- \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
+ \@latex@error{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
\let \@dbltoplist \@empty
\fi
\@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
@@ -1525,7 +1525,7 @@
\global \@colroom \@colht
\ifx \@currlist\@empty
\else
- \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
+ \@latex@error{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
\global \let \@currlist \@empty
\fi
\@makefcolumn\@deferlist
@@ -1676,7 +1676,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
% \changes{v0.1c}{1993/11/23}{Command changed}
% \changes{v1.0b}{1993/11/29}{\cs{@makespecialcolbox} added}
-% We must rewrite this macro to alllow for variations in page-makeup
+% We must rewrite this macro to allow for variations in page-makeup
% required by changes in page-length.
%
% This uses a different macro if a special-length column is being
@@ -1860,7 +1860,7 @@
% force the shortest possible column with the possibility of an
% overfull box.
%
-% This should work for bothe flush- and ragged-bottom setting since
+% This should work for both flush- and ragged-bottom setting since
% it makes the contents no smaller than the size (|\@colht|) of the
% box into which they are put.
%
@@ -2074,7 +2074,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The |\catcode`\ = 10| was removed as it was considered useless
-% (presumably because nothing gets tokenised during shipout).
+% (presumably because nothing gets tokenized during shipout).
%
% This was put in as some error produced active spaces in a mark, I
% think.
@@ -2156,7 +2156,7 @@
%
% The rest was always inside the box.
%
-% RmS 91/08/15: aded this line:
+% RmS 91/08/15: added this line:
% \begin{macrocode}
\reset@font
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -3864,7 +3864,7 @@
% be printed in as small a space as possible, ie it uses any
% shrinkability in the column. If the column was not explicitly broken
% (\eg with |\pagebreak|) this may result in an overfull box message but
-% execpt for this it will come out as expected (if you know what to
+% except for this it will come out as expected (if you know what to
% expect).
%
% The star form of this command is dedicated to Leslie Lamport, the
@@ -3920,9 +3920,9 @@
%</trace>
\@tempskipa#2\relax
\ifdim \@tempskipa>.5\maxdimen
- \@latexerr{Suggested\space extra\space height\space
- (\the\@tempskipa)\space dangerously\space
- large}\@eha
+ \@latex@error{Suggested\space extra\space height\space
+ (\the\@tempskipa)\space dangerously\space
+ large}\@eha
\else
\ifdim \vsize<.5\maxdimen
%<*trace>
@@ -3940,8 +3940,8 @@
\fi
%</trace>
\else
- \@latexerr{Page\space height\space already\space
- too\space large}\@eha
+ \@latex@error{Page\space height\space already\space
+ too\space large}\@eha
\fi
\fi
}
@@ -3973,7 +3973,7 @@
% It also enables the use of an extra specifier, {\tt !}, in the
% location optional argument of a float. If this is present then,
% just for this particular float, whenever it is processed by the float
-% mechanism the followinhg are ignored:
+% mechanism the following are ignored:
%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item all restrictions on the number of floats which can appear;
@@ -4556,7 +4556,7 @@
% Yet another is to move the column count register from the multicol
% package into the kernel. This has been done.
% \item Where should the reinserts be put to maximise the
-% probability that footmotes come out on the correct page?
+% probability that footnotes come out on the correct page?
% Or should we go for as much compatibility as possible (but see
% next item)?
% \item Should we continue to support (as much as possible)
@@ -4980,7 +4980,7 @@
%
% At the top of the page |\@fptop| is inserted;
% typically this supplies some stretchable whitespace.
-% At the bottom of the page |\@fpbot| ais inserted.
+% At the bottom of the page |\@fpbot| is inserted.
% Between adjacent floats |\@fpsep| is inserted.
%
% These parameters are used for all floating objects on a
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
index 8c7aac0a7b8..4504033f542 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltpage.dtx}
- [2020/07/27 v1.0m LaTeX Kernel (page style setup)]
+ [2020/12/05 v1.0m LaTeX Kernel (page style setup)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltpage.dtx}
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@
% the problem is solved.}
% \changes{v1.0j}{2000/05/26}{Use \cs{@empty} instead of brace group
% (pr/3203).}
-% \task{???}{mark initialisation solved?}
+% \task{???}{mark initialization solved?}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@markright#1#2#3{\@temptokena {#1}%
\unrestored@protected@xdef\@themark{{\the\@temptokena}{#3}}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
index 6374f58b89a..03d36a53d98 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltpageno.dtx}
- [1994/05/19 v1.1a LaTeX Kernel (Page Numbering)]
+ [2020/12/05 v1.1a LaTeX Kernel (Page Numbering)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltpageno.dtx}
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
% assigned by |\newcount|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pagenumbering}
-% The user sets the pagenumber style with the |\pagenumbering|\marg{foo}
+% The user sets the page number style with the |\pagenumbering|\marg{foo}
% command, which sets the page counter to 1 and defines |\thepage| to be
% |\foo|. For example, |\pagenumbering{roman}| causes pages to be
% numbered i, ii, etc.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
index ed1b439e9da..969954be0a7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltpar.dtx}
- [1995/04/29 v1.1c LaTeX Kernel (paragraphs)]
+ [2021/04/13 v1.1c LaTeX Kernel (paragraphs)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltpar.dtx}
@@ -67,9 +67,11 @@
% |\par| and |\everypar| when ever their function needs to be
% changed for a long time.
%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \subsection{Implementation}
+% This file here describes the interfaces that have been in the kernel
+% forever, used to implement the scenarios described below. They
+% remain valid but are now augmented in the next file
+% (\texttt{ltpara.dtx}) to add hooks to paragraphs. At some point we
+% will consolidate the two files further.
%
%
% There are two situations in which |\par| may be changed:
@@ -93,6 +95,12 @@
% \end{itemize}
% \end{itemize}
%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \subsection{Implementation}
+%
+%
% \DescribeMacro{\@setpar}
% To permit the proper interaction of these two situations, long-term
% changes are made by the |\@setpar{|\meta{VAL}|}| command.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5ab52a5e9bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1223 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: ltpara.dtx (C) Copyright 2020-2021
+% Frank Mittelbach, LaTeX Team
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+%%% From File: ltpara.dtx
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltparaversion{v1.0g}
+\def\ltparadate{2021/05/27}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+
+%\usepackage{ltpara}
+
+% Fixing footnotes in functions and variables: this should be in l3doc!
+\newcommand\fixfootnote[2]{\footnotemark
+ \AddToHookNext{env/#1/after}{\footnotetext{#2}}}
+\AddToHook{env/function/begin}{\def\footnote{\fixfootnote{function}}}
+\AddToHook{env/variable/begin}{\def\footnote{\fixfootnote{variable}}}
+
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{ltpara.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\env[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+%
+%
+% \title{The \texttt{ltpara.dtx} code\thanks{This file has version
+% \ltparaversion\ dated \ltparadate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\
+% Project.}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% This code defines four special kernel hooks to support paragraph
+% tagging as well as four public hooks which can be occasionally
+% useful.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+%
+% The building of paragraphs in the \TeX{} engine(s) has a number
+% of peculiarities that makes it on one hand fairly flexible but on
+% the other hand somewhat awkward to control or reliably to extend.
+% Thus to better understand the code below we start with a brief introduction
+% of the mechanism; for more details refer to the
+% \TeX{}book~\cite[chap.~14]{texbook} (for the full truth you may
+% even have to study the program code).
+%
+% \subsection{The default processing done by the engine}
+%
+% \TeX{} automatically starts building a paragraph when it is
+% currently in vertical mode and encounters anything that can only
+% live in horizontal mode. Most often this is a character, but
+% there are also many commands that can be used only in horizontal mode.
+% If any of them is encountered, \TeX{} will immediately back up
+% (i.e., the character or command is read later again), adds a
+% \cs{parskip} glue to the current vertical list unless the list is
+% empty, switches to
+% horizontal mode, starts its special \enquote{start of paragraph
+% processing} and only then rereads the character or command that
+% caused the mode change.\footnote{Already not quite true: the
+% command \cs{noindent} starts the paragraph but influences the
+% special processing by suppressing the paragraph indentation box
+% normally inserted by it.}
+%
+% This \enquote{start of paragraph
+% processing} first adds an empty box at the start of the
+% horizontal list of width \cs{parindent} (which represents the
+% paragraph indentation) unless the paragraph was started with
+% \cs{noindent} in which case no such box is
+% added\footnote{That's a bit different from placing a zero-sized
+% box!}. It then reads and processes all tokens stored in the
+% special engine token register \cs{everypar}. After that it reads
+% and processes whatever has caused the paragraph to start.
+%
+% Thus out of the box, \TeX{} offers the possibility to put some
+% special code into \cs{everypar} to gain control at (more or less)
+% the start of the paragraph. For example, in LaTeX{} and a number
+% of packages, special code like the following is sometimes used:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \everypar{{\setbox\z@\lastbox}\everypar{} ...}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This removes the paragraph indentation box again (that was already
+% placed by \TeX), then resets \cs{everypar} so that it doesn't do
+% anything on the next paragraph start and then does whatever it
+% wants to do, e.g., in an \cs{item} of a list it will typeset the label in
+% front of the paragraph text.
+% However, there is only one such \cs{everypar} token register and
+% if different packages and/or the kernel all attempt to add their
+% own code here, coordination is very difficult if not impossible.
+%
+% The process when the paragraph ends has different mechanisms and interfaces.
+% A paragraph ends when the engine primitive \cs{par} is called
+% while \TeX{} is in unrestricted horizontal mode, i.e., is
+% building a paragraph. At other times this primitive does nothing
+% or generates as an error depending on the mode \TeX{} is in,
+% e.g., the \cs{par} in
+% \verb=\hbox{a\par b}= is ignored, but \verb=$a\par b$= would complain.
+%
+% If this primitive ends the paragraph it does some special
+% \enquote{end of horizontal list} processing, then calls \TeX{} paragraph
+% builder that breaks the horizontal list into lines then these
+% lines are added as boxes to the enclosing vertical list and
+% \TeX{} returns to vertical mode.
+%
+% This \cs{par} command can be given explicitly, but there are also
+% situations in which \TeX{} is generating it on the fly. Most
+% often this happens when \TeX\ encounters a blank line which is
+% automatically changed to a \cs{par} command which is then
+% executed. The other possibility is that \TeX{} encounters a
+% command which is incompatible with horizontal processing, e.g.,
+% \cs{vskip} (a request for adding vertical space). In such case it
+% silently backs up, and inserts a \cs{par} in the hope that this
+% gets it out of horizontal mode and makes the offending command
+% acceptable.
+
+% The important point to note here is that \TeX{} really inserts
+% the command \cs{par} which can be redefined. Thus, it may not have
+% its original \enquote{primitive} meaning and therefore may not end the
+% horizontal list and call the paragraph builder. This approach
+% offers some flexibility but also allows you to easily produce a
+% \TeX{} document that loops forever, for example, the simple line
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% A \let\par\relax \vskip
+%\end{verbatim}
+% will start a horizontal list at \texttt{A}, redefines \cs{par},
+% then sees \cs{vskip} and inserts \cs{par} to end the
+% paragraph. But this now only runs \cs{relax} so nothing changes
+% and \cs{vskip} is read again, issues a \cs{par} which \ldots. In
+% short, it takes a plain \TeX{} document with five tokens to run
+% forever (as not even memory is consumed and therefore eventually
+% exhausted).
+%
+% There are no other ways than changing \cs{par} to gain control at
+% the end of a paragraph, i.e., there is no token list like
+% \cs{everypar} that is inserted, i.e., the only way to change the
+% default behavior is to modify the action that \cs{par} executes
+% with similar issues as outlined before: different processes need
+% to ensure that they do not overwrite their modifications or
+% worse, think that the \cs{par} in front of them is the engine
+% primitive while in fact it has already been changed by other
+% code.
+%
+%
+% To make matters slightly worse there are a few places where
+% \TeX{} handles the situation differently (most likely for speed
+% reasons back when computers were much slower). If \TeX{} finds
+% itself in unrestricted horizontal mode at the end of building a
+% vertical box (or an \cs{insert}, \cs{vadjust} or at the end of
+% executing the output routine code), it will finish the horizontal
+% list not by issuing a \cs{par} command (which would be consistent
+% with all other places, but by simply executing the primitive version
+% of \cs{par} regardless of the definition that \cs{par} has at the
+% time.
+%
+% Thus, if you have carefully crafted a redefined \cs{par} to execute
+% some special actions at the end of a paragraph and you write
+% something like
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \vbox{Some paragraph ... text.}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% you will find that your code has never run for the last paragraph
+% in that box. \LaTeX{} avoids this problem, by making sure that
+% all its boxes (such as \cs{parbox} or the \env{minipage}
+% environment, etc.) all internally add an explicit \cs{par} at the
+% end so that such code is run and \TeX{} finds itself in vertical
+% mode already without the need to start up the paragraph builder
+% internally. But, of course, this only works for boxes under direct
+% control of the \LaTeX{} kernel, if some package uses low-level
+% \cs{vbox}es without adding this precaution the \TeX{}
+% optimization kicks in and no special \cs{par} code is executed.
+%
+% And there is another optimization that is painful: if a paragraph
+% is interrupted by a mathematical display, e.g., \verb=\[...\]= in
+% \LaTeX{} or \verb=$$...$$= in plain \TeX{}, then \TeX{} will
+% resume horizontal mode afterward, i.e., build a new horizontal
+% list (without inserting an indentation box or \cs{everypar} at
+% that point). However, if that list immediately ends with an
+% explicit or implicit \cs{par} then \TeX{} will simply throw away
+% this \enquote{null} paragraph and not do its usual \enquote{end
+% of horizontal list} processing, so this special case need to be
+% accounted for when introducing some extended processing.
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{The new mechanism implemented for \LaTeX{}}
+%
+% To improve the situation (and also to support automatic tagging
+% of PDF documents) we now offer public as well as private hooks at
+% the start and end of the paragraph processing. The public hooks
+% can be used by packages (or by the user in the preamble or
+% within the document) and using the hook mechanisms it is possible
+% to reorder or arrange code from different packages in a way that
+% it can safely coexist.
+%
+% To make that happen we have to make use of the basic
+% functionality that is offered by \TeX{}, e.g., we install
+% special code inside \cs{everypar} to provide hooks at the
+% beginning and we redefine \cs{par} to do some special processing
+% when appropriate to install hooks at the end of the paragraph.
+%
+% In order to make this work, we have to ensure that package use of
+% \cs{everypar} is not overwriting our code. This is done through a
+% trick: we basically hide the real \cs{everypar} from the packages
+% and offer them a new token register (with the same name). So if
+% they install their own code it doesn't overwrite ours. Our code
+% then inserts the new \cs{everypar} at the right place inside the
+% process so that it looks as if it was the primitive
+% \cs{everypar}.\footnote{Ideally, \cs{everypar} wouldn't be used
+% at all by packages and instead they would simply write their code
+% into the hooks now offered by the kernel. However, while this is
+% the longterm goal and clearly an improvement (because then the
+% packages do no longer need to worry about getting their code
+% overwritten or needing to account for already existing code in
+% \cs{everypar}), this will not happen overnight. For that reason
+% support for this legacy method is retained.}
+%
+% At the end of the paragraph it would be great if we could use a
+% similar trick. However, due to the fact that \TeX{} inserts the
+% token \cs{par} (that doesn't have a defined meaning) we can't hide
+% \enquote{the real thing\textsuperscript{TM}} and offer the
+% package an indistinguishable alternate.
+%
+% Fortunately, \LaTeX{} has already redefined \cs{par} for its own
+% purposes. As a result there aren't many packages that attempt to
+% change \cs{par}, because without a lot of extra care that would
+% fail miserably. But bottom line, if you load a package that
+% alters \cs{par} then the end of paragraph hooks are most likely
+% not executing while that redefinition is
+% active.\footnote{Similarly to the \cs{everypar} situation, the
+% remedy is that such packages stop doing this and instead add
+% their alterations into the paragraph hooks now provided.}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The provided hooks}
+%
+%
+% \begin{variable}{para/before,
+% para/begin,
+% para/end,
+% para/after
+% }
+% The following four public hooks are defined and executed for
+% each paragraph:
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[\hook{para/before}]
+%
+% This hook is executed after the kernel hook
+% \cs{@kernel@before@para@before} (discussed below) in vertical
+% mode immediately after \TeX{} has contributed \cs{parskip} to
+% the vertical list and before the actual paragraph processing in
+% horizontal mode starts.
+%
+% This hook should either not produce any typeset material or add
+% only vertical material. If it starts a paragraph an error is
+% generated. The reason is that we are in the starting process of
+% processing a paragraph and so this would lead to endless
+% recursion.\footnote{One could allow it but only if the newly
+% started paragraph is processed without any hooks. Furthermore
+% correct spacing would be a bit of a nightmare so for now this
+% is forbidden.}
+%
+% \end{description}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \vspace{-\bigskipamount}
+%
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[\hook{para/begin}]
+%
+% This hook is executed after the kernel hook
+% \cs{@kernel@before@para@begin} (discussed below) in horizontal
+% mode immediately before the indentation box is placed (if there
+% is any, i.e., if the paragraph hasn't been started with
+% \cs{noindent}).
+%
+% The indentation box to be typeset is available to the hook as
+% \cs{IndentBox} and its automatic placement (after the hook is
+% executed) can be prevented through \cs{OmitIndent}.
+% More precisely \cs{OmitIndent} voids the box.
+%
+% The indentation box is then typeset directly
+% after the hook execution by something equivalent to
+% \cs{box}\cs{IndentBox} followed by the current content of
+% the token register \cs{everypar} that it is available to the
+% kernel or to packages (that run some legacy code).
+%
+% One has to be careful not to add any code to the hook that
+% starts its own paragraph (e.g., by adding a \cs{parbox} or a
+% \cs{marginpar} inside) because that would call the hook inside
+% again (as a new paragraph is started there) and thus lead to an
+% endless recursion ending only after exhausting the available
+% memory. This can only be done by making sure that is not
+% executed for the inner paragraphs (or at least not recursively
+% forever).
+%
+%
+% \item[\hook{para/end}]
+%
+% This hook is executed at the end of a paragraph when \TeX{} is
+% ready to return to vertical mode and after it has removed the
+% last horizontal glue (but not kern) placed on the horizontal
+% list. The code is still executed in horizontal mode so it is
+% possible to add further horizontal material at this point, but
+% it should not alter the mode (even a temporary exit from
+% horizontal mode would create chaos---any attempt will cause an
+% error message)! After the hook has ended the kernel hook
+% \cs{@kernel@after@para@end} is executed and then \TeX{} returns to
+% vertical mode.
+%
+% The hook is offered as public hook, but because of the
+% requirement to stay within horizontal mode one needs to be
+% careful in what is placed into the hook.\footnote{Maybe we
+% should guard against that, but it would be rather tricky to
+% implement as mode changes can happen across group boundaries so
+% one would need to keep a private stack just for that. Well,
+% something to ponder.}
+%
+% This hook is implemented as a reversed hook.
+%
+% \item[\hook{para/after}]
+%
+% This hook is executed directly after \TeX{} has returned to
+% vertical mode and after any material that migrated out of the
+% horizontal list (e.g., from a \cs{vadjust}) has processed.
+%
+% This hook should either not produce any typeset material or add
+% only vertical material.
+% However, for this hook starting a new paragraph is not a
+% disaster so that it isn't prevented.
+%
+% This hook is implemented as a reversed hook.
+%
+% Once that hook code has been processed the kernel hook
+% \cs{@kernel@after@para@after} is executed as the final action
+% of the paragraph processing.
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\@kernel@before@para@before,
+% \@kernel@after@para@after,
+% \@kernel@before@para@begin,
+% \@kernel@after@para@end,
+% }
+% As already mentioned above there are also four kernel hooks that
+% are executed at the start and end of the processing.
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[\cs{@kernel@before@para@before}]
+% For future extensions, not currently used by the kernel.
+%
+%
+% \item[\cs{@kernel@after@para@after}]
+% For future extensions, not currently used by the kernel.
+%
+%
+% \item[\cs{@kernel@before@para@begin}]
+%
+% Used by the kernel to implement tagging. This hook is executed
+% at the very beginning of a paragraph after \TeX{} has switched to
+% horizontal mode but before any indentation box got added or any
+% \cs{everypar} was run.
+%
+% It should not generate typeset material that could alter the
+% position. Note that it should never leave hmode, otherwise you
+% will end with a loop! We could guard against this, but since it
+% is an internal kernel hook that shouldn't be touched this isn't
+% checked.
+% \end{description}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \vspace{-\bigskipamount}
+%
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[\cs{@kernel@after@para@end}]
+%
+% Used by the kernel to implement tagging. It is executed
+% directly after the public \hook{para/end} hook. After it there
+% is a quick check that we are still in horizontal mode, i.e.,
+% that the public hook has not mistakenly ended horizontal mode
+% prematurely (this is an incomplete check just testing the mode
+% and could perhaps be improved (at the cost of speed)).
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Altered and newly provided commands}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\par,\endgraf,\para_end:}
+% An explicit request for ending a paragraph is known in plain
+% \TeX{} under the name \cs{endgraf} where it simply calls the
+% paragraph primitive (regardless of what \cs{par} may have as its
+% current definition). In \LaTeX{} \cs{endgraf} with that behavior
+% was also made available.
+%
+% With the new paragraph handling in \LaTeX{}, ending a paragraph
+% means a bit more than just calling the engine's paragraph
+% builder: the process also has to add any hook code for the end of
+% a paragraph. Thus
+% \cs{endgraf} was changed to provide this additional functionality
+% (and so by extension \cs{par} subject to its current meaning).
+%
+% The \pkg{expl3} name for the functionality is \cs{para_end:}.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \textbf{Note:} \em The next two commands are still under
+% discussion and may slightly change their semantics (as described
+% in the document) and/or their names between now and the 2021
+% Spring release!
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\OmitIndent,\para_omit_indent:}
+% Inside the \hook{para/begin} hook one can use this command to
+% suppress the indentation box at the start of the
+% paragraph. (Technically it is possible to use this command
+% outside the hook as well, but this should not be relied upon.)
+% The box itself remains available for use.
+%
+% The \pkg{expl3} name for the function is \cs{para_omit_indent:}.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\IndentBox,\g_para_indent_box}
+% The box register holding the indentation box for the paragraph is
+% available for inspection (or changes) inside hooks. It remains
+% available even if the \cs{OmitIndent} command was
+% used; in that case it will just not be automatically placed.
+%
+% The \pkg{expl3} name for the box register is \cs{g_para_indent_box}.
+% \end{variable}
+%
+%
+% \begin{function}{\RawIndent,\para_raw_indent:,
+% \RawNoindent,\para_raw_noindent:,
+% \RawParEnd,\para_raw_end:}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{RawIndent} \textit{hmode material} \cs{RawParEnd}
+% \cs{RawNoindent} \textit{hmode material} \cs{RawParEnd}
+% \end{syntax}
+%
+% The commands \cs{RawIndent} and \cs{RawNoindent} are not meant
+% for normal paragraph building (where the result is a textual
+% paragraph in the the traditional meaning of the word), but for
+% special cases where \TeX{}'s low-level algorithm is used to
+% achieve special effects, but where the result is not a
+% \enquote{paragraph}.
+%
+% They are called \enquote{raw}, because they bypass \LaTeX{}'s
+% hook mechanism for paragraphs and simply invoke the low-level
+% \TeX{} algorithm. I.e., they are like the original \TeX{}
+% primitives \cs{indent} and \cs{noindent} (that is they execute no
+% hooks other than \cs{everypar}) except that they can only be used
+% in vertical mode and generate an error if found elsewhere.
+%
+% To avoid issues a paragraph started by them should always be
+% ended by \cs{RawParEnd}\footnote{Technical note for those who
+% know their \textit{\TeX book\/}: the \cs{RawParEnd} comand
+% invokes the original \TeX{} engine definition of \cs{par} that
+% (soley) triggers the paragraph builder in \TeX{} when found
+% inside unrestricted horizontal mode and does nothing in other
+% processing modes.}
+% and not by \cs{par} (or a blank line), because the latter will execute
+% hooks which then have no counterpart at the beginning of the
+% paragraph. It is the responsibility of the programmer to make
+% sure that they are properly paired. This also means that one
+% should not put arbitrary user content between these commands if
+% that content could contain stray \cs{par}s.
+%
+% The \pkg{expl3} names for the functions are
+% \cs{para_raw_indent:}, \cs{para_raw_indent:} and
+% \cs{para_raw_end:}.
+% \end{function}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Examples}
+%
+% None of the examples in this section are meant for real use as
+% they are far too simpleminded but they should give some ideas of
+% what could be possible if a bit more care is applied.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Testing the mechanism}
+%
+% The idea is to output for each paragraph encountered some
+% information: a paragraph sequence number, a level number in roman
+% numerals, the environment in which this paragraph appears, and
+% the line number where the start or end of the paragraph is, e.g.,
+% something like
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% PARA: 1-i start (document env. on input line 38)
+% PARA: 1-i end (document env. on input line 38)
+% PARA: 2-i start (document env. on input line 40)
+% PARA: 3-ii start (minipage env. on input line 40)
+% PARA: 3-ii end (minipage env. on input line 40)
+% PARA: 2-i end (document env. on input line 41)
+%\end{verbatim}
+% As you can see paragraph 2 starts on line 40 and ends on 41 and
+% inside a minipage started paragraph 3 (start and end on line 40).
+% If you run this on some document you will find that \LaTeX{}
+% considers more things \enquote{a paragraph} than you have
+% probably thought.
+%
+% This was generated by the following hook code:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \newcounter{paracnt} % sequence counter
+% \newcounter{paralevel} % level counter
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% To support paragraph nesting we need to maintain a stack of the
+% sequence numbers. This is most easily done using \pkg{expl3}
+% functions, so we switch over. This is not a very general
+% implementation, just enough for what we need and a bit of
+% \LaTeXe{} thrown in as well. When popping the result gets stored
+% in \cs{paracntvalue} and the \cs{ERROR} should never happen
+% because it means we have tried to pop from an empty stack.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \ExplSyntaxOn
+% \seq_new:N \g_para_seq
+% \cs_new:Npn \ParaPush
+% {\seq_gpush:No \g_para_seq {\the\value{paracnt}}}
+% \cs_new:Npn \ParaPop {\seq_gpop:NNF \g_para_seq \paracntvalue \ERROR }
+% \ExplSyntaxOff
+%\end{verbatim}
+% At the start of the paragraph increment both sequence counter and
+% level and also save the then current sequence number on our stack.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \AddToHook{para/begin}{%
+% \stepcounter{paracnt}\stepcounter{paralevel}%
+% \ParaPush
+%\end{verbatim}
+% To display the sequence number we \cs{typeout} the current
+% sequence and level number. The command \cs{@currenvir} gives us
+% the current environment and \cs{on@line} produces a space and
+% the current input line number.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \typeout{PARA: \arabic{paracnt}-\roman{paralevel} start
+% (\@currenvir\space env.\on@line)}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% We also typeset the sequence number as a tiny red number in a box
+% that takes up no horizontal space. This helps us seeing where
+% \LaTeX{} sees the start and end of the paragraphs in the
+% document.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \llap{\color{red}\tiny\arabic{paracnt}\ }%
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% At the end of the paragraph we display sequence number and
+% level again. The level counter has the correct value but we need
+% to retrieve the right sequence value by popping it off the stack
+% after which it is available in \cs{paracntvalue} the way we have
+% set this up above.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \AddToHook{para/end}{%
+% \ParaPop
+% \typeout{PARA: \paracntvalue-\roman{paralevel} end \space\space
+% (\@currenvir\space env.\on@line)}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% We also typeset again a tiny red number with that value, this
+% time sticking out to the right.\footnote{Note that this can alter
+% the document pagination, because a paragraph ending in a display
+% (e.g., an equation) will get an extra line---in that case our tiny number
+% has an effect even though it doesn't take up any space, because
+% it paragraph is no longer empty and thus isn't dropped!}
+% We also decrement the level counter since our level has finished.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \rlap{\color{red}\tiny\ \paracntvalue}%
+% \addtocounter{paralevel}{-1}%
+% }
+% \makeatother
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Mark the first paragraph of each \env{itemize}}
+%
+% The code for this is rather simple. We apply hook code that is
+% executed only once inside a hook that is executed at the begin of
+% each \env{itemize}. We explicitly change the color back and
+% forth so that we don't introduce grouping around the paragraph.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \AddToHook{env/itemize/begin}{%
+% \AddToHookNext{para/begin}{\color{blue}}%
+% \AddToHookNext{para/end}{\color{black}}%
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% As a result the first paragraph of each \env{itemize} will appear
+% in blue.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Some technical notes}
+%
+% The code tries hard to be transparent for package code, but of
+% course any change means that there is a potential for breaking
+% other code. So in section we collect a few cases that may be of
+% importance if low-level code is dealing with paragraphs that are
+% now behaving slightly differently. The notes are from issues we
+% observed and will probably grow over time.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Glue items between paragraphs (found with \pkg{fancypar})}
+%
+% In the past \LaTeX{} placed two glue items between two
+% consecutive paragraph, e.g.,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% text1 \par text2 \par
+%\end{verbatim}
+% would show something like
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \glue(\parskip) 0.0 plus 1.0
+% \glue(\baselineskip) 5.16669
+%\end{verbatim}
+% but now there is anothe \cs{parskip} glue (that is always 0pt):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \glue(\parskip) 0.0 plus 1.0
+% \glue(\parskip) 0.0
+% \glue(\baselineskip) 5.16669
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The reason is that we generate a \enquote{fake}'' paragraph to
+% gain control and safely add the early hooks, but this generates
+% an additional glue item. That item doesn't contribute anything
+% vertically but ifsomebody writes code the unravels a constructed
+% list using \cs{lastbox}, \cs{unskip} and \cs{unpenalty} then the
+% code has to remove one additional glue item or else will fail.
+
+%
+% ^^A \subsubsection{}
+%
+%
+%
+% ^^A \subsubsection{}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+%
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=para>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2021/05/24}{Use \cs{msg_...} instead of \cs{__kernel_msg...}}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+%<latexrelease>\NewModuleRelease{2021/06/01}{ltpara}
+%<latexrelease> {Paragraph~handling~and~hooks}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Providing hooks for paragraphs}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{para/before,para/after,para/begin,para/end}
+% The public hooks. They are implemented as a paired set of hooks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\hook_new_pair:nn{para/before}{para/after}
+\hook_new_pair:nn{para/begin}{para/end}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@kernel@before@para@before,
+% \@kernel@after@para@after,
+% \@kernel@before@para@begin,
+% \@kernel@after@para@end}
+% The corresponding kernel hooks (for tagging and future extensions).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let \@kernel@before@para@before \@empty
+\let \@kernel@before@para@begin \@empty
+\let \@kernel@after@para@end \@empty
+\let \@kernel@after@para@after \@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_standard_everypar_tl}
+% Whenever \TeX{} starts a paragraph it inserts first an
+% indentation box and then executes the tokens stored in
+% \cs{tex_everypar:D} (known to \LaTeX{} as \cs{everypar}). We
+% alter this behavior slightly here, so that hooks are added
+% into the right place. Otherwise the process change remains
+% transparent to any legacy code for this space.
+%
+% We keep the standard code to be used by \cs{tex_everypar:D} in a
+% separate token list because we have to switch back and forth
+% for error recovery and so altering \cs{tex_everypar:D} all the
+% time should be a tiny bit faster.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here is now its definition:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we remove the indentation box and store it in
+% \cs{g_para_indent_box}. If there was none because the paragraph
+% was started by \cs{noindent} the box register will be void.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \box_gset_to_last:N \g_para_indent_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This will make the newly started horizontal list empty, so if we
+% stop it now and return to vertical mode it will be dropped by
+% \TeX{}. We do that but inside a group so that any \cs{parshape}
+% settings will not get lost as we need them for later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \group_begin:
+ \tex_par:D
+ \group_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We then change \cs{tex_everypar:D} to generate an error so that
+% we can detect and report if the \hook{para/before} hook illegally
+% changed out of vmode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tex_everypar:D { \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{before}{vertical} }
+ \@kernel@before@para@before
+ \hook_use:n {para/before}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Assuming the hooks have been well behaved it is time to return to
+% horizontal mode and start the paragraph in earnest. We already
+% have the indentation box saved away so we now have to restart the
+% paragraph with an empty \cs{tex_everypar:D} and with
+% \cs{tex_noindent:D}. And we need to make sure not to get another
+% \cs{parskip} or rather (since we can't prevent that) that it is
+% of zero size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \group_begin:
+ \tex_everypar:D {}
+ \skip_zero:N \tex_parskip:D
+ \tex_noindent:D
+ \group_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% That brings us back to the start of the horizontal list but we
+% need to change \cs{tex_everypar:D} back to its normal content in
+% case there are nested paragraphs coming up.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tex_everypar:D{\g_@@_standard_everypar_tl}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This is followed by executing the kernel and the public hook. The
+% kernel hook is there to enable tagging.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@kernel@before@para@begin
+ \hook_use:n {para/begin}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we aren't in horizontal mode any longer the hooks above misbehaved.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if_mode_horizontal: \else:
+ \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{begin}{vertical} \fi:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we reinsert the indentation box (unless suppressed) and
+% then call \cs{everypar} the way legacy \LaTeX\ code expects it.
+%
+% However, adding the public \cs{everypar} is a bit tricky (see below) so
+% we add that later, and indirectly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_handle_indent:
+% \the \everypar % <--- done differently below
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}[int]{\tex_everypar:D}
+% \cs{tex_everypar:D} then only has to execute
+% \cs{g_@@_standard_everypar_tl} by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tex_everypar:D{\g_@@_standard_everypar_tl}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}[int]{\everypar}
+%
+% Tokens inserted at the beginning of the paragraph are placed into
+% \cs{everypar} inside legacy \LaTeX{} code, e.g., by the list
+% environments or by headings to handle \cs{clubpenalty}, etc. Now
+% this isn't any longer the primitive but simply a toks register
+% used in the code above but to legacy \LaTeX{} code that is
+% transparent.
+%
+% There is, however, a problem: a handful packages use exactly the
+% same trick and replace the primitive with a token register and
+% call the token register inside the renamed primitive. That is
+% they assume that \cs{everypar} is the primitive and that it will
+% still be called at the start of the paragraph even if renamed.
+%
+% But if we have already replaced it by a token register then all
+% they do is to give that token register a new name. Thus our code
+% in \cs{tex_everypar:D} would call \cs{everypar} (which is their
+% now token register) and the code that they added ends up in our
+% token register which is then never used at all. A bit mind
+% boggling I guess.
+%
+% So what we have to do is not to call the token register
+% \cs{everypar} by its name inside \cs{tex_everypar:D} but by using
+% its actual register number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks \everypar
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% After we have allocated a new toks register with the name
+% \cs{everypar} the actual register number is available (briefly)
+% inside \cs{allocationnumber}. So instead of \cs{the}\cs{everypar}
+% we have to put \cs{the}\cs{toks}\meta{allocated number} at the end of
+% \cs{tex_everypar:D}.
+%
+% So what remains doing is to append a few tokens to the token list
+% \cs{g_@@_standard_everypar_tl} which we do now. We use \texttt{x}
+% expansion here to get the value of \cs{allocationnumber} in, all
+% the other tokens should not be expanded at this point.
+
+% One important point here is to terminate the register allocation
+% number with a real space. This space will get swallowed up when
+% the number is read. Anything else, such as \cs{scan_stop:} would
+% remain in the input and that would mean that it would interfere
+% with \cs{everypar} code that attempts to scan ahead to see how
+% the paragraph text starts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_gput_right:Nx \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl {
+ \exp_not:N \the
+ \exp_not:N \toks
+ \the \allocationnumber
+ \c_space_tl
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\g_para_indent_box}
+% For managing the indentation we need to provide a public
+% accessible box register
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\box_new:N \g_para_indent_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_handle_indent:}
+% Adding (typesetting) the indent box is straight forward.
+% If it was emptied before it does nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_handle_indent: {
+ \box_use_drop:N \g_para_indent_box
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The declaration \cs{para_omit_indent:} (or
+% \cs{OmitIndent}) changes that to do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \para_omit_indent: {
+ \box_gclear:N \g_para_indent_box
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IndentBox,\OmitIndent}
+% The \LaTeXe{} names for the indentation box and for suppressing it
+% for use in the \hook{para/begin} hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_eq:NN \IndentBox \g_para_indent_box
+\cs_set_eq:NN \OmitIndent \para_omit_indent:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\para_end:}
+% Adding hooks to the end of a paragraph is similar but here we
+% need to alter the command that is used by \TeX{} to end horizontal
+% mode and return to vertical mode, i.e., \cs{par}.
+%
+% This is a bit more complicated as this command can appear anywhere
+% either explicitly or implicitly added by \TeX{} in certain
+% situations:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% when using \cs{par} in the code or the document
+% \item
+% when using a blank line (which is converted to \cs{par})
+% \item
+% when \TeX{} finds any commands incompatible with horizontal
+% mode it issues a \cs{par} and then rereads the command.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% Unfortunately, \TeX{} has some (these days) unnecessary
+% optimization: if a \cs{vbox} ends and \TeX{} is still in
+% horizontal mode it simply exercises the paragraph builder instead
+% of issuing a \cs{par}. It is therefore necessary for \LaTeX{} to
+% ensure that this case doesn't happen and all boxes internally
+% have a \cs{par} command at their end.
+%
+% This \cs{par} may or may not run the ``par primitive'' (which is
+% always available as \cs{tex_par:D} in \pkg{expl3}); it is
+% permissible to have a changed meaning and it is in fact changed
+% by \LaTeX{} in various ways at various points inside
+% \texttt{latex.ltx}. For this \LaTeXe{} code has the following
+% conventions: \cs{@@@@par} and \cs{endgraf} both refer to the
+% default meaning (in the past this was the initex primitive) while
+% \cs{par} is the current meaning which may does something else.
+%
+%
+% We are now going to change this default meaning to run
+% \cs{para_end:} instead, which ultimately executes the initex
+% primitive but additionally adds our hooks when appropriate.
+% This way the change is again transparent to the legacy \LaTeXe{}
+% code.
+%
+% In most cases \cs{para_end:} should behave exactly like the
+% primitive and we achieve this by simply expanding it to the
+% primitive which is available to us as \cs{tex_par:D}. This way we
+% don't have to care about whether \TeX{} just does nothing (e.g.,
+% if in vertical mode already) or generate an error, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \para_end: {
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The only case we care about is when we are in horizontal mode
+% (i.e., doing typesetting) and not also in inner mode (i.e.,
+% making paragraphs and not building an \cs{hbox}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \bool_lazy_and:nnT
+% { \mode_if_horizontal_p: }
+% { \bool_not_p:n { \mode_if_inner_p: } }
+% { ...
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since this is executed for each and every paragraph in a document
+% we try to stay a fast as possible, So we are aren't using the
+% above construct but two conditionals instead. Using low-level
+% \cs{if_mode...} conditions would be even faster but has the
+% danger to conflict with conditionals in the user hooks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \mode_if_horizontal:TF {
+ \mode_if_inner:F {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In that case the action of the primitive would be to remove the
+% last glue (not kern) from the horizontal list constructed to form
+% a paragraph then append the a penalty of 10000 and the
+% \cs{parfillskip} at the end and pass the whole list to the
+% paragraph builder which breaks it into lines and \TeX{} then
+% returns to vertical mode.
+%
+% What we want to do instead is to add our hook code at the end of
+% the horizontal list before that happens and the code is passed to
+% the paragraph builder. If there was a glue item at the end then
+% it should get removed before the hook code gets added so we have
+% to arrange for its removal ourselves.
+%
+% There is not much point in checking if there was really a glue
+% item at the end of the horizontal list, instead we simply try to
+% remove one using \cs{tex_unskip:D}, if there wasn't one this will
+% do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tex_unskip:D
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The we execute the public hook (which may add final typesetting
+% material) followed by the kernel hook we need for adding tagging
+% support. None of this is supposed to change the mode---at the
+% moment we make only a very simple test for this, more devious
+% changes go unnoticed, but too bad, that will then probably
+% badly backfire.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \hook_use:n{para/end}
+ \@kernel@after@para@end
+ \mode_if_horizontal:TF {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The final action (before getting to the point where
+% \cs{tex_par:D} is called) is to add a kern item so that the
+% primitive is prevented from removing glue (if there was some). If
+% we don't do this and the
+% horizontal list ended in several glue items we would end up with
+% removing two instead of just the last one, which would be wrong.
+% We use a kern as that is minimally faster.
+%
+% There is however one other \TeX{} optimization that hurts: in a
+% sequence like this \verb=$$ ... $$ \par= \TeX{} will be in
+% horizontal mode after the display, ready to receive further
+% paragraph text, but since the \cs{par} follows immediately there
+% is a ``null'' paragraph at the end and \TeX{} simply throws that
+% away. The space between \verb=$$= and \cs{par} got already
+% dropped during the display processing so the \cs{par} is not
+% removing any space and appending \cs{parfillskip}, instead it
+% simply goes silently to vmode. Now if we would had added something (to
+% prevent glue removal) that would look to \TeX{} like material
+% after the display and so we would end up with an empty paragraph
+% just containing \cs{parfillskip}.
+%
+% We therefore check if the current hlist is empty
+% (\cs{tex_lastnodetype:D} has the value \texttt{-1} and
+% only if not we add our kern.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if_int_compare:w 0 < \tex_lastnodetype:D
+ \tex_kern:D \c_zero_dim
+ \fi:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To run the \hook{para/after} hook we first end the
+% paragraph. This means that the \cs{tex_par:D} at the very end is
+% unnecessary but executing it there unnecessarily is better than
+% having code that test for all the different mode possibilities.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tex_par:D
+ \hook_use:n{para/after}
+ \@kernel@after@para@after
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we haven't been in horizontal mode then the earlier hook
+% \hook{para/end} is at fault and we report that.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{end}{horizontal} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally close out the nested conditionals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tex_par:D
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\para_raw_indent:,
+% \para_raw_noindent:,
+% \para_raw_end:}
+%
+% The commands \cs{para_raw_indent:} and \cs{para_raw_noindent:}
+% are like the primitives \cs{indent} and \cs{noindent} except that
+% they can only be used in vertical mode.
+%
+% To avoid issues a paragraph started by them should always be
+% ended by \cs{para_raw_end:} and not by \cs{para_end:} or
+% \cs{par} as the latter will execute hooks which then have no
+% counterpart at the beginning of the paragraph. It is the
+% responsibility of the programmer to make sure that they are
+% properly paired.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \para_raw_indent: {
+ \mode_if_vertical:TF
+ {
+ \tex_everypar:D {
+ \box_gset_to_last:N \g_para_indent_box
+ \tex_everypar:D { \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl }
+ \@@_handle_indent:
+ \the\everypar }
+ }
+ { \msg_error:nn { kernel }{ raw-para } }
+ \tex_indent:D
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \para_raw_noindent: {
+ \mode_if_vertical:TF
+ {
+ \tex_everypar:D {
+ \tex_everypar:D { \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl }
+ \the\everypar }
+ }
+ { \msg_error:nn { kernel }{ raw-para } }
+ \tex_noindent:D
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \para_raw_end: \tex_par:D
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RawIndent,\RawNoIndent,\RawParEnd}
+% The \LaTeXe{} names for starting and ending a paragraph without adding any hooks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_eq:NN \RawIndent \para_raw_indent:
+\cs_set_eq:NN \RawNoindent \para_raw_noindent:
+\cs_set_eq:NN \RawParEnd \para_raw_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% This ends the \texttt{para} module code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\par,\endgraf}
+% \begin{macro}[int]{\@@par}
+%
+% Having the new default definition for \cs{par} we also have to
+% set it up so that it gets used. This is needed in three places
+% \cs{par}, \cs{@@par} (to which \LaTeX{} resets \cs{par}
+% occasionally) and \cs{endgraf} which is another name for the
+% ``default'' action of \cs{par}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_eq:NN \par \para_end:
+\cs_set_eq:NN \@@par \para_end:
+\cs_set_eq:NN \endgraf \para_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% While this is not integrated properly into the format we have to
+% redo the \cs{everypar} setting from the kernel, otherwise that
+% gets lost (as it happens before that file is loaded).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\everypar{\@nodocument} %% To get an error if text appears before the
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The error messages}
+%
+% This one is used when we detect that some hook code has changed
+% the mode where it shouldn't, e.g., by starting or ending a
+% paragraph.
+% The first argument is the hook name second the mode
+% it should have stayed in but didn't.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnnn { hooks } { para-mode }
+ {
+ Illegal~mode~ change~ in~ hook~ 'para/#1'.\\
+ Hook~ code~ did~ not~ remain~ in~ #2~ mode.
+ }
+ {
+ Paragraph~ hooks~ cannot~ change~ the~ TeX~ mode~ without~ causing~
+ endless~ recursion.~ The~ hook~ code~ in~ 'para/#1'~ needs~ to~ stay~
+ in~ #2~ mode,~ but~ it~ didn't.~ Examine~ the~ hook~
+ code~ with~ \iow_char:N \\ShowHook~ to~ find~ the~ issue.
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And here is one used in the \enquote{raw} commands when they are
+% used outside of vertical mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnnn { kernel } { raw-para }
+ {
+ Not~ in~ vertical~ mode.
+ }
+ {
+ Starting~ a~ paragraph~ with~ \iow_char:N \\RawIndent~ or~
+ \iow_char:N \\RawNoindent \\
+ (or~ \iow_char:N \\para_raw_indent:~ or~
+ \iow_char:N \\para_raw_noindent:)~ is~ only~ allowed \\
+ if~ LaTeX~ is~ in~ vertical~ mode.
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
+%<latexrelease> {ltpara}{Undo~hooks~for~paragraphs}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let \OmitIndent \@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let \IndentBox \@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let \RawIndent \@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let \RawNoindent \@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\let \RawParEnd \@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\cs_set_eq:NN \par \tex_par:D
+%<latexrelease>\cs_set_eq:NN \@@par \tex_par:D
+%<latexrelease>\cs_set_eq:NN \endgraf \tex_par:D
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndModuleRelease
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
index 5bef40375cd..ae8b58995da 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltpictur.dtx}
- [2020/08/14 v1.2a LaTeX Kernel (Picture Mode)]
+ [2021/04/20 v1.2b LaTeX Kernel (Picture Mode)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltpictur.dtx}
@@ -454,9 +454,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@stackcr}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{2021/04/20}{Use \cs{protected} for \cs{\bslash} variant (gh/548)}
% \begin{macro}{\@ixstackcr}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@stackcr{\@ifstar\@ixstackcr\@ixstackcr}
+\protected\def\@stackcr{\@ifstar\@ixstackcr\@ixstackcr}
\def\@ixstackcr{\@ifnextchar[\@istackcr{\cr\ignorespaces}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1773,7 +1774,7 @@
%
% Initialization: ``|\thinlines|''
% \changes{v1.1f}{1995/10/27}
-% {Move initialisation to kernel from autoload file}
+% {Move initialization to kernel from autoload file}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@linefnt\tenln
\let\@circlefnt\tencirc
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
index 7949b836d46..e0fbcecf1b6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltplain.dtx}
- [2020/08/20 v2.3d LaTeX Kernel (Plain TeX)]
+ [2021/04/18 v2.3f LaTeX Kernel (Plain TeX)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltplain.dtx}
@@ -695,7 +695,7 @@
% {Define \cs{alloc@} in terms of \cs{e@alloc}}
% Since |\e@alloc| was added in 2015, |\@alloc| has not been used,
% but was left as some legacy code calls it. However the original
-% defnition gives spurious errors once the ``classic'' registers
+% definition gives spurious errors once the ``classic'' registers
% run out, so it is now defined to call |\e@alloc| internally.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
@@ -754,8 +754,8 @@
\chardef\e@insert@top\e@alloc@top
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% If the classic registers are exausted, take an insert from the free float list
-% and use |\extrafloats| to add a new float to that list.
+% If the classic registers are exhausted, take an insert from the free
+% float list and use |\extrafloats| to add a new float to that list.
% \changes{v2.2c}{2016/07/29}{fix for tlb-newinsert-001}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\newinsert#1{%
@@ -823,6 +823,28 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\@unused}
+% Allocate read stream for testing and output stream that is never open an
+% thus writes to the terminal.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/11/07}
+% {move here from ltdefns, remove duplicate \cs{@mainaux}}
+% \changes{v2.3e}{2021/03/26}{Allocate \cs{@inputcheck} and
+% \cs{@unused} early so that they are before expl3 allocates
+% more streams (gh/538)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newread\@inputcheck
+\newwrite\@unused
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\maxdimen}
% \begin{macro}{\hideskip}
% Here are some examples of allocation.
@@ -898,6 +920,37 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \tracingcommands=0
% \tracingrestores=0
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tracingstacklevels}
+% For Lua\TeX, the \cs{tracingstacklevels} functionality was
+% implemented as a callback, so here we just define the count register
+% to hold the value of the parameter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}{\tracingstacklevels}%
+%<latexrelease> {tracingstacklevels}%
+\ifx\directlua\@undefined
+ % \tracingstacklevels=0 % added in 2021
+\else
+ \newcount\tracingstacklevels
+ % Code for \tracingstacklevels defined in ltfinal.dtx
+\fi
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\tracingstacklevels}%
+%<latexrelease> {tracingstacklevels}%
+%<latexrelease>\ifx\directlua\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\else
+%<latexrelease> \let\tracingstacklevels\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\fi
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% \language=0
% \begin{macrocode}
\uchyph=1
@@ -1481,43 +1534,69 @@
% \changes{v1.1x}{2002/02/24}{Macro added}
% \changes{v2.0b}{2012/01/20}{etex tracing if available}
% \changes{v2.0d}{2015/02/20}{Spell commands correctly :-)}
-% \changes{v2.0g}{2015/03/10}{Reorganise to be less noisy}
+% \changes{v2.0g}{2015/03/10}{Reorganize to be less noisy}
+% \changes{v2.3f}{2021/04/18}{Drop pre-$\varepsilon$-\TeX{} support}
+% \changes{v2.3f}{2021/04/18}
+% {Add \cs{tracingstacklevels} and \cs{tracinglostchars}=3}
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2015/01/01}{\loggingall}{etex tracing}%
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}{\loggingall}
+%<latexrelease> {\tracingstacklevels and \tracinglostchars=3}%
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-\ifx\tracingscantokens\@undefined
-\gdef\loggingall{%
+\edef\loggingall{%
\tracingstats\tw@
\tracingpages\@ne
- \tracinglostchars\@ne
- \tracingparagraphs\@ne
- \errorcontextlines\maxdimen
- \loggingoutput
- \tracingmacros\tw@
- \tracingcommands\tw@
- \tracingrestores\@ne
- }%
-\else
-\gdef\loggingall{%
- \tracingstats\tw@
- \tracingpages\@ne
- \tracinglostchars\tw@
+ \tracinglostchars\thr@@
\tracingparagraphs\@ne
\tracinggroups\@ne
\tracingifs\@ne
\tracingscantokens\@ne
\tracingnesting\@ne
\errorcontextlines\maxdimen
- \loggingoutput
+ \ifdefined\tracingstacklevels \tracingstacklevels\maxdimen \fi
+ \noexpand \loggingoutput
\tracingmacros\tw@
\tracingcommands\thr@@
\tracingrestores\@ne
\tracingassigns\@ne
}%
-\fi
-\gdef\tracingall{\showoverfull\loggingall}
+\def\tracingall{\showoverfull\loggingall}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2015/01/01}{\loggingall}{etex tracing}%
+%<latexrelease>\ifx\tracingscantokens\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\gdef\loggingall{%
+%<latexrelease> \tracingstats\tw@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingpages\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracinglostchars\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingparagraphs\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \errorcontextlines\maxdimen
+%<latexrelease> \loggingoutput
+%<latexrelease> \tracingmacros\tw@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingcommands\tw@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingrestores\@ne
+%<latexrelease> }%
+%<latexrelease>\else
+%<latexrelease>\gdef\loggingall{%
+%<latexrelease> \tracingstats\tw@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingpages\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracinglostchars\tw@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingparagraphs\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracinggroups\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingifs\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingscantokens\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingnesting\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \errorcontextlines\maxdimen
+%<latexrelease> \loggingoutput
+%<latexrelease> \tracingmacros\tw@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingcommands\thr@@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingrestores\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingassigns\@ne
+%<latexrelease>}%
+%<latexrelease>\fi
+%<latexrelease>\gdef\tracingall{\showoverfull\loggingall}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\loggingall}{etex tracing}%
%<latexrelease>\gdef\loggingall{\tracingcommands\tw@\tracingstats\tw@
%<latexrelease> \tracingpages\@ne\tracinglostchars\@ne
@@ -1532,29 +1611,14 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\tracingnone}
% \changes{v2.0g}{2015/03/10}{macro added}
-% \begin{macro}{\hideoutput}
-% \changes{v2.0g}{2015/03/10}{macro added}
+% \changes{v2.3f}{2021/04/18}{Drop pre-$\varepsilon$-\TeX{} support}
+% \changes{v2.3f}{2021/04/18}
+% {Add \cs{tracingstacklevels} and \cs{tracinglostchars}=3}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2015/01/01}{\tracingnone}%
%<latexrelease> {turn off etex tracing}%
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-\ifx\tracingscantokens\@undefined
-\def\tracingnone{%
- \tracingonline\z@
- \tracingcommands\z@
- \showboxdepth\m@ne
- \showboxbreadth\m@ne
- \tracingoutput\z@
- \errorcontextlines\m@ne
- \tracingrestores\z@
- \tracingparagraphs\z@
- \tracingmacros\z@
- \tracinglostchars\@ne
- \tracingpages\z@
- \tracingstats\z@
-}%
-\else
-\def\tracingnone{%
+\edef\tracingnone{%
\tracingassigns\z@
\tracingrestores\z@
\tracingonline\z@
@@ -1563,6 +1627,7 @@
\showboxbreadth\m@ne
\tracingoutput\z@
\errorcontextlines\m@ne
+ \ifdefined\tracingstacklevels \tracingstacklevels\z@ \fi
\tracingnesting\z@
\tracingscantokens\z@
\tracingifs\z@
@@ -1573,30 +1638,77 @@
\tracingpages\z@
\tracingstats\z@
}%
-\fi
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2015/01/01}{\tracingnone}%
+%<latexrelease> {turn off etex tracing}%
+%<latexrelease>\ifx\tracingscantokens\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\def\tracingnone{%
+%<latexrelease> \tracingonline\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingcommands\z@
+%<latexrelease> \showboxdepth\m@ne
+%<latexrelease> \showboxbreadth\m@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingoutput\z@
+%<latexrelease> \errorcontextlines\m@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingrestores\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingparagraphs\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingmacros\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracinglostchars\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingpages\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingstats\z@
+%<latexrelease>}%
+%<latexrelease>\else
+%<latexrelease>\def\tracingnone{%
+%<latexrelease> \tracingassigns\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingrestores\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingonline\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingcommands\z@
+%<latexrelease> \showboxdepth\m@ne
+%<latexrelease> \showboxbreadth\m@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingoutput\z@
+%<latexrelease> \errorcontextlines\m@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingnesting\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingscantokens\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingifs\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracinggroups\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingparagraphs\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingmacros\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracinglostchars\@ne
+%<latexrelease> \tracingpages\z@
+%<latexrelease> \tracingstats\z@
+%<latexrelease>}%
+%<latexrelease>\fi
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\tracingnone}%
+%<latexrelease> {turn off etex tracing}%
+%<latexrelease>\let\tracingnone\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\hideoutput}
+% \changes{v2.0g}{2015/03/10}{macro added}
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2015/01/01}{\hideoutput}%
+%<latexrelease> {hide output from tracing}%
\def\hideoutput{%
\tracingoutput\z@
\showboxbreadth\m@ne
\showboxdepth\m@ne
\tracingonline\m@ne
}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\tracingnone}%
-%<latexrelease> {turn off etex tracing}%
-%<latexrelease>\let\tracingnone\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{\hideoutput}%
+%<latexrelease> {hide output from tracing}%
%<latexrelease>\let\hideoutput\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
%
% \LaTeX\ change: |\showhyphens| Defined later.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
index 359b445f453..29ea142ba6c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
%%% From File: ltsect.dtx
%<*driver>
% \fi
-\ProvidesFile{ltsect.dtx}[2020/07/27 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Sectioning)]
+\ProvidesFile{ltsect.dtx}[2020/12/05 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Sectioning)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltsect.dtx}
@@ -779,7 +779,7 @@
% \changes{v1.1c}{2018/09/26}{Sometimes mask the endline char when
% writing to files (github/73)}
% \changes{v1.1e}{2020/10/01}{add a fourth argument for better
-% hyperref compability}
+% hyperref compatibility}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx
index e226f753f35..f773cd23da2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%%
-%% File: ltshipout.dtx (C) Copyright 2020 Frank Mittelbach, LaTeX Team
+%% Copyright (C) 2020-2021
+%% Frank Mittelbach, LaTeX Team
%%
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -31,8 +32,8 @@
%%% From File: ltshipout.dtx
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\ltshipoutversion{v1.0d}
-\providecommand\ltshipoutdate{2020/11/24}
+\providecommand\ltshipoutversion{v1.0i}
+\providecommand\ltshipoutdate{2021/03/17}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%<*driver>
@@ -55,6 +56,9 @@
}
\ExplSyntaxOff
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{}
+\providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{}
+
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
\begin{document}
@@ -75,7 +79,7 @@
% \ltshipoutversion\ dated \ltshipoutdate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\
% Project.}}
%
-% \author{Frank Mittelbach}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach, \LaTeX{} Project Team}
%
% \maketitle
%
@@ -108,11 +112,56 @@
% It then stores it in a named box register. This box can then be
% manipulated through a set of hooks after which it is shipped out
% for real.
+%
+% Each shipout that actually happens (i.e., where the material is
+% not discarded for one or the other reason) is recorded and the
+% total number is available in a readonly variable and in a
+% \LaTeX{} counter.
+% \end{function}
+%
+%
+% \begin{function}{\RawShipout}
+% This command implements a simplified shipout that bypasses the
+% foreground and background
+% hooks, e.g., only \hook{shipout/firstpage} and
+% \hook{shipout/lastpage} are executed and the total shipout
+% counters are incremented.
+%
+% The command doesn't use \cs{ShipoutBox} but its own private box
+% register so that it can be used inside of shipout hooks to do
+% some additional shipouts while already in the output routine with
+% the current page being stored in \cs{ShipoutBox}. It does have
+% access to \cs{ShipoutBox} if it is used in \hook{shipout/before}
+% (or \hook{shipout/after}) and can use its content.
+%
+% It is safe to use it in \hook{shipout/before} or
+% \hook{shipout/after} but not necessarily in the other
+% \hook{shipout/...} hooks as they are intended for special
+% processing.
% \end{function}
%
% \begin{variable}{\ShipoutBox,\l_shipout_box}
-% This box register is called \cs{ShipoutBox} (alternatively available via the
-% L3 name \cs{l_shipout_box}).
+% This box register is called \cs{ShipoutBox} (alternatively
+% available via the L3 name \cs{l_shipout_box}).
+%
+% This box is a ``local'' box and assignments to it should be done
+% only locally. Global assignments (as done by some packages with
+% older code where this is box is known as 255) may work but they are
+% conceptually wrong and may result in errors under certain
+% circumstances.
+%
+% During the execution of \hook{shipout/before} this box contains
+% the accumulated material for the page, but not yet any material
+% added by other shipout hooks.
+% During execution of \hook{shipout/after}, i.e., after the shipout
+% has happened, the box also contains any background or foreground
+% material.
+%
+% Material from the hooks \hook{shipout/firstpage} or
+% \hook{shipout/lastpage} is not included (but only used during the
+% actual shipout) to facilitate reuse of the box data (e.g.,
+% \hook{shipout/firstpage} material should never be added to a
+% later page of the output).
% \end{variable}
%
%
@@ -133,11 +182,11 @@
%
% \subsection{Provided hooks}
%
-% \begin{variable}{shipout/before,
+% \begin{variable}{shipout/before,shipout/after,
% shipout/foreground,shipout/background,
% shipout/firstpage,
% shipout/lastpage}
-% The code offers a number of hooks into which packages (or the
+% The code for \cs{shipout} offers a number of hooks into which packages (or the
% user) can add code to support different use cases.
% These are:
% \begin{description}
@@ -148,6 +197,20 @@
% It can be used to alter that box content or to discard it
% completely (see \cs{DiscardShipoutBox} below).
%
+% You can use \cs{RawShipout} inside this hook for special use
+% cases. It can make use of \cs{ShipoutBox} (which doesn't yet
+% include the background and foreground material).
+%
+% \textbf{Note:} It is not possible (or say advisable) to try
+% and use this hook to typeset material with the intention to
+% return it to main vertical list, it will go wrong and give
+% unexpected results in many cases---for starters it will appear
+% after the current page not before or it will vanish or the
+% vertical spacing will be wrong!
+% \end{description}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{description}
% \item[\hook{shipout/background}]
%
% This hook adds a picture environment into the background of
@@ -186,15 +249,22 @@
% not discarded at the last minute). It should only contain
% \cs{special} or similar commands needed to direct post processors
% handling the \texttt{.dvi} or \texttt{.pdf} output.\footnotemark
+% \footnotetext{In
+% \LaTeXe{} that was already existing, but implemented using a box
+% register with the name \cs{@begindvibox}.}
%
% ^^A \fmi{not sure it has to be that restrictive.}
%
+% This hook is added to the very first page regardless of how it
+% is shipped out (i.e., with \cs{shipout} or \cs{RawShipout}).
%
% \item[\hook{shipout/lastpage}]
%
% The corresponding hook to add \cs{special}s at the very end of
-% the output file. It is only executed on the very last page ---
+% the output file. It is only executed on the very last page of
+% the output file ---
% or rather on the page that \LaTeX{} believes is the last one.
+% Again it is executed regardless of the shipout method.
%
% It may not be possible for \LaTeX{} to correctly determine
% which page is the last one without several reruns. If this
@@ -202,17 +272,32 @@
% extra page to place the material and also request a rerun to
% get the correct placement sorted out.
%
+% \item[\hook{shipout/after}]
+%
+% This hook is executed after a shipout has happened. If the
+% shipout box is discarded this hook is not looked at.
+%
+% You can use \cs{RawShipout} inside this hook for special use
+% cases and the main \cs{ShipoutBox} is still available at this
+% point (but in contrast to \hook{shipout/before} it now
+% includes the background and foreground material).
+%
+% \textbf{Note:} Just like \hook{shipout/before} this hook is
+% not meant to be used for adding adding typeset material back
+% to the main vertical list---it might vanish or the
+% vertical spacing will be wrong!
+%
+%
% \end{description}
-% \end{variable}\footnotetext{In
-% \LaTeXe{} that was already existing, but implemented using a box
-% register with the name \cs{@begindvibox}.}
%
% As mentioned above the hook \hook{shipout/before} is executed
% first and can manipulate the prepared shipout box stored in
% \cs{ShipoutBox} or set things up for use in \cs{write} during the
-% actual shipout. The other hooks are added inside hboxes to the
-% box being shipped out in the following
-% order:
+% actual shipout. It is even run if there was a
+% \cs{DiscardShipoutBox} request in the document.
+%
+% The other hooks (except \hook{shipout/after}) are added inside
+% hboxes to the box being shipped out in the following order:
% \begin{center}
% \begin{tabular}{ll}
% \hook{shipout/firstpage} & only on the first page \\
@@ -225,32 +310,50 @@
% If any of the hooks has no code then that particular no box is
% added at that point.
%
+% Once the (page) box has been shipped out the \hook{shipout/after}
+% hook is called (while you are still inside the output routine). It
+% is not called if the shipout box was discarded.
+%
% In a document that doesn't produce pages, e.g., only makes
-% \cs{typeout}s, none of the hooks are executed (as there is no
+% \cs{typeout}s, none of the hooks are ever executed (as there is no
% \cs{shipout}) not even the \hook{shipout/lastpage} hook.
%
+% If \cs{RawShipout} is used instead of \cs{shipout} then only the
+% hooks \hook{shipout/firstpage} and \hook{shipout/lastpage} are
+% executed (on the first or last page), all others are bypassed.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Legacy \LaTeX{} commands}
+%
% \begin{function}{\AtBeginDvi,\AtEndDvi}
% \cs{AtBeginDvi} is the existing \LaTeXe{} interface to fill the
% \hook{shipout/firstpage} hook. This is not really a good name
% as it is not just supporting \texttt{.dvi} but also \texttt{.pdf}
-% output or \texttt{.dvx}.
+% output or \texttt{.xdv}.
%
% \cs{AtEndDvi} is the counterpart that was not available in the
% kernel but only through the package \pkg{atenddvi}. It fills the
% \hook{shipout/lastpage} hook.
+% \end{function}
%
-% \fmi{better names? Any suggestions?}
+% As these two wrappers have been available for a long time we
+% continue offering them. However, for new code we suggest using
+% the high-level hook management commands directly instead of
+% ``randomly-named'' wrappers. This will lead to code that is
+% easier to understand and to maintain. For this reason we do not
+% provide any other wrapper commands for the above hooks in the
+% kernel.
%
-% \end{function}
%
% \subsection{Special commands for use inside the hooks}
%
-% \begin{function}{\DiscardShipoutBox,\shipout_discard_box:}
+% \begin{function}{\DiscardShipoutBox,\shipout_discard:}
% \begin{syntax}
% \cs{AddToHookNext} \texttt{\{shipout/before\} \{...\cs{DiscardShipoutBox}...\}}
% \end{syntax}
% The \cs{DiscardShipoutBox} declaration (L3 name
-% \cs{shipout_discard_box:})
+% \cs{shipout_discard:})
% requests that on the next
% shipout the page box is thrown away instead of being shipped to
% the \texttt{.dvi} or \texttt{.pdf} file.
@@ -261,6 +364,8 @@
% Note that if this declaration is used directly in the document it
% may depend on the placement to which page it applies, given that
% \LaTeX{} output routine is called in an asynchronous manner!
+% Thus normally one would use this only as part of the
+% \hook{shipout/before} code.
%
% \fmi{Once we have a new mark mechanism available we can improve
% on that and make sure that the declaration applies to the page
@@ -279,12 +384,28 @@
% names as given below.
%
%
+%
+% \subsection{Provided Lua\TeX\ callbacks}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{pre_shipout_filter}
+% Under Lua\TeX{} the \texttt{pre\_shipout\_filter} Lua callback is
+% provided which gets called immediately before the shipout primitive gets invoked.
+% The signature is
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% function(<node> head)
+% return true
+% end
+% \end{verbatim}
+% The \texttt{head} is the list node corresponding to the box to be shipped out.
+% The return value should always be \texttt{true}.
+% \end{variable}
+%
% \subsection{Information counters}
%
%
% \begin{variable}{\ReadonlyShipoutCounter,\g_shipout_readonly_int}
% \begin{syntax}
-% \cs{ifnum}\cs{ReadOnlyShipoutCounter}\texttt{=...}
+% \cs{ifnum}\cs{ReadonlyShipoutCounter}\texttt{=...}
% \cs{int_use:N} \cs{g_shipout_readonly_int} \texttt{\% expl3 usage}
% \end{syntax}
% This integer holds the number of pages shipped out up to now
@@ -292,6 +413,7 @@
% routine). More precisely, it is incremented only after it is
% clear that a page will be shipped out, i.e., after the
% \hook{shipout/before} hook (because that might discard the page)!
+% In contrast \hook{shipout/after} sees the incremented value.
%
% Just like with the \texttt{page} counter its value is
% only accurate within the output routine. In the body of the
@@ -299,10 +421,11 @@
% asynchronously!
%
% Also important: it \emph{must not} be set, only read. There are
-% no provisions to prevent that but if you do, chaos will be the
-% result. To emphasize this fact it is not provided as a \LaTeX{}
-% counter but as a \TeX{} counter (i.e., a command), so
-% \cs{Alph}\Arg{\cs{ReadonlyShipoutCounter}} etc, would not work.
+% no provisions to prevent that restriction, but if you manipulate
+% it, chaos will be the result. To emphasize this fact it is not
+% provided as a \LaTeX{} counter but as a \TeX{} counter (i.e., a
+% command), so \cs{Alph}\verb={=\cs{ReadonlyShipoutCounter}\verb=}=
+% etc, would not work.
% \end{variable}
%
% \begin{variable}{totalpages,\g_shipout_totalpages_int}
@@ -314,7 +437,8 @@
% \texttt{totalpages} counter is a \LaTeX{} counter and incremented
% for each shipout attempt including those pages that are discarded
% for one or the other reason. Again \hook{shipout/before} sees
-% the counter before it is incremented).
+% the counter before it is incremented. In contrast
+% \hook{shipout/after} sees the incremented value.
%
% Furthermore, while it is incremented for each page, its value is
% never used by \LaTeX. It can therefore be freely reset or changed by user
@@ -331,9 +455,9 @@
% \cs{thetotalpages}/\cs{PreviousTotalPages}
% \end{syntax}
% Command that expands to the number of total pages from the
-% previous run. If there was no previous run or if usedin the
+% previous run. If there was no previous run or if used in the
% preamble it expands to
-% \texttt{0}. Note that this is a command to a counter, so in order
+% \texttt{0}. Note that this is a command and not a counter, so in order
% to display the number in, say, Roman numerals you have to assign
% its value to a counter and then use \cs{Roman} on that counter.
% \end{variable}
@@ -356,9 +480,15 @@
%
% \section{Emulating commands from other packages}
%
-% The packages in this section are no longer necessary but as they
-% are used in other packages they are emulated when they are loaded
-% via \cs{usepackage} or \cs{RequirePackage}.
+% The packages in this section are no longer necessary, but as they
+% are used by other packages, they are emulated when they are
+% explicitly loaded with \cs{usepackage} or \cs{RequirePackage}.
+%
+% Please note that the emulation only happens if the package is
+% explicitly requested, i.e., the commands documented below are not
+% automatically available in the \LaTeX{} kernel! If you write a
+% new package we suggest to use the appropriate kernel hooks
+% directly instead of loading the emulation.
%
%
% \subsection{Emulating \pkg{atbegshi}}
@@ -410,6 +540,21 @@
% This is the name of the shipout box as \pkg{atbegshi} knows it.
% \end{function}
%
+%
+% \begin{function}{\AtBeginShipoutOriginalShipout}
+% This is the name of the \cs{shipout} primitive as \pkg{atbegshi}
+% knows it. This bypasses all the mechanisms set up by the \LaTeX{}
+% kernel and there are various scenarios in which it can therefore
+% fail. It should only be used to run existing legacy
+% \pkg{atbegshi} code but not in newly developed applications.
+%
+% The kernel alternative is \cs{RawShipout} which is integrated
+% with the \LaTeX{} mechanisms and updates, for example, the
+% \cs{ReadonlyShipoutCounter} counter. Please use \cs{RawShipout}
+% for new code if you want to bypass the before, foreground and
+% background hooks.
+% \end{function}
+%
% \begin{function}{\AtBeginShipoutInit}
% By default \pkg{atbegshi} delayed its action until
% \verb=\begin{document}=. This command was forcing it in an earlier
@@ -434,6 +579,13 @@
%
% \subsection{Emulating \pkg{everyshi}}
%
+% The \pkg{everyshi} package is providing commands to run arbitrary
+% code just before the shipout starts.
+% One point of difference: in the new shipout hooks the page is
+% available as \cs{ShipoutBox} for inspection of change, one should
+% not manipulate box 255 directly inside \hook{shipout/before}, so
+% old code doing this would change to use \cs{ShipoutBox} instead
+% of \texttt{255} or \cs{@cclv}.
%
% \begin{function}{\EveryShipout}
% \begin{syntax}
@@ -447,22 +599,49 @@
% \end{syntax}
% \end{function}
%
+% However, most use cases for \pkg{everyshi} are attempts to put
+% some picture or text into the background or foreground of the page
+% and that can be done today simply by using the
+% \hook{shipout/background} and
+% \hook{shipout/foreground} hooks without any need to coding.
%
%
% \subsection{Emulating \pkg{atenddvi}}
%
-% The \pkg{atenddvi} package implemented only a single command:
-% \cs{AtEndDvi} and that is now available out of the box.
+% The \pkg{atenddvi} package implemented only a single command:
+% \cs{AtEndDvi} and that is now available out of the box so the
+% emulation makes the package a no-op.
%
%
%
% \subsection{Emulating \pkg{everypage}}
%
-% This page takes over the original \cs{@begindvi} hook and replaces
-% it. It should be all covered by the hooks offered here (details
-% need checking) and thus could simply use the provided hooks
-% rather than defining its own.
+% This package patched the original \cs{@begindvi} hook and replaced
+% it with its own version.
+% Its functionality is now covered by the hooks offered by the
+% kernel so that there is no need for such patching any longer.
+%
+% \begin{function}{\AddEverypageHook}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{AddEverypageHook}\Arg{code} $\equiv$
+% \qquad\cs{AddToHook}\texttt{\{shipout/background\}\{\cs{put}(1in,-1in)\Arg{code}\}}
+% \end{syntax}
+% \cs{AddEverypageHook} is adding something into the
+% background of every page at a position of 1in to the right and
+% 1in down from the top left corner of the page.
+% By using the kernel hook directly you can put your material
+% directly to the right place, i.e., use other coordinates in the
+% \cs{put} statement above.
+% \end{function}
%
+% \begin{function}{\AddThispageHook}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{AddThispageHook}\Arg{code} $\equiv$
+% \qquad\cs{AddToHookNext}\texttt{\{shipout/background\}\{\cs{put}(1in,-1in)\Arg{code}\}}
+% \end{syntax}
+% The \cs{AddThispageHook} wrapper is similar but uses
+% \cs{AddToHookNext}.
+% \end{function}
%
%
% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
@@ -479,7 +658,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {\shipout}{Hook mangement (shipout)}%
+%<latexrelease> {\shipout}{Hook management (shipout)}%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -540,6 +719,41 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_raw_box}
+% The \cs{RawShipout} gets its own box but it is internal as there
+% is no hook manipulation for it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\box_new:N \l_@@_raw_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_finalize_box:}
+% For Lua\TeX{} invoke the \texttt{pre\_shipout\_filter} callback.
+% \changes{v1.0i}{2021/01/22}{Add \texttt{pre\_shipout\_filter} Lua callback}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\sys_if_engine_luatex:TF
+ {
+ \newluafunction \@@_finalize_box:
+ \exp_args:Nx \everyjob {
+ \exp_not:V \everyjob
+ \exp_not:N \lua_now:n {
+ luatexbase.create_callback('pre_shipout_filter', 'list')
+ local~call, getbox, setbox = luatexbase.call_callback, tex.getbox, tex.setbox~
+ lua.get_functions_table()[\the \@@_finalize_box:] = function()
+ local~result = call('pre_shipout_filter', getbox(\the \l_shipout_box))
+ if~not (result == true) then~
+ setbox(\the \l_shipout_box, result~or~nil)
+ end~
+ end
+ }
+ }
+ \protected \luadef \@@_finalize_box: \the \@@_finalize_box:
+ } {
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_finalize_box: \scan_stop:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute:}
@@ -567,7 +781,8 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_group_level_tl}
% Helper token list to record the group level at which
-% \cs{@@_execute:} is encountered. \begin{macrocode}
+% \cs{@@_execute:} is encountered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
\tl_new:N \l_@@_group_level_tl
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -581,28 +796,78 @@
\cs_new:Npn \@@_execute_test_level: {
\int_compare:nNnT
\l_@@_group_level_tl < \tex_currentgrouplevel:D
- \tex_aftergroup:D
- \@@_execute_cont:
+ \tex_aftergroup:D \@@_execute_cont:
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute_cont:}
+% This does the actual shipout running several hooks as part of it.
+% The code for them is passed as argument \verb=#2= to \verb=#4=
+% to \cs{@@_execute_main_cont:Nnnn}; the first argument is the box
+% to be shipped out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_execute_cont: {
+ \@@_execute_main_cont:Nnnn
+ \l_shipout_box
+ { \hook_use:n {shipout/before} }
+ { \hook_if_empty:nF {shipout/foreground}
+ { \@@_add_foreground_picture:n
+ { \hook_use:n {shipout/foreground} } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the user hook for the background (\hook{shipout/background}) has
+% no code, there might still code in the kernel hook so we need to
+% test for this too.
+% We only test for the \cs{@kernel@before@shipout@background}
+% though. If the \cs{@kernel@after@shipout@background} needs
+% executing even if the user hook is empty then we can add another
+% test (or the kernel could put something into the before hook).
+%
+% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/11/23}{Check for both kernel and user hook (gh/431)}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{2021/01/08}{Added another kernel hook for more
+% flexibility (cf \texttt{https://github.com/pgf-tikz/pgf/issues/960}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_lazy_and:nnF
+ { \hook_if_empty_p:n {shipout/background} }
+ { \tl_if_empty_p:N \@kernel@before@shipout@background }
+ { \@@_add_background_picture:n
+ { \@kernel@before@shipout@background
+ \hook_use:n {shipout/background}
+ \@kernel@after@shipout@background }
+ }
+ }
+ { \hook_use:n {shipout/after} }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute_main_cont:Nnnn}
% When we have reached this point the shipout box has been
% processed and is available in \cs{l_shipout_box} and ready for
-% real ship out (perhaps)..
+% real ship out (unless it gets discarded during the process).
+%
+% The three arguments hold hook code that is executed just before the
+% actual shipout (\verb=#1=), within the shipout adding
+% background and foreground material (\verb=#2=) and after the
+% shipout has happened (\verb=#3=).
+% These are passed as arguments because the same code without those
+% hooks is also used when doing a ``raw'' shipout implemented by
+% \cs{RawShipout}.
+% The only hook that is always executed is that for the very last
+% page, i.e., \hook{shipout/lastpage}.
%
% First we quickly check if it is void (can't happen in the
% standard \LaTeX{} output routine but \cs{shipout} might be called
% from a package that has some special processing logic). If it is
% void we aren't shipping anything out and processing ends.\footnote{In that
-% case we don't reset the deadcyles, that would be up to the OR
+% case we don't reset the deadcycles, that would be up to the OR
% processing logic to do.}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\cs_new:Npn \@@_execute_cont: {
- \box_if_empty:NTF \l_shipout_box
- { \PackageWarning{ltshipout}{Ignoring~ void~ shipout~ box} }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_execute_main_cont:Nnnn #1#2#3#4 {
+ \box_if_empty:NTF #1
+ { \@latex@warning{Ignoring~ void~ shipout~ box} }
{
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we assume that we will ship something and prepare for
@@ -610,7 +875,8 @@
% \cs{protect} while we are running the hook code).
% We also save the current \cs{protect} state to restore it later.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \bool_gset_false:N \g_@@_discard_bool
+% \bool_gset_false:N \g_@@_discard_bool % setting this would disable
+ % \DiscardShipoutBox on doc-level
\cs_set_eq:NN \@@_saved_protect: \protect
\set@typeset@protect
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -619,11 +885,12 @@
% necessary as the code could access them via \cs{box_ht:N}, etc.,
% but it is perhaps convenient.}
% \begin{macrocode}
- \@@_get_box_size:N \l_shipout_box
+ \@@_get_box_size:N #1
% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we execute the \hook{shipout/before} hook.
+% Then we execute the \hook{shipout/before} hook (or nothing in
+% case of \cs{RawShipout}).
% \begin{macrocode}
- \hook_use:n {shipout/before}
+ #2
% \end{macrocode}
% In \cs{g_shipout_totalpages_int} we count all shipout attempts so
% we increment that counter already here (the other one is
@@ -631,7 +898,8 @@
% \cs{shipout}.
%
% We increment it after running the above hook so that the values
-% for \cs{g_shipout_totalpages_int} and \cs{} are in sync while the
+% for \cs{g_shipout_totalpages_int} and \cs{g_shipout_readonly_int}
+% are in sync while the
% hook is executed (in the case that totalpages isn't manually
% altered or through discarding pages that is).
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -641,7 +909,7 @@
% we now test for it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\bool_if:NTF \g_@@_discard_bool
- { \PackageInfo{ltshipout}{Completed~ page~ discarded}
+ { \@latex@info@no@line{Completed~ page~ discarded}
\bool_gset_false:N \g_@@_discard_bool
% \end{macrocode}
% As we are discarding the page box and not shipping anything out,
@@ -655,7 +923,7 @@
% needed? Or the resetting of \cs{protect} to its kernel value?}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \group_begin:
-% \box_set_eq_drop:NN \l_shipout_box \l_shipout_box
+% \box_set_eq_drop:NN #1 #1
% \group_end:
% \cs_set_eq:NN \protect \exp_not:N
}
@@ -666,8 +934,8 @@
% once more but this time make it a warning, because the best
% practice way is to use the request mechanism.
% \begin{macrocode}
- { \box_if_empty:NTF \l_shipout_box
- { \PackageWarning{ltshipout}{
+ { \box_if_empty:NTF #1
+ { \@latex@warning{
Shipout~ box~ was~ voided~ by~ hook,\MessageBreak
ignoring~ shipout~ box }
}
@@ -691,39 +959,54 @@
% changed) and then look at the hooks \hook{shipout/foreground}
% and \hook{shipout/background}. If either or both are non-empty
% we add a \texttt{picture} environment to the box (in the
-% foreground and or in the background) and execute the hook code
+% foreground and/or in the background) and execute the hook code
% inside that environment.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
- \@@_get_box_size:N \l_shipout_box
- \hook_if_empty:nF {shipout/foreground}
- { \@@_add_foreground_picture:n
- { \hook_use:n {shipout/foreground} } }
- \hook_if_empty:nF {shipout/background}
- { \@@_add_background_picture:n
- { \@kernel@before@shipout@background
- \hook_use:n {shipout/background} } }
+ \@@_get_box_size:N #1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first hook we run is the \hook{shipout/firstpage} hook. This
+% is only done once, then the \cs{@@_run_firstpage_hook:}
+% command redefines itself to do nothing. If the hook contains
+% \cs{special}s for integration at the top of the page they will be
+% temporarily stored in a safe place and added later with
+% \cs{@@_add_firstpage_specials:}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_run_firstpage_hook:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Run the hooks for background and foreground or, if this
+% is called by \cs{RawShipout}, copy the box \cs{l_@@_raw_box} to
+% \cs{l_shipout_box} so that firstpage and lastpage material gets
+% added if necessary (that is always done to \cs{l_shipout_box}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #3
% \end{macrocode}
-% We then run \cs{@@_execute_firstpage_hook:} that adds
+% We then run \cs{@@_add_firstpage_specials:} that adds
% the content of the hook \hook{shipout/firstpage} to the
% start of the first page (if non-empty). It is then redefined to
% do nothing on later pages.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \@@_execute_firstpage_hook:
+ \@@_add_firstpage_specials:
% \end{macrocode}
-% The we check if we have to add the \hook{shipout/lastpage} hook
+% Then we check if we have to add the \hook{shipout/lastpage} hook
+% or the corresponding kernel hook
% because we have reached the last page. This test will be false for
% all but one (and hopefully the correct) page.
+% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/11/23}{Check for both kernel and user hook (gh/431)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\int_compare:nNnT \@abspage@last = \g_shipout_readonly_int
- { \hook_if_empty:nF {shipout/lastpage}
+ { \bool_lazy_and:nnF
+ { \hook_if_empty_p:n {shipout/lastpage} }
+ { \tl_if_empty_p:N \@kernel@after@shipout@lastpage }
{ \@@_debug:n { \typeout{Executing~ lastpage~ hook~
- on~ page~ \int_use:N \g_shipout_readonly_int } }
- \_@@_add_foreground_box:n { \UseHook{shipout/lastpage}
- \@kernel@after@shipout@lastpage }
+ on~ page~ \int_use:N \g_shipout_readonly_int } }
+ \_@@_add_foreground_box:n
+ { \UseHook{shipout/lastpage}
+ \@kernel@after@shipout@lastpage }
}
\bool_gset_true:N \g_@@_lastpage_handled_bool
}
+ \@@_finalize_box:
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally we run the actual \TeX{} primitive for shipout. As that will
% expand delayed \cs{write} statements inside the page in which
@@ -732,6 +1015,21 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_set_eq:NN \protect \exp_not:N
\tex_shipout:D \box_use:N \l_shipout_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cs{l_shipout_box} may contain the firstpage material if this
+% was the very first shipout. That makes it unsuitable for reuse in
+% another shipout, so as a safety measure the next command resets
+% \cs{l_shipout_box} to its earlier state if that is necessary. On
+% later pages this is then a no-op.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_drop_firstpage_specials:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \hook{shipout/after} hook (if in \verb=#4=) needs to run with
+% \cs{protect}ed commands again being executed, because that hook
+% will ``typeset'' material added at the top of the next page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \set@typeset@protect
+ #4
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -746,20 +1044,69 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute_raw:,
+% \@@_execute_test_level_raw:}
+%
+% This implements the ``raw'' shipout which bypasses the before,
+% foreground, background and after hooks. It follows the same pattern than
+% \cs{_@@_execute_raw:} except that it finally calls
+% \cs{_@@_execute_main_cont:Nnnn} with three empty arguments.
+% instead of the hook code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_execute_raw: {
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_group_level_tl
+ { \int_value:w \tex_currentgrouplevel:D }
+ \tex_afterassignment:D \@@_execute_test_level_raw:
+ \tex_setbox:D \l_@@_raw_box
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_execute_test_level_raw: {
+ \int_compare:nNnT
+ \l_@@_group_level_tl < \tex_currentgrouplevel:D
+ \tex_aftergroup:D \@@_execute_nohooks_cont:
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Well, not totally empty arguments, we add some debugging if we
+% are actually doing a shipout.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_execute_nohooks_cont: {
+ \@@_execute_main_cont:Nnnn \l_@@_raw_box
+ {} { \@@_debug:n{ \typeout{Doing~ raw~ shipout~ ...} }
+ \box_set_eq:NN \l_shipout_box \l_@@_raw_box } {}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\RawShipout}
+% The interface name for raw shipout.
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2021/01/10}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_gset_eq:NN \RawShipout \@@_execute_raw:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\@@_saved_protect:}
-% Remeber the current \cs{protect} state.
+% Remember the current \cs{protect} state.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_saved_protect: \protect
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}{shipout/before,
+% \begin{macro}{shipout/before,shipout/after,
% shipout/foreground,shipout/background,
% shipout/firstpage,
% shipout/lastpage}
% Declaring all hooks for the shipout code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hook_new:n{shipout/before}
+\hook_new:n{shipout/after}
\hook_new:n{shipout/foreground}
\hook_new:n{shipout/background}
\hook_new:n{shipout/firstpage}
@@ -770,36 +1117,71 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@kernel@after@shipout@lastpage,
-% \@kernel@before@shipout@background}
+% \@kernel@before@shipout@background,
+% \@kernel@after@shipout@background}
% And here are the internal kernel hooks going before or after the
% public ones where needed.
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2021/01/10}{Internal hook
+% \cs{@kernel@after@shipout@background} added}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@kernel@after@shipout@lastpage\@empty
\let\@kernel@before@shipout@background\@empty
+\let\@kernel@after@shipout@background\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute_firstpage_hook: }
-% This command adds any specials into a box and adds that to the
-% very beginning of the first box shipped out. After that we
-% redefine it to do nothing on later pages.
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_run_firstpage_hook:}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{2021/01/19}{Handling of firstpage hook altered}
+%
+% There are three commands to handle the \hook{shipout/firstpage}
+% hook:
+% \cs{@@_run_firstpage_hook:}, \cs{@@_add_firstpage_specials:} and
+% \cs{@@_drop_firstpage_specials:}.
+%
+% That hook is supposed to contain \cs{special}s and similar
+% material to be placed at the very beginning of the output page
+% and so it needs careful placing to avoid that anything else gets
+% in front of it. And this means we have to wait with this until
+% other hooks such as \hook{shipout/background} have added their
+% bits. It is also important that such \cs{special}s show up only
+% on the very first page, so if this page gets saved before
+% \cs{shipout} for later reuse, we have to make sure that they
+% aren't in the saved version.
+%
+% In addition the hook may also contain code to be executed ``first'', e.g.,
+% visible from code in \hook{shipout/background} and this conflicts
+% with adding the \cs{special}s late.
+%
+% Therefore the processing is split into different parts:
+% \cs{@@_run_firstpage_hook:} is done early and checks if there is
+% any material in the hook.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\cs_new:Npn \@@_execute_firstpage_hook: {
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_run_firstpage_hook: {
+ \hook_if_empty:nTF {shipout/firstpage}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Adding something to the beginning means adding it to the
-% background as that layer is done first in the output. Of course
-% that is only needed if the hook actually contains anything.
+% If not then we define the other two commands to do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \hook_if_empty:nF {shipout/firstpage}
- { \@@_add_background_box:n { \UseHook{shipout/firstpage} } }
+ {
+ \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_add_firstpage_specials: \prg_do_nothing:
+ \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_drop_firstpage_specials: \prg_do_nothing:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If there is material we execute inside a box, which means any
+% \cs{special} will end up in that box and any other code is
+% executed and can have side effects (as long as they are global).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \hbox_set:Nn \l_@@_firstpage_box { \UseHook{shipout/firstpage} }
+ }
% \end{macrocode}
% Once we are here we change the definition to do nothing next time
% and we also change the command used to implement \cs{AtBeginDvi}
-% to become a warning and not add further material to a hook that
+% to become a warning and not add further material to a hook that
% is never used again.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_execute_firstpage_hook: \prg_do_nothing:
+ \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_run_firstpage_hook: \prg_do_nothing:
\cs_gset:Npn \@@_add_firstpage_material:Nn ##1 ##2 {
\@latex@warning{
First~ page~ is~ already~ shipped~ out,~ ignoring\MessageBreak
@@ -807,8 +1189,67 @@
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_add_firstpage_specials:,\@@_drop_firstpage_specials:}
+% The \cs{@@_add_firstpage_specials:} then adds the \cs{special}s
+% stored in \cs{l_@@_firstpage_box} to the page to be shipped out
+% when the time is ready. Note that if there was no material in the
+% \hook{shipout/firstpage} hook then this command gets redefined to
+% do nothing. But for most documents there is something, e.g., some
+% PostScript header, or some meta data declaration, etc.\ so by
+% default we assume there is something to do.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_add_firstpage_specials: {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we make a copy of the \cs{l_shipout_box} that we can
+% restore it later on.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \box_set_eq:NN \l_@@_raw_box \l_shipout_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Adding something to the beginning means adding it to the
+% background as that layer is done first in the output.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_add_background_box:n { \hbox_unpack_drop:N \l_@@_firstpage_box }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After the actual shipout \cs{@@_drop_firstpage_specials:} is
+% run to
+% restore the earlier content of \cs{l_shipout_box} and then
+% redefines itself again to do nothing.
+%
+% As a final act we change the definition to do nothing next time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_add_firstpage_specials: \prg_do_nothing:
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \cs{@@_drop_firstpage_specials:} is run after the shipout has
+% occurred but before the \hook{shipout/afterpage} hook is executed.
+% That is the point where we have to restore the \cs{ShipoutBox} to
+% its state without the \hook{shipout/firstpage} material.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_drop_firstpage_specials: {
+ \box_set_eq:NN \l_shipout_box \l_@@_raw_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If there was no such material then \cs{@@_run_firstpage_hook:}
+% will have changed the definition to a no-op already. Otherwise
+% this is what we do here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_drop_firstpage_specials: \prg_do_nothing:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_firstpage_box}
+% The box to hold any firstpage \cs{special}s.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\box_new:N \l_@@_firstpage_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
%
% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_lastpage_handled_bool}
% A boolean to signal if we have already handled the
@@ -849,8 +1290,8 @@
\dim_set:Nn \l_shipout_box_ht_dim { \box_ht:N #1 }
\dim_set:Nn \l_shipout_box_dp_dim { \box_dp:N #1 }
\dim_set:Nn \l_shipout_box_wd_dim { \box_wd:N #1 }
- \dim_set:Nn \l_shipout_box_ht_plus_dp_dim { \l_shipout_box_ht_dim +
- \l_shipout_box_dp_dim }
+ \dim_set:Nn \l_shipout_box_ht_plus_dp_dim
+ { \l_shipout_box_ht_dim + \l_shipout_box_dp_dim }
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -883,7 +1324,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_tmp_box,\l_@@_saved_badness_tl}
% We need a box for the background and foreground material and a
% token register to remember badness settings as we disable them
-% during te buildup below.
+% during the buildup below.
% \begin{macrocode}
\box_new:N \l_@@_tmp_box
\tl_new:N \l_@@_saved_badness_tl
@@ -1088,7 +1529,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new:Npn \@@_picture_overlay:n #1 {
% \end{macrocode}
-% The very first time this is executed we have to initializes (and
+% The very first time this is executed we have to initialize (and
% freeze) the origins.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@_init_page_origins:
@@ -1183,7 +1624,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\g_shipout_totalpages_int,\c@totalpages}
% We count every shipout attempt (even those that are discarded) in
-% tis counter. It is not used in the code but may get used in user
+% this counter. It is not used in the code but may get used in user
% code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\int_new:N \g_shipout_totalpages_int
@@ -1207,7 +1648,7 @@
% or the statement is missing from it we initialize it with the
% largest possible number in \TeX{}. We use this as the default
% because then we are inserting the \hook{shipout/lastpage} on
-% the last page (or after the last page but not on page 1 for a
+% the last page (or after the last page) but not on page 1 for a
% multipage document.
% \begin{macrocode}
\xdef\@abspage@last{\number\maxdimen}
@@ -1219,11 +1660,11 @@
%
% Instead of using the hooks \hook{enddocument} and
% \hook{enddocument/afterlastpage} we add this code to private
-% kernel hooks to be 100\% when it is executed and to avoid
+% kernel hooks to be 100\% sure when it is executed and to avoid
% cluttering the hooks with data that is always there.
%
% Inside \cs{enddocument} there is a \cs{clearpage}. Just before
-% that we execute this code here. There is a good change that we
+% that we execute this code here. There is a good chance that we
% are on the last page. Therefore, if we don't know the value from
% the last run, we assume that the current page is the right
% one. So we set \cs{@abspage@last} and as a result the next
@@ -1307,7 +1748,7 @@
% At this point we also signal to \LaTeX{}'s endgame that a rerun is
% necessary so that an appropriate message can be shown on the
% terminal. We do this by simply defining a command used as a flag and
-% tested \cs{enddocument}.
+% tested in \cs{enddocument}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_gset_eq:NN \@extra@page@added \relax
}
@@ -1380,7 +1821,8 @@
% defined so we better not use \cs{cs_new_protected:Npn} here.
% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/11/24}{Support for roll forward (gh/434)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\cs_set_protected:Npn \AtBeginDvi {\@@_add_firstpage_material:Nn \AtBeginDvi}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \AtBeginDvi
+ {\@@_add_firstpage_material:Nn \AtBeginDvi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -1409,6 +1851,7 @@
% \@expl@@@shipout@add@foreground@picture@@n}
% Some internals needed elsewhere.
%
+% \InternalDetectionOff
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_set_eq:NN \@expl@@@shipout@add@firstpage@material@@Nn
\__shipout_add_firstpage_material:Nn
@@ -1433,6 +1876,7 @@
\cs_set_eq:NN \@expl@@@shipout@add@foreground@picture@@n
\__shipout_add_foreground_picture:n
% \end{macrocode}
+% \InternalDetectionOn
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1449,7 +1893,7 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\shipout}{The hook management (shipout)}%
+%<latexrelease> {\shipout}{Hook management (shipout)}%
%<latexrelease>
% \end{macrocode}
% If we roll forward then \cs{tex\_shipout:D} may not be defined in
@@ -1462,6 +1906,7 @@
%<latexrelease> \csname tex_shipout:D\endcsname
%<latexrelease>\fi
%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\let \RawShipout\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let \ShipoutBox\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let \ReadonlyShipoutCounter \@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let \c@totalpages \@undefined
@@ -1485,23 +1930,13 @@
%<latexrelease>\let \ShipoutBoxDepth \@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let \ShipoutBoxWidth \@undefined
%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\let \AtBeginShipoutDiscard \@undefined
-%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\let \AtBeginShipoutAddToBox \@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let \AtBeginShipoutAddToBoxForeground \@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let \AtBeginShipoutUpperLeft \@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\let \AtBeginShipoutUpperLeftForeground \@undefined
-%<latexrelease>
% \end{macrocode}
% We do not undo a substitution when rolling back. As the file
% support gets undone the underlying data is no longer used (and
-% sufficiently obscure that should not interfer with existing
+% sufficiently obscure that it should not interfere with existing
% commands) and properly removing it would mean we need to make the
-% \cs{unclare@...} and its support macros available in all earlier
+% \cs{undeclare@...} and its support macros available in all earlier
% kernel releases which is pointless (and actually worse).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\undeclare@file@substitution{everyshi.sty}
-% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<latexrelease>
@@ -1509,7 +1944,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% We do not reenable a disabled package load when rolling back. As the file
% support gets undone the underlying data is no longer checked (and
-% sufficiently obscure that it should not interfer with existing
+% sufficiently obscure that it should not interfere with existing
% commands) and properly removing it would mean we need to make the
% \cs{reenable@package@load} command available in all earlier
% kernel releases which is pointless (and actually worse).
@@ -1585,8 +2020,8 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*atbegshi-ltx>
\ProvidesPackage{atbegshi-ltx}
- [2020/08/17 v1.0a
- Emulation of the original atbegshi package^^Jwith kernel methods]
+ [2021/01/10 v1.0c
+ Emulation of the original atbegshi^^Jpackage with kernel methods]
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -1597,6 +2032,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginShipoutInit}
% Compatibility only, we aren't delaying \ldots
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1650,15 +2086,27 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginShipoutOriginalShipout}
+% This offers the raw \cs{shipout} primitive of the engine. A page
+% shipped out with this is not counted by
+% \cs{ReadonlyShipoutCounter} counter and thus the mechanism to
+% place \cs{special}s at the very end of the output might fail,
+% etc. It should therefore not be used in new applications but is
+% only provided to allow running legacy code. For new code use the
+% commands provided by the kernel instead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+\cs_new_eq:NN \AtBeginShipoutOriginalShipout \tex_shipout:D
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \begin{macro}{\ShipoutBoxHeight,\ShipoutBoxWidth,\ShipoutoBoxDepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\ShipoutBoxHeight,\ShipoutBoxWidth,\ShipoutBoxDepth}
% This is somewhat different from the original in \pkg{atbegshi}
% where \cs{ShipoutBoxHeight} etc.\ only holds the
% \verb=\the\ht<box>= value. This may has some implications in some
% use cases and if that is a problem then it might need changing.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ExplSyntaxOn
\cs_new:Npn \ShipoutBoxHeight { \dim_use:N \l_shipout_box_ht_dim }
\cs_new:Npn \ShipoutBoxDepth { \dim_use:N \l_shipout_box_dp_dim }
\cs_new:Npn \ShipoutBoxWidth { \dim_use:N \l_shipout_box_wd_dim }
@@ -1685,56 +2133,8 @@
%
% \subsection{Package \pkg{everyshi} emulation}
%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*everyshi-ltx>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesPackage{everyshi-ltx}
- [2020/08/17 v1.0a
- Emulation of the original everyshi package^^Jwith kernel methods]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\EveryShipout,\AtNextShipout}
-% This package has only two public commands so simulating it is easy:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\protected \def \EveryShipout {\AddToHook{shipout/before}}
-\protected \def \AtNextShipout {\AddToHookNext{shipout/before}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% This is one difference between \pkg{everyshi} and the kernel
-% implementation, the latter does not directly use box 255.
-%
-% For usage by ordinary users this makes no difference but of a
-% package use complicated code together with \pkg{everyshi} and
-% directly manipulates box 255 then this package needs updating.
-% In most cases the updates are simple because the kernel offers
-% hooks that makes such complicated code unnecessary.
-%
-% We therefore add a little file into the adjusted package
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%
-%% In normal circumstances the above emulation is sufficient and in
-%% all known packages (we know of) that use everyshi it either works or
-%% the packages have been adjusted.
-%%
-%% Code that directly manipulates box 255, however, might fail.
-%% If that is the case look at the shipout hooks offered now as
-%% they are normally sufficienct to avoid such minpulations (or
-%% replace box 255 with \ShipoutBox in the code.
-%%
-%</everyshi-ltx>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% If the package is requested we substitute the one above:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*2ekernel>
-\declare@file@substitution{everyshi.sty}{everyshi-ltx.sty}
-%</2ekernel>
-% \end{macrocode}
+% This is now directly handled in that package so emulation is not
+% necessary any more.
%
%
% Rather important :-)
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
index 1a672c6455d..17fb0d65185 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx
index dedd9e5d375..48627f40a3c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
%%% From File: lttab.dtx
%<*driver>
% \fi
-\ProvidesFile{lttab.dtx}[2020/04/24 v1.1r LaTeX Kernel (Columns)]
+\ProvidesFile{lttab.dtx}[2021/04/20 v1.1s LaTeX Kernel (Columns)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{lttab.dtx}
@@ -464,7 +464,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\@tabcr}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@tabcr{\@stopline \@ifstar{\penalty \@M \@xtabcr}\@xtabcr}
+\protected\def\@tabcr{\@stopline \@ifstar{\penalty \@M \@xtabcr}\@xtabcr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -964,8 +964,9 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\@arraycr}
% Array version of |\\|.
+% \changes{v1.1s}{2021/04/20}{Use \cs{protected} for \cs{\bslash} variant (gh/548)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@arraycr{%
+\protected\def\@arraycr{%
${\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar\@xarraycr\@xarraycr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -994,8 +995,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@tabularcr}
+% \changes{v1.1s}{2021/04/20}{Use \cs{protected} for \cs{\bslash} variant (gh/548)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@tabularcr{%
+\protected\def\@tabularcr{%
{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar\@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx
index 3b6231dafdf..1efc36d5637 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2019-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -26,6 +26,9 @@
% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
%
% \fi
+%
+%%% From File: lttextcomp.dtx
+%
% \iffalse
%
%<*driver>
@@ -33,7 +36,7 @@
%
%
\ProvidesFile{lttextcomp.dtx}
- [2020/04/29 v1.0d LaTeX Kernel (text companion symbols)]
+ [2021/04/16 v1.0f LaTeX Kernel (text companion symbols)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\begin{document}
@@ -46,7 +49,7 @@
%
%
% \GetFileInfo{lttextcomp.dtx}
-% \title{Providing addtional text symbols\\
+% \title{Providing additional text symbols\\
% (previously available through the \texttt{textcomp} package)\thanks
% {This file has version number
% \fileversion\ dated \filedate}}
@@ -67,20 +70,23 @@
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
+% \changes{v1.0e}{2021/03/19}
+% {Use \cs{NewModuleRelease}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\NewModuleRelease{2020/02/02}{lttextcomp}
+%<latexrelease> {Text Companion symbols}
+% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\oldstylenums}
% \begin{macro}{\legacyoldstylenums}
%
-%
% Preserve the old definition of \cs{oldstylenums} under a different name.
%
% This macro implements old style numerals but only works if we
% assume that the standard math fonts are used. Thus it needs
% changing in case other math encodings are used.
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
-%<latexrelease> {\oldstylenums}{Old style numerals}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\legacyoldstylenums[1]{%
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -112,7 +118,7 @@
\mathgroup\symletters #1%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% The \cs{CheckEncodingSubset} is discused below.
+% The \cs{CheckEncodingSubset} is discussed below.
% \begin{macrocode}
\CheckEncodingSubset\@use@text@encoding{TS1}\tc@oldstylesubst2{{#1}}%
\fi
@@ -154,44 +160,6 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\oldstylenums}{Old style numerals}%
-%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\oldstylenums[1]{%
-%<latexrelease> \begingroup
-%<latexrelease> \spaceskip\fontdimen\tw@\font
-%<latexrelease> \usefont{OML}{\rmdefault}{\f@series}{it}%
-%<latexrelease> \mathgroup\symletters #1%
-%<latexrelease> \endgroup
-%<latexrelease>}
-%<latexrelease>\let\legacyoldstylenums\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\def\textcompsubstdefault{cmr}
-%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-
-
-
-
-
-% Everything else in the this file got introduced 2020/02/02, so we do a
-% single rollback (for now).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*2ekernel>
-%</2ekernel>
-%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/02/02}%
-%<latexrelease> {\DeclareEncodingSubset}{Text companion symbols}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareEncodingSubset}
%
% The declaration takes 3 mandatory arguments: an \emph{encoding}
@@ -200,7 +168,7 @@
% declare the subset and finally the \emph{subset} number (between \texttt{0} (all
% of the encoding is supported) and \texttt{9} many glyphs are missing.
%
-% For \texttt{TS1} the numbers have been choosen in a way that most
+% For \texttt{TS1} the numbers have been chosen in a way that most
% fonts can be fairly correctly categorized, but the default
% settings are always conservative, that is they may claim that
% less glyphs are supported than there actually are.
@@ -362,13 +330,14 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-
-
-
-
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\tc@fake@euro}
% |\tc@fake@euro| is an example of a ``fake'' definition to use in arg |#3| of
-% |\CheckEncodingSubset| when a symbol is not available in a
+% the command |\CheckEncodingSubset| when a symbol is not available in a
% certain font family. Here we produce a poor man's Euro symbol by combining
% a ``C'' with a ``=''.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -386,10 +355,10 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-
-
-
-
+%
+%
+%
+%
% \begin{macro}{\tc@check@symbol}
% \begin{macro}{\tc@check@accent}
% These are two abbreviations that we use below to check symbols
@@ -401,21 +370,22 @@
% to ensure that |\textcurrency| is only typeset if the current
% font has a \texttt{TS1} subset id of less than 3. Otherwise
% |\tc@error| is called telling the user that for this font family
-% |\textcurreny| is not available.
+% |\textcurrency| is not available.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tc@check@symbol{\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextSymbol{TS1}\tc@subst}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Accents and been mad an error in the \texttt{textcomp} package when
+% Accents have been made an error in the \texttt{textcomp} package when
% not available. Now that we provide the functionality in the
-% kernel we avoid the eror by swapping in a \texttt{T1} accent if
+% kernel we avoid the error by swapping in a \texttt{T1} accent if
% the \texttt{TS1} accent is not available.
% \begin{macrocode}
%\def\tc@check@accent{\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextAccent{TS1}\tc@error}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tc@check@accent#1{\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextAccent{TS1}{\tc@swap@accent#1}}
+\def\tc@check@accent#1{\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextAccent
+ {TS1}{\tc@swap@accent#1}}
\def\tc@swap@accent#1#2{\UseTextAccent{T1}#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -430,17 +400,17 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{TS1}
-\UndeclareTextCommand{\textdollar} {OT1} % don't use the OT1 def any longer
+\UndeclareTextCommand{\textdollar}{OT1} % don't use the OT1 def any longer
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textsterling}{TS1}
-\UndeclareTextCommand{\textsterling}{OT1} % don't use the OT1 def any longer
+\UndeclareTextCommand{\textsterling}{OT1}% don't use the OT1 def any longer
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textperthousand}{TS1}
-\UndeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{T1} % don't use the T1 def
+\UndeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{T1} % don't use the T1 def
% \end{macrocode}
% Using \cs{UndeclareTextCommand} above is enough only if the
% encoding definition files are not reloaded afterwards. In the
@@ -462,9 +432,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% And here are the other \texttt{TS1} glyphs that are implemented
-% by every font (or nearly everyone---a few are commented out and
+% by every font (or nearly every---a few are commented out and
% moved to sub-encoding 9,
-% because they aren't around in one or two fonts.
+% because they aren't around in some fonts.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbardbl}{TS1} % subst in sub-enc 9 above
\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbrokenbar}{TS1}
@@ -541,31 +511,49 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\Umathcode\@undefined
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalacute} {\tc@check@accent{\'}2\capitalacute}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalbreve} {\tc@check@accent{\u}2\capitalbreve}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalcaron} {\tc@check@accent{\v}2\capitalcaron}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalcedilla} {\tc@check@accent{\c}2\capitalcedilla}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalcircumflex} {\tc@check@accent{\^}2\capitalcircumflex}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaldieresis} {\tc@check@accent{\"}2\capitaldieresis}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaldotaccent} {\tc@check@accent{\.}2\capitaldotaccent}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalgrave} {\tc@check@accent{\`}2\capitalgrave}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalhungarumlaut}{\tc@check@accent{\H}2\capitalhungarumlaut}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalmacron} {\tc@check@accent{\=}2\capitalmacron}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalogonek} {\tc@check@accent{\k}2\capitalogonek}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalring} {\tc@check@accent{\r}2\capitalring}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaltie} {\tc@check@accent{\t}2\capitaltie}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaltilde} {\tc@check@accent{\~}2\capitaltilde}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalacute}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\'}2\capitalacute}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalbreve}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\u}2\capitalbreve}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalcaron}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\v}2\capitalcaron}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalcedilla}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\c}2\capitalcedilla}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalcircumflex}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\^}2\capitalcircumflex}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaldieresis}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\"}2\capitaldieresis}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaldotaccent}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\.}2\capitaldotaccent}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalgrave}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\`}2\capitalgrave}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalhungarumlaut}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\H}2\capitalhungarumlaut}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalmacron}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\=}2\capitalmacron}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalogonek}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\k}2\capitalogonek}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalring}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\r}2\capitalring}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaltie}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\t}2\capitaltie}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaltilde}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\~}2\capitaltilde}
% \end{macrocode}
% For \cs{newtie} and \cs{capitalnewtie} this is actually wrong, they should pick up
% the accent from the substitution font (not done yet).
% \begin{macrocode}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\newtie} {\tc@check@accent{\t}2\newtie}
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalnewtie} {\tc@check@accent{\t}2\capitalnewtie}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\newtie}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\t}2\newtie}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalnewtie}
+ {\tc@check@accent{\t}2\capitalnewtie}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% In Unicode engines we just execute the simple accents:
-% \changes{v1.0c}{2020/02/10}{Use \cs{@tabacckludge} for tabbing where necessary (gh/271)}
-% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/04/29}{Make all captial accents text commands for hyperref (gh/332)}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{2020/02/10}{Use \cs{@tabacckludge} for
+% tabbing where necessary (gh/271)}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{2020/04/29}{Make all capital accents text
+% commands for hyperref (gh/332)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\DeclareTextCommandDefault\capitalacute{\@tabacckludge'}
@@ -593,8 +581,10 @@
% The next two symbols exist in some fonts (faked?), but we ignore
% that to keep the subsets reasonable compact and most important linear.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlbrackdbl} {\tc@check@symbol2\textlbrackdbl}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrbrackdbl} {\tc@check@symbol2\textrbrackdbl}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlbrackdbl}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textlbrackdbl}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrbrackdbl}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textrbrackdbl}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -603,72 +593,118 @@
% claim they aren't in sub-encoding 2 as that's true for most
% fonts.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteightoldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\texteightoldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textfiveoldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textfiveoldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textfouroldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textfouroldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnineoldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textnineoldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textoneoldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textoneoldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsevenoldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textsevenoldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsixoldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textsixoldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textthreeoldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textthreeoldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttwooldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\texttwooldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textzerooldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textzerooldstyle}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% The next set of glyphs is special to TeX fonts (and available
-% with a few older PS fonts supported in the virtual fonts), but
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteightoldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\texteightoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textfiveoldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textfiveoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textfouroldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textfouroldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnineoldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textnineoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textoneoldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textoneoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsevenoldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textsevenoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsixoldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textsixoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textthreeoldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textthreeoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttwooldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\texttwooldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textzerooldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textzerooldstyle}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% The next set of glyphs is special to \TeX{} fonts (and available
+% with a few older PS fonts supported through virtual fonts), but
% not any longer in the majority of fonts provided through
% autoinst, so we pretend there aren't available in sub-encoding 2
% and below.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textacutedbl} {\tc@check@symbol2\textacutedbl}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciiacute} {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciiacute}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciibreve} {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciibreve}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciicaron} {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciicaron}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciidieresis} {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciidieresis}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciigrave} {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciigrave}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciimacron} {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciimacron}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textgravedbl} {\tc@check@symbol2\textgravedbl}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttildelow} {\tc@check@symbol2\texttildelow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textacutedbl}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textacutedbl}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciiacute}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciiacute}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciibreve}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciibreve}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciicaron}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciicaron}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciidieresis}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciidieresis}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciigrave}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciigrave}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciimacron}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textasciimacron}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textgravedbl}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textgravedbl}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttildelow}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\texttildelow}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% Finally those below are only available in CM-based fonts but in
% no font that has its origin outside of the \TeX{} world.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textbaht} {\tc@check@symbol2\textbaht}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textbigcircle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textbigcircle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textborn} {\tc@check@symbol2\textborn}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcentoldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textcentoldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcircledP} {\tc@check@symbol2\textcircledP}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcopyleft} {\tc@check@symbol2\textcopyleft}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdblhyphenchar} {\tc@check@symbol2\textdblhyphenchar}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdblhyphen} {\tc@check@symbol2\textdblhyphen}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdied} {\tc@check@symbol2\textdied}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdiscount} {\tc@check@symbol2\textdiscount}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdivorced} {\tc@check@symbol2\textdivorced}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdollaroldstyle} {\tc@check@symbol2\textdollaroldstyle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textguarani} {\tc@check@symbol2\textguarani}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textleaf} {\tc@check@symbol2\textleaf}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlquill} {\tc@check@symbol2\textlquill}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmarried} {\tc@check@symbol2\textmarried}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmho} {\tc@check@symbol2\textmho}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmusicalnote} {\tc@check@symbol2\textmusicalnote}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnaira} {\tc@check@symbol2\textnaira}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textopenbullet} {\tc@check@symbol2\textopenbullet}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpeso} {\tc@check@symbol2\textpeso}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpilcrow} {\tc@check@symbol2\textpilcrow}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrecipe} {\tc@check@symbol2\textrecipe}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textreferencemark} {\tc@check@symbol2\textreferencemark}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrquill} {\tc@check@symbol2\textrquill}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textservicemark} {\tc@check@symbol2\textservicemark}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsurd} {\tc@check@symbol2\textsurd}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textbaht}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textbaht}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textbigcircle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textbigcircle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textborn}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textborn}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcentoldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textcentoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcircledP}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textcircledP}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcopyleft}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textcopyleft}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdblhyphenchar}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textdblhyphenchar}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdblhyphen}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textdblhyphen}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdied}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textdied}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdiscount}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textdiscount}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdivorced}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textdivorced}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdollaroldstyle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textdollaroldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textguarani}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textguarani}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textleaf}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textleaf}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlquill}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textlquill}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmarried}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textmarried}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmho}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textmho}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmusicalnote}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textmusicalnote}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnaira}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textnaira}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textopenbullet}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textopenbullet}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpeso}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textpeso}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpilcrow}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textpilcrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrecipe}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textrecipe}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textreferencemark}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textreferencemark}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrquill}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textrquill}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textservicemark}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textservicemark}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsurd}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textsurd}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The \cs{textpertenthousand} also belongs in this group but here
-% we have a choice: in T1 there is definition for
+% we have a choice: in T1 there is a definition for
% \cs{textpertenthousand} making the symbol up from \% and
% \verb=\char 24= (twice) but in many fonts that char doesn't exist
% and the slot is reused for random ligatures. So better not use it
@@ -679,7 +715,8 @@
% Alternatively we could just state that the symbol is unavailable in
% those fonts. For now I substitute.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpertenthousand} {\tc@check@symbol2\textpertenthousand}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpertenthousand}
+ {\tc@check@symbol2\textpertenthousand}
\UndeclareTextCommand{\textpertenthousand}{T1}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -691,8 +728,10 @@
% symbols. In the higher-numbered sub-encodings we see only a few
% dropped additionally.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlangle} {\tc@check@symbol3\textlangle}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrangle} {\tc@check@symbol3\textrangle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlangle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol3\textlangle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrangle}
+ {\tc@check@symbol3\textrangle}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -702,14 +741,22 @@
% \subsection{Sub-encoding \texttt{4}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcolonmonetary} {\tc@check@symbol4\textcolonmonetary}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdong} {\tc@check@symbol4\textdong}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdownarrow} {\tc@check@symbol4\textdownarrow}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textleftarrow} {\tc@check@symbol4\textleftarrow}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlira} {\tc@check@symbol4\textlira}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrightarrow} {\tc@check@symbol4\textrightarrow}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textuparrow} {\tc@check@symbol4\textuparrow}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textwon} {\tc@check@symbol4\textwon}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcolonmonetary}
+ {\tc@check@symbol4\textcolonmonetary}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdong}
+ {\tc@check@symbol4\textdong}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdownarrow}
+ {\tc@check@symbol4\textdownarrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textleftarrow}
+ {\tc@check@symbol4\textleftarrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlira}
+ {\tc@check@symbol4\textlira}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrightarrow}
+ {\tc@check@symbol4\textrightarrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textuparrow}
+ {\tc@check@symbol4\textuparrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textwon}
+ {\tc@check@symbol4\textwon}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -720,22 +767,24 @@
%
% Most older PS fonts (supported in \TeX{} since the early nineties
% when virtual fonts became available) are sorted under this
-% sub-encoding. But in reality, many of them don't have all glpyhs
+% sub-encoding. But in reality, many of them don't have all glyphs
% that should be available in sub-encoding \texttt{5}. Instead they
% show little squares, i.e., they produce ``tofu'' if you are
% unlucky.
%
% But the coverage is so random that it is impossible to sort them
% properly and if we tried to ensure that they only typeset those
-% glyphs that are really always available wouput put them all into
-% sub-encoding \texttt{9} so that's a compromise really.
+% glyphs that are really always available, we would have to put them all into
+% sub-encoding \texttt{9}; so putting them into 5 is really a compromise.
%
-% Modern fonts that don't typeset a tofu character if a glyph is
-% missing are only cataloged as sub-encoding \texttt{5} if they
-% really support of its glyph set.
+% Modern fonts usually don't typeset a tofu character if a glyph is
+% missing. They are therefore only classified as sub-encoding \texttt{5} if they
+% really support its glyph set completely.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textestimated} {\tc@check@symbol5\textestimated}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnumero} {\tc@check@symbol5\textnumero}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textestimated}
+ {\tc@check@symbol5\textestimated}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnumero}
+ {\tc@check@symbol5\textnumero}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -744,8 +793,10 @@
% \subsection{Sub-encoding \texttt{6}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textflorin} {\tc@check@symbol6\textflorin}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency} {\tc@check@symbol6\textcurrency}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}
+ {\tc@check@symbol6\textflorin}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}
+ {\tc@check@symbol6\textcurrency}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -753,10 +804,14 @@
% \subsection{Sub-encoding \texttt{7}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textfractionsolidus}{\tc@check@symbol7\textfractionsolidus}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textohm} {\tc@check@symbol7\textohm}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmu} {\tc@check@symbol7\textmu}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textminus} {\tc@check@symbol7\textminus}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textfractionsolidus}
+ {\tc@check@symbol7\textfractionsolidus}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textohm}
+ {\tc@check@symbol7\textohm}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmu}
+ {\tc@check@symbol7\textmu}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textminus}
+ {\tc@check@symbol7\textminus}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -764,16 +819,19 @@
% \subsection{Sub-encoding \texttt{8}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textblank} {\tc@check@symbol{8}\textblank}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textinterrobangdown}{\tc@check@symbol{8}\textinterrobangdown}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textinterrobang} {\tc@check@symbol{8}\textinterrobang}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textblank}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{8}\textblank}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textinterrobangdown}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{8}\textinterrobangdown}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textinterrobang}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{8}\textinterrobang}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Fonts with this sub-encoding don't have a Euro symbol, but
% instead of substituting we fake it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteuro}
- {\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextSymbol{TS1}\tc@fake@euro{8}\texteuro}
+ {\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextSymbol{TS1}\tc@fake@euro{8}\texteuro}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -782,13 +840,20 @@
% \subsection{Sub-encoding \texttt{9} (most missing)}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcelsius}{\tc@check@symbol{9}\textcelsius}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textonesuperior}{\tc@check@symbol{9}\textonesuperior}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textthreequartersemdash}{\tc@check@symbol{9}\textthreequartersemdash}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textthreesuperior}{\tc@check@symbol{9}\textthreesuperior}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttwelveudash}{\tc@check@symbol{9}\texttwelveudash}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttwosuperior}{\tc@check@symbol{9}\texttwosuperior}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textbardbl}{\tc@check@symbol{9}\textbardbl}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcelsius}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{9}\textcelsius}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textonesuperior}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{9}\textonesuperior}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textthreequartersemdash}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{9}\textthreequartersemdash}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textthreesuperior}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{9}\textthreesuperior}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttwelveudash}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{9}\texttwelveudash}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttwosuperior}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{9}\texttwosuperior}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textbardbl}
+ {\tc@check@symbol{9}\textbardbl}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -830,20 +895,20 @@
\DeclareTextCommand{\texteightoldstyle}\UnicodeEncodingName{\oldstylenums{8}}
\DeclareTextCommand{\textnineoldstyle} \UnicodeEncodingName{\oldstylenums{9}}
% \end{macrocode}
-% These have Unicode slots so this should be integrated into TU explictly
+% These have Unicode slots so this should be integrated into TU explicitly
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\textpilcrow} \UnicodeEncodingName{"00B6}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\textborn} \UnicodeEncodingName{"002A}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdied} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2020}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\textlbrackdbl} \UnicodeEncodingName{"27E6}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\textrbrackdbl} \UnicodeEncodingName{"27E7}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\textguarani} \UnicodeEncodingName{"20B2}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textpilcrow} \UnicodeEncodingName{"00B6}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textborn} \UnicodeEncodingName{"002A}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdied} \UnicodeEncodingName{"2020}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textlbrackdbl} \UnicodeEncodingName{"27E6}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textrbrackdbl} \UnicodeEncodingName{"27E7}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textguarani} \UnicodeEncodingName{"20B2}
% \end{macrocode}
% We could make \cs{textcentoldstyle} and \cs{textdollaroldstyle}
% point to dollar and cent in the Unicode encoding
% \begin{macrocode}
-%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcentoldstyle} \UnicodeEncodingName{"00A2}
-%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdollaroldstyle} \UnicodeEncodingName{"0024}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcentoldstyle} \UnicodeEncodingName{"00A2}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdollaroldstyle}\UnicodeEncodingName{"0024}
% \end{macrocode}
% but I think it is better to pick them up from TS1 even if that
% usually means LMR fonts
@@ -908,7 +973,8 @@
\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmss} {1}
\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmssq} {1}
\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmvtt} {1}
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmtt} {1} % missing TM, SM, pertenthousand for some reason
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmtt} {1} % missing TM, SM and
+ % pertenthousand for some reason
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -918,33 +984,33 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{bch} {5} % tofu for blank, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futj} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futs} {5} % tofu for blank, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futx} {5} % probably (currently broken distrib)
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pag} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pbk} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pcr} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{phv} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pnc} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pplj} {5} % tofu for blank
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pplx} {5} % tofu for blank
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ppl} {5} % tofu for blank interrobang/down
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ptm} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pzc} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ul9} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{bch} {5} % tofu for blank, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futj}{5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futs}{5} % tofu for blank, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futx}{5} % probably (currently broken distrib)
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pag} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pbk} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pcr} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{phv} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pnc} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pplj}{5} % tofu for blank
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pplx}{5} % tofu for blank
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ppl} {5} % tofu for blank interrobang/down
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ptm} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pzc} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ul9} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{dayroms} {6} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{dayrom} {6} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{dayroms}{6} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{dayrom} {6} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{augie} {8} % really only missing euro
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{put} {8}
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{uag} {8} % probably (currently broken distrib)
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ugq} {8}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{augie}{8} % really only missing euro
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{put} {8}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{uag} {8} % probably (currently broken distrib)
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ugq} {8}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -976,14 +1042,14 @@
% substituted.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lato-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{opensans-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cantarell-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{fbb-*} {0} % missing centoldstyle
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lato-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{opensans-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cantarell-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{fbb-*} {0} % missing centoldstyle
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{tli} {1} % with lots of tofu inside
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{tli} {1} % with lots of tofu inside
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1109,7 +1175,7 @@
\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{erewhon-*} {7}
\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ComicNeue-TLF} {7}
\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ComicNeueAngular-TLF} {7}
-\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Forum-LF} {7} % the superiors are missing
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Forum-LF} {7} % the superiors are missing
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1156,7 +1222,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\textlegacysection}
%
% Here are new names for the legacy symbols that \LaTeX{} used to
-% pick up from the \texttt{OMS} encoded fonts (and used dor itemize
+% pick up from the \texttt{OMS} encoded fonts (and used for itemize
% lists or footnote symbols.
%
% We go the roundabout way via separate OMS declarations so that
@@ -1199,9 +1265,19 @@
% Supporting rollback \ldots
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\DeclareEncodingSubset}{Text companion symbols}%
+%<latexrelease> {lttextcomp}{Undefine text companion symbols}%
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand\oldstylenums[1]{%
+%<latexrelease> \begingroup
+%<latexrelease> \spaceskip\fontdimen\tw@\font
+%<latexrelease> \usefont{OML}{\rmdefault}{\f@series}{it}%
+%<latexrelease> \mathgroup\symletters #1%
+%<latexrelease> \endgroup
+%<latexrelease>}
+%<latexrelease>\let\legacyoldstylenums\@undefined
+%<latexrelease>\def\textcompsubstdefault{cmr}
%<latexrelease>
%<latexrelease>\let\DeclareEncodingSubset\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\CheckEncodingSubset\@undefined
@@ -1237,26 +1313,32 @@
%<latexrelease>\let\textbrokenbar\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textcelsius\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textcent\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcopyright}{\textcircled{c}}
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcopyright}
+%<latexrelease> {\textcircled{c}}
%<latexrelease>\let\textdegree\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textdiv\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textlnot\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textonehalf\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textonequarter\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textonesuperior\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textordfeminine}{\textsuperscript{a}}
-%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textordmasculine}{\textsuperscript{o}}
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textordfeminine}
+%<latexrelease> {\textsuperscript{a}}
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textordmasculine}
+%<latexrelease> {\textsuperscript{o}}
%<latexrelease>\let\textpm\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textquotesingle\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textquotestraightbase\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textquotestraightdblbase\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textregistered}{\textcircled{%
-%<latexrelease> \check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont R}}
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textregistered}
+%<latexrelease> {\textcircled{%
+%<latexrelease> \check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@
+%<latexrelease> \math@fontsfalse\selectfont R}}
%<latexrelease>\let\textthreequartersemdash\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textthreequarters\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textthreesuperior\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\texttimes\@undefined
-%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttrademark}{\textsuperscript{TM}}
+%<latexrelease>\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttrademark}
+%<latexrelease> {\textsuperscript{TM}}
%<latexrelease>\let\texttwelveudash\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\texttwosuperior\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textyen\@undefined
@@ -1386,9 +1468,7 @@
%<latexrelease>\let\textlegacyperiodcentered\@undefined
%<latexrelease>\let\textlegacysection\@undefined
%<latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
-%<*2ekernel>
-%</2ekernel>
+%<latexrelease>\EndModuleRelease
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -1433,9 +1513,12 @@
% kernel is info only). Using the package options you can change this behavior.
% \changes{v2.0n}{2020/02/05}{Changed the package default to info (gh/262)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{error}{\gdef\tc@errorwarn{\PackageError{textcomp}}}
-\DeclareOption{warn}{\gdef\tc@errorwarn#1#2{\PackageWarning{textcomp}{#1}}}
-\DeclareOption{info}{\gdef\tc@errorwarn#1#2{\PackageInfo{textcomp}{#1}}}
+\DeclareOption{error}
+ {\gdef\tc@errorwarn{\PackageError{textcomp}}}
+\DeclareOption{warn}
+ {\gdef\tc@errorwarn#1#2{\PackageWarning{textcomp}{#1}}}
+\DeclareOption{info}
+ {\gdef\tc@errorwarn#1#2{\PackageInfo{textcomp}{#1}}}
\DeclareOption{quiet}{\gdef\tc@errorwarn#1#2{}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -1443,7 +1526,7 @@
% of the default (which, unless changes, is 9 these days), i.e., it
% no longer depends on the font in use. This is mainly there
% because it might have been used in older documents, but not
-% somehting that is recommended.
+% something that is recommended.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{force}{%
\def\CheckEncodingSubset#1#2#3#4#5{%
@@ -1483,7 +1566,7 @@
% This section contains the old code for the textcomp package and
% its documentation. It is only used if we roll back prior to 2020.
% Thus all the rest is mainly for historians. Note that the old
-% code categorised in the sub-encodings only into 6 classes not 10.
+% code categorized in the sub-encodings only into 6 classes not 10.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*TS1oldsty>
@@ -1773,7 +1856,7 @@
% to ensure that |\textcurrency| is only typeset if the current
% font has a \texttt{TS1} subset id of less than 3. Otherwise
% |\tc@error| is called telling the user that for this font family
-% |\textcurreny| is not available.
+% |\textcurrency| is not available.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tc@check@symbol{\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextSymbol{TS1}\tc@subst}
\def\tc@check@accent{\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextAccent{TS1}\tc@error}
@@ -2008,7 +2091,7 @@
%
% Finally input the encoding-specific definitions for
% \texttt{TS1} thus making the top-level definitions
-% optimised for this encoding (and not for the default
+% optimized for this encoding (and not for the default
% encoding).
% \changes{v1.9o}{1998/03/20}{Load decls after defaults for speed.}
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
index 4e3c51ab77e..00fe97c77af 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
index c42a126a31c..af0688b887b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltvers.dtx}
- [2020/03/02 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Version Info)]
+ [2021/04/16 v1.1g LaTeX Kernel (Version Info)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltvers.dtx}
@@ -112,10 +112,10 @@
%</2ekernel>
%<latexrelease>\edef\latexreleaseversion
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
- {2020-10-01}
+ {2021-06-01}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<*2ekernel>
-\def\patch@level{4}
+\def\patch@level{0}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\development@branch@name}
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@
% intended to help us internally when we locally install a
% format out of some development branch.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\development@branch@name{}
+\edef\development@branch@name{develop \the\year-\the\month-\the\day}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -181,28 +181,30 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum0\ifnum\patch@level=0 \ifx\development@branch@name\@empty 1\fi\fi>0 %
\everyjob\expandafter{\the\everyjob
- \typeout{\fmtname \space<\fmtversion>}}
+ \typeout{\fmtname\space <\fmtversion>}}
\immediate
\write16{\fmtname \space<\fmtversion>}
\else\ifnum\patch@level>0
\everyjob\expandafter{\the\everyjob
- \typeout{\fmtname \space<\fmtversion> patch level \patch@level}}
+ \typeout{\fmtname\space <\fmtversion> patch level \patch@level}}
\immediate
- \write16{\fmtname \space<\fmtversion> patch level \patch@level}
+ \write16{\fmtname\space <\fmtversion> patch level \patch@level}
\else
\everyjob\expandafter{\the\everyjob
- \typeout{\fmtname \space<\fmtversion> pre-release-\number-\patch@level\space
- \ifx\development@branch@name\@undefined \else
- \ifx\development@branch@name\@empty \else
- \space (\development@branch@name\space branch)%
+ \typeout{\fmtname\space <\fmtversion>
+ pre-release-\number-\patch@level\space
+ \ifx\development@branch@name\@undefined \else
+ \ifx\development@branch@name\@empty \else
+ \space (\development@branch@name\space branch)%
\fi
\fi
}}
\immediate
- \write16{\fmtname \space<\fmtversion> pre-release-\number-\patch@level\space
- \ifx\development@branch@name\@undefined \else
- \ifx\development@branch@name\@empty \else
- \space (\development@branch@name\space branch)%
+ \write16{\fmtname\space <\fmtversion>
+ pre-release-\number-\patch@level\space
+ \ifx\development@branch@name\@undefined \else
+ \ifx\development@branch@name\@empty \else
+ \space (\development@branch@name\space branch)%
\fi
\fi
}
@@ -212,6 +214,11 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\IncludeInRelease}
+% \begin{macro}{\EndIncludeInRelease}
+% \begin{macro}{\@IncludeInRelease}
+% \begin{macro}{\@IncludeInRele@se}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble@IncludeInRelease}
+% \begin{macro}{\@check@IncludeInRelease}
% \changes{v1.0w}{2015/02/21}
% {set \cs{@currname} empty here (in case \cs{IncludeInRelease} input early)}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -222,6 +229,7 @@
% \changes{v1.0m}{2015/01/17}{modified with \cs{@currname}}
% \changes{v1.0o}{2015/01/19}{Optional argument}
% \changes{v1.0q}{2015/02/19}{Swap argument order}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{2021/03/18}{Add support for usage in \cs{NewModuleRelease}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
@@ -235,9 +243,29 @@
{There is an \string\EndIncludeRelease\space missing}%
\@includeinreleasefalse
\fi
- \kernel@ifnextchar[%
- {\@IncludeInRelease{#1}}
- {\@IncludeInRelease{#1}[#1]}}
+ \ifnum0%
+ \ifx\new@moduledate\@empty\else 1\fi
+ \ifnum \expandafter\@parse@version#1//00\@nil=0 1\fi
+ =11
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
+ {\finish@module@release{#1}}%
+ {\kernel@ifnextchar[%
+ {\@IncludeInRelease{#1}}
+ {\@IncludeInRelease{#1}[#1]}}}
+\def\finish@module@release#1#2#3{%
+ \toks@{[#1] #3}%
+ \ifnum\expandafter\@parse@version\new@moduledate//00\@nil
+ >\expandafter\@parse@version\fmtversion//00\@nil
+ \GenericInfo{}{Applying: \the\toks@}%
+ \else
+ \GenericInfo{}{Skipping: \the\toks@}%
+ \expandafter\gobble@finish@module@release
+ \fi}
+\long\def\gobble@finish@module@release#1\EndModuleRelease{%
+ \EndModuleRelease}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% If a specific date has not been specified in |latexrelease|
@@ -255,13 +283,13 @@
% that is actually reapplying what is already in the format, i.e.,
% it is useless and possibly allocating new registers. However, it
% makes the logic simpler so this is the way it is for now. In
-% theory we could always jump overthe first patch because that is
+% theory we could always jump over the first patch because that is
% only really needed for rolling forward. So maybe one day \dots
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\expandafter\@parse@version#1//00\@nil
- >\expandafter\@parse@version\fmtversion//00\@nil
+ >\expandafter\@parse@version\fmtversion//00\@nil
\GenericInfo{}{Skipping: \the\toks@}%
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@gobble@IncludeInRelease
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@gobble@IncludeInRelease
\else
\GenericInfo{}{Applying: \the\toks@}%
\@includeinreleasetrue
@@ -280,6 +308,9 @@
\@includeinreleasefalse
\else
\PackageError{latexrelease}{mis-matched EndIncludeInRelease}{}%
+\fi
+\if@skipping@module
+ \expandafter\new@module@skip
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -294,13 +325,87 @@
#2#3\@end@check@IncludeInRelease{%
\ifx\@check@IncludeInRelease#2\else
\PackageError{latexrelease}{skipped IncludeInRelease for tag \string#2}{}%
+ \fi
+ \if@skipping@module
+ \expandafter\new@module@skip
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
+% \subsection{Declaring an all-new module}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@skipping@module}
+% \begin{macro}{\NewModuleRelease}
+% \begin{macro}{\EndModuleRelease}
+% \begin{macro}{\new@module@skip}
+% \begin{macro}{\new@modulename}
+% \begin{macro}{\new@moduledate}
+%
+% When we have a whole new module, we can't roll back to a date where
+% such module exists, otherwise hundreds of \enquote{command already
+% defined} errors will pop up. But we can't skip it altogether
+% either, because the module might have changes we still want applied,
+% so a more detailed cherry-picking of code chunks have to be done.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1f}{2021/03/18}{Added \cs{NewModuleRelease}.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2021/04/16}
+% {\cs{NewModuleRelease} with the same arguments as \cs{IncludeInRelease}.}
% \begin{macrocode}
-%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+\let\if@skipping@module\iffalse
+\def\@skipping@moduletrue{\let\if@skipping@module\iftrue}
+\def\@skipping@modulefalse{\let\if@skipping@module\iffalse}
+\let\new@modulename\@empty
+\let\new@moduledate\@empty
+\def\NewModuleRelease#1#2#3{%
+ \ifx\new@modulename\@empty \else
+ \@latex@error{Nested \noexpand\NewModuleRelease forbidden.}\@ehd \fi
+ \edef\new@moduledate{#1}%
+ \edef\new@modulename{#2}%
+ \GenericInfo{}{BEGIN module: \new@modulename\space (\new@moduledate)}%
+ \GenericInfo{}{ \@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space#3\@gobble}%
+ \ifnum\sourceLaTeXdate<%
+ \expandafter\@parse@version\new@moduledate//00\@nil\relax
+ \ifnum\expandafter\@parse@version\fmtversion//00\@nil<%
+ \expandafter\@parse@version\new@moduledate//00\@nil\relax
+ \GenericInfo{}{Skipping module \new@modulename}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\gobble@finish@module@release
+ \else
+ \GenericInfo{}{Applying module \new@modulename}
+ \@skipping@modulefalse
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \GenericInfo{}{Skipping module \new@modulename}
+ \@skipping@moduletrue
+ \expandafter\new@module@skip
+ \fi}
+\long\def\new@module@skip#1\IncludeInRelease{\IncludeInRelease}
+\def\EndModuleRelease{%
+ \ifx\new@modulename\@empty
+ \@latex@error{Extra \string\EndModuleRelease.}\@eha
+ \else
+ \GenericInfo{}{END module: \new@modulename\space (\new@moduledate)}%
+ \let\new@modulename\@empty
+ \let\new@moduledate\@empty
+ \@skipping@modulefalse
+ \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \Finale
%
\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
index 0c7130c3717..7a21f7d871f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
%
%<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
%<class>\ProvidesClass{ltxdoc}
-%<class> [2020/10/04 v2.1b Standard LaTeX documentation class]
+%<class> [2020/12/05 v2.1b Standard LaTeX documentation class]
%
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
@@ -484,7 +484,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Set \cs{protect} to a suitable value in the index entries (we
% can't use |\set@display@protect| as that would result in different
-% numer of spaces after a command depending on the number of
+% number of spaces after a command depending on the number of
% expansion happening prior to writing the index).
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
index 56ae09c1650..dd482299b28 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltxref.dtx}
- [2020/08/23 v1.1o LaTeX Kernel (Cross Referencing)]
+ [2020/12/05 v1.1o LaTeX Kernel (Cross Referencing)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltxref.dtx}
@@ -68,10 +68,10 @@
% The user writes |\label|\marg{foo} to define the following
% cross-references:
%
-% |\ref|\marg{foo}: value of most recently incremented referencable
+% |\ref|\marg{foo}: value of most recently incremented referenceable
% counter. in the current environment. (Chapter, section,
% theorem and enumeration counters are
-% referencable, footnote counters are not.)
+% referenceable, footnote counters are not.)
%
% |\pageref|\marg{foo}: page number at which |\label{foo}| command
% appeared. where foo can be any string of characters not
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@
\message{x-ref,}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% This is implemented as follows. A referencable counter CNT is
+% This is implemented as follows. A referenceable counter CNT is
% incremented by the command \refstepcounter{CNT} , which sets
% \@currentlabel == {CNT}{eval(\p@cnt\theCNT)}. The command
% \label{FOO} then writes the following on file \@auxout :
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
index a149bcf86c5..e8e48e60b06 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
% \fi
%\iffalse
% Copyright (C) 1985 by Leslie Lamport
-% Copyright (C) 1994-98 by \LaTeX3 Project and Johannes Braams
+% Copyright (C) 1994-98 by LaTeX Project and Johannes Braams
%\fi
%
% \changes{1.0b}{1994/01/21}{added a missing \cs{end\{macro\}}, a
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins
index 5e86d50579e..427d4c79674 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins
index 962510313c0..e2ce183f05e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
index 91a19196a78..3b6e001075b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
index ce47cb85543..554c7ae8f07 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
%
% \fi
\def\nfssfontfileversion{v2.2e}
-\def\nfssfontfiledate{2019/10/12}
+\def\nfssfontfiledate{2020/11/26}
%
% \iffalse
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
%
% Within the \NFSS{} distribution there is a \LaTeX{} file
% \texttt{nfssfont.tex} which can be used to test new fonts, produce
-% font tables showing all characters, etc. This is an addaption of a
+% font tables showing all characters, etc. This is an adaption of a
% program originally written by Don Knuth.
% When you run this file through \LaTeX{} you will be asked to enter
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
% |\help|.
%
% This is at
-% the moment only a crude addaption of the test program for the
+% the moment only a crude adaption of the test program for the
% Computer Modern fonts by Donald Knuth.
%
% \StopEventually{}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
index d6760bcfde8..7d1b9cc41ae 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins
index 85cb077b59c..d878507d8e3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
index c0c14f2aa26..d04ddb6323b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx
index fd9e03ac44f..b2ca24bce5b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx
index 8db8fef7f10..7a1329fb82c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -28,8 +28,8 @@
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
-% Copyright (C) 1991,1992 by Leslie Lamport \and
-% Copyright (C) 1994,1995 by the \LaTeX3 project \and Johannes Braams
+% Copyright (C) 1991,1992 by Leslie Lamport and
+% Copyright (C) 1994-2020 by the LaTeX Project and Johannes Braams
%
% \changes{v1.1}{1994/01/25}{Made `proc' a document class and provide
% a .sty file for compatibility mode}
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
%</driver>
%<+class>\ProvidesClass{proc}
%<+style>\ProvidesFile{proc.sty}
- [2014/09/29 v1.3l
+ [2020/11/23 v1.3l
%<+class> Standard LaTeX document class]
%<+style> LaTeX 2.09 compatibility style option `proc']
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@
%
% \section{Implementation}
%
-% In this case a check is needed to see wether \LaTeXe\ runs in
+% In this case a check is needed to see whether \LaTeXe\ runs in
% compatibility mode.
% \changes{v1.3i}{1994/05/27}{Added missing docstrip guard}
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins
index 2c419c92b94..cfed5bd6a39 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx
index 8b7276f492d..883e7d34f04 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
-% Copyright (C) 1994-97 LaTeX3 project, Frank Mittelbach
+% Copyright (C) 1994-97 LaTeX Project, Frank Mittelbach
% and Rainer Sch\"opf, all rights reserved.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
%<*driver>
\ProvidesFile{slides.drv}
%</driver>
- [2020/02/20 v2.4b
+ [2020/11/23 v2.4b
%<+class> Standard LaTeX document class]
%<+cmd> SLiTeX definitions]
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@
% \end{quote}
%
% The code is divided into two parts, we first implement the class
-% related functions and declarations and then define lowlevel stuff
+% related functions and declarations and then define low level stuff
% that is necessary within every class. By placing such commands into
% a separate file it will be possible to share it with other slide
% classes.
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The option \Lopt{landscape} switches the values of |\paperheight|
-% and |\paperwidth|, assuming the dimensions wer given for portrait
+% and |\paperwidth|, assuming the dimensions were given for portrait
% paper.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{landscape}
@@ -705,7 +705,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
-% These penalties are use to discourrage club and widow lines.
+% These penalties are use to discourage club and widow lines.
% Because we use their default values we only show them here,
% commented out.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -718,7 +718,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
-% Discourrage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display
+% Discourage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display
% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
% after a display without a penalty. Again the default values are
% used, therefore we only show them here.
@@ -1721,7 +1721,7 @@
\if@titlepage \break \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \section{Initialisation}
+% \section{Initialization}
%
% \subsection{Date}
%
@@ -2348,8 +2348,8 @@ COLOR LAYER\\[.75in]%
% any output when the |@visible| switch is false.
%
% \changes{v2.2j}{1994/03/11}{Corrected \cs{@oval}, like previous
-% \changes{v2.4a}{2016/03/29}{initialise in \cs{@oval}tests added for latex/4452}
-% change to \file{latex.dtx}.}
+% \changes{v2.4a}{2016/03/29}{Initialize in \cs{@oval}tests added for
+% latex/4452} change to \file{latex.dtx}.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\line(#1,#2)#3{\if@visible\@xarg #1\relax \@yarg #2\relax
\@linelen #3\unitlength
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins
index 0eaa1eb1d7f..43ec2bebdf8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
This is a generated file.
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -138,8 +138,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
index d3951cfa574..ec8b802596f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% Copyright 1993-2019
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
%\iffalse This is a META comment
%
% File `slifonts.fdd'.
-% Copyright (C) 1989-1998 LaTeX3 project, Frank Mittelbach and
+% Copyright (C) 1989-1998 LaTeX Project, Frank Mittelbach and
% Rainer Sch\"opf, all rights reserved.
%
%<lcmss&!ec>\ProvidesFile{ot1lcmss.fd}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
index 1f7c5b651d5..b214c49ae4a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins
index c4a69c4101a..6b4113ed115 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.fdd
index 9308d801ff2..5c1566a5bad 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.fdd
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.fdd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% Copyright 2016-2019
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
%\iffalse This is a META comment
%
% File `cmfonts.fdd'.
-% Copyright (C) 2016-2019 LaTeX3 Project
+% Copyright (C) 2016-2019 LaTeX Project
%
%
%<TUlmr>\ProvidesFile{tulmr.fd}
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
\title{The file \texttt{tulm.fdd} for use with
\LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
-\date{\filedate}\author{LaTeX3 Project}
+\date{\filedate}\author{\LaTeX\ Project}
\addtolength\textwidth{30pt}
\begin{document}
\MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{latex}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.ins
index 9e32e39a63b..98962f2b207 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/tulm.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 2016-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 2016-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 2016-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 2016-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins
index 3264a401d9e..6332fcb5c00 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
index 8d454d1c718..79c725915c7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@
%<+ts1> \ProvidesFile{ts1enc.dfu}
%<+x2> \ProvidesFile{x2enc.dfu}
%<+all> \ProvidesFile{utf8enc.dfu}
-%<-utf8-2018> [2019/11/14 v1.2k UTF-8 support for inputenc]
+%<-utf8-2018> [2021/01/27 v1.2l UTF-8 support for inputenc]
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@
% However, if we are not doing typesetting, then we execute the
% command \cs{UTFviii@two@octets@noexpand} which works like
% \cs{UTF@two@octets@string} but uses \cs{noexpand} instead of
-% \cs{string}. This way the sequence is temporay rendered harmless,
+% \cs{string}. This way the sequence is temporary rendered harmless,
% e.g., would display as is or stays put inside a
% \cs{protected@edef}. But if the result is later reused the
% starting octet is still active and so will be able to construct
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@two@octets@noexpand}
% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@three@octets@noexpand}
% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@four@octets@noexpand}
-% These tempoarily prevent the active chars from expanding.
+% These temporarily prevent the active chars from expanding.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\UTF@two@octets@noexpand#1#2{\noexpand#2\noexpand}
\long\def\UTF@three@octets@noexpand#1#2#3{\noexpand#2\noexpand#3\noexpand}
@@ -530,10 +530,11 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@loop}
-% This bit of code derived from \texttt{xmltex} defines the active character
-% correspnding to starting octets to call |\UTFviii@two@octets| etc as appropriate.
-% The starting octet itself is passed directly as the first argument, the others
-% are picked up later en route.
+% This bit of code derived from \texttt{xmltex} defines the active
+% character corresponding to starting octets to call |\UTFviii@two@octets|
+% etc as appropriate.
+% The starting octet itself is passed directly as the first
+% argument, the others are picked up later en route.
%
% The |\UTFviii@loop| loops through the numbers starting at
% |\count@| and ending at |\@tempcnta|${} - 1$, each time executing
@@ -691,7 +692,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Here is an example of what is happening, for the pair \texttt{"C2 "A3}
-% (which is the utf8 represenation for the character \textsterling{}).
+% (which is the utf8 representation for the character \textsterling{}).
% After |\parse@XML@charref| we have, stored in |\UTFviii@tmp|, a
% single command with two character tokens as arguments:
% \begin{quote}
@@ -849,7 +850,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\decode@UTFviii}
% \changes{v1.1o}{2015/08/28}{Macro added}
-% In the reverse direction, take a sequence of octects(bytes)
+% In the reverse direction, take a sequence of octets(bytes)
% representing a character in UTF-8 and construct the Unicode number.
% The sequence is terminated by |\relax|.
%
@@ -1134,9 +1135,9 @@
%
% \changes{v1.1o}{2015/08/28}{Add U+00A0 and U+00AD}
% \changes{v1.1q}{2015/12/02}{Add remaining latin uses of accents in T1}
-% \changes{v1.1r}{2015/12/03}{Add some more ogoneck cases}
+% \changes{v1.1r}{2015/12/03}{Add some more ogonek cases}
% \changes{v1.1s}{2016/01/11}{Add some more caron and acute}
-% \changes{v1.1t}{2017/01/28}{Add caron cominations for GgYy}
+% \changes{v1.1t}{2017/01/28}{Add caron combinations for GgYy}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\nobreakspace}
%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\textexclamdown}
@@ -1537,7 +1538,7 @@
% two mappings are wrong or rather the names in OT2 should change for
% consistency.
%
-% On the other hand the names |\CYROTLD| are somewhat questionabled as the
+% On the other hand the names |\CYROTLD| are somewhat questionable as the
% Unicode standard only describes ``Cyrillic barred O'' while |TLD| refers
% to a tilde (which is more less what the ``Cyrillic FITA looks according
% to the Unicode book).
@@ -1700,6 +1701,18 @@
%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0E3F}{\textbaht}
%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\.B}
%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\.b}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{2021/01/27}{Added various additional dot accents (gh/484)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\d d}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\d h}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\d l}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\d m}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\.n}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\d n}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\d r}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\d s}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\d t}
%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E9E}{\SS}
%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{200C}{\textcompwordmark}
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/color.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/color.dtx
index cdc2dbe5fed..2dfbb238daa 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/color.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/color.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,9 @@
% \iffalse
%
%% color.dtx Copyright (C) 1994--1999 David Carlisle
-%% Copyright (C) 2005-2020 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/drivers.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/drivers.dtx
index 9bf32f78a1f..6704ad11c68 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/drivers.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/drivers.dtx
@@ -3,7 +3,9 @@
%
%% drivers.dtx Copyright (C) 1994 David Carlisle Sebastian Rahtz
%% Copyright (C) 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 David Carlisle
-%% Copyright (C) 2000-2020 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 2000-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/epsfig.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/epsfig.dtx
index 8e883bd8df7..a34aa6842ee 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/epsfig.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/epsfig.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,9 @@
% \iffalse
%
%% epsfig.dtx Copyright (C) 1994-1996 1999 Sebastian Rahtz
-%% Copyright (C) 2000-2020 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 2000-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphics.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphics.dtx
index 51ef9a4ee39..0c5c9e88eca 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphics.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphics.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,9 @@
% \iffalse
%
%% graphics.dtx Copyright (C) 1994 David Carlisle Sebastian Rahtz
-%% Copyright (C) 1995-2020 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
@@ -25,7 +27,7 @@
%<driver> \ProvidesFile{graphics.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{graphics.dtx}
- [2020/08/30 v1.4c Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)]
+ [2021/03/04 v1.4d Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -1123,7 +1125,12 @@
\ifx\filename@ext\relax
\let\filename@ext\Gin@gzext
\else
- \edef\Gin@ext{\Gin@ext\Gin@sepdefault\Gin@gzext}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.4d}{2021/03/04}
+% {\cs{filename@ext} instead of \cs{Gin@ext} when
+% checking for \texttt{gzip}ped graphics file.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\filename@ext{\filename@ext\Gin@sepdefault\Gin@gzext}%
\fi
\fi
\ifx\filename@ext\relax
@@ -1146,14 +1153,17 @@
% {Try adding an extension even if the filename had a dot AND
% if the filename without the extension exists (but doesn't have
% a known extension).}
+% \changes{v1.4d}{2021/03/03}
+% {Avoid warning when loading a file using a generic rule.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum0%
\ifx\Gin@ext\relax 1%
\else \@ifundefined{Gin@rule@\Gin@ext}{1}{0}%
\fi >0
- \let\Gin@ext\relax
+ \let\Gin@extsaved\Gin@ext
\let\Gin@savedbase\filename@base
\let\Gin@savedext\filename@ext
+ \let\Gin@ext\relax
\edef\filename@base{\filename@base\Gin@sepdefault\filename@ext}%
\let\filename@ext\relax
\@for\Gin@temp:=\Gin@extensions\do{%
@@ -1164,6 +1174,7 @@
% Restore if no file found using the known extensions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\Gin@ext\relax
+ \let\Gin@ext\Gin@extsaved
\let\filename@base\Gin@savedbase
\let\filename@ext\Gin@savedext
\fi
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphicx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphicx.dtx
index b10c67c7946..a2fc17e3936 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphicx.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/graphicx.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,9 @@
% \iffalse
%
%% graphicx.dtx Copyright (C) 1994 David Carlisle Sebastian Rahtz
-%% Copyright (C) 1995-2020 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
@@ -17,7 +19,7 @@
%<driver> \ProvidesFile{graphicx.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{graphicx.dtx}
- [2020/09/09 v1.2b Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)]
+ [2020/12/05 v1.2c Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -88,7 +90,7 @@
% name (or key) and any options that must be set are set by explicitly
% associating this name with the desired value.
%
-% The members of the \LaTeX3 project do appreciate the importance of
+% The members of the \LaTeX\ Project do appreciate the importance of
% this kind of syntax, but felt that rather than extending the syntax of
% \LaTeX\ in an uncoordinated way, it would be better to keep with
% `standard arguments' in \LaTeXe, which is intended as a `consolidation
@@ -507,9 +509,10 @@
%
% \begin{key}{Gin}{quiet}
% \changes{v1.1a}{2017/06/01}{New quiet key}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{2020/12/05}{fix missing default value}
% Skip writing to the log.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{Gin}{quiet}{%
+\define@key{Gin}{quiet}[]{%
\let\Gin@log\@gobble
}
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/keyval.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/keyval.dtx
index dd1f542832c..58664b8f037 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/keyval.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/keyval.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
%
% \iffalse
%% keyval.dtx Copyright (C) 1993 1994 1995 1997 1998 1999 David Carlisle
-%% Copyright (C) 2000-2020 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 2000-2021 David Carlisle, LaTeX Project
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/lscape.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/lscape.dtx
index ac5c16d7c20..969c94ae7a8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/lscape.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/lscape.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,9 @@
% \iffalse
%
%% lscape.dtx Copyright (C) 1994 1999-2000 David Carlisle
-%% Copyright (C) 2000-2020 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 2000-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/rotating.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/rotating.dtx
index 535f115594b..c6db1273a43 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/rotating.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/rotating.dtx
@@ -3,9 +3,11 @@
%
%
% File: rotating.dtx
-%% Copyright (C) 1995--1999 Sebastian Rahtz and Leonor Barroca
-%% Copyright (C) 2001--2003,2007--2009 Robin Fairbairns
-%% Copyright (C) 2016-2020 LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1999 Sebastian Rahtz and Leonor Barroca
+%% Copyright (C) 2001-2003,2007-2009 Robin Fairbairns
+%% Copyright (C) 2016-2021 LaTeX Project
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/trig.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/trig.dtx
index 67f6c6a9703..83e774ff20b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/trig.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/graphics/trig.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse
-%% File: trig.dtx Copyright (C) 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1999 David Carlisle
-%% Copyright (C) 2000-2020 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% File: trig.dtx Copyright (C) 1993-1999 David Carlisle
+%% Copyright (C) 2000-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.dtx
index 600d221cb63..e5fa69f5152 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.ins
index 96cba1ed0ca..0cfc531f193 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/afterpage.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ The source is maintained by the LaTeX Project team and bug
reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs/
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/array.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/array.dtx
index ff963d7f514..84376a486b3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/array.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/array.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<+package>\DeclareCurrentRelease{}{2020-10-01}
%<+package>
%<+package>\ProvidesPackage{array}
-%<+package> [2020/10/01 v2.5c Tabular extension package (FMi)]
+%<+package> [2021/04/20 v2.5e Tabular extension package (FMi)]
%
% \fi
%
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@
% David Carlisle\thanks{David kindly agreed on the inclusion
% of the \texttt{\textbackslash{}newcolumntype} implementation,
% formerly in
-% \texttt{newarray.sty} into this package }}
+% \texttt{newarray.sty} into this package.}}
%
% \date{Printed \today}
%
@@ -361,6 +361,56 @@
% columns have predefined widths.
% \end{itemize}
%
+%
+% \subsection{The behavior of the \texttt{\string\\} command}
+%
+% In the basic \texttt{tabular} implementation of \LaTeX{} the \cs{\bslash}
+% command ending the rows of the \texttt{tabular} or \texttt{array} has
+% a somewhat inconsistent behavior if its optional argument is used. The
+% result then depends on the type of rightmost column and as remarked in
+% Leslie Lamport's \LaTeX{} manual~\cite{bk:lamport} may not always produce the
+% expected extra space.
+%
+%
+% Without the \textsf{array} package the extra space requested by the
+% optional argument of \cs{\bslash} is measured from the last baseline of
+% the rightmost column (indicated by ``x'' in the following
+% example). As a result, swapping the column will give different
+% results:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{lp{1cm}}
+% 1 & 1\newline x \\[20pt] 2 & 2 \end{tabular}
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{p{1cm}l}
+% 1\newline 1 & x \\[20pt] 2 & 2 \end{tabular}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \pagebreak
+% If you run this without the \textsf{array} package you will get the
+% following result:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{lp{1cm}}
+% 1 & 1\newline x \\[32pt] 2 & 2 \end{tabular}
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{p{1cm}l}
+% 1\newline 1 & x \\[20pt] 2 & 2 \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% In contrast, when the \textsf{array} package is loaded, the requested
+% space in the optional argument is always measured from the baseline of
+% the whole row and not from the last baseline of the rightmost column, thus
+% swapping columns doesn't change the spacing and we same table height
+% with an effective 8pt of extra space (as the second line already takes
+% up 12pt of the requested 20pt):
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{lp{1cm}}
+% 1 & 1\newline x \\[20pt] 2 & 2 \end{tabular}
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{p{1cm}l}
+% 1\newline 1 & x \\[20pt] 2 & 2 \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% This correction of behavior only makes a difference if the rightmost column
+% is a \texttt{p}-column. Thus if you add the \textsf{array}
+% package to an existing document, you should verify the spacing in all
+% tables that have this kind of structure.
+%
+%
% \subsection{Defining new column specifiers}
%
% \DeleteShortVerb{\=}
@@ -1958,8 +2008,9 @@
% \changes{v2.2d}{1994/05/16}{Use \LaTeXe \cs{@finalstrut}}
% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/05/07}{Add \cs{hfil} for tools/2120}
% \changes{v2.4i}{2018/09/13}{Add group to prevent color leak (gh/72)}
+% \changes{v2.5d}{2021/02/10}{Explicitly run \cs{par} at the end of pboxes}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@endpbox{\@finalstrut\@arstrutbox \color@endgroup \egroup\hfil}
+\def\@endpbox{\@finalstrut\@arstrutbox \par \color@endgroup \egroup\hfil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -2142,8 +2193,9 @@
% For further information see
% \cite[Appendix D]{bk:knuth}.
% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/04/23}{Avoid adding an ord atom in math}
+% \changes{v2.5e}{2021/04/20}{Use \cs{protected} for \cs{\bslash} variant (gh/548)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@arraycr{\relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
+\protected\def\@arraycr{\relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we test whether the user is using the star form and ignore
% a possible star (I also disagree with this procedure, because a
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.dtx
index 096f6c4bc2a..2b56b92b547 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
%<driver>\ProvidesFile{bm.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{bm.dtx}
- [2019/07/24 v1.2d Bold Symbol Support (DPC/FMi)]
+ [2021/04/25 v1.2e Bold Symbol Support (DPC/FMi)]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -295,6 +295,23 @@
% between these two packages, this package defines |\boldsymbol| and
% |\heavysymbol| as alternative names for |\bm| and |\hm|.
%
+% \section{Package Options}
+%
+% \subsection{Logging level}
+% As described above, the \textsf{bm} package has to interrogate the font
+% setup to try to find matching bold fonts for each font used in the |normal|
+% math version. This can fail in various ways as there may be no bold font
+% or a bold font may be found but no room is available to allocate it.
+% The options |warn|, |info| and |silent| control whether messages that \textsf{bm}
+% produces are sent to the terminal, or just to the log file (the default) or suppressed.
+%
+% \subsection{Poor Man's Bold}
+% As discussed above, by default, if no real bold font is available, \textsf{bm} will use
+% ``poor man's bold''. That is, over-printing the character with slight offsets.
+% Since version 1.2e, the package now warns if a font is set up to use this over-printing and
+% the package option |nopbm| is available which prevents its use in which case |\bm| will
+% use the non-bold for characters from the affected font,
+%
% \StopEventually{}
%
% \section{Implementation}
@@ -320,6 +337,20 @@
% {minor doc changes latex/3058}
%
%
+% \changes{v1.2e}{2021/04/25}
+% {Package options gh/71}
+% Options to use or not use poor mans bold (over-printing)
+% and level of warning messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\DeclareOption{nopmb}{\let\bm@pmb@\@firstofone}
+\DeclareOption{warn}{\def\bm@info{\PackageWarningNoLine{bm}}}
+\DeclareOption{info}{\def\bm@info#1{\PackageInfo{bm}{#1\@gobble}}}
+\DeclareOption{silent}{\let\bm@info\@gobble}
+\ExecuteOptions{info}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
%
% The commands |\bm| and |\hm| work by defining a number of additional
% symbol fonts corresponding to the standard ones
@@ -368,6 +399,7 @@
% code, which is temporarily defined to |\bm|, to save wasting a csname.
% Similarly |\bm@pmb|\ldots\ (which will be defined later) are used
% as scratch macros.
+% (This csname saving no longer used, setup command is |\bm@setup| not |\bm|).
%
% The general plan. Run through the fonts allocated to the normal math
% version. Ignore \meta{math alphabet} allocations\footnote{For now?}
@@ -393,15 +425,15 @@
% using |\boldmath| or poor man's bold.)
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bm#1#2{%
+\def\bm@setup#1#2{%
% \end{macrocode}
% This code can not work inside a group, as that would affect any symbol
% font allocations, so instead use some scratch macros to save and
% restore the definitions of commands we need to change locally.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\bm@pmb\install@mathalphabet
- \let\bm@pmb@\getanddefine@fonts
- \let\bm@pmb@@\or
+ \let\bm@install@mathalphabet\install@mathalphabet
+ \let\bm@getanddefine@fonts\getanddefine@fonts
+ \let\bm@or\or
\edef\bm@general{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size}%
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -465,8 +497,12 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% If they are the same, set this offset to $-1$, as a flag to use
% poor man's bold.
+% \changes{v1.2e}{2021/04/25}
+% {make use of pmb optional and warn about it gh/71}
% \begin{macrocode}
\bm@define\m@ne
+ \bm@info{No #1 for \string##2%
+ \ifx\bm@pmb@\@firstofone\else, using \string\pmb\fi}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Else make a new name by adjoining |#1| to the name of the symbol font
@@ -569,7 +605,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% If the font has been allocated already, use the existing allocation.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \PackageInfo{bm}%
+ \bm@info
{Symbol font \@tempa\space already defined.\MessageBreak
Not overwriting it}%
\fi
@@ -613,9 +649,9 @@
% Put things back as they were.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\split@name\bm@general\@nil
- \let\install@mathalphabet\bm@pmb
- \let\getanddefine@fonts\bm@pmb@
- \let\or\bm@pmb@@}
+ \let\install@mathalphabet\bm@install@mathalphabet
+ \let\getanddefine@fonts\bm@getanddefine@fonts
+ \let\or\bm@or}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -647,13 +683,13 @@
\def\bm@boldtable{\m@ne}
\AtEndOfPackage{%
\def\bm@gr@up#1#2{%
- \bm@pmb{#2}}}
+ \bm@install@mathalphabet{#2}}}
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise use the definition of |\bm| above to set up |\bm@boldtable|
% by comparing the fonts available in the normal and bold math versions.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \bm{bold}\bmmax
+ \bm@setup{bold}\bmmax
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mathbf}
@@ -689,7 +725,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\mv@heavy\@undefined
\else
- \bm{heavy}\hmmax
+ \bm@setup{heavy}\hmmax
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -781,6 +817,8 @@
% you put something really strange in the arguments.
% \changes{v0.11}{1997/01/06}
% {\cs{@ifnextchar} made safe.}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{2021/04/25}
+% {treat \cs{kernel@ifnextchar} like \cs{@ifnextchar}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ifnextchar##1##2##3##4{%
\if##1##4%
@@ -789,6 +827,7 @@
\expandafter\@secondoftwo
\fi
{##2##4}{##3{##4}}}%
+ \let\kernel@ifnextchar\@ifnextchar
% \end{macrocode}
% For Vladimir Volovich\ldots
% \changes{v1.0f}{1998/12/10}
@@ -1397,6 +1436,8 @@
% \begin{macro}{\bm@pmb}
% \changes{v0.10}{1997/01/04}
% {Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{2021/04/25}
+% {option to make pmb a no-op}
% Add a poor man's bold construction to the list being built.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\bm@pmb#1{%
@@ -1410,6 +1451,7 @@
% |\pmb| variant. (See \TeX{}Book, or AMS \textsf{amsbsy} package).
% This one takes a bit more care to use smaller offsets in subscripts.
% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\bm@pmb@\@firstofone\else
\def\bm@pmb@#1{{%
\setbox\tw@\hbox{$\m@th\mkern.4mu$}%
\mathchoice
@@ -1434,6 +1476,7 @@
\raise1.5\dimen@\rlap{\copy\z@}%
\kern\dimen@
\box\z@}}%
+\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.ins
index e963d1d88e2..c00a3e5cca4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/bm.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ The source is maintained by the LaTeX Project team and bug
reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs/
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/calc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/calc.dtx
index 62fe27489b2..78b6167fe6f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/calc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/calc.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
%% Copyright (C) 1992--1995
%% Kresten Krab Thorup and Frank Jensen.
%% Copyright (C) 1997--2007
-%% Kresten Krab Thorup, Frank Jensen and the LaTeX3 Project.
+%% Kresten Krab Thorup, Frank Jensen and the LaTeX Project.
%%
%% The original authors (fj@hugin.dk and krab@daimi.aau.dk) have
%% contributed this package to the LaTeX distribution.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/dcolumn.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/dcolumn.dtx
index 1899cce5560..069e633221d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/dcolumn.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/dcolumn.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/delarray.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/delarray.dtx
index 17cac2052cb..cc503707b0d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/delarray.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/delarray.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/enumerate.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/enumerate.dtx
index 3ce463e6015..150a7386b83 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/enumerate.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/enumerate.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fileerr.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fileerr.dtx
index 16a95e28203..d9163041161 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fileerr.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fileerr.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fontsmpl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fontsmpl.dtx
index a5fb2964a98..b7208267736 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fontsmpl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/fontsmpl.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/ftnright.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/ftnright.dtx
index e5fffdfcd92..e8da56aa204 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/ftnright.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/ftnright.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@
% \newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986.
%
% \bibitem{src:ltxiii94}
-% \LaTeX3 project.
+% \LaTeX\ Project.
% \newblock \LaTeXe distribution, 1994.
% \newblock Sources for {\LaTeXe} the successor to \LaTeX~2.09.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/hhline.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/hhline.dtx
index b9234b5aa25..98d68024515 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/hhline.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/hhline.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/indentfirst.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/indentfirst.dtx
index 7123be04c54..e54df284ae1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/indentfirst.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/indentfirst.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/layout.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/layout.dtx
index 8918ffdca48..de61aeae8c4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/layout.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/layout.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
%<+package>\ProvidesPackage{layout}
%<+driver>\ProvidesFile{layout.drv}
%\ProvidesFile{layout.dtx}
- [2014/10/28 v1.2c Show layout parameters]
+ [2021-03-10 v1.2e Show layout parameters]
%
% A short driver is provided that can be extracted if necessary by
% the \textsf{DocStrip} program provided with \LaTeXe.
@@ -54,6 +54,17 @@
% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/09/08}{Stored texts in control sequences to
% allow other languages}
%
+% \makeatletter
+% \def\allowtofu{^^A
+%\def\UTFviii@undefined@err##1{^^A
+% \PackageWarning{inputenc}{Unicode character \expandafter
+% \UTFviii@splitcsname\string##1\relax
+% \MessageBreak
+% not set up for use with LaTeX}^^A
+% \raisebox{.8pt}{\fboxsep1pt\kern.1pt\fbox{$\cdot$}\kern.1pt}^^A
+% }}
+% \makeatother
+%
% \GetFileInfo{layout.dtx}
% \title{Displaying page layout variables}
% \author{Kent McPherson a.o.\thanks{Converted for \LaTeXe\ by
@@ -172,6 +183,32 @@
\def\notshown{non mostrato}
}
% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2e}{2021-03-10}{Added option for Romanian (gh529)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{romanian}{%
+ \def\Headertext{Antet}
+ \def\Bodytext{Corp}
+ \def\Footertext{Subsol}
+ \def\MarginNotestext{Note\\ Marginale}
+ \def\oneinchtext{un inch}
+ \def\notshown{neafi\textcommabelow sat}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2d}{2020-07-25}{Added option for Japanese (gh353)}
+% \begin{allowtofu}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{japanese}{%
+ \def\Headertext{天}
+ \def\Bodytext{基本版面}
+ \def\Footertext{地}
+ \def\MarginNotestext{傍\\注}
+ \def\oneinchtext{1インチ}
+ \def\notshown{非表示}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{allowtofu}
%
% This package has an option \Lopt{verbose}. Using it will make the
% command |\layout| type some of the parameters on the terminal.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.dtx
index 004d630fcec..457891dac72 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -27,11 +27,17 @@
\ProvidesFile{longtable.dtx}
%</dtx>
%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01]
+%<package>\providecommand\DeclareRelease[3]{}
+%<package>\providecommand\DeclareCurrentRelease[2]{}
+%<package>
+%<package>\DeclareRelease{v4.13}{2020-01-02}{longtable-2020-01-07.sty}
+%<package>\DeclareCurrentRelease{}{2020-02-07}
+%<package>
%<package>\ProvidesPackage{longtable}
%<driver> \ProvidesFile{longtable.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{longtable.dtx}
- [2020/01/07 v4.13 Multi-page Table package (DPC)]
+ [2021-05-07 v4.16 Multi-page Table package (DPC)]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -303,7 +309,7 @@
% (see below), the "LTchunksize" must be at least as large as the
% number of rows in each of the head or foot sections.
%
-% This document specifies "\setcounter{LTchunksize}{10}". If you look
+% This document specifies "\setcounter{LTchunksize}{200}". If you look
% at the previous table, after the \emph{first} run of \LaTeX\ you will
% see that various parts of the table do not line up.
% \LaTeX\ will also have printed a warning that the column
@@ -877,9 +883,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\LTchunksize}
-% Chunk size (The number of rows taken per "\halign"). Default 20.
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Increase default chunksize from 20 to 200}
+% Chunk size (The number of rows taken per "\halign"). Default 200.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\LTchunksize \LTchunksize=20
+\newcount\LTchunksize \LTchunksize=200
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -916,6 +924,14 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@gbox}
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {global box added (tools/2914)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\LT@gbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% \begin{macro}{\LT@cols}
% Counter for number of columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1212,7 +1228,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\LT@start}
-% % \changes{v4.13}{2020/01/07}
+% \changes{v4.13}{2020/01/07}
% {fix issue https://github.com/davidcarlisle/dpctex/issues/8}
% This macro starts the process of putting the table on the current
% page. It is not called until either a "\\" or "\endlongtable" command
@@ -1228,6 +1244,34 @@
\let\LT@start\endgraf
\endgraf\penalty\z@\vskip\LTpre\endgraf
% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Guard against shrink glue on current page tools/3396 and github 183}
+% This next block was suggested by Lars Hellström in pr tools/3396
+% He documents it as:
+%
+% The original problem occurs because TeX has not yet found an awfully bad
+% "(b=*)" breakpoint and is therefore still collecting material to see if there
+% is a really good break somewhere just ahead. As we know there aren't, we
+% want to make it stop looking and break the page, so that "\pagetotal" will be
+% for the page where the table will actually end up. To achieve this, we
+% need to give \TeX\ an awfully bad, but legal, breakpoint. The simplest way of
+% doing this seems to be to insert a "\kern" that counters the "\pageshrink" for
+% the page, followed by a "\penalty" and a "\par" (to exercise the page builder).
+% We also have to make sure that this breakpoint doesn't affect how the next
+% page is broken, so we make the penalty 9999 (10000 is infinite and thus not
+% a legal breakpoint) and cancel out the "\kern" with a new "\kern".
+%
+% I don't think this is the \emph{right} solution to the problem (that would be
+% that the standard output routine has a feature for syncronizing with
+% typesetting, as part of the preparations for switching output routine), but
+% it's OK. Perhaps XOR will make it better.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \pagetotal<\pagegoal \else
+ \dimen@=\pageshrink
+ \advance \dimen@ 1sp %
+ \kern\dimen@\penalty 9999\endgraf \kern-\dimen@
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
% Start a new page if there is not enough room for the table head, foot,
% and one extra line.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1238,6 +1282,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.16}{1995/11/09}
% {Measure the first line of the table}
+% \changes{v4.15}{2021/04/18}
+% {silence \cs{vbadness}}
% At this point I used to add "\ht\@arstrutbox" and "\dp\@arstrutbox"
% as a measure of a row size. However this can fail spectacularly
% for "p" columns which might be much larger. Previous versions could
@@ -1245,12 +1291,13 @@
% a head \emph{then} a `first head'! So now measure the first line of
% the table accurately by "\vsplit"ting it out of the first chunk.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \dimen@ii\vfuzz
+ \edef\LT@reset@vfuzz{\vfuzz\the\vfuzz\vbadness\the\vbadness\relax}%
\vfuzz\maxdimen
- \setbox\tw@\copy\z@
- \setbox\tw@\vsplit\tw@ to \ht\@arstrutbox
- \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}%
- \vfuzz\dimen@ii
+ \vbadness\@M
+ \setbox\tw@\copy\z@
+ \setbox\tw@\vsplit\tw@ to \ht\@arstrutbox
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}%
+ \LT@reset@vfuzz
\advance\dimen@ \ht
\ifdim\ht\@arstrutbox>\ht\tw@\@arstrutbox\else\tw@\fi
\advance\dimen@\dp
@@ -1259,7 +1306,18 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\advance\dimen@ -\pagegoal
- \ifdim \dimen@>\z@\vfil\break\fi
+ \ifdim \dimen@>\z@
+ \vfil\break
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Guard against shrink glue on current page see github 183}
+% The LT output routine does not handle shrink on the page, which can cause
+% The first page to be over-long, so forget it is there.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\pageshrink>\z@\pageshrink\z@\fi
+ \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Store height of page minus table foot in "\@colroom".
% \changes{v3.14}{1995/05/02}
@@ -1269,9 +1327,12 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% If the foot is non empty, reduce the "\vsize" and "\@colroom"
% accordingly.
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Rearrange vertical space tests for tools/3512 (floats on same page)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifvoid\LT@foot\else
- \advance\vsize-\ht\LT@foot
+% \advance\vsize-\ht\LT@foot
+ \global\advance\vsize-\ht\LT@foot
\global\advance\@colroom-\ht\LT@foot
\dimen@\pagegoal\advance\dimen@-\ht\LT@foot\pagegoal\dimen@
\maxdepth\z@
@@ -1350,8 +1411,15 @@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Force one more go with the \env{longtable} output routine.
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Rearrange vertical space tests for tools/3512 (floats on same page)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\endgraf\penalty -\LT@end@pen
+ \ifvoid\LT@foot\else
+ \global\advance\vsize\ht\LT@foot
+ \global\advance\@colroom\ht\LT@foot
+ \dimen@\pagegoal\advance\dimen@\ht\LT@foot\pagegoal\dimen@
+ \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now close the group to return to the standard routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1361,9 +1429,11 @@
% table.\footnote{This can not be the correct. However if it is omitted,
% there is a problem with marginpars, for example on page~3 of this
% document. Any Output Routine Gurus out there?}
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Rearrange vertical space tests for tools/3512 (floats on same page)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\@mparbottom\z@
- \pagegoal\vsize
+% \pagegoal\vsize
\endgraf\penalty\z@\addvspace\LTpost
% \end{macrocode}
% Footnotes. As done in the \package{multicol} package.
@@ -1431,8 +1501,10 @@
% So use the following variant. Added in v3.14.
% \changes{v3.14}{1995/04/25}
% {More fun with \cs{ifnum} cf tools/1571}
+% \changes{v4.15}{2021/04/21}
+% {protected (gh/584)}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\LT@tabularcr{%
+\protected\def\LT@tabularcr{%
\relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@ifstar
{\def\crcr{\LT@crcr\noalign{\nobreak}}\let\cr\crcr
@@ -1452,6 +1524,8 @@
% \begin{macro}{\LT@setprevdepth}
% \changes{v4.05}{1996/11/12}
% {Macro added}
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {spurious \cs{global} removed}
% This will be redefined to set the "\prevdepth"
% at the start of a chunk.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1471,7 +1545,7 @@
\global\advance\LT@rows\@ne
\ifnum\LT@rows=\LTchunksize
\gdef\LT@setprevdepth{%
- \prevdepth\z@\global
+ \prevdepth\z@
\global\let\LT@setprevdepth\relax}%
\expandafter\LT@xtabularcr
\else
@@ -1528,11 +1602,13 @@
% \begin{macro}{\LT@echunk}
% \changes{v4.05}{1996/11/12}
% {\cs{unskip} added for pagebreak support}
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {allocated global box (tools/2914)}
% This ends the current chunk, and removes the dummy row.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\LT@echunk{%
\crcr\LT@save@row\cr\egroup
- \global\setbox\@ne\lastbox
+ \global\setbox\LT@gbox\lastbox
% \end{macrocode}
% The following line was added in v4.05.
% \package{longtable} relies on "\lineskip" glue (which is 0pt) to
@@ -1753,9 +1829,11 @@
% Loop through the last row, discarding glue, and saving box widths. At
% V3.04 changed the scratch box to 2, as the new "\kill" requires that
% "\box0" be preserved.
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {allocated global box (tools/2914)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\setbox\tw@\hbox{%
- \unhbox\@ne
+ \unhbox\LT@gbox
\let\LT@old@row\LT@save@row
\global\let\LT@save@row\@empty
\count@\LT@cols
@@ -1892,13 +1970,15 @@
% {Call \cs{LT@makecaption} not \cs{LT@mkcaption}}
% \changes{v3.14}{1995/05/24}
% {Add new control argument}
+% \changes{v4.16}{2021/05/07}
+% {use \cs{ext@table} gh/561}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\LT@c@ption#1[#2]#3{%
\LT@makecaption#1\fnum@table{#3}%
\def\@tempa{#2}%
\ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
{\let\\\space
- \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{\protect\numberline{\thetable}{#2}}}%
+ \addcontentsline{\ext@table}{table}{\protect\numberline{\thetable}{#2}}}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1927,6 +2007,8 @@
% and modified to call \cs{@makecaption}}
% \changes{v3.14}{1995/05/02}
% {Use the first arg to remove counter for star form}
+% \changes{v4.15}{2021/03/28}
+% {\cs{reset@font} for gh/133}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\LT@makecaption#1#2#3{%
\LT@mcol\LT@cols c{\hbox to\z@{\hss\parbox[t]\LTcapwidth{%
@@ -1934,6 +2016,7 @@
% Based on article class "\@makecaption", "#1" is "\@gobble" in star
% form, and "\@firstofone" otherwise.
% \begin{macrocode}
+ \reset@font
\sbox\@tempboxa{#1{#2: }#3}%
\ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize
#1{#2: }#3%
@@ -1973,13 +2056,17 @@
% vsplit off a bit of the last chunk, so that the last page did not just
% have head and foot sections, but it is hard to do this in a consistent
% manner.}
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Rearrange vertical space tests for tools/3512 (floats on same page)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\dimen@\pagegoal
+ \advance\dimen@\ht\LT@foot
\advance\dimen@-\ht\LT@lastfoot
\ifdim\dimen@<\ht\z@
\setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\z@\copy\LT@foot\vss}%
\@makecol
\@outputpage
+ \global\vsize\@colroom
\setbox\z@\vbox{\box\LT@head}%
% \end{macrocode}
% End of "\ifdim\dimen@<\ht\@cclc".
@@ -1993,14 +2080,17 @@
% Reset "\@colroom".
% \changes{v3.14}{1995/05/02}
% {Reset \cs{@colroom}, for tools/1584}
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Rearrange vertical space tests for tools/3512 (floats on same page)}
% \begin{macrocode}
- \global\@colroom\@colht
- \global\vsize\@colht
+% \global\@colroom\@colht
+% \global\vsize\@colht
% \end{macrocode}
% Put the last page of the table on to the main vertical list.
+% \changes{v4.14}{2020/02/07}
+% {Remove box from final page tools/3512}
% \begin{macrocode}
- \vbox
- {\unvbox\z@\box\ifvoid\LT@lastfoot\LT@foot\else\LT@lastfoot\fi}%
+ \unvbox\z@\box\ifvoid\LT@lastfoot\LT@foot\else\LT@lastfoot\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% End of "\ifnum\outputpenalty > -\LT@end@pen".
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2139,10 +2229,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\LT@p@ftntext}
+% \changes{v4.15}{2021/03/28}
+% {make long for gh/364}
% Inside the `p' column, just save up the footnote text in a token
% register.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\LT@p@ftntext#1{%
+\long\def\LT@p@ftntext#1{%
\edef\@tempa{\the\LT@p@ftn\noexpand\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]}%
\global\LT@p@ftn\expandafter{\@tempa{#1}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.ins
index 7ada121ea95..92a04e00d4e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/longtable.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ The source is maintained by the LaTeX Project team and bug
reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs/
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.dtx
index 39bccef2d78..1d16a01c158 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.dtx
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
%% not for the payment of a license fee per se (which might or might
%% not follow from this evaluation).
%%
-%% The license fee, if any, can be payed either to the LaTeX3 fund
+%% The license fee, if any, can be payed either to the LaTeX fund
%% (see ltx3info.txt in the base LaTeX distribution) or to the author of
%% the program who can be contacted at
%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.ins
index f872b83cdee..c8838f8be22 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/multicol.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ The source is maintained by the LaTeX Project team and bug
reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs/
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/rawfonts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/rawfonts.dtx
index 9c5daa57a50..f54aeaf44db 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/rawfonts.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/rawfonts.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/shellesc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/shellesc.dtx
index 3b96c3e9ee3..54027cada76 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/shellesc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/shellesc.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse
%% Source File: shellesc.dtx
-%% Copyright (C) 2015-2020
+%% Copyright (C) 2015-2021
%%
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file may be distributed under the terms of the LPPL.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
% \title{The \textsf{shellesc} Package\thanks{This file
% has version number \fileversion, last
% revised \filedate.}}
-% \author{\LaTeX3 project}
+% \author{\LaTeX\ project}
% \date{\filedate}
%
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/showkeys.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/showkeys.dtx
index 59eb699ae81..3c9236f2ef4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/showkeys.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/showkeys.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
% \fi
% \iffalse
%% File: showkeys.dtx Copyright (C) 1992-1997 David Carlisle
-%% File: showkeys.dtx Copyright (C) 2006-2019 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% File: showkeys.dtx Copyright (C) 2006-2019 David Carlisle, LaTeX Project
%
%<*dtx>
\ProvidesFile{showkeys.dtx}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/somedefs.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/somedefs.dtx
index 120ad980781..825a93ec666 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/somedefs.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/somedefs.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.dtx
index 577730e665b..a0f75fc4fa6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.ins
index 05effd3342e..a0d39c2564a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tabularx.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ The source is maintained by the LaTeX Project team and bug
reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs/
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/theorem.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/theorem.dtx
index 0df7dbb7649..8543ff9d7cb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/theorem.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/theorem.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tools.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tools.ins
index 5e978712215..15c64ac80ab 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tools.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/tools.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -49,8 +49,8 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs/
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/trace.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/trace.dtx
index 4a08f569bb5..d10243f690b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/trace.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/trace.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<driver>\ProvidesFile{trace.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{trace.dtx}
- [2018/10/13 v1.1e trace LaTeX code]
+ [2021/04/18 v1.1f trace LaTeX code]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\traceon}
% This macro ensures that |\conditionally@traceoff| is actually
-% turning off switches (since |\tracinall| might have disabled it)
+% turning off switches (since |\tracingall| might have disabled it)
% and then calls |\tr@ce@n| to setup tracing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\traceon{\let\conditionally@traceoff\unconditionally@traceoff
@@ -470,6 +470,8 @@
% |\tr@ce@n|, however there is no point in resetting
% |\tracinglostchars| so we leave it alone.
% \changes{v1.1c}{2003/04/30}{Reset \cs{tracingstats} to one}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{2021/04/18}
+% {Add \cs{tracingstacklevels} and \cs{tracinglostchars}=3}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \tracingstats\@ne
%% \tracinglostchars\z@
@@ -498,13 +500,14 @@
% on last (in fact like before we disassemble |\tracingall|
% and reorder it partially).
% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\tr@ce@n{%
- \@tracingtrue
+ \edef\tr@ce@n{%
+ \noexpand\@tracingtrue
\tracingstats\tw@
\tracingpages\@ne
- \tracinglostchars\@ne
+ \tracinglostchars\thr@@
\tracingparagraphs\@ne
\errorcontextlines\maxdimen
+ \ifdefined\tracingstacklevels \tracingstacklevels\maxdimen \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% We only change |\tracingoutput| if it hasn't already been enabled by
% |\showoutput|. If that's not the case, we set it to 2 so that we
@@ -512,12 +515,12 @@
% \changes{v1.1e}{2018/10/13}{Only reset \cs{tracingoutput} if not
% set by \cs{showoutput} earlier}
% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\tracingoutput=\@ne
- \else
+ \noexpand\ifnum\tracingoutput=\@ne
+ \noexpand\else
\tracingoutput\tw@
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen
\showboxdepth\maxdimen
- \fi
+ \noexpand\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -543,8 +546,11 @@
% |@tracing| switch and always set the primitives back to zero.
% \changes{v1.1c}{2003/04/30}{Turn off \cs{tracingoutput}}
% \changes{v1.1c}{2003/04/30}{Reset \cs{tracingstats} to one}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{2021/04/18}{Add missing reset of \cs{errorcontextlines}}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{2021/04/18}
+% {Add \cs{tracingstacklevels} and \cs{tracinglostchars}=3}
% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\conditionally@traceoff{%
+ \edef\conditionally@traceoff{%
\tracingassigns\z@
\tracingrestores\z@
\tracingcommands\z@
@@ -557,15 +563,17 @@
% \changes{v1.1e}{2018/10/13}{Only reset \cs{tracingoutput} if not
% set by \cs{showoutput} earlier}
% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\tracingoutput=\tw@
+ \noexpand\ifnum\tracingoutput=\tw@
\tracingoutput\z@
\showboxbreadth\m@ne
\showboxdepth\m@ne
- \fi
+ \noexpand\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\tracingstats\@ne
+ \ifdefined\tracingstacklevels \tracingstacklevels\z@ \fi
+ \errorcontextlines\m@ne
\tracingparagraphs\z@
\tracinggroups\z@
}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.dtx
index 2bba60465e0..eac06580e73 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.ins
index 951eedad891..559f1f28542 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/varioref.ins
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ The source is maintained by the LaTeX Project team and bug
reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs/
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2020
-The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+Copyright (C) 1993-2021
+The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/verbatim.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/verbatim.dtx
index e62886e0033..fcbaf28172e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/verbatim.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/verbatim.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xr.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xr.dtx
index a963886cde7..c0d0b90c0fc 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xr.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xr.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xspace.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xspace.dtx
index ebe8d0f9478..adcfe154da3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xspace.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/tools/xspace.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2020
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2021
%
-% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.